REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS
OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY
BONIFACIO DRIVE, PORT AREA BONIFACIO DRIVE, PORT AREA
MANILA MANILA

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
FOR
PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS
PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS
( IN THREE VOLUMES )
2004

VOLUME II
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR HIGHWAYS, BRIDGES AND AIRPORTS

1
 Item 207- Aggregate Stockpile ---- 57
-
VOLUME II

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR HIGHWAYS, BRIDGES AND PART E- SURFACE COURSES ---------------------------
AIRPORTS
Item 300- Aggregate Surface Course --------- 59
TABLE OF CONTENTS Item 301- Bituminous Prime Coat --------- 61
Item 302- Bituminous Tack Coat --------- 63
PAGE Item 303- Bituminous Seal Coat --------- 65
Item 304- Bituminous Surface Treatment --------------- 68
PART A- FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER --- 1 Item 305- Bituminous Penetration --------------- 73
Macadam Pavement
PART B- OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ---- 5 Item 306- Bituminous Road Mix Surface --------------- 78
Course
PART C- EARTHWORK ---- 6 Item 307- Bituminous Plant-Mix Surface --------------- 83
Course-General

Item 100- Clearing and Grubbing ---- 6 Item 308- Cold Asphalt Plant-Mix -------- 95
Item 101- Removal of Structures and ---- 9 Item 309- Bituminous Plant-Mix --------------- 100
Obstructions (Stockpile Maintenance
Item 102- Excavation ---- 12 Mixture)
Item 103- Structure Excavation ---- 18 Item 310- Bituminous Concrete Surface --------------- 102
Item 104- Embankment ---- 24 Course, Hot Laid
Item 105- Subgrade Preparation ---- 31 Item 311- Portland Cement Concrete --------------- 104
Item 106- Compaction Equipment and Density -------- 34 Pavement
Control Strips
Item 107- Overhaul ---- 36
PART F- BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION ---------------------------

PART D- SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE ---- 38 Item 400- Piling -------- 134
Item 401- Railings --------------- 160
Item 200- Aggregate Subbase Course ---- 38 Item 402- Timber Structures -------- 164
Item 201- Aggregate Base Course ---- 41 Item 403- Metal Structures -------- 169
Item 202- Crushed Aggregate Base Course ---- 44 Item 404- Reinforcing Steel -------- 207
Item 203- Lime Stabilized Road Mix Base ---- 46 Item 405- Structural Concrete -------- 210
Course ---- Item 406- Prestressed Concrete --------------- 220
Item 204- Portland Cement Stabilized Road Mix ---- 51 Structures
Base Course ---- Item 407- Concrete Structures -------- 230
Item 205- Asphalt Stabilized Road Mix Base ---- 53 Item 408- Steel Bridges -------- 250
Course - Item 409- Welded Structural Steel -------- 255
Item 206- Portland Cement Treated Plant Mix ---- 54 Item 410- Treated and Untreated --------------- 267
Base Course Timber
Item 411- Paint -------- 269
2
 Item 412- Elastomeric Bearing Pads --------------- 276 Item 609- Sprigging -------- 348
Item 413- Pre Molded Joint Filler for --------------- 281 Item 610- Sodding -------- 352
Concrete Item 611- Tree Planting -------- 355
Paving and Structural Item 612- Reflective Thermoplastic --------------- 362
Construction Stripping Material (Solid Form)

PART DRAINAGE AND SLOPE --------------------------- 282 PART MATERIALS DETAILS --- 367
G- PROTECTION I-
STRUCTURES Item 700- Hydraulic Cement -------- 367
Item 701- Construction Lime --------------- 367
Item 500- Pipe Culverts and Storm --------------- 282 (Hydrated)
Drains Item 702- Bituminous Materials --------- 370
Item 501- Underdrains -------- 288 Item 703- Aggregates --------- 376
Item 502- Manholes, Inlets and Catch --------------- 291 Item 703A- Mineral Filler --------- 385
Basins Item 704- Masonry Units --------- 387
Item 503- Drainage Steel Grating with --------------- 294 Item 705- Joint Materials --------- 387
Frame Item 706- Concrete Clay, Plastic and --------------- 392
Item 504- Cleaning and --------------- 298 Fiber Pipe
Reconditioning Existing Item 707- Metal Pipe --------- 394
Drainage Structures Item 708- Chemical Admixtures For --------------- 397
Item 505- Riprap and Grouted Riprap -------- 300 Concrete
Item 506- Stone Masonry -------- 304 Item 709- Paints --------- 401
Item 507- Rubble Concrete -------- 308 Item 710- Reinforcing Steel and Wire --------------- 404
Item 508- Hand-Laid Rock -------- 310 Rope
Embankment Item 711- Fence and Guardrail --------- 406
Item 509- Sheet Piles -------- 312 Item 712- Structural Metal --------- 408
Item 510- Concrete Slope Protection -------- 313 Item 713- Treated and Untreated --------------- 415
Item 511- Gabions and Mattresses -------- 315 Timber
Item 714- Water --------------- 416
Item 715- Geotextiles --------------- 417

PART MISCELLANEOUS -------------- 322

H- STRUCTURES

Item 600- Curb and/or Gutter -------- 322

Item 601- Sidewalk -------- 326
Item 602- Monuments, Markers and --------------- 329
Guide Posts
Item 603- Guardrail -------- 330
Item 604- Fencing -------- 334
Item 605- Road Sign -------- 336
Item 606- Pavement Markings -------- 340
Item 607- Reflective Pavement Studs -------- 344
Item 608- Topsoil -------- 347
3
 The Contractor shall be responsible for raising the ground (if
necessary), grading and drainage in the vicinity of each facility with
suitable access walkways, seeding and sodding of the ground around as
directed and approved by the Engineer. Also, the Contractor shall
construct a parking area for the compound near the buildings and a
satisfactory access road to the parking areas.

PART A The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance and

protection of all facilities to be provided during the duration of the
FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER Contract, including providing adequate stock of all expendable items,
such as light bulbs, light tubes, laboratory equipment and supplies at all
A.1 REQUIREMENTS times to ensure proper and continuous functioning of all the Engineer’s
facilities.
A.1.1 Offices and Laboratories for the Engineer
The whole area of the Engineer’s compound shall be fenced with
1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain field offices and barbed wire (or equivalent) with necessary gates as directed by the
testing laboratories, including all the necessary electricity, water, drainage Engineer.
and telephone services for the use of the Engineer and his staff. The
offices and laboratories shall have at least the floor area prescribed on The Contractor shall provide suitable utilities and services, such
the Plans and shall contain the equipment, supplies and furnishings as potable water, electricity, sewerage and security on a 24-hour basis.
specified in the Contract. Testing equipment supplied in accordance with
the Special Provisions shall be located in testing laboratories as required 2. The Contractor shall provided qualified and experienced
by the Engineer. All offices and laboratories shall be ready for occupancy laboratory staff to carry out all the materials quality control and all the
and use by the Engineer within two (2) months of the commencement of tests specified in the Contract and required by the Engineer. The person
the Works. Their location and final plan shall require the approval of the so appointed by the Contractor to mange the laboratory shall be well
Engineer prior to the start of construction. It is the intent of this experienced in the type of work to be undertaken and shall be subject to
Specification to locate the field offices and laboratories in government the approval of the Engineer. He shall work full time and shall be
owned lots so that the use by the government of these facilities can be responsible to the Engineer for all works carried out.
maximized even after the completion of the project. However, if no
government lot is available, and these structures are to be erected on 3. The telephone service, if required in the Contract shall have a
private property, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to make the separate connection direct to the telephone company’s telephone
necessary arrangements with the landowner(s) regarding the use of the exchange simgle line for the exclusive use of the Engineer and his staff.
lot for the Engineer’s office and laboratories and to remove and/or
transfer, if so required under the Contract, the improvements thereon, 4. The Contractor shall provide, if required in the Contract, a two-
including all appurtenances upon completion of the Works. way radio communication service.

All facilities provided by the Contractor shall be near the job site, 5. Any portable offices required in the Contract shall be
where necessary and shall conform to the best standard for the required dismantled, moved and erected from time to time as directed by the
types. On completion of the Contract, the facilities provided by the Engineer.
Contractor including utilities and communication facilities shall revert to
the Government including office equipment, apparatus, pieces of 6. All offices, stores and testing laboratories shall be proficiently
furniture, laboratory equipment, etc, unless otherwise specified in the guarded at all times of the day and night, regularly and properly cleaned,
Contract documents. adequately supplied and maintained for the duration of the Contract.

4
A.1.2 Vehicles for the Engineer A.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

The Contractor shall provide within thirty (30) calendar days after A.2.1 Measurement
notice to commence work, the vehicles listed in the Special Provisions for
the exclusive use of the Engineer. The vehicles to be provided by the 1. Lump-sum items shall be provided for the provision of:
Contractor shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All vehicles shall - Office building for the Engineer including pieces of
comply in all respects with all relevant Philippine national or local laws furnitures, appliances and equipment.
statutes and regulations. All vehicles shall carry or be fitted with the - Laboratory building for the Engineer including
accessories as may be prescribed by laws and have comprehensive furnitures, appliances and equipment.
insurance. The vehicles on delivery shall be new and shall be driven by a - Survey equipment for the Engineer.
competent qualified and experienced driver who shall be under the direct
order of the Engineer. 2. The quantities for the maintenance of the office and the
laboratory for the Engineer shall be for the time the Engineer occupies the
The contractor shall maintain the vehicle in first class condition office and the laboratory respectively. The unit of the measure is “month”.
and shall be supplied with appropriate fuel and lubricants al all times
He shall provide equivalent substitute vehicles during any period 3. No separate payment shall be made in respect of
when the specified vehicles are taken out of service for maintenance, consumable materials as this is deemed to be included in the pay item for
repair or any other reason. Unless otherwise specified, the vehicle shall maintenance of the Engineer’s facilities.
at the end of the Contract become the property of the Government.
4. The quantities for the provision of vehicles for the Engineer
A.1.3 Assistance to the Engineer shall be the number of each type of vehicle supplied. The unit of measure
is “each”.
The Contractor shall at all times during the duration of the
Contract provide for the use of the Engineer all equipment, instruments 5. The quantities for the operation of vehicle for the Engineer
and apparatus, all information and records and qualified chainmen and shall be for the time the Engineer is supplied with each vehicle prior to
laborers required by the Engineer for inspecting and measuring the their finally becoming the property of the Government. The unit of
Works. Such equipment, instruments and apparatus shall include those measure is “month”.
listed in the Special Provisions.
6. The quantities for progress photographs shall be the number
A.1.4 Photographs of photographs selected and provided as progress photographs. The unit
of measure is ‘each”.
The Contractor shall provide record photographs taken as, when
and where directed by the Engineer at intervals of not more than one A.2..2 Payment
month. The photographs shall be sufficient in number and location to
record the exact progress of the Works. The Contractor shall provide one The quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for
proof print of each photograph taken, and the negative and ten copies, at the appropriate contract unit price, for each of the particular pay items
not less than 254 mm x 203 mm and printed on glossy paper, of any of shown in the Bill of Quantities which price and payment shall constitute
the photographs by the Engineer. The photographs retained by the full compensation for furnishing and maintaining such items.
Engineer will become the property of the Government and the Contractor
shall supply approved albums to accommodate them. Two copies are to
be signed by the Contractor, one of which will be signed by the Engineer
and returned to the Contractor.

5
 of any qualified Medical Officer designated by the Government to
supervise medical arrangements on the Site.

B.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Work prescribed in Section B.2 shall not be measured and

paid separately, same shall be deemed to be included in pay items for
PART B other items for work.

OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART C – EARTHWORK

B.1 OFFICES, SHOPS, STORES AND WORKMENS ITEM 100 – CLEARING AND GRUBBING
ACCOMMODATION FOR CONTRACTOR
100.1 Description
The contractor shall provide and maintain such offices, stores,
workshops latrines, housing and messing accommodations as are This item shall consist of clearing, grubbing, removing and
necessary. These should be located in the Contractor’s compound, disposing all vegetation and debris as designated in the Contract, except
distinct and separate from the Engineer’s compound. The location, those objects that are designated to remain in place or are to be
dimensions and layout of such buildings and places shall be subject to the removed in consonance with other provisions of this Specification. The
approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall not be permitted to erect work shall also include the preservation from injury or defacement of all
temporary buildings or structures on the site without the specific objects designated to remain.
permission in writing of the Engineer including approval of the dimensions
of such buildings or structures. Before the commencement of the period 100.2 Construction Requirements
of Warranty, the Contractor shall fence of the Contractor’s store area from
the rest of the Site. By the end of the Period of Warranty, the Contractor 100.2.1 General
shall remove this fence and all buildings shall be cleared and the area
shall be graded as required by the Engineer. The Engineer will establish the limits of work and designate all
trees, shrubs, plants and other things to remain. The Contractor shall
B.2 MEDICAL ROOM AND FIRST AID FACILITIES preserve all objects designated to remain. Paint required for cut or
scarred surface of trees or shrubs selected for retention shall be an
1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain throughout the approved asphaltum base paint prepared especially for tree surgery.
duration of the Contract, a medical room together with all necessary
supplies to be sited in the Contractor’s main area. The medical room shall Clearing shall extend one (1) meter beyond the toe of the fill
be waterproof; it could be a building or room designated and used slopes or beyond rounding of cut slopes as the case maybe for the entire
exclusively for the purpose and have a floor area of at least 15 square length of the project unless otherwise shown on the plans or as directed
meters and a glazed window area of at least 2 square meters. by the Engineer and provided it is within the right of way limits of the
2. The Contractor shall employ permanently on the site a fully project, with the exception of trees under the jurisdiction of the Forest
trained Medical Aide who shall be engaged solely from medical duties. Management Bureau (FMB).
3. The location of the medical room and any other arrangements
shall be made known to all employees by posting on prominent locations 100.2.2 Clearing and Grubbing
suitable notices in the Site.
4. The Contractor’s arrangement to comply with this Section All surface objects and all trees, stumps, roots and other
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and also to the approval protruding obstructions, not designated to remain, shall be cleared and/or
grubbed, including mowing as required, except as provided below:
6
 (1) Removal of undisturbed stumps and roots and In the event that the Contractor is directed by the Engineer not to
nonperishable solid objects with a minimum depth of one start burning operations or to suspend such operations because of
(1) meter below subgrade or slope of embankment will not hazardous weather conditions, material to be burned which interferes with
be required. subsequent construction operations shall be moved by the Contractor to
temporary locations clear of construction operations and later, if directed
(2) In areas outside of the grading limits of cut and embankment by the Engineer, shall be placed on a designated spot and burned.
areas, stumps and nonperishable solid objects shall be cut
off not more than 150 mm (6 inches) above the ground line Materials and debris which cannot be burned and perishable
or low water level. materials may be disposed off by methods and at locations approved by
the Engineer, on or off the project. If disposal is by burying, the debris
(3) In areas to be rounded at the top of cut slopes, stumps shall be placed in layers with the material so disturbed to avoid nesting.
shall be cut off flush with or below the surface of the final Each layer shall be covered or mixed with earth material by the land-fill
slope line. method to fill all voids. The top layer of material buried shall be covered
with at least 300 mm (12 inches) of earth or other approved material and
(4) Grubbing of pits, channel changes and ditches will be shall be graded, shaped and compacted to present a pleasing
required only to the depth necessitated by the proposed appearance. If the disposal location is off the project, the Contractor
excavation within such areas. shall make all necessary arrangements with property owners in writing for
obtaining suitable disposal locations which are outside the limits of view
from the project. The cost involved shall be included in the unit bid price.
(5) In areas covered by cogon/talahib, wild grass and other A copy of such agreement shall be furnished to the Engineer. The
vegetations, top soil shall be cut to a maximum depth of disposal areas shall be seeded, fertilized and mulched at the Contractor’s
150 mm below the original ground surface or as expense.
designated by the Engineer, and disposed outside the
clearing and grubbing limits as indicated in the typical Woody material may be disposed off by chipping. The wood
roadway section. chips may be used for mulch, slope erosion control or may be uniformly
spread over selected areas as directed by the Engineer. Wood chips
Except in areas to be excavated, stump holes and other holes used as mulch for slope erosion control shall have a maximum thickness
from which obstructions are removed shall be backfilled with suitable of 12 mm (1/2 inch) and faces not exceeding 3900 mm2 (6 square inches)
material and compacted to the required density. on any individual surface area. Wood chips not designated for use under
other sections shall be spread over the designated areas in layers not to
If perishable material is burned, it shall be burned under the exceed 75 mm (3 inches) loose thickness. Diseased trees shall be
constant care of component watchmen at such times and in such a buried or disposed off as directed by the Engineer.
manner that the surrounding vegetation, other adjacent property, or
anything designated to remain on the right of way will not be jeopardized. All merchantable timber in the clearing area which has not been
If permitted, burning shall be done in accordance with applicable laws, removed from the right of way prior to the beginning of construction, shall
ordinances, and regulation. become the property of the Contractor, unless otherwise provided.

The Contractor shall use high intensity burning procedures, (i.e., Low hanging branches and unsound or unsightly branches on
incinerators, high stacking or pit and ditch burning with forced air trees or shrubs designated to remain shall be trimmed as directed.
supplements) that produce intense burning with little or no visible smoke Branches of trees extending over the roadbed shall be trimmed to give a
emission during the burning process. At the conclusion of each burning clear height of 6 m (20 feet) above the roadbed surface. All trimming
session, the fire shall be completely extinguished so that no smoldering shall be done by skilled workmen and in accordance with good tree
debris remains. surgery practices.
7
 100.4 Basis of Payment
Timber cut inside the area staked for clearing shall be felled
within the area to be cleared. The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section
100.3, shall be paid for at the Contract unit price for each of the Pay Items
100.2.3 Individual Removal of Trees or Stumps listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities, which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment,
Individual trees or stumps designated by the Engineer for removal tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this
and located in areas other than those established for clearing and Item.
grubbing and roadside cleanup shall be removed and disposed off as
specified under Subsection 100.2.2 except trees removed shall be cut as Payment will be made under:
nearly flush with the ground as practicable without removing stumps.

100.3 Method of Measurement Pay Item Description Unit of

Number Measurement
Measurement will be by one or more of the following alternate
methods: 100 (1) Clearing and Grubbing Hectare
100 (2) Clearing and Grubbing Lump Sum
1. Area Basis. The work to be paid for shall be the number 100 (3) Individual Removal of Each
of hectares and fractions thereof acceptably cleared and Trees, Small
grubbed within the limits indicated on the Plans or as may 100 (4) Individual removal of Each
be adjusted in field staking by the Engineer. Areas not Trees, Large
within the clearing and grubbing limits shown on the
Plans or not staked for clearing and grubbing will not be
measured for payment. ITEM 101 – REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS
2. Lump-Sum Basis. When the Bill of Quantities contains a 101.1 Description
Clearing and Grubbing lump-sum item, no measurement
of area will be made for such item. This Item shall consist of the removal wholly or in part, and
satisfactory disposal of all buildings, fences, structures, old pavements,
3. Individual Unit Basis (Selective Clearing). The diameter abandoned pipe lines, and any other obstructions which are not
of trees will be measured at a height of 1.4 m (54 inches) designated or permitted to remain, except for the obstructions to be
above the ground. Trees less than 150 mm (6 inches) in removed and disposed off under other items in the Contract. It shall also
diameter will not be measured for payment. include the salvaging of designated materials and backfilling the resulting
trenches, holes, and pits.
When Bill of Quantities indicates measurement of trees by
individual unit basis, the units will be designated and measured in 101.2 Construction Requirements
accordance with the following schedule of sizes:
101.2.1 General

Diameter at height of 1.4 m Pay Item Designation The Contractor shall perform the work described above, within
and adjacent to the roadway, on Government land or easement, as
Over 150 mm to 900 mm Small shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. All designated
Over 900 mm Large salvable material shall be removed, without unnecessary damage, in
sections or pieces which may be readily transported, and shall be stored
8
by the Contractor at specified places on the project or as otherwise shown Blasting or other operations necessary for the removal of an
in the Special Provisions. Perishable material shall be handled as existing structure or obstruction, which may damage new construction,
designated in Subsection 100.2.2 Nonperishable material may be shall be completed prior to placing the new work, unless otherwise
disposed off outside the limits of view from the project with written provided in the Special Provisions.
permission of the property owner on whose property the material is
placed. Copies of all agreements with property owners are to be 101.2.3 Removal of Pipes Other than Pipe Culverts
furnished to the Engineer. Basements or cavities left by the structure
removal shall be filled with acceptable material to the level of the Unless otherwise provided, all pipes shall be carefully removed
surrounding ground and, if within the prism of construction, shall be and every precaution taken to avoid breakage or damaged. Pipes to be
compacted to the required density. relaid shall be removed and stored when necessary so that there will be
no loss of damage before re-laying. The Contractor shall replace
101.2.2 Removal of Existing Bridges, Culverts, and other sections lost from storage or damage by negligence, at his own expense.
Drainage Structures
101.2.4 Removal of Existing Pavement, Sidewalks, Curbs, etc.
All existing bridges, culverts and other drainage structures in use
by traffic shall not be removed until satisfactory arrangements have been All concrete pavement, base course, sidewalks, curbs, gutters,
made to accommodate traffic. The removal of existing culverts within etc., designated for removal, shall be:
embankment areas will be required only as necessary for the installation
of new structures. Abandoned culverts shall be broken down, crushed (1) Broken into pieces and used for riprap on the project, or
and sealed or plugged. All retrieved culvert for future use as determined
by the Engineer shall be carefully removed and all precautions shall be (2) Broken into pieces, the size of which shall not exceed 300
employed to avoid breakage or structural damage to any of its part. All mm (12 inches) in any dimension and stockpiled at
sections of structures removed which are not designated for stockpiling designated locations on the project for use by the
or re-laying shall become the property of the Government and be Government, or
removed from the project or disposed off in a manner approved by the
Engineer. (3) Otherwise demolished and disposed off as directed by the
Engineer. When specified, ballast, gravel, bituminous
Unless otherwise directed, the substructures of existing structures materials or other surfacing or pavement materials shall be
shall be removed down to the natural stream bottom and those parts removed and stockpiled as required in Subsection 101.2.1,
outside of the stream shall be removed down to at least 300 mm (12 otherwise such materials shall be disposed off as directed.
inches) below natural ground surface. Where such portions of existing
structures lie wholly or in part within the limits for a new structure, they There will be no separate payment for excavating for removal of
shall be removed as necessary to accommodate the construction of the structures and obstructions or for backfilling and compacting the
proposed structure. remaining cavity.

Steel bridges and wood bridges when specified to be salvaged 101.3 Method of Measurement
shall be carefully dismantled without damaged. Steel members shall be
match marked unless such match marking is waived by the Engineer. All When the Contract stipulates that payment will be made for
salvaged material shall be stored as specified in Subsection 101.2.1. removal of obstructions on lump-sum basis, the pay item will include all
structures and obstructions encountered within the roadway. Where the
Structures designated to become the property of the Contractor contract stipulates that payment will be made for the removal of specific
shall be removed from the right-of-way. items on a unit basis, measurement will be made by the unit stipulated in
the Contract.

9
 Whenever the Bill of Quantities does not contain an item for any material found in the roadway as ordered by the Engineer for specific use
aforementioned removals, the work will not be paid for directly, but will be in the improvement. Roadway excavation will be classified as
considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor under other “unclassified excavation”, “rock excavation”, “common excavation”, or
Contract Items. “muck excavation” as indicated in the Bill of Quantities and hereinafter
described.
101.4 Basis of Payment
(1) Unclassified Excavation. Unclassified excavation shall
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section consist of the excavation and disposal of all materials
101.3, shall be paid for at the Contract unit price or lump sum price bid for regardless of its nature, not classified and included in the
each of the Pay Items listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities Bill of Quantities under other pay items.
which price and payment shall be full compensation for removing and
disposing of obstructions, including materials, labor, equipments, tools (2) Rock Excavation. Rock excavation shall consist of
and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rock which cannot
The price shall also include backfilling, salvage of materials removed, be excavated without blasting or the use of rippers, and all
their custody, preservation, storage on the right-of-way and disposal as boulders or other detached stones each having a volume of
provided herein. 1 cubic meter or more as determined by physical
measurements or visually by the Engineer.
Payment will be made under:

(3) Common Excavation. Common excavations shall consist

Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement of all excavation not included in the Bill of Quantities under
Number “rock excavation” or other pay items.
101 (1) Removal of Structures Lump Sum
and Obstruction (4) Muck Excavation. Muck excavation shall consist of the
101 (2) Removal of Each removal and disposal of deposits of saturated or
101 (3) Removal of Square Meter unsaturated mixtures of soils and organic matter not
101 (4) Removal of Linear Meter suitable for foundation material regardless of moisture
content.

ITEM 102 – EXCAVATION 102.1.2 Borrow Excavation

102.1 Description Borrow excavation shall consist of the excavation and utilization
of approved material required for the construction of embankments or for
This Item shall consist of roadway and drainage and borrow other portions of the work, and shall be obtained from approved sources,
excavation and the disposal of material in accordance with this in accordance with Clause 61 and the following:
Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions
shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer. (1) Borrow, Case 1
Borrow Case 1 will consist of material obtained from
102.1.1 Roadway Excavation sources designated on the Plans or in the Special
Provisions.
Roadway excavation will include excavation and grading for (2) Borrow, Case 2
roadways, parking areas, intersections, approaches, slope rounding, Borrow Case 2 will consist of material obtained from
benching, waterways and ditches; removal of unsuitable material from the sources provided by the Contractor.
roadbed and beneath embankment areas; and excavating selected
10
 The material shall meet the quality requirements determined by Only approved materials shall be used in the construction of
the Engineer unless otherwise provided in the Contract. embankments and backfills.

102.2 Construction Requirements All excess material, including rock and boulders that cannot be
used in embankments shall be disposed off as directed.
102.2.1 General
Material encountered in the excavation and determined by the
When there is evidence of discrepancies on the actual elevations Engineer as suitable for topping, road finishing, slope protection, or other
and that shown on the Plans, a pre-construction survey referred to the purposes shall be conserved and utilized as directed by the Engineer.
datum plane used in the approved Plan shall be undertaken by the
Contractor under the control of the Engineer to serve as basis for the Borrow material shall not be placed until after the readily
computation of the actual volume of the excavated materials. accessible roadway excavation has been placed in the fill, unless
otherwise permitted or directed by the Engineer. If the Contractor places
All excavations shall be finished to reasonably smooth and moré borrow than is required and thereby causes a waste of excavation,
uniform surfaces. No materials shall be wasted without authority of the the amount of such waste will be deducted from the borrow volume.
Engineer. Excavation operations shall be conducted so that material
outside of the limits of slopes will not be disturbed. Prior to excavation, 102.2.4 Prewatering
all necessary clearing and grubbing in that area shall have been
performed in accordance with Item 100, Clearing and Grubbing. Excavation areas and borrow pits may be prewatered before
excavating the material. When prewatering is used, the areas to be
102.2.2 Conservation of Topsoil excavated shall be moistened to the full depth, from the surface to the
bottom of the excavation. The water shall be controlled so that the
Where provided for on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, excavated material will contain the proper moisture to permit compaction
suitable topsoil encountered in excavation and on areas where to the specified density with the use of standard compacting equipment.
embankment is to be placed shall be removed to such extent and to such Prewatering shall be supplemented where necessary, by truck watering
depth as the Engineer may direct. The removed topsoil shall be units, to ensure that the embankment material contains the proper
transported and deposited in storage piles at locations approved by the moisture at the time of compaction.
Engineer. The topsoil shall be completely removed to the required depth
from any designated area prior to the beginning of regular excavation or The Contractor shall provide drilling equipment capable of
embankment work in the area and shall be kept separate from other suitably checking the moisture penetration to the full depth of the
excavated materials for later use. excavation.

102.2.3 Utilization of Excavated Materials 102.2.5 Presplitting

All suitable material removed from the excavation shall be used in Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, rock excavation which
the formation of the embankment, subgrade, shoulders, slopes, bedding, requires drilling and shooting shall be presplit.
and backfill for structures, and for other purposes shown on the Plans or
as directed. Presplitting to obtain faces in the rock and shale formations shall
be performed by: (1) drilling holes at uniform intervals along the slope
The Engineer will designate as unsuitable those soils that cannot lines, (2) loading and stemming the holes with appropriate explosives and
be properly compacted in embankments. All unsuitable material shall be stemming material, and (3) detonating the holes simultaneously.
disposed off as shown on the Plans or as directed without delay to the
Contractor. Prior to starting drilling operations for presplitting, the Contractor
shall furnish the Engineer a plan outlining the position of all drill holes,
11
depth of drilling, type of explosives to be used, loading pattern and throwing all loose materials on the downhill side so that the bottom of the
sequence of firing. The drilling and blasting plan is for record purposes finished ditch shall be approximately 450 mm (18 inches) below the crest
only and will not absolve the Contractor of his responsibility for using of the loose material piled on the downhill side. Hand finish will not be
proper drilling and blasting procedures. Controlled blasting shall begin required, but the flow lines shall be in satisfactory shape to provide
with a short test section of a length approved by the Engineer. The test drainage without overflow.
section shall be presplit, production drilled and blasted and sufficient
material excavated whereby the Engineer can determine if the 102.2.7 Excavation of Roadbed Level
Contractor’s methods are satisfactory. The Engineer may order
discontinuance of the presplitting when he determines that the materials Rock shall be excavated to a depth of 150 mm (6 inches) below
encountered have become unsuitable for being presplit. subgrade within the limits of the roadbed, and the excavation backfilled
with material designated on the Plans or approved by the Engineer and
The holes shall be charged with explosives of the size, kind, compacted to the required density.
strength, and at the spacing suitable for the formations being presplit, and
with stemming material which passes a 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) standard sieve When excavation methods employed by the Contractor leave
and which has the qualities for proper confinement of the explosives. undrained pockets in the rock surface, the Contractor shall at his own
expense, properly drain such depressions or when permitted by the
The finished presplit slope shall be reasonably uniform and free Engineer fill the depressions with approved impermeable material.
of loose rock. Variance from the true plane of the excavated backslope
shall not exceed 300 mm (12 inches); however, localized irregularities or Material below subgrade, other than solid rock shall be thoroughly
surface variations that do not constitute a safety hazard or an impairment scarified to a depth of 150 mm (6 inches) and the moisture content
to drainage courses or facilities will be permitted. increased or reduced, as necessary, to bring the material throughout this
150 mm layer to the moisture content suitable for maximum compaction.
A maximum offset of 600 mm (24 inches) will be permitted for a This layer shall then be compacted in accordance with Subsection
construction working bench at the bottom of each lift for use in drilling the 104.3.3.
next lower presplitting pattern.
102.2.8 Borrow Areas
102.2.6 Excavation of Ditches, Gutters, etc.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer sufficiently in advance of
All materials excavated from side ditches and gutters, channel opening any borrow areas so that cross-section elevations and
changes, irrigation ditches, inlet and outlet ditches, toe ditchers, furrow measurements of the ground surface after stripping may be taken, and
ditches, and such other ditches as may be designated on the Plans or the borrow material can be tested before being used. Sufficient time for
staked by the Engineer, shall be utilized as provided in Subsection testing the borrow material shall be allowed.
102.2.3.
All borrow areas shall be bladed and left in such shape as to
Ditches shall conform to the slope, grade, and shape of the permit accurate measurements after excavation has been completed.
required cross-section, with no projections of roots, stumps, rock, or The Contractor shall not excavate beyond the dimensions and elevations
similar matter. The Contractor shall maintain and keep open and free established, and no material shall be removed prior to the staking out and
from leaves, sticks, and other debris all ditches dug by him until final cross-sectioning of the site. The finished borrow areas shall be
acceptance of the work. approximately true to line and grade established and specified and shall
be finished, as prescribed in Clause 61, Standard Specifications for Public
Furrow ditches shall be formed by plowing a continuous furrow Works and Highways, Volume 1. When necessary to remove fencing, the
along the line staked by the Engineer. Methods other than plowing may fencing shall be replaced in at least as good condition as it was originally.
be used if acceptable to the Engineer. The ditches shall be cleaned out The Contractor shall be responsible for the confinement of livestock when
by hand shovel work, by ditcher, or by some other suitable method, a portion of the fence is removed.
12
 The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the contract
102.2.9 Removal of Unsuitable Material unit prices all costs of obtaining land for the disposal of unsuitable or
surplus material.
Where the Plans show the top portion of the roadbed to be
selected topping, all unsuitable materials shall be excavated to the depth 102.4 Basis of Payment
necessary for replacement of the selected topping to the required
compacted thickness. The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section
102.3 shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the Pay Items
Where excavation to the finished graded section results in a listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities which price and
subgrade or slopes of unsuitable soil, the Engineer may require the payment shall be full compensation for the removal and disposal of
Contractor to remove the unsuitable material and backfill to the finished excavated materials including all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals
graded section with approved material. The Contractor shall conduct his necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.
operations in such a way that the Engineer can take the necessary cross-
sectional measurements before the backfill is placed. Payment will be made under:

The excavation of muck shall be handled in a manner that will not Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement
permit the entrapment of muck within the backfill. The material used for Number
backfilling up to the ground line or water level, whichever is higher, shall 102 (1) Unsuitable Excavation Cubic Meter
be rock or other suitable granular material selected from the roadway 102 (2) Surplus Common Cubic Meter
excavation, if available. If not available, suitable material shall be Excavation
obtained from other approved sources. Unsuitable material removed 102 (3) Surplus Rock Excavation Cubic Meter
shall be disposed off in designated areas shown on the Plans or approved 102 (4) Surplus Unclassified Cubic Meter
by the Engineer. Excavation

102.3 Method of Measurement

ITEM 103 – STRUCTURE EXCAVATION
The cost of excavation of material which is incorporated in the
Works or in other areas of fill shall be deemed to be included in the Items 103.1 Description
of Work where the material is used.
This Item shall consist of the necessary excavation for foundation
Measurement of Unsuitable or Surplus Material shall be the net of bridges, culverts, underdrains, and other structures not otherwise
volume in its original position. provided for in the Specifications. Except as otherwise provided for pipe
culverts, the backfilling of completed structures and the disposal of all
For measurement purposes, surplus suitable material shall be excavated surplus materials, shall be in accordance with these
calculated as the difference between the net volume of suitable material Specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the Plans or as
required to be used in embankment corrected by applying a shrinkage established by the Engineer.
factor or a swell factor in case of rock excavation, determined by
laboratory tests to get its original volume measurement, and the net This Item shall include necessary diverting of live streams,
volume of suitable material from excavation in the original position. bailing, pumping, draining, sheeting, bracing, and the necessary
Separate pay items shall be provided for surplus common, unclassified construction of cribs and cofferdams, and furnishing the materials
and rock material. therefore, and the subsequent removal of cribs and cofferdams and the
placing of all necessary backfill.

13
 It shall also include the furnishing and placing of approved After each excavation is completed, the Contractor shall
foundation fill material to replace unsuitable material encountered below notify the Engineer to that effect and no footing, bedding
the foundation elevation of structures. material or pipe culvert shall be placed until the Engineer
has approved the depth of excavation and the character of
No allowance will be made for classification of different types of the foundation material.
material encountered.
(2) Structures other than pipe culverts. All rock or other hard
foundation materials shall be cleaned all loose materials,
and cut to a firm surface, either level, stepped, or serrated
as directed by the Engineer. All seams or crevices shall be
cleaned and grouted. All loose and disintegrated rocks
and thin strata shall be removed. When the footing is to
103.2 Construction Requirements rest on material other than rock, excavation to final grade
shall not be made until just before the footing is to be
103.2.1 Clearing and Grubbing placed. When the foundation material is soft or mucky or
otherwise unsuitable, as determined by the Engineer, the
Prior to starting excavation operations in any area, all necessary Contractor shall remove the unsuitable material and backfill
clearing and grubbing in that area shall have been performed in with approved granular material. This foundation fill shall
accordance with Item 100, Clearing and Grubbing. be placed and compacted in 150 mm (6 inches) layers up
to the foundation elevation.
103.2.2 Excavation
When foundation piles are used, the excavation of each
(1) General, all structures. The Contractor shall notify the pit shall be completed before the piles are driven and any
Engineer sufficiently in advance of the beginning of any placing of foundation fill shall be done after the piles are
excavation so that cross-sectional elevations and driven. After the driving is completed, all loose and
measurements may be taken on the undisturbed ground. displaced materials shall be removed, leaving a smooth,
The natural ground adjacent to the structure shall not be solid bed to receive the footing.
disturbed without permission of the Engineer.
(3) Pipe Culverts. The width of the pipe trench shall be
Trenches or foundation pits for structures or structure sufficient to permit satisfactory jointing of the pipe and
footings shall be excavated to the lines and grades or thorough tamping of the bedding material under and around
elevations shown on the Plans or as staked by the the pipe.
Engineer. They shall be of sufficient size to permit the
placing of structures or structure footings of the full width Where rock, hardpan, or other unyielding material is
and length shown. The elevations of the bottoms of encountered, it shall be removed below the foundation
footings, as shown on the Plans, shall be considered as grade for a depth of at least 300 mm or 4 mm for each 100
approximate only and the Engineer may order, in writing, mm of fill over the top of pipe, whichever is greater, but not
such changes in dimensions or elevations of footings as to exceed three-quarters of the vertical inside diameter of
may be deemed necessary, to secure a satisfactory the pipe. The width of the excavation shall be at least 300
foundation. mm (12 inches) greater than the horizontal outside
diameter of the pipe. The excavation below grade shall be
Boulders, logs, and other objectionable materials backfilled with selected fine compressible material, such as
encountered in excavation shall be removed. silty clay or loam, and lightly compacted in layers not over

14
 150 mm (6 inches) in uncompacted depth to form a uniform dimensions of cofferdams shall be such as to give sufficient clearance for
but yielding foundation. the construction of forms and the inspection of their exteriors, and to
permit pumping outside of the forms. Cofferdams or cribs which are tilted
Where a firm foundation is not encountered at the grade or moved laterally during the process of sinking shall be righted or
established, due to soft, spongy, or other unstable soil, enlarged so as to provide the necessary clearance.
such unstable soil under the pipe and for a width of at least
one diameter on each side of the pipe shall be removed to When conditions are encountered which, as determined by the
the depth directed by the Engineer and replaced with Engineer, render it impracticable to dewater the foundation before placing
approved granular foundation fill material properly the footing, the Engineer may require the construction of a concrete
compacted to provide adequate support for the pipe, unless foundation seal of such dimensions as he may consider necessary, and of
other special construction methods are called for on the such thickness as to resist any possible uplift. The concrete for such
Plans. seal shall be placed as shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer.
The foundation shall then be dewatered and the footing placed. When
The foundation surface shall provide a firm foundation of weighted cribs are employed and the mass is utilized to overcome
uniform density throughout the length of the culvert and, if partially the hydrostatic pressure acting against the bottom of the
directed by the Engineer, shall be cambered in the direction foundation seal, special anchorage such as dowels or keys shall be
parallel to the pipe centerline. provided to transfer the entire mass of the crib to the foundation seal.
When a foundation seal is placed under water, the cofferdams shall be
Where pipe culverts are to be placed in trenches vented or ported at low water level as directed.
excavated in embankments, the excavation of each trench
shall be performed after the embankment has been Cofferdams shall be constructed so as to protect green concrete
constructed to a plane parallel to the proposed profile grade against damage from sudden rising of the stream and to prevent damage
and to such height above the bottom of the pipe as shown to the foundation by erosion. No timber or bracing shall be left in
on the Plans or directed by the Engineer. cofferdams or cribs in such a way as to extend into substructure masonry,
without written permission from the Engineer.
103.2.3 Utilization of Excavated Materials
Any pumping that may be permitted from the interior of any
All excavated materials, so far as suitable, shall be utilized as foundation enclosure shall be done in such a manner as to preclude the
backfill or embankment. The surplus materials shall be disposed off in possibility of any portion of the concrete material being carried away.
such manner as not to obstruct the stream or otherwise impair the Any pumping required during the placing of concrete, or for a period of at
efficiency or appearance of the structure. No excavated materials shall least 24 hours thereafter, shall be done from a suitable sump located
be deposited at any time so as to endanger the partly finished structure. outside the concrete forms. Pumping to dewater a sealed cofferdam
shall not commence until the seal has set sufficiently to withstand the
103.2.4 Cofferdams hydrostatic pressure.

Suitable and practically watertight cofferdams shall be used Unless otherwise provided, cofferdams or cribs, with all sheeting
wherever water-bearing strata are encountered above the elevation of the and bracing involved therewith, shall be removed by the Contractor after
bottom of the excavation. If requested, the Contractor shall submit the completion of the substructure. Removal shall be effected in such
drawings showing his proposed method of cofferdam construction, as manner as not to disturb or mar finished masonry.
directed by the Engineer.
103.2.5 Preservation of Channel
Cofferdams or cribs for foundation construction shall in general,
be carried well below the bottoms of the footings and shall be well braced Unless otherwise permitted, no excavation shall be made outside
and as nearly watertight as practicable. In general, the interior of caissons, cribs, cofferdams, or sheet piling, and the natural stream bed
15
adjacent to structure shall not be disturbed without permission from the
Engineer. If any excavation or dredging is made at the side of the Broken rock or coarse sand and gravel shall be provided for a
structure before caissons, cribs, or cofferdams are sunk in place, the drainage filter at weepholes as shown on the Plans.
Contractor shall, after the foundation base is in place, backfill all such
excavations to the original ground surface or stream bed with material 103.2.7 Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment for Pipe Culverts
satisfactory to the Engineer.
Bedding, Backfill and Embankment for pipe culverts shall be done
103.2.6 Backfill and Embankment for Structures Other Than Pipe in accordance with Item 500, Pipe Culverts and Storm Drains.
Culverts
103.3 Method of Measurement
Excavated areas around structures shall be backfilled with free
draining granular material approved by the Engineer and placed in 103.3.1 Structure Excavation
horizontal layers not over 150 mm (6 inches) in thickness, to the level of
the original ground surface. Each layer shall be moistened or dried as The volume of excavation to be paid for will be the number of
required and thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers. cubic metres measured in original position of material acceptably
excavated in conformity with the Plans or as directed by the Engineer, but
In placing backfills or embankment, the material shall be placed in no case, except as noted, will any of the following volumes be included
simultaneously in so far as possible to approximately the same elevation in the measurement for payment:
on both sides of an abutment, pier, or wall. If conditions require placing
backfill or embankment appreciably higher on one side than on the (1) The volume outside of vertical planes 450 mm (18 inches)
opposite side, the additional material on the higher side shall not be outside of and parallel to the neat lines of footings and the
placed until the masonry has been in place for 14 days, or until tests inside walls of pipe and pipe-arch culverts at their widest
made by the laboratory under the supervision of the Engineer establishes horizontal dimensions.
that the masonry has attained sufficient strength to withstand any
pressure created by the methods used and materials placed without (2) The volume of excavation for culvert and sections outside
damage or strain beyond a safe factor. the vertical plane for culverts stipulated in (1) above.

Backfill or embankment shall not be placed behind the walls of (3) The volume outside of neat lines of underdrains as shown
concrete culverts or abutments or rigid frame structures until the top slab on the Plans, and outside the limits of foundation fill as
is placed and cured. Backfill and embankment behind abutments held at ordered by the Engineer.
the top by the superstructure, and behind the sidewalls of culverts, shall
be carried up simultaneously behind opposite abutments or sidewalls. (4) The volume included within the staked limits of the roadway
excavation, contiguous channel changes, ditches, etc., for
All embankments adjacent to structures shall be constructed in which payment is otherwise provided in the Specification.
horizontal layers and compacted as prescribed in Subsection 104.3.3
except that mechanical tampers may be used for the required (5) Volume of water or other liquid resulting from construction
compaction. Special care shall be taken to prevent any wedging action operations and which can be pumped or drained away.
against the structure and slopes bounding or within the areas to be filled
shall be benched or serrated to prevent wedge action. The placing of (6) The volume of any excavation performed prior to the taking
embankment and the benching of slopes shall continue in such a manner of elevations and measurements of the undisturbed ground.
that at all times there will be horizontal berm of thoroughly compacted
material for a distance at least equal to the height of the abutment or wall (7) the volume of any material rehandled, except that where
to the backfilled against except insofar as undisturbed material obtrudes the Plans indicate or the Engineer directs the excavation
upon the area. after embankment has been placed and except that when
16
 installation of pipe culverts by the imperfect trench method The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section
specified in Item 500 is required, the volume of material re- 103.3, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the particular
excavated as directed will be included. pay items listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities. The
payment shall constitute full compensation for the removal and disposal of
(8) The volume of excavation for footings ordered at a depth excavated materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
more than 1.5 m (60 inches) below the lowest elevation for necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item, except as follows:
such footings shown on the original Contract Plans, unless
the Bill of Quantities contains a pay item for excavation (1) Any excavation for footings ordered at a depth more than
ordered below the elevations shown on the Plans for 1.5 m below the lowest elevation shown on the original
individual footings. Contract Plans will be paid for as provided in Part K,
Measurement and Payment, unless a pay item for
103.3.2 Bridge Excavation excavation ordered below Plan elevation appears in the Bill
of Quantities.
The volume of excavation, designated on the Plans or in the
Special Provisions as “Bridge Excavation” will be measured as described (2) Concrete will be measured and paid for as provided under
below and will be kept separate for pay purposes from the excavation for Item 405, Structural Concrete.
all structures.
(3) Any roadway or borrow excavation required in excess of
The volume of bridge excavation to be paid shall be the vertical the quantity excavated for structures will be measured and
450 mm (18 inches) outside of and parallel to the neat lines of the footing. paid for as provided under Item 102.
The vertical planes shall constitute the vertical faces of the volume for pay
quantities regardless of excavation inside or outside of these planes. (4) Shoring, cribbing, and related work required for excavation
ordered more than 1.5 m (60 inches ) below Plan elevation
103.3.3 Foundation Fill will be paid for in accordance with Part K.

The volume of foundation fill to be paid for will be the number of Payment will be made under:
cubic metres measures in final position of the special granular material
actually provided and placed below the foundation elevation of structures Pay Item Number Description Unit of
as specified, complete in place and accepted. Measurement
103 (1) Structure Excavation Cubic Meter
103.3.4 Shoring, Cribbing, and Related Work 103 (2) Bridge Excavation Cubic Meter
103 (3) Foundation Fill Cubic Meter
Shoring, cribbing and related work whenever included as a pay 103 (4) Excavation ordered Cubic Meter
item in Bill of Quantities will be paid for at the lump sum bid price. This below Plan elevation
work shall include furnishing, constructing, maintaining, and removing any 103 (5) Shoring, cribbing, and
and all shoring, cribbing, cofferdams, caissons, bracing, sheeting water related work Lump sum
control, and other operations necessary for the acceptable completion of 103 (6) Pipe culverts and drain Cubic Meter
excavation included in the work of this Section, to a depth of 1.5 m below excavation
the lowest elevation shown on the Plans for each separable foundation
structure.

103.3.5 Basis of Payment ITEM 104 – EMBANKMENT

104.1 Description
17
 104.3 Construction Requirements
This Item shall consist of the construction of embankment in
accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades 104.3.1 General
and dimensions shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer.
Prior to construction of embankment, all necessary clearing and
104.2 Material Requirements grubbing in that area shall have been performed in conformity with Item
100, Clearing and Grubbing.
Embankments shall be constructed of suitable materials, in
consonance with the following definitions: Embankment construction shall consist of constructing roadway
embankments, including preparation of the areas upon which they are to
1. Suitable Material – Material which is acceptable in be placed; the construction of dikes within or adjacent to the roadway; the
accordance with the Contract and which can be compacted placing and compacting of approved material within roadway areas where
in the manner specified in this Item. It can be common unsuitable material has been removed; and the placing and compacting of
material or rock. embankment material in holes, pits, and other depressions within the
roadway area.
Selected Borrow, for topping – soil of such gradation
that all particles will pass a sieve with 75 mm (3 inches) Embankments and backfills shall contain no muck, peat, sod,
square openings and not more than 15 mass percent will roots or other deleterious matter. Rocks, broken concrete or other solid,
pass the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve, as determined by bulky materials shall not be placed in embankment areas where piling is
AASHTO T 11. The material shall have a plasticity index of to be placed or driven.
not more than 6 as determined by ASSHTO T 90 and a
liquid limit of not more than 30 as determined by AASHTO Where shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer, the
T 89. surface of the existing ground shall be compacted to a depth of 150 mm
(6 inches) and to the specified requirements of this Item.
2. Unsuitable Material – Material other than suitable materials
such as: Where provided on the Plans and Bill of Quantities the top
portions of the roadbed in both cuts and embankments, as indicated, shall
(a) Materials containing detrimental quantities of organic consist of selected borrow for topping from excavations.
materials, such as grass, roots and sewerage. 104.3.2 Methods of Construction

(b) Organic soils such as peat and muck. Where there is evidence of discrepancies on the actual elevations
and that shown on the Plans, a preconstruction survey referred to the
(c) Soils with liquid limit exceeding 80 and/or plasticity index datum plane used in the approved Plan shall be undertaken by the
exceeding 55. Contractor under the control of the Engineer to serve as basis for the
computation of the actual volume of the embankment materials.
(d) Soils with a natural water content exceeding 100%.
When embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides,
(e) Soils with very low natural density, 800 kg/m3 or or when new embankment is to be compacted against existing
lower. embankments, or when embankment is built one-half width at a time, the
existing slopes that are steeper than 3:1 when measured at right angles
(f) Soils that cannot be properly compacted as to the roadway shall be continuously benched over those areas as the
determined by the work is brought up in layers. Benching will be subject to the Engineer’s
Engineer. approval and shall be of sufficient width to permit operation of placement
and compaction equipment. Each horizontal cut shall begin at the
18
intersection of the original ground and the vertical sides of the previous equipment, the lower part of the fill may be constructed by dumping
cuts. Material thus excavated shall be placed and compacted along with successive loads in a uniformly distributed layer of a thickness not greater
the embankment material in accordance with the procedure described in than necessary to support the hauling equipment while placing
this Section. subsequent layers.

Unless shown otherwise on the Plans or special Provisions, When excavated material contains more than 25 mass percent of
where an embankment of less than 1.2 m (4 feet) below subgrade is to be rock larger than 150 mm in greatest diameter and cannot be placed in
made, all sod and vegetable matter shall be removed from the surface layers of the thickness prescribed without crushing, pulverizing or further
upon which the embankment is to be placed, and the cleared surfaced breaking down the pieces resulting from excavation methods, such
shall be completely broken up by plowing, scarifying, or steeping to a materials may be placed on the embankment in layers not exceeding in
minimum depth of 150 mm except as provided in Subsection 102.2.2. thickness the approximate average size of the larger rocks, but not
This area shall then be compacted as provided in Subsection 104.3.3. greater than 600 mm (24 inches).
Sod not required to be removed shall be thoroughly disc harrowed or
scarified before construction of embankment. Wherever a compacted Even though the thickness of layers is limited as provided above,
road surface containing granular materials lies within 900 mm (36 inches) the placing of individual rocks and boulders greater than 600 mm in
of the subgrade, such old road surface shall be scarified to a depth of at diameter will be permitted provided that when placed, they do not exceed
least 150 mm (6 inches) whenever directed by the Engineer. This 1200 mm (48 inches) in height and provided they are carefully distributed,
scarified materials shall then be compacted as provided in Subsection with the interstices filled with finer material to form a dense and compact
104.3.3. mass.

When shoulder excavation is specified, the roadway shoulders Each layer shall be leveled and smoothed with suitable leveling
shall be excavated to the depth and width shown on the Plans. The equipment and by distribution of spalls and finer fragments of earth. Lifts
shoulder material shall be removed without disturbing the adjacent of material containing more than 25 mass percent of rock larger than 150
existing base course material, and all excess excavated materials shall be mm in greatest dimensions shall not be constructed above an elevation
disposed off as provided in Subsection 102.2.3. If necessary, the areas 300 mm ( 12 inches) below the finished subgrade. The balance of the
shall be compacted before being backfilled. embankment shall be composed of suitable material smoothed and
placed in layers not exceeding 200 mm (8 inches) in loose thickness and
Roadway embankment of earth material shall be placed in compacted as specified for embankments.
horizontal layers not exceeding 200 mm (8 inches), loose measurement,
and shall be compacted as specified before the next layer is placed. Dumping and rolling areas shall be kept separate, and no lift shall
However, thicker layer maybe placed if vibratory roller with high be covered by another until compaction complies with the requirements of
compactive effort is used provided that density requirement is attained Subsection 104.3.3.
and as approved by the Engineer. Trial section to this effect must be
conducted and approved by the Engineer. Effective spreading equipment Hauling and leveling equipment shall be so routed and distributed
shall be used on each lift to obtain uniform thickness as determined in the over each layer of the fill in such a manner as to make use of compaction
trial section prior to compaction. As the compaction of each layer effort afforded thereby and to minimize rutting and uneven compaction.
progresses, continuous leveling and manipulating will be required to
assure uniform density. Water shall be added or removed, if necessary, 104.3.3 Compaction
in order to obtain the required density. Removal of water shall be
accomplished through aeration by plowing, blading, discing, or other Compaction Trials
methods satisfactory to the Engineer.
Before commencing the formation of embankments, the
Where embankment is to be constructed across low swampy Contractor shall submit in writing to the Engineer for approval his
ground that will not support the mass of trucks or other hauling proposals for the compaction of each type of fill material to be used in the
19
works. The proposals shall include the relationship between the types of Embankment materials classified as rock shall be deposited,
compaction equipment, and the number of passes required and the spread and leveled the full width of the fill with sufficient earth or other fine
method of adjusting moisture content. The Contractor shall carry out full material so deposited to fill the interstices to produce a dense compact
scale compaction trials on areas not less than 10 m wide and 50 m long embankment. In addition, one of the rollers, vibrators, or compactors
as required by the Engineer and using his proposed procedures or such meeting the requirements set forth in Subsection 106.2.1, Compaction
amendments thereto as may be found necessary to satisfy the Engineer Equipment, shall compact the embankment full width with a minimum of
that all the specified requirements regarding compaction can be three complete passes for each layer of embankment.
consistently achieved. Compaction trials with the main types of fill
material to be used in the works shall be completed before work with the 104.3.4 Protection of Roadbed During Construction
corresponding materials will be allowed to commence.
During the construction of the roadway, the roadbed shall be
Throughout the periods when compaction of earthwork is in maintained in such condition that it will be well drained at all times. Side
progress, the Contractor shall adhere to the compaction procedures found ditches or gutters emptying from cuts to embankments or otherwise shall
from compaction trials for each type of material being compacted, each be so constructed as to avoid damage to embankments by erosion.
type of compaction equipment employed and each degree of compaction
specified. 104.3.5 Protection of Structure

Earth If embankment can be deposited on one side only of abutments,

The Contractor shall compact the material placed in all wing walls, piers or culvert headwalls, care shall be taken that the area
embankment layers and the material scarified to the designated depth immediately adjacent to the structure is not compacted to the extent that it
below subgrade in cut sections, until a uniform density of not less than 95 will cause overturning of, or excessive pressure against the structure.
mass percent of the maximum dry density determined by AASHTO T 99 When noted on the Plans, the fill adjacent to the end bent of a bridge shall
Method C, is attained, at a moisture content determined by Engineer to be not be placed higher than the bottom of the backfill of the bent until the
suitable for such density. Acceptance of compaction may be based on superstructure is in place. When embankment is to be placed on both
adherence to an approved roller pattern developed as set forth in Item sides of a concrete wall or box type structure, operations shall be so
106, Compaction Equipment and Density Control Strips. conducted that the embankment is always at approximately the same
elevation on both sides of the structure.
The Engineer shall during progress of the Work, make density
tests of compacted material in accordance with AASHTO T 191, T 205, or 104.3.6 Rounding and Warping Slopes
other approved field density tests, including the use of properly calibrated
nuclear testing devices. A correction for coarse particles may be made in Rounding-Except in solid rock, the tops and bottoms of all slopes,
accordance with AASHTO T 224. If, by such tests, the Engineer including the slopes of drainage ditches, shall be rounded as indicated on
determines that the specified density and moisture conditions have not the Plans. A layer of earth overlaying rock shall be rounded above the
been attained, the Contractor shall perform additional work as may be rock as done in earth slopes.
necessary to attain the specified conditions.
Warping-adjustments in slopes shall be made to avoid injury in
At least one group of three in-situ density tests shall be carried standing trees or marring of weathered rock, or to harmonize with existing
out for each 500 m of each layer of compacted fill. landscape features, and the transition to such adjusted slopes shall be
gradual. At intersections of cuts and fills, slopes shall be adjusted and
Rock warped to flow into each other or into the natural ground surfaces without
Density requirements will not apply to portions of embankments noticeable break.
constructed of materials which cannot be tested in accordance with
approved methods. 104.3.7 Finishing Roadbed and Slopes

20
 After the roadbed has been substantially completed, the full width 99, Method C. The cross-section of the finished compacted berm shall
shall be conditioned by removing any soft or other unstable material that reasonably conform to the typical cross-section as shown on the Plans.
will not compact properly or serve the intended purpose. The resulting
areas and all other low sections, holes of depressions shall be brought to Uncompacted Berm
grade with suitable selected material. Scarifying, blading, dragging,
rolling, or other methods of work shall be performed or used as necessary Uncompacted berm construction shall consist of drying, if
to provide a thoroughly compacted roadbed shaped to the grades and necessary and placing material in locations shown on the Plans or as
cross-sections shown on the Plans or as staked by the Engineer. established by the Engineer. Material shall contain no frozen material,
roots, sod or other deleterious materials. Contractor shall take
All earth slopes shall be left with roughened surfaces but shall be precautions to prevent material from escaping over the embankment
reasonably uniform, without any noticeable break, and in reasonably slope.
close conformity with the Plans or other surfaces indicated on the Plans
or as staked by the Engineer, with no variations therefrom readily 104.4 Method of Measurement
discernible as viewed from the road.
The quantity of embankment to be paid for shall be the volume of
104.3.8 Serrated Slopes material compacted in place, accepted by the Engineer and formed with
material obtained from any source.
Cut slopes in rippable material (soft rock) having slope ratios
between 0.75:1 and 2:1 shall be constructed so that the final slope line Material from excavation per Item 102 which is used in
shall consist of a series of small horizontal steps. The step rise and tread embankment and accepted by the Engineer will be paid under
dimensions shall be shown on the Plans. No scaling shall be performed Embankment and such payment will be deemed to include the cost of
on the stepped slopes except for removal of large rocks which will excavating, hauling, stockpiling and all other costs incidental to the work.
obviously be a safety hazard if they fall into the ditchline or roadway.
Material for Selected Borrow topping will be measured and paid
104.3.9 Earth Berms for under the same conditions specified in the preceding paragraph.

When called for in the Contract, permanent earth berms shall be 104.5 Basis of Payment
constructed of well graded materials with no rocks having a diameter
greater than 0.25 the height of the berm. When local material is not The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section
acceptable, acceptable material shall be imported, as directed by the 104.4, shall be paid for at the Contract unit price for each of the Pay
Engineer. Items listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities. The payment
shall continue full compensation for placing and compacting all materials
Compacted Berm including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the work prescribed in this Item.
Compacted berm construction shall consist of moistening or
drying and placing material as necessary in locations shown on the Payment will be made under:
drawings or as established by the Engineer. Material shall contain no
frozen material, roots, sod, or other deleterious materials. Contractor
shall take precaution to prevent material from escaping over the Pay Item Description Unit of
embankment slope. Shoulder surface beneath berm will be roughened Number Measurement
to provide a bond between the berm and shoulder when completed. The 104 (1) Embankment Cubic Meter
Contractor shall compact the material placed until at least 90 mass 104 (2) Selected, Borrow for
percent of the maximum density is obtained as determined by AASHTO T topping, Case 1 Cubic Meter
104 (3) Selected Borrow for Cubic Meter
21
 topping, Case 2 design CROSSFALL OR CAMBER + 0.5 %
104 (4) Earth Berm Meter Permitted variation from ± 0.1 %
design LONGITUDINAL GRADE
over 25 m length

Item 105 – SUBGRADE PREPARATION 105.3.3 Subgrade in Common Excavation

105.1 Description Unless otherwise specified, all materials below subgrade level in
earth cuts to a depth 150 mm or other depth shown on the Plans or as
This Item shall consist of the preparation of the subgrade for the directed by the Engineer shall be excavated. The material, if suitable,
support of overlying structural layers. It shall extend to full width of the shall be set side for future use or, if unsuitable, shall be disposed off in
roadway. Unless authorized by the Engineer, subgrade preparation shall accordance with the requirements of Subsection 102.2.9.
not be done unless the Contractor is able to start immediately the
construction of the pavement structure. Where material has been removed from below subgrade level,
the resulting surface shall be compacted to a depth of 150 mm and in
105.2 Material Requirements accordance with other requirements of Subsection 104.3.3.

Unless otherwise stated in the Contract and except when the All materials immediately below subgrade level in earth cuts to a
subgrade is in rock cut, all materials below subgrade level to a depth 150 depth of 150 mm, or to such greater depth as may be specified, shall be
mm or to such greater depth as may be specified shall meet the compacted in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 104.3.3.
requirements of Section 104.2, Selected Borrow for Topping.
105.3.4 Subgrade in Rock Excavation
105.3 Construction Requirements
Surface irregularities under the subgrade level remaining after
105.3.1 Prior Works trimming of the rock excavation shall be leveled by placing specified
material and compacted to the requirements of Subsection 104.3.3.
Prior to commencing preparation of the subgrade, all culverts,
cross drains, ducts and the like (including their fully compacted backfill), 105.3.5 Subgrade on Embankment
ditches, drains and drainage outlets shall be completed. Any work
on the preparation of the After the embankment has been completed, the full width shall be
subgrade shall not be started unless prior work herein described shall conditioned by removing any soft or other unstable material that will not
have been approved by the Engineer. compacted properly. The resulting areas and all other low sections,
holes, or depressions shall be brought to grade with suitable material. The
entire roadbed shall be shaped and compacted to the requirements of
105.3.2 Subgrade Level Tolerances Subsections 104.3.3. Scarifying, blading, dragging, rolling, or other
methods of work shall be performed or used as necessary to provide a
The finished compacted surface of the subgrade shall conform to thoroughly compacted roadbed shaped to the cross-sections shown on
the allowable tolerances as specified hereunder: the Plans.

Permitted variation from + 20 mm 105.3.6 Subgrade on Existing Pavement

design LEVEL OF SURFACE - 30 mm
Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY Where the new pavement is to be constructed immediately over
MEASURED BY 3-m STRAIGHT EDGE 30 mm an existing Portland Cement concrete pavement and if so specified in the
Permitted variation from Contract the slab be broken into pieces with greatest dimension of not
22
more than 500 mm and the existing pavement material compacted as 105.4.2 Payment for all work for the preparation of the subgrade,
specified in Subsection 104.3.3, as directed by the Engineer. The including shaping to the required levels and tolerances, other
resulting subgrade level shall, as part pavement construction be shaped than as specified above shall be deemed to be included in the
to conform to the allowable tolerances of Subsection 105.3.2 by placing Pay Item for Embankment.
and compacting where necessary a leveling course comprising the
material of the pavement course to be placed immediately above. 105.5 Basis of Payment

Where the new pavement is to be constructed immediately over The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section
an existing asphalt concrete pavement or gravel surface pavement and if 105.4, shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit price for Pay Item
so specified in the Contract the pavement shall be scarified, thoroughly listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities which price and
loosened, reshaped and recompacted in accordance with Subsection payment shall be full compensation for the placing or removal and
104.3.3. The resulting subgrade level shall conform to the allowable disposal of all materials including all labor, equipment, tools and
tolerances of Subsection 105.3.2. incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.

105.3.7 Protection of Completed Work Payment will be made under:

The Contractor shall be required to protect and maintain at his

own expense the entire work within the limits of his Contract in good Pay Item Number Description Unit of
condition satisfactory to the Engineer from the time he first started work Measurement
until all work shall have been completed. Maintenance shall include 105 (1) Subgrade Preparation Square Meter
repairing and recompacting ruts, ridges, soft spots and deteriorated (Common Material)
sections of the subgrade caused by the traffic of the Contractor’s 105 (2) Subgrade Preparation Square Meter
vehicle/equipment or that of the public. (Existing Pavement)
105 (3) Subgrade Preparation Square Meter
105.3.8 Templates and Straight-edges (Unsuitable Material)

The Contractor shall provide for use of the Engineer, approved

templates and straight-edges in sufficient number to check the accuracy ITEM 106 – COMPACTION EQUIPMENT AND DENSITY CONTROL
of the work, as provided in this Specification. STRIPS

105.4 Method of Measurement 106.1 Description

105.4.1 Measurement of Items for payment shall be provided When specified, this procedure will be used to determine density
only for: requirements of selected embankments, subgrade, bases, and
bituminous concrete. The procedure will consist of control strip
1. The compaction of existing ground below subgrade level in construction to establish target densities for the specified course plus use
cuts of common material as specified in Subsection 105.3.3. of sand-cone method of density testing equipment to determine in-place
densities obtained during the construction process.
2. The breaking up or scarifying, loosening, reshaping and
recompacting of existing pavement as specified in Subsection 106.2 Construction Requirements
105.3.6. The quantity to be paid for shall be the area of the
work specified to be carried out and accepted by the 106.2.1 Compaction Equipment
Engineer.

23
 Compaction equipment shall be capable of obtaining compaction remainder of the course represented by the control strip. The underlying
requirements without detrimentally affecting the compacted material. The grade or pavement structure upon which a control strip is to be
equipment shall be modern, efficient compacting units approved by the constructed shall have the prior approval of the Engineer.
Engineer. The compacting units may be of any type, provided they are
capable of compacting each lift of material as specified and meet the The equipment used in the construction of the control strip shall
minimum requirements as contained herein. Minimum requirements for be approved by the Engineer and shall be of the same type and mass to
rollers are as follows: be used on the remainder of the course represented by the control strip.

1. Sheepsfoot, tamping or grid rollers shall be capable of Compaction of control strips shall commence immediately after
exerting a force of 45 Newton per millimeter (250 pounds per the course has been placed to the specified thickness, and shall be
inch) of length of roller drum. continuous and uniform over the entire surface. Compaction of the
control strip shall be continued until no discernible increase in density can
2. Steel-wheel rollers other than vibratory shall be capable of be obtained by additional compactive effort.
exerting a force of not less than 45 Newton per millimeter of
width of the compression roll or rolls. Upon completion of the compaction, the mean density of the
control strip will be determined by averaging the results of ten in-place
3. Vibratory steel-wheel rollers shall have a minimum mass of 6 density tests taken at randomly selected sites within the control strip.
tonnes. The compactor shall be equipped with amplitude The mean density of the control strip shall be the target density for the
and frequency controls and specifically designed to compact remainder of the course which it represents.
the material on which it is used.
If the mean density of the control strip is less than 98 percent of
4. Pneumatic-tire rollers shall have smooth tread tires of equal the density of laboratory compacted specimens as determined by testing
size that will provide a uniform compacting pressure for the procedures appropriate for the material being placed, the Engineer may
full width of the roller and capable of exerting a ground order the construction of another control strip.
pressure of at least 550 kpa (80 pounds per square inch).
A new control strip may also be ordered by the Engineer or
5. Heavier compacting unit may be required to achieve the requested by the Contractor when:
specified density of the embankment.
1. A change in the material or job-mix formula, is made.
106.2.2 Construction of Control Strips and Determination of Target
Density 2. Ten days of production have been accepted without
construction of a new control strip.
To determine target density, a control strip shall be constructed at
the beginning of work each course of material to be compacted. Each 3. There is reason to believe that a control strip density is not
control strip, constructed to acceptable density and surface tolerances representative of the material being placed.
shall remain in place and become a section of the completed roadway.
Unacceptable control strip shall be corrected or removed and replaced at 106.3 Method of Measurement
the Contractor’s expense. A control strip shall have an area of
approximately 335 square meters and shall be of the same depth No measurement for payment will be made for this Item.
specified for the construction of the course which it represents.
106.4 Basis of Payment
The materials used in the construction of the control strip shall
conform to the specification requirements. They shall be furnished from Unless otherwise provided, the cost of constructing the control
the same source and shall be of the same type to be used in the strip will be considered incidental to the cost of the work item for which a
24
control strip is required. Payment for the work item shall be deemed to
include compensation for performing the work herein specified and the The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section
furnishing of all materials, labors, tools, equipment and incidentals 107.2, shall be paid for the contract unit price for Overhaul, for the
necessary to construct the density control strip. No payment will be particular Pay Item listed below that is shown on the Bill of Quantities,
made for any material used in the construction of unacceptable control which price and payment shall be full compensation for overhaul,
strip. including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the work prescribed in this Item.

ITEM 107 – OVERHAUL Payment will not be made for overhaul of Borrow, Case 2,
Foundation Fill, bedding materials and material removed in the rounding
107.1 Description of cut slopes when rounding is a separate pay item.

Overhaul shall consist of authorized hauling in excess of the free- When the Bill of Quantities does not show estimated quantities for
haul distance. Free-haul distance is the specified distance that “Overhaul” from the Pay Item listed below, overhaul will not be directly
excavated material shall be hauled without additional compensation. paid for, but will be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the free-haul distance shall be under other contract items.
600 meters.
Payment will be made under:
107.2 Method of Measurement

In determining what constitutes authorized overhaul, it will be Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement
assumed that material taken from excavation will be deposited in Number
embankment after having been hauled the shortest distance.
107 (1) Overhaul Cubic Meter-kilometer
The overhaul distance for material obtained and placed within the 107 (2) Overhaul of Borrow, Cubic Meter-kilometer
roadway limits will be measured along the centerline of the roadway. No Case 1
allowance will be made for transverse or lateral movement to or from the
centerline except materials moved to or from designated areas outside PART D – SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE
the roadway limits; such as Case 1, Borrow Pits, disposal areas, etc. In
such case, measurement shall be along the shortest route determined by ITEM 200 – AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSE
the Engineer to be feasible and satisfactory unless otherwise provided.
200.1 Description
If the Contractor chooses to haul material over some other route,
and such other route is longer, the computation for payment shall be This item shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting an
based on the overhaul distance measured along the route designated by aggregate subbase course on a prepared subgrade in accordance with
the Engineer. this Specification and the lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the
Plans, or as directed by the Engineer.
The number of cubic metre-kilometres of overhaul to be paid for
shall be the number of cubic meters of overhaul material multiplied by the 200.2 Material Requirements
overhaul distance in kilometers. The unit “cubic meter-kilometer” is the
amount of hauling required to move one cubic meter a distance of one Aggregate for subbase shall consist of hard, durable particles or
kilometer beyond the free-haul distance. fragments of crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed or natural gravel
and filler of natural or crushed sand or other finely divided mineral matter.
107.3 Basis of Payment The composite material shall be free from vegetable matter and lumps or
25
balls of clay, and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily required compacted thickness. When more than one layer is required,
to form a firm, stable subbase. each layer shall be shaped and compacted before the succeeding layer is
placed.
The subbase material shall conform to Table 200.1, Grading
Requirements The placing of material shall begin at the point designated by the
Engineer. Placing shall be from vehicles especially equipped to
Table 200.1 – Grading Requirements distribute the material in a continuous uniform layer or windrow. The
layer or windrow shall be of such size that when spread and compacted
Sieve Designation the finished layer be in reasonably close conformity to the nominal
Standard, mm Alternate US Standard Mass Percent thickness shown on the Plans.
Passing
50 2” 100 When hauling is done over previously placed material, hauling
25 1” 55 – 85 equipment shall be dispersed uniformly over the entire surface of the
9.5 3/8” 40 – 75 previously constructed layer, to minimize rutting or uneven compaction.
0.075 No. 200 0 - 12
200.3.3 Spreading and Compacting
The fraction passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be
greater than 0.66 (two thirds) of the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. When uniformly mixed, the mixture shall be spread to the plan
40) sieve. thickness, for compaction.

The fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a Where the required thickness is 150 mm or less, the material may
liquid limit not greater than 35 and plasticity index not greater than 12 as be spread and compacted in one layer. Where the required thickness is
determined by AASHTO T 89 and T 90, respectively. more than 150 mm, the aggregate subbase shall be spread and
compacted in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness, and
The coarse portion, retained on a 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve, shall the maximum compacted thickness of any layer shall not exceed 150 mm.
have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 50 by the Los Angeles All subsequent layers shall be spread and compacted in a similar manner.
Abrasion Tests as determined by AASHTO T 96.
The moisture content of subbase material shall, if necessary, be
The material shall have a soaked CBR value of not less than 25% adjusted prior to compaction by watering with approved sprinklers
as determined by AASHTO T 193. The CBR value shall be obtained at mounted on trucks or by drying out, as required in order to obtain the
the maximum dry density and determined by AASHTO T 180, Method D. required compaction.

200.3 Construction Requirements Immediately following final spreading and smoothening, each
layer shall be compacted to the full width by means of approved
200.3.1 Preparation of Existing Surface compaction equipment. Rolling shall progress gradually from the sides to
the center, parallel to the centerline of the road and shall continue until
The existing surface shall be graded and finished as provided the whole surface has been rolled. Any irregularities or depressions that
under Item 105, Subgrade Preparation, before placing the subbase develop shall be corrected by loosening the material at these places and
material. adding or removing material until surface is smooth and uniform. Along
curbs, headers, and walls, and at all places not accessible to the roller,
200.3.2 Placing the subbase material shall be compacted thoroughly with approved
tampers or compactors.
The aggregate subbase material shall be placed at a uniform
mixture on a prepared subgrade in a quantity which will provide the
26
 If the layer of subbase material, or part thereof, does not conform LEVEL OF SURFACE -20 mm
to the required finish, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make the Permitted SURFACE
necessary corrections. IRREGULARITY 20 mm
Measured by 3-m straight-edge
Compaction of each layer shall continue until a field density of at Permitted variation from design
least 100 percent of the maximum dry density determined in accordance CROSSFALL OR CAMBER ±0.3%
with AASHTO T 180, Method D has been achieved. In-place density Permitted variation from design
determination shall be made in accordance with AASHTO T 191. LONGITUDINAL GRADE over
25 m in length ±0.1%
200.3.4 Trial Sections

Before subbase construction is started, the Contractor shall 200.4 Method of Measurement
spread and compact trial sections as directed by the Engineer. The
purpose of the trial sections is to check the suitability of the materials and Aggregate Subbase Course will be measured by the cubic meter
the efficiency of the equipment and construction method which is (m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume compacted
proposed to be used by the Contractor. Therefore, the Contractor must in-place as shown on the Plans, and accepted in the completed course.
use the same material, equipment and procedures that he proposes to No allowance will be given for materials placed outside the design limits
use for the main work. One trial section of about 500 m2 shall be made shown on the cross-sections. Trial sections shall not be measured
for every type of material and/or construction equipment/procedure separately but shall be included in the quantity of subbase herein
proposed for use. measured.

After final compaction of each trial section, the Contractor shall 200.5 Basis of Payment
carry out such field density tests and other tests required as directed by
the Engineer. The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section
200.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Aggregate Subbase
If a trial section shows that the proposed materials, equipment or Course which price and payment shall be full compensation for
procedures in the Engineer’s opinion are not suitable for subbase, the furnishings and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools
material shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense, and a new trial and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.
section shall be constructed.
Payment will be made under:
If the basic conditions regarding the type of material or procedure
change during the execution of the work, new trial sections shall be
constructed. Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement
Number
200.3.5 Tolerances 200 Aggregate Subbase Cubic Meter
Course
Aggregate subbase shall be spread with equipment that will
provide a uniform layer which when compacted will conform to the
designed level and transverse slopes as shown on the Plans. The ITEM 201 – AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
allowable tolerances shall be as specified hereunder:
201.1 Description
Permitted variation from design ± 20 mm
THICKNESS OF LAYER This Item shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting an
Permitted variation from design +10 mm aggregate base course on a prepared subgrade/subbase in accordance
27
with this Specificaton and the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross- The coarse portion, retained on a 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve shall
sections shown on the Plans, or as established by the Engineer. have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 50 by the Los Angeles
Abrasion test determined by AASHTO T 96.
201.2 Material Requirements
The material passing the 19 mm (3/4 inch) sieve shall have a
Aggregate for base course shall consist of hard, durable particles soaked CBR value of not less than 80% as determined by AASHTO T
or fragments of crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed or natural gravel 193. The CBR value shall be obtained at the maximum dry density
and filler of natural or crushed sand or other finely divided mineral matter. (MDD) as determined by AASHTO T 180, Method D.
The composite material shall be free from vegetable matter and lumps or
balls of clay, and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily If filler, in addition to that naturally present, is necessary for
to form a firm, stable base. meeting the grading requirements or for satisfactory bonding, it shall be
uniformly blended with the base course material on the road or in a
In some areas where the conventional base course materials are pugmill unless otherwise specified or approved. Filler shall be taken from
scarce or non-available, the use of 40% weathered limestone blended sources approved by the Engineer, shall be free from hard lumps and
with 60% crushed stones or gravel shall be allowed, provided that the shall not contain more than 15 percent of material retained on the 4.75
blended materials meet the requirements of this Item. mm (No. 4) sieve.

The base course material shall conform to Table 201.1, 201.3 Construction Requirements
whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities
201.3.1 Preparation of Existing Surface
Table 201.1 – Grading Requirements
Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing The existing surface shall be graded and finished as provided
Standard, Alternate US Grading A Grading B under Item 105, Subgrade Preparation, before placing the base material.
mm Standard
50 2” 100 201.3.2 Placing
37.5 1-1/2” - 100
25.0 1” 60 – 85 - It shall be in accordance with all the requirements of Subsection
19.0 ¾” - 60 – 85 200.3.2, Placing.
12.5 ½” 35 – 65 -
4.75 No. 4 20 – 50 30 – 55 201.3.3 Spreading and Compacting
0.425 No. 40 5 – 20 8 – 25
0.075 No. 200 0 – 12 2 – 14 It shall be in accordance with all the requirements of Subsection
200.3.3, Spreading and Compacting.
The fraction passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be
201.3.4 Trial Sections
greater than 0.66 (two thirds) of the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No.
40) sieve.
Trial sections shall conform in all respects to the requirements
specified in Subsection 200.3.4.
The fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a
liquid limit not greater than 25 and plasticity index not greater than 6 as
201.3.5 Tolerances
determined by AASHTO T 89 and T 90, respectively.
The aggregate base course shall be laid to the designed level
and transverse slopes shown on the Plans. The allowable tolerances
shall be in accordance with following:
28
 This Item shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting
Permitted variation from design ± 10 mm crushed gravel, crushed stone or crushed rock on a prepared
THICKNESS OF LAYER subgrade/subbase in one or more layers in accordance with this
Permitted variation from design + 5 mm Specification and lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-sections
LEVEL OF SURFACE -10 mm shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer.
Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY
Measured by 3-m straight-edge 5 mm 202.2 Material Requirements
Permitted variation from design ± 0.2%
CROSSFALL OR CAMBER 202.2.1 Crushed Aggregate
Permitted variation from design ± 0.1%
LONGITUDINAL GRADE over It shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or
25 m in length gravel crushed to the size and of the quality requirements of this Item. It
shall be clean and free from vegetable matters, lumps or balls of clay and
201.4 Method of Measurement other deleterious substances. The material shall be of such nature that it
can be compacted readily to form a firm, stable base.
Aggregate Base Course will be measured by the cubic meter
(m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume compacted The base material shall conform to the grading requirements of
in-place as shown on the Plans, and accepted in the completed base Table 202.1, whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities.
course. No allowance shall be given for materials placed outside the
design limits shown on the cross-sections. Trial sections shall not be
measured separately but shall be included in the quantity of aggregate
base course.
Table 201.1 – Grading Requirements
201.5 Basis of Payment
Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section Standard, mm Alternate US Grading A Grading B
201.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Aggregate Base Standard
Course which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing 37.5 1-1/2” 100
and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and 25 1” - 100
incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. 19 ¾” 60 – 85 -
12.5 ½” - 60 – 90
Payment will be made under: 4.75 No. 4 30 – 55 35 – 65
0.425 No. 40 8 – 25 10 – 30
0.075 No. 2 - 14 5 – 15
Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement 200
Number
201 Aggregate Base Course Cubic Meter The portion of the material passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve
shall not be greater than 0.66 (two thirds) of the fraction passing the 0.425
mm (No. 40) sieve.
ITEM 202 – CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
The portion of the material passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve
202.1 Description shall have a liquid limit of not more than 25 and a plasticity index of not
more than 6 as determined by AASHTO T 89 and T 90, respectively.

29
 Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement
The coarse aggregate retained on a 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve shall Number
have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 45 by the Los Angeles 202 Crushed Aggregate Cubic Meter
Abrasion Test as determined by AASHTO T 96, and not less than 50 Base Course
mass percent shall have at least one (1) fractured face.

The material passing the 19 mm (3/4 inch) sieve shall have a

minimum soaked CBR-value of 80% tested according to AASHTO T 193. ITEM 203 – LIME STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE COURSE
The CBR-value shall be obtained at the maximum dry density determined
according to AASHTO T 180, Method D. 203.1 Description

If filler, in addition to that naturally present, is necessary for This Item shall consist of a foundation for surface course
meeting the grading requirements or for satisfactory bonding, it shall be composed of soil aggregate, lime and water in proper proportions, road-
uniformly blended with the crushed base course material on the road or in mixed and constructed on a prepared subgrade/subbase in accordance
a pugmill unless otherwise specified or approved. Filler shall be obtained with this Specification and the lines, grades and typical cross-sections
from sources approved by the Engineer, free from hard lumps and not shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer.
contain more than 15 percent of material retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4)
sieve. 203.2 Material Requirements

202.3 Construction Requirements 203.2.1 Soil Aggregate

Same as Subsections 201.3.1 through 201.3.5. It shall consist of any combination of gravel, sand, silt and clay or
other approved combination of materials free from vegetable or other
202.4 Method of Measurement objectionable matter. It may be materials encountered in the
construction site or materials obtained from approved sources. The
Crushed Aggregate Base Course will be measured by the cubic crushed or uncrushed granular material shall consist of hard, durable
meter (m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume stones and rocks, of accepted quality, free from an excess of flat,
compacted in-place as shown on the Plans, and accepted in the elongated, soft or disintegrated pieces or other objectionable matter. It is
completed course. No allowance shall be given for materials placed the intent of this Specification to utilize soils existing on the roadbed if the
outside the design limits shown on the cross-sections. Trial sections quality is satisfactory. If the quality and/or quantity is deficient, the soil
shall not be measured separately but shall be included in the quantity of aggregate shall be obtained wholly or partly from approved outside
crushed aggregate base course. sources.

202.5 Basis of Payment The soil-aggregate shall conform to the grading requirements of
Table 203. 1.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section
202.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Crushed Aggregate Table 203.1 – Grading Requirements
Base Course which price and payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing
and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. Standard, mm Alternate US Grading A Grading B
Standard
Payment will be made under: 50 2” 100 100
4.75 No. 4 45 – 100 55 – 100

30
 2.00 No. 10 37 – 80 45 – 100
0.425 No. 40 15 – 20 25 – 80 CBR Test for Gravelly Soils. The mixture passing the 19 mm
0.075 No. 200 0 – 25 11 – 35 (3/4 inch) sieve shall have a minimum soaked CBR-value of 100% tested
according to AASHTO T 193. The CBR-value shall be obtained at the
The materials passing the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve produced in the maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO T 180, Method
crushing operation of either stone or gravel shall be incorporated in the D.
base material to the extent permitted by the gradation requirements. The
plasticity index shall not be less than 4 nor more than 10. Unconfined Compression Test for Finer Textured Soils. The 7-
day compressive strength of laboratory specimen molded and compacted
The aggregate shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding in accordance with ASTM D 1632 to a density of 100% of maximum dry
50 as determined by AASHTO Method T 96. density determined according to AASHTO T 134, Method B, shall not be
less than 2.1 MPa (300 psi) when tested in accordance with ASTM D
203.2.1.1 New Soil-Aggregate 1633.

It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 203.3 Construction Requirements

203.2.1, Soil Aggregate.
203.3.1 Weather Limitations

203.2.1.2 Salvaged Soil-Aggregate Lime shall not be applied during windy, rainy or impending bad
weather. In the event rain occurs during the operations, work shall be
Where soil-aggregate required is already in place, the Contractor promptly stopped and the entire section shall be reconstructed in
shall not be responsible for its grading or quality except for removal of accordance with this Specification.
oversized materials as directed by the Engineer. In general, salvaged
soil-aggregate to be used for lime stabilized road mix base course will 203.3.2 Construction Equipment
consist of material meeting the requirements given in Subsection 203.2.1,
Soil Aggregate. The equipment to be used by the Contractor shall include
scarifying, pulverizing, mixing, spreading, hauling, watering, finishing and
203.2.2 Hydrated Lime compacting equipment and a slurry lime distributor.

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 701, Construction Distributor equipment shall include a tachometer pressure gauge,
Lime. accurate volume measuring devices or a calibrated tank. It shall be
equipped with a power unit for the pump and full circulation spray bars
203.2.3 Water adjustable laterally and vertically, as well as agitator to prevent setting of
lime solids.
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 714, Water
These equipment shall be on the project site in good condition
203.2.4 Proportioning of Mixture and shall have been approved by the Engineer, both as to type and
condition, and provided with experienced operators before the start of
The amount of lime to be added to the soil-aggregate shall be construction.
from 3 to 12 mass percent of the dry soil. The exact percentage to be
added shall be fixed by the Engineer on the basis of preliminary 203.3.3 Preparation of Soil-Aggregate
laboratory tests and trial mixes of materials furnished.
1. Case 1 (New Soil-Aggregate)
203.2.5 Strength Requirements
31
 When new soil-aggregate is to be used, the existing predetermined transverse and longitudinal intervals or applying bulk lime
roadbed shall be scarified lightly and bladed to uniform from suitably equipped self-unloading trucks. An approved spreader is
grade and to the cross-section shown on the Plans and preferable for uniform distribution.
shall then be rolled or watered and rolled, as directed. If
so ordered by the Engineer, depressions shall first be filled If lime slurry is employed, the preparation facilities should be
and weak portions of the roadbed strengthened with new approved by the Engineer. A typical slurry ratio is 1 tonne lime to 2 cubic
soil-aggregate. At least one day shall then be allowed for metre water. The actual mixing proportion depends upon the percent of
measuring, sampling and testing for approval of quantity lime, specified type of soil and its moisture condition.
and gradation before the windrow is spread for application
of hydrated lime. The slurry is distributed by one or more passes over a measured
area until the specified percentage (based on lime solids content) is
If the surface moisture of the soil-aggregate is more than obtained. To prevent run-off and consequent non-uniformity of lime
2 mass percent of the dry aggregate, the soil aggregate distribution, the slurry is mixed in immediately after each spreading pass.
shall be turned by blades or disc harrows or otherwise
aerated until the moisture content is reduced to 2 percent or 203.3.5 Mixing
less. The soil-aggregate shall then be spread smoothly
and uniformly over half the road or other convenient width After the last lime application and partial mixing, the entire mass
of the surface ready for the application of hydrated lime. of the mixture shall be windrowed on the road surface and then mixed by
blading the mixture from side to side of the road, or by manipulation
2. Case 2 (Salvaged Soil-Aggregate) producing equivalent results, until the whole mass has a uniform color
and the mixture is free from fat or lean spots or balls of unmixed particles.
When material in the existing roadbed is to be used for During the mixing operations, care shall be taken to avoid cutting into the
mixing, the surface shall be scarified lightly and bladed to underlying course. When directed, the mixing process shall be confined
uniform grade and to the cross-section shown on the Plans. to part of the width or area of the road so as to allow traffic to pass.
The reshaped surface shall then be scarified again to the
depth ordered by the Engineer and in such manner as to Should the mixture show an excess, deficiency or uneven
leave a foundation of undisturbed material parallel, both in distribution of lime, the condition shall be corrected by the addition of soil-
profile and cross-section, the proposed finished surface. aggregate or lime as required and then remix. If the mixture contains
The loosened materials shall be bladed aside into a excessive amounts of moisture or volatile matter, as may be encountered
windrow at the side of the road, and the undisturbed in slurry application method, it shall be bladed, aerated or otherwise
material roiled, or watered and rolled, as directed. manipulated until the moisture and volatile content are satisfactory. The
spreading of the mix shall not be done when the surface to be covered is
203.3.4 Application of Lime in an unsatisfactory condition. At the end of each day’s work, or when
the work is interrupted by weather conditions or otherwise, all loose
The hydrated lime shall be uniformly spread at specified percent materials, shall be bladed into a windrow, whether mixing is completed or
using either the dry or slurry (wet) methods. It shall be distributed in not, and shall be retained in a windrow until operations are resumed.
successive applications, in such amount and at such intervals as directed.
The mixing equipment shall follow immediately behind the distributor, When the mixing operations have been satisfactorily completed,
after each application to partially mix the lime with the soil-aggregate. the mixture shall be formed into a windrow of uniform cross-section.

Dry lime should not be spread under windy conditions to avoid 203.3.6 Spreading, Compacting and Finishing
excessive dustings. It shall be applied only to such areas as can be
mixed into the soil-aggregate during the day of application. Dry The material shall be spread by a self-propelled pneumatic-tire
application encompass either spotting bags of lime in equal blade grader or a mechanical spreader of approved type. In spreading
32
from the windrow, care shall be taken to avoid cutting into the underlying 4. Apply on the surface a liquid membrane curing compound
course. of the type and quantity approved by the Engineer.

After the material is spread, the surface shall be rolled. Rolling The Contractor shall be required to maintain at his own expense
shall be parallel to the road center line and shall commence at the outer the entire work within the limits of his Contract in good condition
edges of the road, overlapping the shoulders and progress toward the satisfactory to the Engineer from the time he first started work until all
center, overlapping on successive passes by at least one-half the width of work shall have been completed. Maintenance shall include immediate
the roller, except that on superelevated curves rolling shall progress from repairs of any defects that may occur before and after the lime-stabilized
the lower to the upper edge. Each pass shall terminate at least 910 mm base course has been compacted and finished, which work shall be done
(3 ft) in advance or to the rear of the end of the preceding pass. During by the Contractor at his own expense and repeated as may be necessary
compaction, the surface shall be dragged or bladed as necessary to fill to keep the base continuously intact.
ruts and to remove incipient corrugation or other irregularities. Rolling
shall continue until the surface is of uniform texture and satisfactory 203.3.8 Trial Sections
compaction is obtained. Initial rolling shall be performed with a
pneumatic tire roller and final rolling with a 3-wheel or tandem-type steel Trial sections of the stabilized base shall be constructed at least 2
wheel roller. Rolling shall be discontinued whenever it begins to produce weeks before actual base construction. These shall conform to the
excessive pulverizing of the aggregate or displacement of the mixture. applicable requirements of Subsections 200.3.4, Trial Sections.

When the compacted thickness of the road mix lime stabilized 203.3.9 Tolerances
base course is to be more than 150 mm, the mixture shall be spread from
the windrow and compacted in two (2) approximately equal layers, the The stabilized base course shall be laid to the designed level and
first layer to be bladed and rolled before the second layer is spread. transverse slopes shown on the Plans. The allowable tolerances shall be
in accordance with Subsection 201.3.5, Tolerance.
Compaction shall continue until a field density of not less than
100% of the compacted maximum dry density determined in accordance 203.3.10 Traffic
with AASHTO T 180, Method D has been attained. Field Density test
shall be in accordance with AASHTO T 191. The Contractor will not be permitted to drive heavy equipment
over completed portions prior to the end of five (5) days curing period
203.3.7 Protection, Curing and Maintenance except pneumatic-tired equipment required for constructing adjoining
sections. Turning areas on completed portions of the base shall be
After the lime-stabilized base course has been finished as protected by a layer of stable granular materials of not less than 50 mm of
specified herein, the surface shall be protected against rapid drying for a compacted depth.
period of at least five (5) days by either of the following curing methods:
203.4 Method of Measurement
1. Maintain in a thorough and continuously moist condition by
sprinkling with water. Lime Stabilized Road Mix base Course will be measured by the
cubic meter (m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume
2. Cover the completed surface with a 50 mm layer of earth or compacted in place as shown on the Plans, and accepted in the
sand and maintain in moist condition. completed course. No allowance shall be given for materials placed
outside the design limits shown on the cross-sections. Trial sections
3. Apply on the surface an asphalt membrane of the type and shall not be measured separately but shall be included in the quantity of
quantity approved by the Engineer. lime stabilized road mix base course.

203.5 Basis of Payment

33
 The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section It shall conform to the requirements of Item 714, Water.
203.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Lime Stabilized Road
Mix Base Course which price and payment shall be full compensation for 204.2.4 Proportioning of Mixture
furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools
and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. The amount of cement to be added to the soil-aggregate shall be
from 6 to 10 mass percent of the dry soil. The exact percentage to be
Payment will be made under: added shall be fixed by the Engineer on the basis of preliminary
laboratory tests and trial mixes of the materials furnished by the
Contractor.
Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement
Number 204.2.5 Strength Requirements
203 Lime Stabilized Road Mix Cubic Meter
Base Course, Strength requirements shall conform in all respects to those
(New or Salvaged) specified in Subsection 203.2.5.
Soil-Aggregate
204.3 Construction Requirements

Construction requirements and procedures shall be as prescribed

ITEM 204 – PORTLAND CEMENT STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE under Subsections 203.3.1 through 203.3.10. In all cases, the word
COURSE ”lime” shall be deleted and replaced with “Portland Cement”.

204.1 Description 204.4 Method of Measurement

This Item shall consist of a foundation for surface source Portland Cement Stabilized Road Mix Base Course will be
composed of soil-aggregate, Portland Cement and water in proper measured by the cubic meter (m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be
proportions, road-mixed and constructed on a prepared the design volume compacted in-place as shown on the Plans, and
subgrade/subbase in accordance with this Specification and the lines, accepted in the completed course. No allowance shall be given for
grades and typical cross-sections shown on the Plans or as established materials placed outside the design limits shown on the cross-sections.
by the Engineer. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but shall be included in
the quantity of Portland Cement Stabilized Road Mix Base Course.
204.2 Material Requirements
204.5 Basis of Payment
204.2.1 Soil Aggregate
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed, in Section
It shall conform to the grading and quality requirements of 204.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Portland Cement
Subsection 203.2.1. stabilized Road Mix Base Course which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor,
204.2.2 Portland Cement equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work
prescribed in this Item.
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 700, Hydraulic
Cement. Payment will be made under:

204.2.3 Water
34
 Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement Strength requirements shall conform in all respects to those
Number specified in Subsection 203.2.5.
204 Portland Cement Stabilized
Road Mix Base Course, 205.3 Construction Requirements

(New or Salvaged) Cubic meter Construction requirements and procedures shall be as prescribed
Soil-Aggregate under Subsections 306.3.1 through 306.3.7. In all cases, the word
“aggregate” shall be deleted and replaced by “soil-aggregate”.

Trial Sections shall conform to the applicable requirements of

Item 205 – ASPHALT STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE COURSE Subsection 200.3.4.

205.1 Description The allowable tolerances shall be in accordance with Subsection

201.3.5.
This Item shall consist of a foundation for surface course,
composed of soil-aggregate and asphaltic material in proper proportions, 205.4 Method of Measurement
road mixed and constructed on a prepared subgrade/subbase in
accordance with this Specification and the lines, grades and typical cross- Asphalt Stabilized Road Mix Base Course will be measured by
sections shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer. the cubic meter (m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design
volume compacted in place as shown on the Plans, accepted in the
205.2 Material Requirements completed course. No allowance shall be given for materials placed
outside the design limits shown on the cross-sections. Trial sections
205.2.1 Soil-Aggregates shall not be measured separately but shall be included in the quantity of
Asphalt stabilized Road Mix Base Course.
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 703,
Aggregates, Gradation A or B shall be used. 205.5 Basis of Payment

205.2.2 Asphaltic Material The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section

205.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Asphalt Stabilized
Asphaltic material shall be Anionic or Cationic Emulsified Asphalt Road Mix Base Course which price and payment shall be full
of the slow setting type meeting the requirements of Item 702, Bituminous compensation for furnishing and placing all materials including all labor,
Materials, Emulsified Asphalt. equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the prescribed
work in this Item.
205.2.3 Proportioning of Mixture
Payment will be made under:
The amount of asphaltic material to be added to the soil-
aggregate shall be from 4 to 7 mass percent of the dry soil-aggregate.
The exact percentage to be used shall be fixed by the Engineer on the Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement
basis of preliminary laboratory tests and trial mixes of the materials Number
furnished by the Contractor. 205 Asphalt Stabilized Road
Mix Base Course, Cubic Meter
205.2.4 Strength Requirements
(New or Salvaged)
Soil-Aggregate
35
 The soil-aggregate to be treated shall be placed in a uniform
windrow and spread to a uniform thickness to the required width. The
specified quantity of Portland Cement shall be applied uniformly in a
ITEM 206 – PORTLAND CEMENT TREATED PLANT MIX BASE trench on top of the windrows or spread uniformly over the soil-aggregate.
COURSE Spread cement that has been lost shall be replaced, without additional
compensation, before mixing is started.
206.1 Description
Mixing shall be accomplished by means of a mixer that will
This Item shall consist of a foundation for surface course thoroughly blend the cement with the soil-aggregate. The mixer shall be
composed of aggregate, Portland Cement and water in proper equipped with a water metering device that will introduce the required
proportions, mixed by a travel plant or in a central plant and spread and quantity of water during the mixing cycle. The cement soil-aggregate
compacted on a prepared subgrade/subbase in one or more layers, in mixture shall be sufficiently blended to prevent the formation of cement
accordance with this Specification and the lines, grades, thickness and balls when water is applied.
typical cross-sections shown on the Plans or as established by the
Engineer. A maximum time of 2 hours shall be permitted for wet mixing,
laydown, and finishing when this method is used.
206.2 Material Requirements
206.3.3 Central Plant Method
Same as Subsections 204.2.1 through 204.2.5
The soil-aggregate shall be proportioned and mixed with cement
206.3 Construction Requirements and water in a central mixing plant. The plant shall be equipped with
feeding and metering devices which will introduce the cement, soil-
206.3.1 Weather Limitations aggregate, and water into the mixer in the quantities specified. Mixing
shall continue until a uniform mixture has been obtained.
Portland Cement shall not be applied during windy, rainy or
impending bad weather. In the event rain occurs, work shall be promptly 206.3.4 Spreading, Compacting and Finishing
stopped and the entire section shall be reconstructed in accordance with
this Specification. The mixture shall be spread on a prepared and moistened
subgrade/subbase in a uniform layer by an approved equipment. Not
206.3.2 Travel Plant Method more than 60 minutes shall elapse between the start of mixing and the
time of starting compaction of the spread mixture.
The salvaged or new soil-aggregate shall be pulverized until at
least 80 mass percent of all material other than stone or gravel will pass a After spreading, the mixture shall be compacted and finished
4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve. conforming to the procedures/requirements specified under Subsection
203.3.6, Spreading, Compacting and Finishing.
Any material retained on a 50 mm (2 inches) sieve and other
unsuitable material shall be removed. If additional material is specified, it The compaction and finishing shall be completed within 2 hours
shall be blended with the existing material. All butt joints at existing of the time water is added to the mixture.
pavements or other structures shall be cleaned prior to mixing.
206.3.5 Protection, Curing and Maintenance
The subgrade/subbase shall support all equipment required in the
construction of the base course. Soft or yielding areas shall be corrected The completed cement treated base shall be cured with a
prior to mixing. bituminous curing seal applied as soon as possible after the completion of
final rolling. The surface shall be kept moist until the seal is applied.
36
 The rate of application shall be between 0.5 L/m2 to 1.00 L/m2 of Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement
surface. The exact rate will be determined by the Engineer. Curing seal Number
will be applied in sufficient quantity to provide a continuous film over the 206 Portland Cement treated
base. The film shall be maintained at least 5 days unless the treated Plant Mix Course, Cubic Meter
base is protected by a subsequent course.
(New or Salvaged)
The Contractor shall be responsible for adequate maintenance of Soil-Aggregate
the base at all times as specified under Subsection 203.3.7, Protection,
Curing and Maintenance.
ITEM 207 – AGGREGATE STOCKPILE
206.3.6 Trial Sections
207.1 Description
Same as Subsection 203.3.8.
This Item shall consist of furnishing and placing aggregate in
206.3.7 Tolerances stockpiles at locations shown on the Plans or as directed and approved
by the Engineer.
Same as Subsection 203.3.9.
207.2 Material Requirements
206.3.8 Traffic
The aggregate shall conform to all requirements of the specified
Same as Subsection 203.3.10. Item No. of the Specifications.

206.4 Method of Measurement It shall be tested for acceptance at the source.

Portland Cement Treated Plant Mix Base Course will be 207.3 Construction Requirements
measured by the cubic meter (m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be
the design volume compacted in-place as shown on the Plans, accepted The stockpile area, as staked by the Engineer, shall be graded,
in the completed course. No allowance shall be given for materials shaped and compacted to a uniform cross-section that will drain
placed outside the design limits shown on the cross-sections. Trial satisfactorily. The entire area shall be compacted with a minimum of
sections shall not be measured separately but shall be included in the three completed passes of the approved equipment.
quantity of Portland Cement Treated Plant Mix Base Course.
The stockpiling and handling of aggregates shall be in
206.5 Basis of Payment accordance with clauses 65 and 66, Part H Control of Materials of the
latest DPWH Standard Specifications, Volume I, Requirements and
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section Conditions of Contract.
206.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Portland Cement
Treated Plant Mix Base Course which price and payment shall be full 207.4 Method of Measurement
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work The quantity of aggregate to be paid for will be the number of
prescribed in this Item. cubic meters as ordered and placed in authorized stockpiles. The
stockpiles shall be measured and computed by the average end-area
Payment will be made under: method. No allowance will be made for settlement or shrinkage.

37
207.5 Basis of Payment Standard
25 1” 100 100 100 100
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 9.5 3/8 50-85 60-100 - -
207.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Aggregate Stockpile, 4.75 No.4 35-65 50-85 55-100 70-100
which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and 2.00 No. 10 25-50 40-70 40-100 55-100
stockpiling the aggregate, including all labor, equipment, tools and 0.425 No.40 15-30 25-45 20-50 30-70
incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. 0.075 No. 200 5-20 5-20 6-20 8-25

Payment will be made under:

The coarse aggregate material retained on the 2.00 mm (No.10)
sieve shall have a mass percent of wear by the Los Angeles Test
Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement (AASHTO T 96) of not more than 45.
Number
207 Aggregate Stockpile Cubic Meter When crushed aggregate is called for in the Bill of Quantities, not
less than fifty (50) mass percent of the particles retained on the 4.75 mm
(No. 4) sieve shall have at least one (1) fractured face.

The fraction passing the 0.075 mm (No.200) sieve shall not be

PART E – SURFACE COURSES greater than two-thirds of the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No.40)
sieve.
ITEM 300 – AGGREGATE SURFACE COURSE
The fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a
300.1 Description liquid limit not greater than 35 and a plasticity index range of 4 to 9, when
tested by AASHTO T 89 and T 90, respectively.
This item shall consist of a wearing or top course composed of
gravel or crushed aggregate and binder material, whichever is called for Materials for gravel surface course and crushed aggregate
in the Bill of Quantities, constructed on a prepared base in accordance surface course shall have a soaked CBR Value of not less than 25% and
with this Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades and typical 80% respectively as determined by AASHTO T 193. The CBR Value shall
cross-sections shown on the Plans. be obtained at the maximum dry density and determined by AASHTO T
180, Method D.
300.2 Material Requirements
300.3 Construction Requirements
The aggregate shall consist of hard, durable particles or
fragments of stone or gravel and sand or other fine mineral particles free 300.3.1 Placing
from vegetable matter and lumps or balls of clay and of such nature that it
can be compacted readily to form a firm, stable layer. It shall conform to Aggregate surface course shall be placed in accordance with the
the grading requirements shown in table 300.1 when tested by AASHTO requirements of Item 201, Aggregate Base Course.
T 11 and T 27.
300.3.2 Compacting Requirements
Table 300.1 – Grading Requirements
Aggregate surface course shall be compacted in accordance with
Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing the requirements of Item 201, Aggregate Base Course.
Standard Alternate Grading Grading Grading Grading
Mm U. S. A B C D 300.3.3 Trial Sections
38
 handling, placing, watering, and rolling all materials, including all labor
Trial sections shall be carried out for aggregate surface course in and equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
accordance with the requirements of Item 201, Aggregate Base Course.
Payment will be made under:
300.3.4 Surface Course Thickness and Tolerances

The aggregate surface course shall be laid to the designed level Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement
and transverse slopes shown on the Plans. The allowable tolerances shall Number
be as specified hereunder: 300 Aggregate Surface Cubic Meter
300 (1) Course compacted in place
Permitted variation from +15 mm Gravel Surface Course
design THICKNESS OF LAYER - 5 mm
Permitted variation from +15 mm 300 (2) Crushed Aggregate
design LEVEL OF SURFACE - 5 mm Surface Course
Permitted SURFACE
IRREGULARITY 5 mm
Measured by 3-m straight-edge ITEM 301 – BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT

Permitted variation from design 301.1 Description

CROSSFALL OR CAMBER +0.2%
This Item shall consist of preparing and treating an aggregate
Permitted variation from design base course with material in accordance with the Plans and
LONGITUDINAL GRADE over Specifications, preparatory to the construction of a bituminous surface
25 m in length +0.1% course.

301.2 Material Requirements

Bituminous material shall be either Rapid Curing (RC) or Medium

300.4 Method of Measurement Curing (MC) Cut-back Asphalt, whichever is called for in the Bill of
Quantities. It shall conform to the requirements of Item 702, Bituminous
Aggregate surface course shall be measured by the cubic metre Materials. The type and grade shall be specified in the Special
(m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of cubic metres of Provisions.
aggregate including all filler, placed, compacted and accepted in the
completed course. No allowance will be given for material placed outside 301.3 Construction Requirements
the design limits shown on the cross-sections. Trial sections shall not be
measured separately but shall be included in the quantities as measured 301.3.1 Surface Condition
above.
Prime coat shall be applied only to surfaces which are dry or
300.5 Basis of Payment slightly moist. No prime coat shall be applied when the weather is foggy
or rainy.
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 300.4
shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Aggregate Surface Course 301.3.2 Equipment
which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing,

39
 The liquid bituminous material shall be sprayed by means of a coat, the surface shall be slightly sprayed with water but not saturated.
pressure distributor of not less than 1000 liters capacity, mounted on Bituminous material shall be applied by means of a pressure distributor at
pneumatic tires of such width and number that the load produced on the the temperature given in Item 702, Bituminous Materials. The rate of
road surface will not exceed 1 kN(100 kgf) per cm width of tire. application of the bituminous material shall be within the range of 1 to 2
litres/m2, the exact rate to be ordered by the Engineer.
The tank shall have a heating device able to heat a complete
charge of bituminous liquid to 1800C. The heating device shall be such The prime coat shall be left undisturbed for a period of at least 24
that overheating will not occur. Consequently, the flames must not hours and shall not be opened to traffic until it has penetrated and cured
directly touch the casing of the tank containing the bituminous liquid. The sufficiently so that it will not be picked up by the wheels of passing
liquid shall be insulated in such a way that the drop in temperature when vehicles. The Contractor shall maintain the prime coat until the next
the tank is filled with bituminous liquid at 1800C and not heated will be course is applied. Care shall be taken that the application of bituminous
less than 20C per hour. A thermometer shall be fixed to the tank in order material is not in excess of the specified amount, any excess shall be
to be able to measure continuously the temperature of the liquid. The blotted with sand or removed as directed by the Engineer. All areas
thermometer shall be placed in such a way that the highest temperature inaccessible to the distributor shall be sprayed manually using the device
in tank is measured. The tank shall be furnished with a calibrated for hand spraying. The surface of structures and trees adjacent to the
dipstick to indicate the contents. The pipes for filling the tank shall be areas being treated shall be protected in such a manner as to prevent
furnished with an easily changeable filter. their being spattered or marred.

The distributor shall be able to vary the spray width of the 301.4 Method of Measurement
bituminous liquid in maximum steps of 100 mm to a total width of 4 m.
The spraying bar shall have nozzles from which the liquid is sprayed fan- Bituminous Prime Coat shall be measured by the tonne (t). The
shaped on the road surface equally distributed over the total spraying quantity to be paid for shall be the number of tonnes of bituminous
width. material applied and accepted in the completed work.

For adding the liquid bituminous material, the distributor shall 301.5 Basis of Payment
have a pump either driven by a separate motor, or with a device to
synchronize its speed with the speed of the distributor. The pump shall The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 301.4,
be furnished with an indicator showing the rate of flow. The suction side shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Prime Coat
of the pump shall have an easily changeable filter. A thermometer shall which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and
be fixed, such that it indicates the temperature of the liquid immediately placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
before it leaves the spraying bar. necessary to complete this Item.

The distributor shall be furnished with a tachometer, indicating its Payment will be made under:
forward speed, which shall be visible from the driver’s seat. The
distributor shall be designed so that the deviation from the prescribed rate Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
of application does not exceed 10% and shall be equipped with a device 301 Bituminous Prime Coat
for hand spraying of the bituminous liquid. 301(1) MC – Cut-back Asphalt tonne
301 (2) RC – Cut-back Asphalt tonne
301.3.3 Application of Bituminous Material

Immediately before applying the prime coat, the full width of ITEM 302 – BITUMINOUS TACK COAT
surface to be treated shall be swept with a power broom and if necessary,
scraped to remove all dirt and other objectionable materials. When 302.1 Description
required by the Engineer, immediately prior to the application of the prime
40
 This Item shall consist of preparing and treating an existing being treated shall be protected in such a manner so as to prevent their
bituminous or cement concrete surface with bituminous material in being spattered or marred.
accordance with the Plans and Specifications, preparatory to the
construction of a bituminous surface course. Traffic shall be kept off the tack coat at all times. The tack coat
shall be sprayed only so far in advance on the surface course as will
302.2 Material Requirements permit it to dry to a “tacky” condition. The Contractor shall maintain the
tack coat until the next course has been applied. Any area that has
Bituminous material shall be either Rapid Curing (RC) Cut-back become fouled by traffic or otherwise, shall be cleaned and resprayed at
or Emulsified Asphalt, whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities. It the Contractor’s expense before the next course is applied.
shall conform to the requirements of Item 702, Bituminous Materials.
The type and grade will be specified in the Special Provisions. 302.4 Method of Measurement

The bituminous tack coat shall be measured by the tonne (t),

302.3 Construction Requirements completed and accepted in-place.

302.3.1 Surface Condition 302.5 Basis of Payment

Tack coat shall be applied only to surfaces which are dry or The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 302.4
slightly moist. No tack coat shall be applied when the weather is foggy or shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Tack Coat which
rainy. price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all
materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary
302.3.2 Equipment to complete this Item.
Payment will be made under:
Equipment shall conform in all respects to Subsection 301.3.2..

302.3.3 Application of Bituminous Material Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

Immediately before applying the tack coat, the full width of the 302 Bituminous Tack Coat
surface to be treated shall be cleaned of loose and foreign materials by 302(1) RC – Cut-back Asphalt Tonne
means of a power broom or power blower, supplemented as necessary 302 (2) Emulsified Asphalt Tonne
by hand sweeping. Where required by the Engineer, immediately prior to ITEM 303 – BITUMINOUS SEAL COAT
the application of the tack coat, the surface shall be lightly sprayed with
water but not saturated. Bituminous material shall be applied by means 303.1 Description
of a pressure distributor at the temperature given in Item 702, Bituminous
Materials, of the particular material being used. The rate of application of This Item shall consist of an application of bituminous material
either the Rapid Curing Cut-back or the Emulsified Asphalt shall be within with or without an application of aggregate on an existing bituminous
the range of 0.2 to 0.7 litre/m2, the exact rate as determined by the surface course in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
Engineer.
303.2 Material Requirements
Care shall be taken that the application of bituminous material is
not in excess of the specified amount; any excess shall be blotted by 303.2.1 Quantities of Materials
sand or removed as directed by the Engineer. All areas inaccessible to
the distributor shall be treated manually using the device for hand
spraying. The surfaces of structures and trees adjacent to the areas
41
 The approximate amounts of materials per square metre for seal 4.75 No. 4 85 – 100 85 – 100 10 – 30
coats of the several types shall be as provided in Table 303.1. The exact 2.36 No. 8 60 – 100 10 – 40 0 – 10
amounts to be used shall be set by the Engineer. 1.18 No. 16 - 0 – 10 0–5
0.300 No. 50 - 0–5 -
Table 303.1 – Quantities of Materials for Seal Coats 0.150 No. 100 0 – 10 - -

Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 The aggregate shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding
40 when tested by AASHTO T 96.
Bituminous material L/m2 0.20 – 0.50 0.50 – 1.00 0.85 – 1.50
When crushed slag is used, it shall be of uniform density and
Cover Aggregate, kg/m2 none 5.00 – 10.00 8.00 – 14.00 quality and shall have a density of not less than 960 kg/m3 (60 lb/cu. ft.)
as determined by AASHTO T 19.

303.2.2 Bituminous Materials 303.3 Construction Requirements

Bituminous material shall be Asphalt Cement, Penetration Grade 303.3.1 Weather and Moisture Conditions
120-150, Rapid Curing (RC) or Medium Curing (MC) Cut-back Asphalt. It
shall conform to the requirements of Item 702, Bituminous Materials, Seal coating shall not be undertaken during foggy or rainy
whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities. The type and grade of weather or when the surface to be treated is wet. Wet cover coat
asphalt cement or cut-back asphalt will be specified in the Special material shall not be used on the work. No seal coating work shall be
Provisions. continued at night unless provided with sufficient lighting. The Engineer
shall always be consulted before the commencement of the work and all
303.2.3 Cover Aggregate work shall be terminated at once in the event of rain.

Cover Aggregate for Type 2 seal coat shall consist of sand and 303.3.2 Preparation of Surface
fine screenings, reasonably free from dirt or other organic matter.
Seal coating operations shall not be started until the bituminous
Aggregate for Type 3 seal coat shall be crushed stone, crushed surface is thoroughly compacted by traffic and rolling. In no event shall
slag or crushed gravel. Only one type of aggregate shall be used in a seal coat be placed on newly constructed or reconditioned surfaces in
project unless alternative types are approved. less than ten (10) days after such surface is laid and opened to traffic,
unless ordered in writing by the Engineer.
Aggregate gradation shall conform with Table 303.2 when tested
by AASHTO T 27. Immediately prior to applying the bituminous material, the surface
shall be cleaned of all dirt, sand, dust and objectionable material. This
Table 303.2 – Grading Requirements cleaning shall be effected by means of a rotary power broom or a power
blower, unless other methods are authorized by the Engineer. Dried mud
or other foreign material which cannot be removed otherwise shall be
Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing removed by hand methods.
Standard Alternate Type 2 Type 3
mm U.S. Grading A Grading B 303.3.3 Application of Bituminous Material
Standard
12.50 ½ in. - - 100 Bituminous material shall be applied by means of a pressure
9.50 3/8 in. 100 100 85 – 100 distributor at the rate of approximately 0.9 to 1.8 litres for asphalt cement
and 1.5 to 3.0 litres for cut-back asphalt, per square metre of surface, in a
42
uniform, unbroken spread over the section to be treated. The pressure 303.3.5 Maintenance
distributor used for applying asphaltic materials shall be equipped with
pneumatic tires and shall be designed and operated so as to distribute the The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the
asphaltic material at the specified rate. It shall be equipped with a fifth surface until the work is accepted by the Engineer. The maintenance
wheel tachometer registering the speed and so located as to be visible to work shall consist of keeping any excess aggregate evenly spread over
the truck driver. The distributor pump shall be equipped with a gauge the asphalt surface by approved sweeping devices. It shall also consist
registering litres per minute passing through the nozzles and readily of keeping all potholes or failures which may occur, repaired by use of
visible to the operator. Other suitable measuring devices approved by additional asphalt and necessary aggregate. All fat or bleeding surfaces
the Engineer may be used. The exact quantity to be applied shall be shall be covered with approved cover aggregate so that the asphalt will
determined by the Engineer. The temperature at the time of application not adhere to, or be picked up by the wheels of vehicles.
shall be within the range of temperature specified under Item 702,
Bituminous Materials. Care shall be taken that the application of 303.4 Method of Measurement
bituminous material at the junction of spreads is not in excess of the
specified quantities. Any excess shall be removed from the surface by a The quantities of bituminous material and cover aggregate shall
squeegee. If necessary, to obtain proper junction of spreads, a strip of be measured by the tonne (t), calculated by the actual rate of application
manila paper approximately 1 metre wide and at least as long as the approved by the Engineer.
spray bar shall be used at the beginning and end of each spread. The
paper shall be removed after use. 303.5 Basis of Payment

Any skipped areas or recognized deficiencies shall be corrected The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section
immediately by hand application and hand operated pressure devices or 303.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Seal Coat,
by other equally suitable means. which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
In the event that any structure becomes discolored with necessary to complete this Item.
bituminous material, the Contractor, at his own expense, shall remove the
discoloration to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Payment will be made under:

303.3.4 Application of the Cover Aggregate

Pay Item Number Description Unit of
Immediately after the application of asphalt, the cover aggregate Measurement
shall be evenly spread over the surface at the rate of approximately 0.004 303 Bituminous Seal Coat
to 0.007 cubic metre per square metre. The exact quantity shall be as 303 (1) Cover Aggregate, Type Tonne
directed by the Engineer. Spreading shall be accomplished by aggregate ___
spreader only so that an even and accurate distribution is obtained. The 303 (2) MC ___ Cut-back Tonne
use of spreader boards attached to tail gates of trucks shall not be Asphalt
permitted. The tires of the aggregate trucks shall at no time come in 303 (3) RC ___ Cut-back Tonne
contact with the uncovered and newly applied asphalt. Asphalt
303 (4) Asphalt Cement Pen. Tonne
As soon as the cover aggregate has been spread, the surface Gr.
shall be broomed lightly with approved push or drag broom to insure an
even distribution, and shall then be rolled with an approved power roller
weighing not less than 5, nor more than 6 tonnes to a uniform surface. ITEM 304 – BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT

304.1 Description
43
 Grading B, kg/m2 11.0 – 14.0
This Item shall consist of either a single application of bituminous Second Course:
material followed by a single spreading of aggregate (single surface Apply bituminous material, L/m2 2.3 – 2.7 AC
treatment) or two applications of bituminous material each followed by a 2.8 – 3.5 MC
spreading of aggregate (double surface treatment) in accordance with the Spread Aggregate:
Plans and Specifications. Grading C, kg/m2 11.0 – 14.0

304.2 Material Requirements

Tabel 304.2 – Quantities of Materials and Sequence of Operations
304.2.1 Quantities of Materials Using Emulsified Asphalt

The approximate amounts of materials per square metre and Aggregate Grading and Single Double
sequence of operations for single and double surface treatment shall be Sequence of Operations S.T. S.T.
as provided in Table 304.1 and Table 304.2, whichever is called for in the
Bill of Quantities. First Course:
Apply bituminous material, 0.9 – 1.6 1.4 – 2.0
The quantities given in the Tables are those of aggregates having L/m2
a bulk specific gravity of 2.65 as determined by AASHTO T 84 and T 85.
Proportionate corrections will be made when the aggregate furnished on Spread Aggregate:
the job has a bulk specific gravity above 2.75 or below 2.55. In such Grading A, kg/m2 14.0 – 19.0
case, the corrected amount will be the product of the quantity shown in Grading B, kg/m2 11.0 – 14.0
the tables and the ratio of the bulk specific gravity of aggregate to 2.65.
Second Course:
The amounts given in the Tables are approximate and the exact Apply bituminous material, 2.1 – 3.0
amounts will be set by the Engineer. Total amount of bituminous L/m2
material per square metre may be varied by the Engineer as necessary to
fit conditions, but the total amount of aggregate per square metre, after Spread Aggregate:
adjusting for specific gravity will not be changed.
Grading C, kg/m2 5.0 – 8.0

304.2.2 Bituminous Materials

Bituminous materials shall be either CRS-1 (Cationic Rapid

Tabel 304.1 – Quantities of Materials and Sequence of Operations
Setting), CRS-2 (Cationic Rapid Setting), RS-1 (Rapid Setting), RS-2
Using Cut-Back Asphalt or Asphalt Cement
(Rapid Setting), AC 120-150 (Asphalt cement), MC 250-800 (Medium
Curing), whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities. It shall conform
Aggregate Grading and Single Double to the requirements of Item 702, Bituminous Materials, Penetration
Sequence of Operations S.T. S.T.
Grade No. of asphalt cement, the type and grade of cut-back and
emulsified asphalt will be specified in the Special Provisions.
First Course:
Apply bituminous material, L/m2 0.7 – 1.1 AC 1.6 – 2.0 AC 304.2.3 Aggregates
0.9 – 1.5 MC 1.8 – 2.3 MC
Spread Aggregate:
Grading A, kg/m2 22.0 – 27.0
44
 The aggregates shall be crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed absorbency of the aggregate, the weather condition and the traffic. The
gravel. Only one type of aggregate shall be used in a project unless actual quantities to be used for surface treatment shall be determined by
alternative types are approved. The gradation shall conform to Table the Contractor in accordance with the design methods for one-size
304.3. aggregate given in the Asphalt Institute Manual (MS-13), Asphalt Surface
Treatment. The proposed design shall be subject to the approval of the
Table 304.3 – Aggregate Grading Requirements Engineer.

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a certified vendor’s
Standard Alternative Grading A Grading B Grading C certificate in duplicate immediately upon delivery of asphaltic material to
mm U.S. the Site.
Standard
25.0 1” 100 - - The Contractor shall provide weighing equipment on the Site to
19.0 ¾” 90 – 100 - - control the application of aggregates. The weighing equipment shall have
12.5 ½” 20 – 55 100 - an approved multiple beam type scale with indicator and other necessary
9.5 3/8” 0 – 15 85 – 100 100 dials for accurately weighing the aggregate. The scale shall be protected
4.75 No. 4 0–5 10 – 30 85 – 100 by a weather-proof house with a floor area not less than 10 m2. The
2.36 No. 8 - 0 – 10 10 – 40 Contractor shall at his own expense have the scale tested and approved
1.18 No. 16 - 0–5 0 – 10 by the Department of Public Works and Highways.
0.300 No. 50 - - 0–5
304.3.2 Equipment
The aggregate shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding
40 when tested by AASHTO T 96.
Equipment for applying the bituminous material shall conform to
the requirements of Subsection 301.3.2, Equipment of Item 301,
When crushed gravel is used, not less than 50 mass percent of
Bituminous Prime Coat. A mechanical spreader shall be used for
the particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have at least
spreading the aggregates. It shall be capable of spreading the aggregate
one fractured face.
uniformly over the full width of the area being treated and shall have
controls to regulate the feed gates, the feed roll, the auger and the truck
When crushed slag is used, it must be of uniform density and
hatch. The equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
quality and shall have a density not less than 960 kg/m3 (60 lb/cu.ft.) as
determined by AASHTO T 19.
304.3.3 Application of Bituminous Material

The application of bituminous material shall be done when the

weather is warm and dry.

The required asphaltic material shall be applied to the surface at

least twenty four (24) hours after it has been prime coated.
304.3 Construction Requirements
Prior to applying the aphaltic material, dirt and other objectionable
304.3.1 Rates of Application/Spreading of Asphalt and Aggregate
material shall be removed from the surface. If so directed by the
Engineer, the surface shall be cleaned by power broom until all dust and
The rates of application/spreading of asphalt and aggregate shall
loose materials are removed. Asphaltic material shall be applied on a dry
be within the range in Table 304.1 and 304.2 respectively. These
surface whenever cut-back or asphalt cement is used; moist surface
quantities are given as guide only and will vary considerably according to
when emulsified asphalt is used.
the type and condition of the surface, the grading, type, shape and

45
 Spraying shall not be done unless the road temperature has been
above 200C for at least one hour prior to the commencement of spraying 304.5 Basis of Payment
operations, and the temperature shall not be less than 200C during the
spraying. The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section
304.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Surface
The application temperature for asphalt cement shall be within Treatment, which price and payment shall be full compensation for
the range that produces a viscosity of 10 to 60 second Saybolt Furol and furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools and
for cut-back asphalt shall be within the range given in Item 702, incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Bituminous Material. The temperature shall be such that no fogging
occurs. Payment will be made under:

304.3.4 Spreading of Aggregate

Pay Item Description Unit of
Immediately after applying the asphaltic material, dry aggregate Number Measurement
shall be uniformly and evenly distributed over the treated surface from an 304 Bituminous Surface Tonne
approved mechanical aggregate spreader. The truck carrying the Treatment
aggregate shall move backward as it spreads the aggregate so as to 304 (1) Aggregate Grading Tonne
prevent the tires of the truck and the mechanical aggregate spreader from 304 (2) Asphalt Cement Pen. Tonne
driving directly on the newly sprayed asphalt. Grade
304 (3) RC ___ Cut-back Asphalt Tonne
No portion of the sprayed surface shall remain uncovered for a 304 (4) MC ___ Cut-back Asphalt Tonne
period in excess of 2 minutes. Immediately after spreading the 304 (5) Emulsified Asphalt Tonne
aggregate, the treated surface shall be rolled with an approved
pneumatic-tire roller. ITEM 305 – BITUMINOUS PENETRATION MACADAM PAVEMENT
Where asphaltic material is exposed during rolling, the area shall 305.1 Description
be covered with additional aggregate and further rolled until an even
surface results. This Item shall consist of furnishing and placing one or more
courses of graded aggregate and one or more application of bituminous
304.3.5 Control of Traffic material, followed by a seal coat with cover aggregate constructed on a
prepared base in accordance with this Specifications and in conformity
The Contractor shall take all steps necessary to control traffic with the lines, grades and typical cross-sections shown on the Plans.
over newly-laid bituminous surface treatment so that the surface is not
damaged in any way. Traffic shall be prohibited from traveling at speeds 305.2 Material Requirements
in excess of 40 km/h until the asphaltic material has set. The Contractor
shall ensure that no vehicles, including those delivering aggregates, shall 305.2.1 Quantities of Materials
be permitted to turn around on newly-laid material.
The approximate amounts of materials per square metre and
304.4 Method of Measurement sequence of operations shall be provided in Table 305.1, whichever is
called for in the Bill of quantities.
Bituminous material and aggregate for Bituminous Surface
Treatment will be measured by the tonne (t). The quantity to be paid for The weights given in the Table are those of aggregates having a
shall be the number of tonnes of bituminous material and aggregate used bulk specific gravity of 2.65 as determined by AASHTO T 84 and T 85.
and accepted in the completed work.
46
Proportionate corrections will be made when the aggregates furnished on 305.2.2 Bituminous Material
the job have a bulk specific gravity above 2.75 or below 2.55. In such
case, the corrected amount will be the product of the weight given in the The bituminous material shall be either Asphalt Cement, Rapid
Table and the ratio of the bulk specific gravity of the aggregate to 2.65. Curing (RC), Cut-back Asphalt or Emulsified Asphalt, whichever is called
for in the Bill of Quantities. It shall conform to the requirements of Item
The amounts in the Table are approximate and the exact quantity 702, Bituminous Materials. The Penetration Grade Number of asphalt
will be set by the Engineer. Total amount of bituminous material per cement and type and/or grade of cut-back or emulsified asphalt will be
square metre may be varied by the Engineer as necessary to fit specified in the Special Provisions.
conditions, but the total amount of aggregate per square metre, after
adjusting for specific gravity will not be changed. 305.2.3 Aggregate
The coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone, crushed slag or
Table 305.1 – Quantities of Materials and Sequence of crushed gravel. The choker material, key rock, and cover aggregate
Operations shall be crushed or broken stone, crushed gravel, or crushed boulders or
screened gravel or coarse sand. All aggregate shall consist of clean,
Type of Bituminous Material tough, durable fragments, free from excess of flat, soft or disintegrated
Type of Aggregate and Asphalt Emulsified pieces and free from stone coated with dirt or other objectionable matter
Cement which will prevent adherence of the asphalt to the aggregate. Natural
Sequence of Operations or Rapid Asphalt gravel may be used for cover material. Gradation shall conform to Table
Curing 305.2.
(RC)
First Layer: Table 305.2 – Aggregate Grading Requirements
Spread Aggregates:
Coarse Aggregate, kg/m2 90 90 Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing
Choker Aggregate, kg/m2 - 10 Standard Alternate Coarse Choker Key Cover
Apply bituminous material, L/m2 4.0 5.5 Mm U.S. Aggregate Aggregate Aggregate Aggregate
Standard
Second Layer: 63 2 – 1/2” 100 - - -
Spread Aggregate: 50 2” 90 – 100 - - -
Key Aggregate, kg/m2 13 10 37.5 1 – 1/2” 35 – 70 - - -
Apply bituminous material, L/m2 1.8 3.5 25 1” 0 – 15 - 100 -
19 ¾” - 100 90 – 100 -
Third Layer: 12.5 ½” 0–5 90 – 100 20 – 55 100
Spread Aggregate: 9.5 3/8” - 40 – 70 0 – 15 85 – 100
Key Aggregate, kg/m2 11 8 4.75 No. 4 - 0 – 15 0–5 10 – 30
Apply bituminous material, L/m2 1.4 2 2.36 No. 8 - 0–5 - 0 – 10
1.18 No. 16 - - - 0–5
Fourth Layer:
Spread Aggregate: The aggregate shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding
Cover Aggregate, kg/m2 8 8 40 when tested by AASHTO T 96.
Total Quantities:
Bituminous Material, L/m2 7.2 11 When the crushed gravel is subjected to five cycles of the sodium
sulfate soundness test (AASHTO T 104), the weighted loss shall not
Aggregate, kg/m2 122 126
exceed 12 mass percent.

47
 305.3.4 Spreading and Compacting of Aggregate Layers
When crushed slag is used, it must be of uniform density and
quality and shall have a density not less than 1120 kg/m3 (70 lb/cu. ft.) as The number of layers in which the macadam pavement is to be
determined by AASHTO T 19. constructed and the order and rates the bituminous material and mineral
aggregates are to be spread shall be as indicated in Table 305.1.
305.3 Construction Requirements
The type of aggregate required in the order of spreading shall be
305.3.1 Weather Limitations placed in the required amount of approved aggregate spreaders, or by
other approved mechanical methods. All areas with non-uniformly
Application of bituminous material shall be made only when the graded aggregate shall be removed and replaced with suitable materials
aggregate is dry and the atmospheric temperature in the shade is 150C or before the rolling begins. These corrections shall be made by hand
above and when the weather is not foggy or rainy. picking whenever necessary and shall be continued after initial rolling until
the appearance and texture of the aggregate are uniform and all
305.3.2 Equipment irregularities are corrected.

The equipment to be used shall include hand or power operated The aggregate shall be dry-rolled until it is compacted and keyed.
brooms, shovels, rakes, self-powered bituminous material distributors or Rolling shall progress gradually from the sides to the center, parallel with
hand or power-operated spray pumps, broom dragging equipment and the center line of the road and overlapping uniformly each preceding rear
self-powered rollers. A sufficient number of stiff-fiber or steel-bristle push wheel track by one-half the width of such track and shall continue until the
brooms shall be included. Application of the bituminous material by any aggregate does not creep or displace ahead of the rollers.
means other than a pressure spray will not be approved and the
equipment used shall be of such nature that the temperature of Materials which are crushed excessively under the roller or
application of the bituminous material can be accurately controlled within becomes segregated in such a manner as to prevent free and uniform
the limits specified and such that the rates of application can be penetration of the bituminous material shall be removed and replaced with
accurately controlled. suitable aggregate. The compacted aggregate shall have a firm and even
surface.
The rollers shall be self-propelled steel wheel, vibratory or
pneumatic type. The number and weight of rollers shall be sufficient to Dry rolling shall be stopped when the surface of the aggregate
compact the layer to the required condition. will support the distributor and before the voids are closed sufficiently to
prevent the free uniform penetration of the bituminous material.
305.3.3 Conditioning of Existing Base
Along curbs, headers and walls, and at all places not accessible
Before spreading the aggregate, the base shall be cleaned of all to the roller, the aggregate shall be tamped thoroughly with mechanical
loose foreign materials. The existing base shall be swept until the tampers or with
embedded large aggregate is exposed, or in the case of a previously hand tampers. Each hand tamper shall have a mass of not less than 25
constructed asphalt surface, until the surface is free of mud or other kg and a face area of not more than 250 mm by 250 mm.
covering.
Aggregate in any layer that becomes coated or mixed with dirt or
If shown on the Plans and called for in the Bill of Quantities, a clay prior to the application of the bituminous material shall be removed
prime coat shall be applied to the prepared untreated base in accordance and replace with clean aggregates and the area shall be rerolled.
with the Item 301, Bituminous Prime Coat, or in case of previously
constructed asphalt or cement surface tack coat shall be applied in Prior to application of the bituminous material, the surface of the
accordance with Item 302, Bituminous Tack Coat. aggregate layer will be tested by the Engineer using a 3-m straight-edge
at selected locations. The variation of the surface from the testing edge
48
of the straight-edge between any two contacts with the surface shall at no 305 (1) Aggregates Tonne
point exceed 10 mm. All humps or depressions exceeding the specified 305 (2) Asphalt Cement Tonne
tolerances shall be corrected by removing defective work and replacing it 305 (3) RC ___ Cut-back Tonne
with new materials as specified. Asphalt
305 (4) Emulsified Asphalt Tonne
Each layer of aggregate shall be spread so that the bituminous
material is covered before wheels or tracks pass over it. ITEM 306 – BITUMINOUS ROAD MIX SURFACE COURSE

305.3.5 Application of Bituminous Material 306.1 Description

The bituminous material shall be uniformly applied at the rate This Item shall consist of constructing a bituminous road-mix
specified in Table 305.1. Building paper shall be placed over the end of surface course on a prepared base in accordance with these Specification
the previous application and the joining application shall start on the and in conformity with the lines, grades and typical cross-sections shown
building paper. Building paper so used shall be removed and disposed on the Plans, or as established by the Engineer.
off in a satisfactory manner. During the application of the bituminous
material, care shall be taken to prevent spattering of adjacent pavements, 306.2 Material Requirements
structures and trees.
306.2.1 Bituminous Material
The distributors shall not be cleaned or discharged into ditches,
borrow pits or shoulders along the right-of-way. The bituminous material shall be either Rapid Curing (RC) Cut-
back, Medium Curing (MC) Cut-back or Emulsified Asphalt, whichever is
305.4 Method of Measurement called for in the Bill of Quantities. It shall conform to the requirements of
Item 702, Bituminous Material. The type and grade will be specified in
Bituminous Materials, and Aggregate for Bituminous Penetration the Special Provisions.
Macadam Pavement will be measured by the tonne (t). The quantity to
be paid for shall be the number of tonnes of bituminous material and 306.2.2 Aggregate
aggregate used and accepted in the completed work.
The aggregate shall conform to applicable requirements of Item
305.5 Basis of Payment 703, Aggregates. It will be tested for acceptance immediately preceding
addition of bituminous material to the mix. This Acceptance will be based
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section on periodic samples from the windrowed materials after all aggregates
305.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous have been blended for each layer.
Penetration Macadam Pavement, which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor, The aggregate may be new or salvaged from the existing surface.
equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
1. New Aggregate

Payment will be made under: It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item
703, Aggregates.

Pay Item Number Description Unit of 2. Salvaged Aggregate

Measurement
305 Bituminous Penetration Where aggregate required for the road mix surface
Macadam Pavement course is already in place, the Contractor shall not be
49
 responsible for its grading or quality except for removal of Distributor equipment shall include a tachometer pressure gauge,
oversize pieces. In general, salvaged aggregate to be accurate volume measuring devices or a calibrated tank, and a
used for road mix surface course will consist of materials thermometer for measuring temperatures of tank contents. Distributors
meeting the requirements given in Item 703, Aggregates, shall be equipped with a power unit for the pump, and full circulation
for new aggregate or may consist of selected granular spray bars adjustable laterally and vertically.
material for other gradings. Any particles of salvaged
aggregate appearing in the surface at the time of lay-down Travelling or stationary mixing plants or other equipment of
and finishing that will not pass 37.5 mm (1-1/2 inch) sieve proven performance may be used by the Contractor in lieu of the
shall be removed by the Contractor as directed by the specified equipment, if approved by the Engineer.
Engineer.
Rollers shall be self-propelled steel-wheel tandem or 3-wheel
306.2.3 Proportioning of Mixture rollers weighing not less than 8 tonnes each and pneumatic tire rollers
having a total compacting width of not less than 1,520 mm (60 inches)
The proportion of bituminous material on the basis of total dry and the gross mass adjustable within the range of 3,640 to 6,360
aggregate, shall be from 4.5 to 7.0 mass percent when cut-back asphalt is kilograms per metre (200 t0 350 pounds per inch) of compaction width.
used and from 6.0 to 10.0 mass percent when emulsified asphalt is used. The operating mass shall be directed. Tire pressure or contact pressure
The exact percentage to be used shall be fixed by the Engineer in may be specified for pneumatic-tire rollers. All tires on pneumatic rollers
accordance with the job-mix formula and the other quality control shall be equally inflated, exerting equal unit pressure, with a means of
requirements. varying the contact pressure to suit project conditions.

During the mixing operation, one-half to one (0.5 to 1.0) mass 306.3.3 Preparation of Base
percent of hydrated lime, dry aggregate basis, shall be added to the
mixture. The lower percentage limit is applicable to aggregates which 1. Case 1 (New Aggregate)
are predominantly calcareous.
When new aggregate is to be used for the road mix
306.3 Construction Requirements surface course, the existing base shall be scarified lightly and
bladed to uniform grade and to the cross-section shown on
306.3.1 Weather Limitations the Plans and shall then be rolled or watered and rolled, as
directed. If so ordered by the Engineer, depressions shall
The construction of road mix bituminous pavement shall be first be filled and weak portions of the base strengthened with
carried on only when the surface on which the material is to be placed is new aggregate.
dry and when the weather is not foggy or rainy.
2. Case 2 (Salvaged Aggregate)
306.3.2 Construction Equipment
When material in the existing road surface is to be used
The equipment used by the Contractor shall include scarifying, for mixing, the surface shall be scarified lightly and bladed to
mixing, spreading, finishing and compacting equipment; a bituminous uniform grade and to the cross-section shown on the Plans.
distributor; and the equipment for heating bituminous material. The reshaped surface shall then be scarified again to the
depth ordered by the Engineer and in such manner as to
The distributor shall be so designed, equipped, maintained and leave a foundation of undisturbed material parallel, both in
operated that bituminous material at even heat may be applied uniformly profile and cross-section, to the proposed finished surface.
on variable widths of surface up to 4.5 m at readily determined and The loosened materials shall be bladed aside into a windrow
controlled rates from 0.2 to 10 L/m2, with uniform pressure, and with an at the side of the road and the undisturbed material rolled or
allowable variation from any specified rate not to exceed 0.1 L/m2. watered and rolled, as directed.
50
 aggregate particles are coated with bituminous material and the whole
306.3.4 Placing Aggregates mass has a uniform color and the mixture is free from fat or lean spots, or
balls of uncoated particles. During the mixing operations, care shall be
New aggregates, where required, shall be uniformly spread on taken to avoid cutting into the underlying course or contaminating the
the prepared surface by the use of spreader boxes, or other approved mixture with earth or other extraneous matter. When directed, the mixing
mechanical spreading devices. When two or more sizes of aggregates process shall be confined to part of the width or area of the road so as to
are used, each size of aggregate shall be placed in the proper amount to allow traffic to pass.
provide for surfacing of the required width and thickness. The proper
amounts of the separate sizes of aggregate for each course shall be Should the mixture show an excess, deficiency or uneven
blended and shaped into a windrow of uniform cross-section. At least distribution of bituminous material, the condition shall be corrected by the
one day shall be allowed for measuring, sampling and testing for approval addition of aggregate or bituminous material as required and re-mixing.
of quantity and gradation before the windrowed material is spread for If the mixture contains excessive amounts of moisture or volatile matter, it
application of bituminous material. shall be bladed, aerated or otherwise manipulated until the moisture and
volatile content are satisfactory. The spreading of the mix shall not be
If the surface moisture of the aggregate is more than 2 percent of done when the surface to be covered is in an unsatisfactory condition. At
the dry weight of the aggregate, except when the bituminous material is the end of each day’s work, or when the work is interrupted by weather
emulsified asphalt, the aggregate shall be turned by blades or disc conditions or otherwise, all loose materials shall be bladed into a windrow,
harrows or otherwise aerated until the moisture content is reduced to 2 whether mixing is completed or not, and shall be retained in a windrow
percent or less. The aggregate shall then be spread smoothly and until operations are resumed.
uniformly over half the road or other convenient width of the surface ready
for the application of bituminous material, except that when a traveling When the mixing operations have been satisfactorily completed,
mixing plant is used, the aggregate shall be formed into a uniform cross- the mixture shall be formed into a windrow of uniform cross-section.
section.
If the Contractor elects to use traveling or stationary mixing plants
In lieu of aerating and drying the aggregate, the Contractor may in lieu of the specified equipment, the same requirements regarding
use an approved additive, except where emulsified asphalt is used, which residual moisture and evaporation of volatiles given above shall apply.
shall be satisfactorily blended with the bituminous material. The additive
shall permit suitable coating of the wet aggregate and shall prevent the 306.3.7 Spreading, Compacting and Finishing
bituminous coating from stripping in the presence of water.
The material shall be spread by a self-propelled pneumatic-tire
306.3.5 Application of Bituminous Material blade grader or a mechanical spreader of approved type. In spreading
from the windrow, care shall be taken to avoid cutting into the underlying
The bituminous material shall be uniformly distributed in base.
successive application, in such amounts and at such intervals as directed.
The mixing equipment shall follow immediately behind the distributor, After the material is spread, the surface shall be rolled. Rolling
after each application of bituminous material, to partially mix the shall be parallel to the road center line and shall commence at the outer
aggregate and the bituminous material. edges of the road, overlapping the shoulders and progressing towards the
center, overlapping on successive passes by at least one-half the width of
306.3.6 Mixing the roller, except that on superelevated curves, rolling shall progress from
the lower to the upper edge.
After the last application of bituminous material and partial mixing,
the entire mass of bituminous material and aggregate shall be windrowed Each pass shall terminate at least 910 mm (3 ft) in advance or to
on the road surface and then mixed, by blading the mixture from side to the rear of the end of the preceding pass. During compaction, the
side of the road, or by manipulation producing equivalent results, until all surface shall be dragged or bladed as necessary to fill ruts and to remove
51
incipient corrugations or other irregularities. Rolling shall continue until Payment will be made under:
the surfacing is of uniform texture and satisfactory compaction is
obtained. Initial rolling shall be performed with a pneumatic-tire roller and
final rolling with a 3-wheel or tandem type steel wheel roller. Rolling shall Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
be discontinued whenever it begins to produce excessive pulverizing of 306 Bituminous Road Mix
the aggregate or displacement of the mixture. Surface Course
306 (1) Aggregate for Bituminous
When the compacted thickness of the road mix surface is to be Road Mix Surface Course Tonne
more than 50 mm (2 inches), the mixture shall be spread from the 306 (2) Bituminous Material for
windrow and compacted in two layers, the first layer to be bladed and Bituminous Road Mix
rolled before the second layer is spread. Surface Course Tonne

While the surface is being compacted and finished, the

Contractor shall trim the edges neatly to line.
ITEM 307 – BITUMINOUS PLANT-MIX SURFACE COURSE -
306.3.8 Surface Requirements GENERAL

Surface requirements shall be as specified in Subsection 307.1 Description

307.3.11 except that the permissible surface variance will be 10 mm in 3
m (3.8 inch in 10 ft.). This item includes general requirements that are applicable to all
types of bituminous plant mix surface courses irrespective of gradation of
306.4 Method of Measurement aggregate or kind and amount of bituminous material. Derivations from
these general requirements will be indicated in the specific requirements
Bituminous material and aggregate for Bituminous Road Mix for each type.
Surface Course will be measured by the tonne (t). The quantity to be
paid for shall be the number of tonnes of bituminous material and This work shall consist of constructing one or more bituminous
aggregate used and accepted in the completed work. The weight of all bound layers on a prepared foundation in accordance with the
moisture in the aggregate will be deducted from the pay quantity. Specifications and the specific requirements of the type under contract,
and in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades, thickness, and
Due to possible variations in the specific gravity of the typical cross-sections shown on the Plans within the tolerances specified
aggregates, the tonnage used may vary from the proposed quantities. or established by the Engineer.
No adjustment in contract unit price will be made because of such
variation. 307.2 Material Requirements

307.2.1 Composition and Quality of Bituminous Mixture

306.5 Basis of Payment
(Job-Mix Formula). The bituminous mixture shall be composed
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section of aggregate, mineral filler, hydrated lime, and bituminous material.
306.4 shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Road Mix
Surface Course, which price and payment shall be full compensation for At least three weeks prior to production, the Contractor shall
furnishing materials, handling, mixing, hauling, placing, rolling, submit in writing a job-mix formula for each mixture supported by
compacting, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to laboratory test data along with samples and sources of the components
complete this Item. and viscosity-temperature relationships information to the Engineer for
testing and approval.
52
 9.6 MPa (1400 psi), with no appreciable holding time after each
Each job-mix formula submitted shall propose definite single application of the full load.
values for:
307.2.2 Bituminous Material
1. The percentage of aggregate passing each specified sieve
size. The kind of bituminous material to be used will be as called for in
2. The percentage of bituminous material to be added. the Bill of Quantities, while the type and grade will be specified in the
3. The temperature of the mixture delivered on the road. Special Provisions. The grade may be changed one step by the
4. The kind and percentage of additive to be used. Engineer at no change in unit price. It shall conform to the applicable
5. The kind and percentage of mineral filler to be used. requirements of Item 702, Bituminous Materials.

After the job-mix is established, all mixture furnished for the 307.2.3 Aggregates
project shall conform thereto within the following ranges of tolerances:
Aggregates shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item
Passing No. 4 and larger sieves ± 7 703, Aggregates.
percent
Passing No. 8 to No. 100 sieves (inclusive) ± 4
percent 307.2.4 Mineral Filler
Passing No. 200 sieve ± 2
percent It shall conform to the requirements of Item 703 A, Mineral Filler.
Bituminous Material ±
0.4 percent 307.2.5 Hydrated Lime
Temperature of Mixture ± 100C
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 701, Construction
Should a change in source of material be proposed or should a Lime.
job-mix formula prove unsatisfactory, a new job-mix formula shall be
submitted by the Contractor in writing and be approved by the Engineer 307.2.6 Proportioning of Mixture
prior to production.
The proportion of bituminous material, on the basis of total dry
Approval of a new jobmix formula may require laboratory testing aggregate, shall be from 5.0 to 8.0 mass percent. The exact percentage
and verification. to be used shall be fixed by the Engineer in accordance with job-mix
formula and other quality control requirements.
The mixture shall have a minimum compressive strength of 1.4
MPa (200 psi). Hydrated lime shall be added to the mixture during the mixing
operation in the amount of one-half to one (0.5 to 1.0) mass percent, dry
The mixture shall have a mass percent air voids with the range of aggregate basis. The lower percentage limit is applicable to aggregates
3 to 5. which are predominantly calcareous.

The mixture shall also have an index of retained strength of not 307.3 Construction Requirements
less than 70 when tested by AASHTO T 165. For aggregates having
maximum sizes over 25 mm (1 inch), AASHTO T 165 will be modified to 307.3.1 Weather Limitations
use 150 mm x 150 mm ( 6 x 6 inches) cylindrical specimens. The 150 mm
(6 inches cylinders will be compacted by the procedures outlined in
AASHTO T 167 modified to employ 10 repetitions of a molding load of
53
 Bituminous Plant mix shall not be placed on any wet surface, or flame shall be in contact with the tank. The circulating system for the
when weather conditions would prevent the proper handling or finishing of bituminous material shall be designed to assure proper and continuous
the bituminous mixtures. circulation during the operating period. Provision shall be made for
measuring and sampling storage tanks.
307.3.2 Construction Equipment
3. Feeder for Drier. The plant shall be provided with accurate
1. Bituminous Mixing Plant
mechanical means for uniformly feeding the aggregate into
the drier so that uniform production and temperature will be
Sufficient storage space shall be provided for each size of
obtained.
aggregate. The different aggregate sizes shall be kept separated until
they have been delivered to the cold elevator feeding the drier. The
storage yard shall be maintained neat and orderly and the separate 4. Drier. The plant shall include a drier or driers which continuously
stockpiles shall be readily accessible for sampling. agitate during the heating and drying process. For cold-type bituminous
mix, equipment for mechanical cooling of the dried aggregate to the
Plants used for the preparation of bituminous mixtures shall temperature prescribed for cold mixtures shall be provided and shall be
conform to the requirements for all plants under (a) below except that capable of supplying prepared material for the mixer to operate at full
scale requirements shall apply only where weight proportioning is used. capacity.
In addition, batch mixing plants and continuous mixing plants shall
conform to the respective requirements which follow this Subsection.
5. Screens. Plant screens, capable of screening all
a. Requirements for all Plants. aggregate to the specified sizes and proportions and
having normal capacities in excess of the full capacity of
Mixing plants shall be of sufficient capacity and coordinated to the mixer, shall be provided.
adequately handle the proposed bituminous construction.
6. Bins. The plant shall include storage bins of sufficient capacity to
1. Plant Scales. Scales shall be accurate to 0.5 percent of the maximum supply the mixer when it is operating at full capacity. Bins shall be
load that may be required. Poises shall be designed to be locked in any arranged to assure separate and adequate storage of appropriate fractions of
the mineral aggregates. Separate dry storage shall be provided for filler or
position to prevent unauthorized change of position. In lieu of plant and
truck scales, the Contractor may provide an approved automatic printer hydrated lime when used and the plant shall be equipped to feed such
system which will print the weights of the material delivered, provided the material into the mixer. Each bin shall be provided with overflow pipes, of
such size and at such locations as to prevent backing up of material into
system is used in conjunction with an approved automatic batching and
mixing control system. Such weights shall be evidenced by a weight ticket other compartments or bins. Each compartment shall be provided with
for each load. individual outlet gate, constructed so that when closed, there shall be no
leakage. The gates shall cut off quickly and completely. Bins shall be so
constructed that samples can be readily obtained. Bins shall be equipped
Scales shall be inspected and sealed as often as the with adequate tell-tale devices to indicate the position of the aggregates in
Engineer may deem necessary to assure their continued the bins at the lower quarter points.
accuracy. The Contractor shall have on hand not less than
ten 20-kg weights for testing the scales.
7. Bituminous Control Gate. Satisfactory means, either by
2. Equipment for Preparation of Bituminous Material. Tanks for the weighing or metering, shall be provided to obtain the proper
storage of bituminous material shall be equipped with the proper devices to amount of bituminous material in the mix within the
heat and hold the material at the required temperatures. The heating shall be tolerance specified. Means shall be provided for checking
accomplished by steam coils, electricity, or other approved means so that no the quantity or rate of flow of bituminous material into the
mixer.
54
 area. This area shall be kept free from drippings from the
8. Thermometric Equipment. An armored thermometric of mixing platforms.
adequate range in temperature reading shall be fixed in the
bituminous feed line at a suitable location near the charging
valve at the mixer unit.
b. Requirements for Batching Plants
The plant shall also be equipped with either an
approved dial-scale, mercury-actuated thermometer, an 1. Weigh box or hopper. The equipment shall include a
electric pyrometer, or other approved thermometric means for accurately weighing each size of aggregate in a
instrument so placed at the discharge chute of the drier as weight box or hopper suspended on scales and of ample
to register automatically or indicate the temperature of the size to hold a full batch without hand raking or running over.
heated aggregates. The gate shall close tightly so that no material is allowed to
leak into the mixer while a batch is being weighed.
The Engineer may require replacement of any
thermometer by an approved temperature-recording 2. Bituminous Control. The equipment used to measure the
apparatus for better regulation of the temperature of bituminous material shall be accurate to plus or minus 0.5
aggregates. percent. The bituminous material bucket shall be a
nontilting type with a loose sheet metal cover. The length
9. Dust Collector. The plant shall be equipped with a dust of the discharge opening or spray bar shall be less than ¾
collector constructed to waste or return uniformly all or any the length of the mixer and it shall discharge directly into
part of the material to the hot elevator collected as directed. the mixer. The bituminous material bucket, its discharge
valve or valves and spray bar shall be adequately heated.
10. Truck Scales. The bituminous mixture shall be weighed on Steam jackets, if used, shall be efficiently drained and all
approved scales furnished by the Contractor or on public connections shall be so constructed that they will not
scales at the Contractor’s expense. Such scales shall be interfere with the efficient operation of the bituminous
inspected and sealed as often as the Engineer deems scales. The capacity of the bituminous material bucket
necessary to assure their accuracy. (See paragraph I). shall be at least 15 percent in excess of the weight of
bituminous material required in any batch. The plant shall
11. Safety Requirements. Adequate and safe stairways to the have an adequately heated quick-acting, non-drip, charging
mixer platform and sampling points shall be provided, and valve located directly over the bituminous material bucket.
guarded ladders to other plant units shall be placed at all
points where accessibility to plant operations is required. The indicator dial shall have a capacity of at least 15
Accessibility to the top of truck bodies shall be provided by percent in excess of the quantity of bituminous material
a platform or other suitable device to enable the Engineer used in a batch. The controls shall be constructed so that
to obtain sampling and mixture temperature data. A hoist they may be locked at any dial setting and will automatically
or pulley system shall be provided to raise scale calibration reset to that reading after the addition of bituminous
equipment, sampling equipment and other similar material to each batch. The dial shall be in full view of the
equipment from ground to the mixer platform and return. mixer operator. The flow of bituminous material shall be
All gears, pulleys, chains, sprockets, and other dangerous automatically controlled so that it will begin when the dry
moving parts shall be thoroughly guarded and protected. mixing period is over. All of the bituminous material
Ample and unobstructed space shall be provided on the required for one batch shall be discharged in not more than
mixing platform. A clear and unobstructed passage shall 15 seconds after the flow has started. The size and
be maintained at all times in and around the truck loading spacing of the spray bar openings shall provide a uniform
application of bituminous material the full length of the
55
 mixer. The section of the bituminous line between the The plant shall have a feeder mounted under each
charging valve and the spray bar shall be provided with a compartment bin. Each compartment bin shall have an
valve and outlet for checking the meter when a metering accurately controlled individual gate to form an orifice for
device is substituted for a bituminous material bucket. volumetrically measuring the material drawn from each
compartment. The feeding orifice shall be rectangular with
3. Mixer. The batch mixer shall be an approved type capable one dimension adjustable by positive mechanical means
of producing a uniform mixture with the job-mix tolerances. provided with a lock.
If not enclosed, the mixer box shall be equipped with a dust
hood to prevent loss of dust. Indicators shall be provided for each gate to show the
respective gate opening in millimeter.
The clearance of blades from all fixed and moving parts
shall not exceed 25 mm (1 inch) unless the maximum 2. Weight Calibration of Aggregate Feed. The plant shall
diameter of the aggregate in the mix exceed 30 mm (1-1/4 include a means for calibration of gate openings by
inches), in which case the clearance shall not exceed 40 weighing test samples. Provision shall be made so that
mm (1-1/2 inches). materials fed out of individual orifice may be by passed to
individual test boxes. The plant shall be equipped to
4. Control of Mixing Time. The mixer shall be equipped with conveniently handle individual test samples weighing not
an accurate time lock to control the operation of a complete less than 50 kilograms. Accurate scales shall be provided
mixing cycle. It shall lock the weigh box gate after the by the Contractor to weigh such test samples.
charging of the mixer until the closing of the mixer gate at
the completion of the cycle. It shall lock the bituminous 3. Synchronization of Aggregate Feed and Bituminous
material bucket throughout the dry and wet mixing periods. Material Feed. Satisfactory means shall be provided to
The dry mixing period is defined as the interval of time afford positive interlocking control between the flow of
between the opening of the weigh box gate and the start of aggregate from the bins and the flow of bituminous material
introduction of bituminous material. The wet mixing period from the meter or other proportioning device. This control
is the interval of time between the start of introduction of shall be accomplished by interlocking mechanical means
bituminous material and the opening of the mixer gate. or by any other positive method satisfactory to the
Engineer.
The control of the timing shall be flexible and capable of
being set at intervals of 5 seconds or less throughout a total 4. Mixer. The plants shall include a continuous mixer of an
cycle of up to 3 minutes. A mechanical batch counter shall approved type, adequately heated and capable of
be installed as a part of the timing device and shall be so producing a uniform mixture within the job-mix tolerances.
designed as to register only completely mixed batches. It shall be equipped with a discharge hopper with dump
gates which will permit rapid and complete discharge of the
The setting of time interval shall be performed in the mixture. The paddles shall be adjustable for angular
presence and at the direction of the Engineer who shall position on the shafts and reversible to retard the flow of
then lock the case covering the timing device until such the mix. The mixer shall have a manufacturer’s plate
time as a change is to be made in the timing periods. giving the net volumetric contents of the mixer of the
several heights inscribed on a permanent gauge. Charts
c. Requirement for Continuous Mixing Plants shall be provided showing the rate of feed or aggregate per
minute for the aggregate being used.
1. Aggregate Proportioning. The plant shall include means
for accurately proportioning each size of aggregate. 2. Hauling Equipment

56
 Trucks used for hauling bituminous mixtures shall have tight,
clean, smooth metal beds which have been thinly coated with approved The Contractor shall provide and have ready for use at all times
material to prevent the mixture from adhering to the beds. Each truck enough covers, as may be necessary, for use in any emergency such as
shall have a cover of canvass or other suitable material of such size as rain, chilling wind, on unavoidable delay, for the purpose of covering or
to protect the mixture from the weather. When necessary, such that the protecting any material that may have been dumped and not spread.
mixture will be delivered on the road at the specified temperature, truck
beds shall be insulated and covers shall be securely fastened. 4. Rollers

Truck beds shall be drained prior to loading. The equipment shall be of the steel and/or pneumatic tire type
and shall be in good condition, capable of reversing without backlash, and
3. Bituminous Pavers shall be operated at speeds slow enough to avoid displacement of the
bituminous mixture. The number and weight of rollers shall be sufficient
The equipment shall be self-contained, power-propelled units, to compact the mixture to the required density while it is still in a workable
provided with an adjustable activated screed or strike-off assembly, condition. The use of equipment which results in excessive crushing of
heated if necessary, and capable of spreading and finishing courses of the aggregate will not be permitted.
bituminous plant mix material in lane widths applicable to the specified
typical section and thickness shown on the Plans. 307.3.3 Conditioning of Existing Surface

Pavers shall be equipped with a control system capable of Immediately before placing the bituminous mixture, the existing
automatically maintaining the screen elevation as specified herein. The surface shall be cleaned of loose or deleterious material by brooming or
control system shall be automatically actuated from either a reference line other approved means.
or surface through a system of mechanical sensors or sensor directed
mechanisms or devices which will maintain the paver screed at a Contract surface or curb, gutters, manholes and other structures
predetermined transverse slope and at the proper elevation to obtain the shall be painted with a thin, uniform coating of bituminous material prior to
required surface. When directed, the transverse slope control system the bituminous mixture being placed against them.
shall be made inoperative and the screed shall be controlled by sensor
directed automatic mechanisms which will independently control the 307.3.4 Preparation of Bituminous Material
elevation of each end of the screed from reference lines or surface.
The bituminous material shall be heated so as to avoid local
The controls shall be capable of working in connection with any of overheating and provide a continuous supply of the bituminous material to
the following attachments. the mixer at a uniform temperature. The temperature of asphalt cement
delivered to the mixer shall be as required to achieve a kinematic
a. Ski-type device of not less than 9 m (30 feet) in length or as viscosity in the range of 150-300 mm2/s, as determined by AASHTO T
directed by the Engineer. 201. Asphalt cement shall not be used while it is foaming nor shall be
b. Taut stringline (wire) set to grade. heated above 1590C (3200F) at any time after delivery in the project.
c. Short ski or shoe
307.3.5 Preparation of Aggregate
The Contractor shall furnish the long ski, the short ski or shoe and
furnish and install all required stakes and wire for a taut stringline. Aggregates for pug mill mixing shall be heated, dried and
delivered to the mixing unit at a temperature within the range ±170C
Should the automatic control systems become inoperative during (±300F) of the bitumen. Moisture content of the aggregate shall not
the day’s work, the Contractor will be permitted to finish the day’s work exceed one mass percent at the time it is introduced into the mixing unit.
using manual controls, however, work shall not be resumed thereafter Flames used for drying and heating shall be properly adjusted to avoid
until the automatic control system has been made operative. damage to the aggregate and to avoid soot on the aggregate. Moisture
57
content of the mixture from drum dryer plants shall not exceed three (3) Immediately after the mixture has been spread, struck off and
percent of the output, as determined by AASHTO T 110. surface irregularities adjusted, it shall be thoroughly and uniformly
compacted by rollers as specified under paragraph No. 4 of Subsection
307.3.6 Mixing 307.3.2.

The dried aggregates and the bituminous material shall be The surface shall be rolled when the mixture is in proper condition
measured or gauged and introduced into the mixer in the amount and when the rolling does not cause under displacement, cracking and
specified by the job mix formula. shoving. Rolling shall begin at the sides and proceeds longitudinally
parallel toward the road centerline, each trip overlapping ½ the roller
After the required amounts of aggregate and bituminous material width, gradually progressing to the crown of the road. When paving in
have been introduced into the mixer, the material shall be mixed until a echelon or abutting a previously placed lane, the longitudinal joint should
complete and uniform coating of the particles and a thorough distribution be rolled first followed by the regular rolling procedure. On
of the bituminous material throughout the aggregate is secured. superelevated curves, the rolling shall begin at the low side and progress
to the high side overlapping of longitudinal trips parallel to the center line.
307.3.7 Spreading and Finishing
Rollers shall move at a slow but uniform speed with the drive roll
The mixture shall be spread and struck off to the grade and or wheels nearest the paver.. Rolling shall be continued until roller marks
elevation established. Bituminous pavers shall be used to distribute the are eliminated and a minimum of 97 mass percent of the density of the
mixture either over the entire width or over such partial width as may be laboratory compacted specimens prepared in accordance with AASHTO
practicable. T 166 has been obtained.

The longitudinal joint in one layer shall offset that in the layer Any displacement occurring as a result of the reversing of the
immediately below approximately 15 cm (6 inches); however, the joint in direction of a roller, or from other causes, shall be corrected at once by
the top layer shall be at the center line of the pavement if the roadway the use of rakes and addition of fresh mixture when required. Care shall
comprises two (2) lanes, or at lane lines if the roadway is more than two be exercised in rolling not to displace the line and grade of the edges of
(2) lanes, unless otherwise directed. the bituminous mixture.

On areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacle makes the To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the rollers, the wheels shall
use of mechanical spreading and finishing equipment impracticable, the be kept properly moistened with water or water mixed with very small
mixture may be placed and finished by hand tools. quantities of detergent or other approved material. Excess liquid will not
be permitted.
The mixture shall be placed at a temperature not less than 1070C
0
(225 F) as measured in the truck just prior to dumping into the spreader. Along forms, curbs, headers, walls and other places not
accessible to the rollers, the mixture shall be thoroughly compacted with
When tar is used, the mixture shall be placed at between 660C hot hand tampers, smoothing irons or with mechanical tampers.
and 1070C (1500F and 2250F).
307.3.9 Joints
When production of the mixture can be maintained and when
practical, pavers shall be used in echelon to place the wearing course in Placing of the bituminous paving shall be continuous as possible.
adjacent lanes. Rollers shall not pass over the unprotected end of a freshly laid mixture
unless authorized by the Engineer. Transverse joints shall be formed by
307.3.8 Compaction cutting back on the previous run to expose the full depth of the course.
When directed by the Engineer, a brush coat of bituminous material shall

58
be used on contact surfaces of transverse joints before additional mixture
is placed against the previously rolled material. The surface will be checked by the use of a 3-m straight-edge at
sites selected by the Engineer. The straight-edge will be applied at right
307.3.10 Acceptance, Sampling and Testing angles, as well as, parallel to the centerline of the roadbed.

The contractor shall cut full depth samples as directed, from the The variation of the surface from the testing edge of the straight-
finished pavement, for testing. Samples shall be neatly cut by saw or core edge between any two contacts with the surface shall not exceed 6 mm.
drill. Each sample shall be at least 150 mm x 150 mm or 100 mm
diameter full depth. At least one, but not more than three samples shall be Tests will be made immediately after initial compaction and any
taken for each full day’s operation. If no core samples were taken during variations detected shall be corrected by removing or adding materials, as
the day’s operation, core samples shall be taken from the completed may be necessary. Rolling shall then be continued as specified. After
pavement for every 100 L. M. per lane. The contractor shall supply and final rolling, the smoothness of the course shall be checked again and any
furnish new material to backfill boreholes left by the samples taken. area defective in texture or composition shall be corrected, including
removal and replacement of unsatisfactory material at the Contractor’s
No acceptance and final payment shall be made on completed expense as directed by the Engineer.
asphalt pavement unless core test for thickness determination is
conducted, except for Barangay Roads where the implementing office is 307.4 Method of Measurement
allowed to waive such test.
The area to be paid for under this item shall be the number of
The samples obtained will be used to measure the thickness of square meters (m2) of asphalt pavement placed, compacted and
the pavement. The same samples will be used to test the density of the accepted based on the thickness and densities of the cores taken in
compacted pavement by AASHTO T 166. accordance with subsection 307.3.10 (Acceptance, Sampling and
Testing).
The compacted pavement shall have a density equal to, or
greater than 97 mass percent of the density of a laboratory specimen. 307.5 Basis of Payment
The asphalt pavement represented by the cores shall not be accepted if
the deficiency in density is more than 2%. The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 307.4
will be paid for as provided in the respective items for the specified type of
The compacted pavement shall have a thickness tolerances of -5 bituminous plant mix.
mm. Thickness in excess of the specified thickness shall not be ITEM 308 – COLD ASPHALT PLANT- MIX
considered in the payment of asphalt pavement. The asphalt pavement
represented by the individual core shall not be accepted if the deficiency 308.1 Description
in the core thickness as obtained in accordance with ASTM D 3549 is
more than 5 mm. Averaging of the density and thickness of asphalt cores This item shall consist of constructing Bituminous Surface Course
is not permitted. (Asphalt Cold Mix) prepared in central mixing plant, laid cold, on the
prepared base in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with
If the deficiency in the core thickness is more than 5 mm, the lines, grades and typical cross-section shown on the Plans.
additional layer may be permitted in order to meet the designed thickness,
however, the minimum additional asphalt overlay thickness should be 308.2 Material Requirements
dependent on the minimum thickness capacity of asphalt paver but it
should not be less than 50 mm (2 inches) and that proper construction 308.2.1 Composition and Quality of Asphalt Cold Mix (Job-Mix
procedures are followed. Formula)

307.3.11 Surface Tolerances

59
 The asphalt cold mix shall be composed of coarse mineral requirements of AASHTO Specification M82, M140 or M208 (ASTM
aggregates, fine mineral aggregates, mineral fillers and chemically Designation D 2397).
bonding bitumen.
308.2.3 Coarse Aggregates
At least three weeks prior to production, the Contractor shall
submit in writing a job-mix formula for each mixture supported by Coarse Aggregates shall conform to the applicable requirements
laboratory test data along with samples and sources of the components of Item 703 or AASHTO Specification M 79.
and viscosity-temperature relationships information to the Engineer for
testing and approval. 308.2.4 Fine Aggregates

Each job-mix formula submitted shall propose definite single Fine Aggregates shall conform to the applicable requirements of
value for: Item 703, AASHTO Specification M 29 or ASTM D 1073.

1. The percentage of coarse mineral aggregates passing each 308.2.5 Mineral Fillers
specified sieve size.
2. The percentage of fine mineral aggregates passing each It shall conform to the requirements of Item 703A, Mineral Filler
specified sieve size. or ASTM Designation D 242.
3. The percentage of chemically bonding bitumen material to be
added. 308.2.6 Proportioning of Mixture
4. The temperature of the mixture delivered on the prepared base of
the road. The proportioning of Bituminous Material on the basis of total dry
5. The kind and percentage of chemical additive to be used. aggregate shall be from 4.5 to 7.0 mass percent when cut back asphalt is
6. The kind and percentage of mineral filler to be incorporated. used and from 6.0 to 10.0 mass percent when emulsified asphalt is used.
The exact percentage to be used shall be fixed by the Engineer in
Stability Requirements: accordance with the job-mix formula and the other quality control
requirements.
The mixture shall conform to the following:
308.3 Construction Requirements
Test Property Minimum Maximum
308.3.1 Weather Limitations
Stability N (lb) at 22.20C 2224 (500) or 17.7 -
(720F) psi Cold Asphalt Plant Mix shall be placed only when the specified
Percent Stability Loss density can be obtained. The mixture shall not be placed on any wet
After Vacuum Saturation - 50 surface or when weather condition will prevent its proper handling or
and finishing. Asphalt surface mixture shall not be placed when the surface
Immersion temperature of the base course is below 100C (500F).
Aggregate Coating (Percent) 50 -
308.3.2 Preparing Area To Be Paved

308.2.2 Bituminous Material 1. The area to be paved shall be substantially true to line and grade.
It shall have a firm and properly prepared surface before paving
It shall be either Liquid Cut-back Asphalt or Emulsified Asphalt, operations begin. All loose and foreign material shall be removed.
whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities. The type and grade of
asphalt material will be specified by the Engineer and shall comply to the
60
 2. When the compacted subgrade on which the asphalt base is to be
placed loosely bonded, it shall be primed with 0.5 to 1.40 litre/m2 308.3.4 Placing The Mix
or 0.1 to 0.3 gal/yd2 of the type and grade of asphalt priming
material. The asphalt should be entirely absorbed by the base The base course mixture shall be placed in one or more lifts with
course and the prime should be fully set and cured before placing an asphalt paver or spreader to provide a nominal compacted thickness
the surface. of the base course. The surface course mixture shall be placed with an
asphalt paver to provide a nominal compacted thickness of the surface
3. Holes and depressions in existing surfaces shall be repaired by course. The minimum lift thickness shall be at least two times the
removing all loose and defective material to sound pavement and maximum particle size. The maximum lift thickness shall be that which
replacing with an approved asphalt-aggregate patching material. can be demonstrated to be laid in a single lift and compacted to a
The patching mixture shall be compacted to produce a tight required uniform density and smoothness. Placing the mixture shall be a
surface conforming to the adjacent pavement area. continuous operation. If any irregularities occur, they shall be corrected
before final compaction of the mixture.
4. Excess asphalt in patches and joints shall be removed only
through methods approved by the engineer.
308.3.5 Compacting The Mixture
5. Immediately prior to application of the asphalt tack coat all loose
and foreign material shall be removed by sweeping or by blowing, The mix shall be compacted immediately after placing. Initial
or both. rolling with a steel-wheeled tandem or three wheeled roller, vibratory
roller, or a pneumatic-tired roller shall follow the paver as closely as
6. Surfaces of curbs, gutters, vertical faces of existing pavements, possible. If needed, intermediate rolling with a pneumatic-tired roller shall
and all structures to be in actual contact with the asphalt- be done immediately behind the initial rolling. An application of choke
aggregate mixture shall be given a thin, even coating of asphalt aggregate may be necessary to prevent mix pick-up by the pneumatic-
material, type and grade. Care shall be taken to prevent spattering tired roller. Final rolling shall eliminate marks from previous rolling. In
of the asphalt on surfaces that will not be in contact with the areas too small for the roller a vibrating plate compactor or a hand-tamper
asphalt-aggregate mixture. shall be used to achieve thorough compaction.

308.3.3 Preparing The Mixture 308.3.6 Safety

1. The asphalt shall be warmed, if necessary, at the paving plant to a Safety precautions shall be used at all times during the progress
temperature at which it can be applied uniformly to the aggregate. of the work. As appropriate, workmen shall be furnished with hard hats,
safety shoes, respirators, and any other safety apparel that will reduce the
2. When it is necessary to blend aggregates from one or more possibility of injury from accidents. All Occupational Safety and Health
sources to produce the combined gradation, each source or size Act requirements shall be observed.
of aggregate shall stockpiled individually. Aggregate from the
individual stockpiles shall fed through separate bins to cold 308.3.7 Acceptance Requirement
elevator feeders. They shall not be blended in the stockpile.
Divide asphalt mixture production into lots, each lot equal to the
3. Cold aggregates shall be fed carefully to the plant so that mix produced during one day. Determine the target density for each lot
surpluses and shortages will not occur and cause breaks in the by measuring the average density of six laboratory prepared specimens
continuous operation. representing two randomly chosen subsamples from trucks delivering
mixture to the jobsite. The target density should be reported as dry
4. Mixing time shall be the shortest time that will produce a density.
satisfactory mixture.
61
 Determine the compacted density in the field from five 5. Steel-wheeled, pneumatic-tired, or vibratory rollers capacity of
randomly located positions in each lot of the compacted mixture. The attaining the required density and smoothness.
density of freshly compacted material can be determined using a properly
calibrated nuclear density device or other procedure. Density 6. A power broom or a power blower or both.
determinations made after a period of curing may be determined on
samples obtained from compacted material by a suitable core drilling 7. Hand tools necessary to complete the job.
technique. All compacted densities should be converted to dry densities.
It is recommended that the average of five field density determinations Other equipment can be used in addition to the specified equipment
made in each lot be equal to or greater than 97 percent of the average when approved by the Engineer.
density of the six laboratory prepared specimens, and that no individual
determination be lower than 95 percent. 308.5 Sampling

The compacted base and surface shall have an average Sampling of asphalt materials shall be in accordance with the
thicknesses no less than those specified on the plans. Any deficiency in latest revision of AASHTO Designation T40 (ASTM Designation D140).
thickness shall be made up with surface mixture when the surface course Sampling of mineral aggregate shall be in accordance with the latest
is placed. revision of AASHTO designation (ASTM Designation D 75). Sampling of
the asphalt mixture, as required by the Engineer, shall be in accordance
The surface of the completed pavement will be checked with the latest revision of AASHTO Designation 168 (ASTM Designation
longitudinally and transversely for smoothness with a 3 m (!0 ft.) D 979).
straightedge. The surface shall not vary more than 5 mm (0.2 in) in a 3 m
(10 ft.) parallel to the centerline and not more than 8 mm (0.3 in) in 3 m 308.6 Testing
(10 ft.) at right angles to the centerline.
Methods of Testing shall be in accordance with the applicable
AASHTO or ASTM Methods.
308.4 Construction Equipment
308.7 Method of Measurement
308.4.1 Equipment
The bituminous mixture will be measured by square meter (m2).
The equipment shall include: The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of square meters of the
mixture placed and compacted in the accepted pavement. No deduction
1. Asphalt mixing plants designed to produce a uniform mix within will be made for the weight of bituminous material in the mixture.
the job-mix tolerances.
Batch weights will not be permitted as a method of measurement.
2. Self-powered pavers that are capable of spreading the mix to the
thickness and width specified, true to the line, grade and crown 308.8 Basis of Payment
shown on the Plans.
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 308.8,
3. Enough smooth metal-bedded haul trucks, with covers when shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Plant-Mix
required ensure orderly and continuous paving operations. Surface Course, Cold-Laid, which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing all materials, handling, placing, rolling,
4. A pressure distributor that is capable of applying tack coat and compacting, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
prime material uniformly without atomization. complete this Item.

62
 It shall be crushed stone, crushed or natural gravel, slag, sand,
stone or slag screenings, mineral dust, or a combination of these
Payment will be made under: materials. The several aggregate fractions shall be combined in such
proportions that the gradation of the composite aggregate shall conform
to the grading requirements of Table 309.1.
Pay item No. Description Unit of Measurement
The combined aggregate after going through the drier, shall have
308 Bituminous Plant-Mix Square Meter a sand equivalent value of not less than 40.
Surface Course,
Cold-Laid The coarse aggregate shall have a mass percent of wear not
exceeding 40 when tested by AASHTO T 96.

ITEM 309 – BITUMINOUS PLANT-MIX (STOCKPILE MAINTENANCE Slag, if used, shall weigh not less than 1120 kg/m3 (70 lb/cu. ft.).
MIXTURE)
Table 309.1 – Grading Requirements
309.1 Description
Sieve Designation
This Item shall consist of a bituminous stockpile maintenance mixture Standard, mm Alternate U.S. Standard Mass Percent
composed of aggregate, mineral filler, hydrated lime and bituminous Passing
material mixed in a central plant. The mixture is stockpiled for immediate 19.0 ¾ in 100
or future maintenance needs. 12.5 ½ in 80 – 100
9.5 3/8 in 70 – 90
309.2 Material Requirements 4.75 No. 4 50 – 70
2.36 No. 8 35 – 50
309.2.1 Composition and Quality of Bituminous Mixture 0.60 No. 30 18 – 30
0.30 No. 50 15 – 25
Same as Subsection 307.2.1 0.15 No. 100 8 – 15
0.075 No. 200 4 - 10
309.2.2 Bituminous Material
309.2.4 Mineral Filler
The type and grade of bituminous material shall be in accordance
with the following guidelines: It shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Plant
Mix Surface Course – General.
MC - 250 For use within short time after stockpiling.
MC - 800 For immediate use under hot or moderate 309.2.5 Hydrated Lime
weather conditions, or for use within a short
time after stockpiling. It shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Plant
CMS- - Mix can be designed for use within a short time Mix Surface Course – General.
2/2S after stockpiling or for long storage period.
*CMS - Cationic emulsified Asphalt. 309.2.6 Proportioning of Mixture
309.2.3 Aggregate The amount of bituminous material to be added will be from 4 to
10 mass percent of total mix. The exact percentage to be used shall be

63
fixed by the Engineer in accordance with the job-mix formula and other
quality control requirements. Upper limit may be raised when using Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
absorptive aggregate.
309 Bituminous Plant-Mix
During the mixing operation, one-half to one (0.5 to 1.0) mass (Stockpile Maintenance Square Meter
percent of hydrated lime, dry aggregate basis, shall be added to the Mixture)
mixture. The lower percentage limit is applicable to aggregates which
are predominantly calcareous.

309.3 Construction Requirements ITEM 310 – BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE, HOT-LAID

309.3.1 Preparation of Mixture 310.1 Description

The aggregate, mineral filler, and hydrated lime shall be fed into This Item shall consist of constructing a bituminous concrete
the plant in the proportions required to provide a composite aggregate surface course composed of aggregates, mineral filler, and bituminous
meeting the grading requirements. The aggregate shall be free from material mixed in a central plant, constructed and laid hot on the prepared
visible moisture at the time of mixing. The bituminous material shall be base in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with lines,
applied at the rate and temperature specified by the Engineer. Mixing grades, thickness and typical cross-section shown on the Plans.
shall be thorough and shall continue until all aggregate particles are well
coated. 310.2 Material Requirements

309.3.2 Stockpiling 310.2.1 Composition and Quality of Bituminous Mixture (Job-Mix

Formula)
The finished mixture shall be stockpiled on a platform level
storage space. Same as Subsection 307.2.1

309.4 Method of Measurement 310.2.2 Bituminous Material

The area to be paid for under this item shall be the number of It shall be either Medium Curing (MC) Cut-back Asphalt or
square meters (m2) of asphalt pavement placed, compacted and Asphalt Cement, whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities. It shall
accepted based on the thickness and density of the cores taken in conform to the requirements of Item 702, Bituminous Materials. The
accordance with subsection 307.3.10 (Acceptance, Sampling and penetration grade, type and grade of bituminous material shall be
Testing). specified in the Special Provisions.

309.5 Basis of Payment 310.2.3 Aggregates

The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 309.4, Aggregates shall conform to the requirements of Item 307,
will be paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Plant-Mix Bituminous Plant Mix Surface Course-General.
(Stockpile Maintenance Mixture) which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and stockpiling the material including 310.2.4 Mineral Filler
incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Plant
Payment will be made under: Mix Surface Course-General.

64
310.2.5 Hydrated Lime
310 Bituminous
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Concrete
Plant-Mix Surface Course-General. Surface Course,
Hot-Laid Square Meter
310.2.6 Proportioning of Mixtures

The proportion of bituminous material on the basis of total dry ITEM 311 – PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
aggregate shall be from 5.0 to 8.0 mass percent. The exact percentage
to be used shall be fixed by the Engineer in accordance with the job-mix 311.1 Description
formula and the other quality control requirements.
This Item shall consist of pavement of Portland Cement Concrete,
During the mixing operation, one-half to one (0.5 to 1.0) mass with or without reinforcement, constructed on the prepared base in
percent of hydrated lime, dry aggregate basis, shall be added to the accordance with this Specification and in conformity with lines, grades,
mixture. The lower percentage limit is applicable to aggregates which thickness and typical cross-section shown on the Plans.
are predominantly calcareous.
311.2 Material Requirements
310.3 Construction Requirements
311.2.1 Portland Cement
The construction requirements shall be in accordance whenever
applicable, with Section 307.3. It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 700,
Hydraulic Cement. Only Type I Portland Cement shall be used unless
otherwise provided for in the Special Provisions. Different brands or the
310.4 Method of Measurement same brands from different mills shall not be mixed nor shall they be used
alternately unless the mix is approved by the Engineer. However, the
The area to be paid for under this item shall be the number of use of Portland Pozzolan Cement Type IP meeting the requirements of
square meters (m2) of asphalt pavement placed, compacted and AASHTO M 240/ASTM C 695, Specifications for Blended Hydraulic
accepted based on the thickness and density of the cores taken in Cement shall be allowed, provided that trial mixes shall be done and that
accordance with subsection 307.3.10 (Acceptance, Sampling and the mixes meet the concrete strength requirements, the AASHTO/ASTM
Testing). provisions pertinent to the use of Portland Pozzolan Type IP shall be
adopted.
310.5 Basis of Payment
Cement which for any reason, has become partially set or which
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 310.4, contains lumps of caked cement will be rejected. Cement salvaged from
shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Concrete Surface discarded or used bags shall not be used.
Course, Hot-Laid, which price and payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing all materials, handling, mixing, hauling, placing, rolling, Samples of Cement shall be obtained in accordance with
compacting, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to AASHTO T 127.
complete this Item.
311.2.2 Fine Aggregate
Payment will be made under:
It shall consist of natural sand, stone screenings or other inert
materials with similar characteristics, or combinations thereof, having
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement hard, strong and durable particles. Fine aggregate from different sources
65
of supply shall not be mixed or stored in the same pile nor used It shall contain not more than one (1) mass percent of material
alternately in the same class of concrete without the approval of the passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve, not more than 0.25 mass percent
Engineer. of clay lumps, nor more than 3.5 mass percent of soft fragments.

It shall not contain more than three (3) mass percent of material If the coarse aggregate is subjected to five (5) cycles of the
passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200 sieve) by washing nor more than one (1) sodium sulfate soundness test, the weighted loss shall not exceed 12
mass percent each of clay lumps or shale. The use of beach sand will mass percent.
not be allowed without the approval of the Engineer.
It shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 when
If the fine aggregate is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium tested by AASHTO T 96.
sulfate soundness test, the weighted loss shall not exceed 10 mass
percent. If the slag is used, its density shall not be less than 1120 kg/m3
(70 lb./cu. ft.). The gradation of the coarse aggregate shall conform to
The fine aggregate shall be free from injurious amounts of Table 311.2.
organic impurities. If subjected to the colorimatic test for organic
impurities and a color darker than the standard is produced, it shall be Only one grading specification shall be used from any one
rejected. However, when tested for the effect of organic impurities of source.
strength of mortar by AASHTO T 71, the
fine aggregate may be used if the relative strength at 7 and 28 days is not Table 311.2 – Grading Requirement for Coarse Aggregate
less than 95 mass percent.

The fine aggregate shall be well-graded from coarse to fine and Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing
shall conform to Table 311.1 Standard Alternate Grading Grading Grading
Mm U. S. A B C
Table 311.1 – Grading Requirements for Fine Aggregate Standard
75.00 3 in. 100 - -
Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing 63.00 2-1/2 in. 90-100 100 100
9.5 mm (3/8 in) 100 50.00 2 in. - 90-100 95-100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 95 – 100 37.5 1-1/2 in. 25-60 35-70 -
2.36 mm (No. 8) - 25.0 1 in. - 0-15 35-70
1.18 mm (No. 16) 45 – 80 19.0 ¾ in. 0-10 - -
0.600 mm (No. 30) - 12.5 ½ in. 0-5 0-5 10-30
0.300 mm (No. 50) 5 – 30 4.75 No. 4 - - 0-5
0.150 mm (No. 100) 0 – 10
311.2.4 Water

311.2.3 Coarse Aggregate Water used in mixing, curing or other designated application shall
be reasonably clean and free of oil, salt, acid, alkali, grass or other
It shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, blast furnace slag, or substances injurious to the finished product. Water will be tested in
other approved inert materials of similar characteristics, or combinations accordance with and shall meet the requirements of Item 714, Water.
thereof, having hard, strong, durable pieces and free from any adherent Water which is drinkable may be used without test. Where the source of
coatings. water is shallow, the intake shall be so enclosed as to exclude silt, mud,
grass or other foreign materials.

66
 311.2.8 Curing Materials
311.2.5 Reinforcing Steel
Curing materials shall conform to the following requirements as
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing specified;
Steel. Dowels and tie bars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M 31 or M 42, except that rail steel shall not be used for tie bars that are a) Burlap cloth - AASHTO M 182
to be bent and restraightened during construction. Tie bars shall be b) Liquid membrane forming compounds - AASHTO M 148
deformed bars. Dowels shall be plain round bars. Before delivery to the c) Sheeting (film) materials - AASHTO M 171
site of work, one-half of the length of each dowel shall be painted with one
coat of approved lead or tar paint. Cotton mats and water-proof paper can be used.

The sleeves for dowel bars shall be metal of approved design to 311.2.9 Calcium Chloride/Calcium Nitrate
cover 50 mm ( 2 inches), plus or minus 5 mm (1/4 inch) of the dowel, with
a closed end, and with a suitable stop to hold the end of the sleeve at It shall conform to AASHTO M 144, if specified or permitted by
least 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the dowel. Sleeves shall be of such the Engineer, as accelerator.
design that they do not collapse during construction.

311.2.6 Joint Fillers

Poured joint fillers shall be mixed asphalt and mineral or rubber 311.2.10 Storage of Cement and Aggregate
filler conforming to the applicable requirements of Item 705, Joint
Materials. All cement shall be stored, immediately upon delivery at the Site,
in weatherproof building which will protect the cement from dampness.
Preformed joint filler shall conform to the applicable requirements The floor shall be raised from the ground. The buildings shall be placed
of Item 705. It shall be punched to admit the dowels where called for in in locations approved by the Engineer. Provisions for storage shall be
the Plans. The filler for each joint shall be furnished in a single piece for ample, and the shipments of cement as received shall be separately
the full depth and width required for the joint. stored in such a manner as to allow the earliest deliveries to be used first
and to provide easy access for identification and inspection of each
311.2.7 Admixtures shipment. Storage buildings shall have capacity for storage of a
sufficient quantity of cement to allow sampling at least twelve (12) days
Air-entraining admixture shall conform to the requirements of before the cement is to be used. Bulk cement, if used, shall be
AASHTO M 154. transferred to elevated air tight and weatherproof bins. Stored cement
shall meet the test requirements at any time after storage when retest is
Chemical admixtures, if specified or permitted, shall conform to ordered by the Engineer. At the time of use, all cement shall be free-
the requirements of AASHTO M 194. flowing and free of lumps.

Fly Ash, if specified or permitted as a mineral admixture and as The handling and storing of concrete aggregates shall be such as
20% partial replacement of Portland Cement in concrete mix shall to prevent segregation or the inclusion of foreign materials. The
conform to the requirements of ASTM C 618. Engineer may require that aggregates be stored on separate platforms at
satisfactory locations.
Admixture should be added only to the concrete mix to produce In order to secure greater uniformity of concrete mix, the
some desired modifications to the properties of concrete where Engineer may require that the coarse aggregate be separated into two or
necessary, but not as partial replacement of cement. more sizes. Different sizes of aggregate shall be stored in separate bins

67
or in separate stockpiles sufficiently removed from each other to prevent The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality
the material at the edges of the piles from becoming intermixed. control of all materials during the handling, blending, and
mixing and placement operations.
311.2.11 Proportioning, Consistency and Strength of Concrete
2. Quality Control Plan
The Contractor shall prepare the design mix based on the
absolute volume method as outlined in the American Concrete Institute The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a Quality
(ACI) Standard 211.1, “Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions Control Plan detailing his production control procedures
for Normal and Heavyweight Concrete”. and the type and frequency of sampling and testing to
insure that the concrete produces complies with the
It is the intent of this Specification to require at least 364 kg of Specifications. The Engineer shall be provided free
cement per cubic meter of concrete to meet the minimum strength access to recent plant production records, and if requested,
requirements. The Engineer shall determine from laboratory tests of the informational copies of mix design, materials certifications
materials to be used, the cement content and the proportions of and sampling and testing reports.
aggregate and water that will produce workable concrete having a slump
of between 40 and 75 mm (1-1/2 and 3 inches) if not vibrated or between 3. Qualification of Workmen
10 and 40 mm (1/2 and 1-1/2 inches) if vibrated, and a flexural strength of
not less than 3.8 MPa (550 psi) when tested by the third-point method or Experienced and qualified personnel shall perform all
4.5 MPa (650 psi) when tested by the mid-point method at fourteen (14) batching or mixing operation for the concrete mix, and shall
days in accordance with AASHTO T97 and T177, respectively; or a be present at the plant and job site to control the concrete
compressive strength of 24.1 MPa (3500 psi) for cores taken at fourteen productions whenever the plant is in operation. They shall
(14) days and tested in accordance with AASHTO T24. be identified and duties defined as follows:

Slump shall be determined using AASHTO T 119. a. Concrete Batcher. The person performing the
batching or mixing operation shall be capable of
The designer shall consider the use of lean concrete (econocrete) accurately conducting aggregate surface moisture
mixtures using local materials or specifically modified conventional determination and establishing correct scale weights
concrete mixes in base course and in the lower course composite, for concrete materials. He shall be capable of
monolithic concrete pavements using a minimum of 75 mm (3 inches) of assuring that the proportioned batch weights of
conventional concrete as the surface course. materials are in accordance with the mix design.

The mix design shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval b. Concrete Technician. The person responsible for
and shall be accompanied with certified test data from an approved concrete production control and sampling and testing
laboratory demonstrating the adequacy of the mix design. A change in for quality control shall be proficient in concrete
the source of materials during the progress of work may necessitate a technology and shall have a sound knowledge of the
new design mix. Specifications as they relate to concrete production.
He shall be capable of conducting tests on concrete
311.3 Construction Requirements and concrete materials in accordance with these
Specifications. He shall be capable of adjusting
311.3.1 Quality Control of Concrete concrete mix designs for improving workability and
Specification compliance and preparing trial mix
1. General designs. He shall be qualified to act as the concrete
batcher in the batcher’s absence.

68
 4. Quality Control Testing
b. Bins and Hoppers. Bins with adequate separate
The Contractor shall perform all sampling, testing and compartments for fine aggregate and for each size of
inspection necessary to assure quality control of the coarse aggregate shall be provided in the batching
component materials and the concrete. plant.

The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the c. Scales. Scales for weighing aggregates and cement
gradation of fine and coarse aggregates and for testing the shall be of either the beam type or the springless-dial
concrete mixture for slump, air content, water-cement ratio type. They shall be accurate within one-half percent
and temperature. He shall conduct his operations so as to (0.5%) throughout the range of use. Poises shall be
produce a mix conforming to the approved mix design. designed to be locked in any position and to prevent
unauthorized change.
5. Documentation
Scales shall be inspected and sealed as often as the
The Contractor shall maintain adequate records of all Engineer may deem necessary to assure their
inspections and tests. The records shall indicate the continued accuracy.
nature and number of observations made, the number and
type of deficiencies found, the quantities approved and d. Automatic Weighing Devices. Unless otherwise
rejected, and nature of any corrective action taken. allowed on the Contract, batching plants shall be
equipped with automatic weighing devices of an
The Engineer may take independent assurance approved type to proportion aggregates and bulk
samples at random location for acceptance purposes as he cement.
deems necessary.
2. Mixers.
311.3.2 Equipment
a. General. Concrete may be mixed at the Site of
Equipment and tools necessary for handling materials and
construction or at a central plant, or wholly or in part
performing all parts of the work shall be approved by the Engineer as to
in truck mixers. Each mixer shall have a
design, capacity and mechanical condition. The equipment shall be at
manufacturer’s plate attached in a prominent place
the jobsite sufficiently ahead of the start of construction operations to be
showing the capacity of the drum in terms of volume
examined thoroughly and approved.
of mixed concrete and the speed of rotation of the
mixing drum or blades.
1. Batching Plant and Equipment
b. Mixers at Site of Construction. Mixing shall be done
a. General. The batching shall include bins, weighing
in an approved mixer capable of combining the
hoppers, and scales for the fine aggregate and for
aggregates, cement and water into a thoroughly
each size of coarse aggregate. If cement is used in
mixed and uniform mass within the specified mixing
bulk, a bin, a hopper, and separate scale for cement
period and discharging and distributing the mixture
shall be included. The weighing hopper shall be
without segregation on the prepared grade. The
properly sealed and vented to preclude dusting
mixer shall be equipped with an approved timing
operation. The batch plant shall be equipped with a
device which will automatically lock the discharge
suitable non-resettable batch counter which will
lever when the drum has been charged and released
correctly indicate the number of batches
it at the end of the mixing period. In case of failure
proportioned.
69
 of the timing device, the mixer may be used for the
balance of the day while it is being repaired, provided 5. Forms
that each batch is mixed 90 seconds. The mixer
shall be equipped with a suitable nonresettable batch Forms shall be of steel, of an approved section, and of
counter which shall correctly indicate the number of depth equal to the thickness of the pavement at the edge.
the batches mixed. The base of the forms shall be of sufficient width to provide
necessary stability in all directions. The flange braces
c. Truck Mixer and Truck Agitators. Truck mixers used must extend outward on the base to not less than 2/3 the
for mixing and hauling concrete, and truck agitators height of the form.
used for hauling central-mixed concrete, shall
conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 157. All forms shall be rigidly supported on bed of thoroughly
compacted material during the entire operation of placing
d. Non-Agitator Truck. Bodies of non-agitating hauling and finishing the concrete. Forms shall be provided with
equipment for concrete shall be smooth, mortar-tight adequate devices for secure setting so that when in place,
metal containers and shall be capable of discharging they will withstand, without visible spring or settlement, the
the concrete at a satisfactory controlled rate without impact and vibration of the consolidation and finishing or
segregation. paving equipment.

3. Paving and Finishing Equipment 311.3.3 Preparation of Grade

The concrete shall be placed with an approved paver After the subgrade of base has been placed and compacted to
designed to spread, consolidate, screed and float finish the the required density, the areas which will support the paving machine and
freshly placed concrete in one complete pass of the the grade on which the pavement is to be constructed shall be trimmed to
machine in such a manner that a minimum of hand finishing the proper elevation by means of a properly designed machine extending
will be necessary to provide a dense and homogeneous the prepared work areas compacted at least 60 cm beyond each edge of
pavement in conformance with the Plans and the proposed concrete pavement. If loss of density results from the
Specifications. trimming operations, it shall be restored by additional compaction before
concrete is placed. If any traffic is allowed to use the prepared subgrade
The finishing machine shall be equipped with at least or base, the surface shall be checked and corrected immediately ahead of
two (2) oscillating type transverse screed. the placing concrete.

Vibrators shall operate at a frequency of 8,300 to 9,600 The subgrade or base shall be uniformly moist when the concrete
impulses per minute under load at a maximum spacing of is placed.
60 cm.

4. Concrete Saw
311.3.4 Setting Forms
The Contractor shall provide sawing equipment in
adequate number of units and power to complete the 1. Base Support.
sawing with a water-cooled diamond edge saw blade or an
abrasive wheel to the required dimensions and at the The foundation under the forms shall be hard and true to
required rate. He shall provide at least one (1) stand-by grade so that the form when set will be firmly in contact for
saw in good working condition and with an ample supply of its whole length and at the specified grade. (Any roadbed,
saw blades. which at the form line is found below established grade,
70
 shall be filled with approved granular materials to grade in The batch plant site, layout, equipment and provisions for
lifts of three (3) cm or less, and thoroughly rerolled or transporting material shall be such as to assure a continuous supply of
tamped.) Imperfections or variations above grade shall be material to the work.
corrected by tamping or by cutting as necessary. Stockpiles shall be built up in layers of not more than one (1) meter in
thickness. Each layer shall be completely in place before beginning the
2. Form Setting next which shall not be allowed to “cone” down over the next lower layer.
Aggregates from different sources and of different grading shall not be
Forms shall be set sufficiently in advance of the point stockpiled together.
where concrete is being placed. After the forms have been
set to correct grade, the grade shall be thoroughly tamped, All washed aggregates and aggregates produced or handled by
mechanically or by hand, at both the inside and outside hydraulic methods, shall be stockpiled or binned for draining at least
edges of the base of the forms. The forms shall not twelve (12) hours before being batched.
deviate from true line bv more than one (1) cm at any point.
When mixing is done at the side of the work. aggregates shall be
3. Grade and Alignment transported from the batching plant to the mixer in batch boxes, vehicle
bodies, or other containers of adequate capacity and construction to
The alignment and grade elevations of the forms shall properly carry the volume required. Partitions separating batches shall
be checked and corrections made by the Contractor be adequate and effective to prevent spilling from one compartment to
immediately before placing the concrete. Testing as to another while in transit or being dumped. When bulk cement is used, the
crown and elevation, prior to placing of concrete can be Contractor shall use a suitable method of handling the cement from
made by means of holding an approved template in a weighing hopper to transporting container or into the batch itself for
vertical position and moved backward and forward on the transportation to the mixer, with chute, boot or other approved device, to
forms. prevent loss of cement, and to provide positive assurance of the actual
presence in each batch of the entire cement content specified.
When any form has been disturbed or any grade has
become unstable, the form shall be reset and rechecked. Bulk cement shall be transported to the mixer in tight
compartments carrying the full amount of cement required for the batch.
311.3.5 Conditioning of Subgrade or Base Course However, if allowed in the Special Provisions, it may be transported
between the fine and coarse aggregate. When cement is placed in
When side forms have been securely set to grade, the subgrade contact with the aggregates, batches may be rejected unless mixed within
or base course shall be brought to proper cross-section. High areas shall 1-1/2 hours of such contact. Cement in original shipping packages may
be trimmed to proper elevation. Low areas shall be filled and compacted be transported on top of the aggregates, each batch containing the
to a condition similar to that of surrounding grade. The finished grade number of sacks required by the job mix.
shall be maintained in a smooth and compacted condition until the
pavement is placed. The mixer shall be charged without loss of cement. Batching
shall be so conducted as to result in the weight to each material required
Unless waterproof subgrade or base course cover material is within a tolerance of one (1) percent for the cement and two (2) percent
specified, the subgrade or base course shall be uniformly moist when the for aggregates.
concrete is placed. If it subsequently becomes too dry, the subgrade or
base course shall be sprinkled, but the method of sprinkling shall not be Water may be measured either by volume or by weight. The
such as to form mud or pools of water. accuracy of measuring the water shall be within a range of error of not
over than one (1) percent. Unless the water is to be weighed, the water-
311.3.6 Handling, Measuring and Batching Materials measuring equipment shall include an auxiliary tank from which the
measuring tank shall be equipped with an outside tap and valve to
71
provide checking the setting, unless other means are provided for readily The batches shall be so charged into the drum that a portion of
and accurately determining the amount of water in the tank. The volume the mixing water shall be entered in advance of the cement and
of the auxiliary tank shall be at least equal to that of the measuring tank. aggregates. The flow of water shall be uniform and all water shall be in
the drum by the end of the first fifteen (15) seconds of the mixing period.
311.3.7 Mixing Concrete The throat of the drum shall be kept free of such accumulations as may
restrict the free flow of materials into the drum.
The concrete may be mixed at the site of the work in a central-
mix plant, or in truck mixers. The mixer shall be of an approved type and Mixed concrete from the central mixing plant shall be transported
capacity. Mixing time will be measured from the time all materials, in truck mixers, truck agitators or non-agitating truck specified in
except water, are in the drum. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and Subsection 311.3.2, Equipment. The time elapsed from the time water is
delivered in accordance with requirements of AASHTO M 157, except that added to the mix until the concrete is deposited in place at the Site shall
the minimum required revolutions at the mixing speed for transit-mixed not exceed forty five (45) minutes when the concrete is hauled in non-
concrete may be reduced to not less than that recommended by the mixer agitating trucks, nor ninety (90) minutes when hauled in truck mixers or
manufacturer. The number of revolutions recommended by the mixer truck agitators, except that in hot weather or under other conditions
manufacturer shall be indicated on the manufacturer’s serial plate contributing to quick hardening of the concrete, the maximum allowable
attached to the mixer. The Contractor shall furnish test data acceptable time may be reduced by the Engineer.
to the Engineer verifying that the make and model of the mixer will
produce uniform concrete conforming to the provision of AASHTO M 157 In exceptional cases and when volumetric measurements are
at the reduced number of revolutions shown on the serial plate. authorized for small project requiring less than 75 cu.m. of concrete per
day of pouring, the weight proportions shall be converted to equivalent
When mixed at the site or in a central mixing plant, the mixing volumetric proportions. In such cases, suitable allowance shall be made
time shall not be less than fifty (50) seconds nor more than ninety (90) for variations in the moisture condition of the aggregates, including the
seconds, unless mixer performance tests prove adequate mixing of the bulking effect in the fine aggregate. Batching and mixing shall be in
concrete is a shorter time period. accordance with ASTM C 685, Section 6 through 9.

Four (4) seconds shall be added to the specified mixing time if Concrete mixing by chute is allowed provided that a weighing
timing starts at the instant the skip reaches its maximum raised positions. scales for determining the batch weight will be used.
Mixing time ends when the discharge chute opens. Transfer time in
multiple drum mixers is included in mixing time. The contents of an Retempering concrete by adding water or by other means shall
individual mixer drum shall be removed before a succeeding batch is not be permitted, except that when concrete is delivered in truck mixers,
emptied therein. additional water may be added to the batch materials and additional
mixing performed to increase the slump to meet the specified
The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed as shown on the requirements, if permitted by the Engineer, provided all these operations
manufacturer’s name plate attached on the mixer. Any concrete mixed are performed within forty-five (45) minutes after the initial mixing
less than the specified time shall be discarded and disposed off by the operation and the water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Concrete that is
Contractor at his expense. The volume of concrete mixed per batch shall not within the specified slump limits at the time of placement shall not be
not exceed the mixer’s nominal capacity in cubic metre, as shown on the used. Admixtures for increasing the workability or for accelerating the
manufacturer’s standard rating plate on the mixer, except that an overload setting of the concrete will be permitted only when specifically approved
up to ten (10) percent above the mixer’s nominal capacity may be by the Engineer.
permitted provided concrete test data for strength, segregation, and
uniform consistency are satisfactory, and provided no spillage of concrete 311.3.8 Limitation of Mixing
takes place.

72
 No concrete shall be mixed, placed or finished when natural light or a side form. In no case shall the vibrator be operated longer than
is insufficient, unless an adequate and approved artificial lighting system fifteen (15) seconds in any one location.
is operated.
Concrete shall be deposited as near as possible to the expansion
During hot weather, the Engineer shall require that steps be taken and contraction joints without disturbing them, but shall not be dumped
to prevent the temperature of mixed concrete from exceeding a maximum from the discharge bucket or hopper into a joint assembly unless the
temperature of 900F ( 320C) hopper is well centered on the joint assembly. Should any concrete
material fall on or be worked into the surface of a complete slab, it shall
Concrete not in place within ninety (90) minutes from the time the be removed immediately.
ingredients were charged into the mixing drum or that has developed
initial set shall not be used. Retempering of concrete or mortar which 311.3.10 Test Specimens
has partially hardened, that is remixing with or without additional cement,
aggregate, or water, shall not be permitted. As work progresses, at least one (1) set consisting of three (3)
concrete beam test specimens, 150 mm x 150 mm x 525 mm or 900
In order that the concrete may be properly protected against the mm shall be taken from each 330 m2 of pavement, 230 mm depth, or
effects of rain before the concrete is sufficiently hardened, the Contractor fraction thereof placed each day. Test specimens shall be made under
will be required to have available at all times materials for the protection the supervision of the Engineer, and the Contractor shall provide all
of the edges and surface of the unhardened concrete. concrete and other facilities necessary in making the test specimens and
shall protect them from damage by construction operations. Cylinder
311.3.9 Placing Concrete samples shall not be used as substitute for determining the adequacy of
the strength of concrete.
Concrete shall be deposited in such a manner to require minimal
rehandling. Unless truck mixers or non-agitating hauling equipment are The beams shall be made, cured, and tested in accordance with
equipped with means to discharge concrete without segregation of the AASHTO T 23 and T 97.
materials, the concrete shall be unloaded into an approved spreading
device and mechanically spread on the grade in such a manner as to 311.3.11 Strike-off of Concrete and Placement of Reinforcement
prevent segregation. Placing shall be continuous between transverse
joints without the use of intermediate bulkheads. Necessary hand Following the placing of the concrete, it shall be struck off to
spreading shall be done with shovels, not rakes. Workmen shall not be conform to the cross-section shown on the Plans and to an elevation such
allowed to walk in the freshly mixed concrete with boots or shoes coated that when the concrete is properly consolidated and finished, the surface
with earth or foreign substances. of the pavement will be at the elevation shown on the Plans. When
reinforced concrete pavement is placed in two (2) layers, the bottom layer
When concrete is to be placed adjoining a previously constructed shall be struck off and consolidated to such length and depth that the
lane and mechanical equipment will be operated upon the existing lane, sheet of fabric or bar mat may be laid full length on the concrete in its final
that previously constructed lane shall have attained the strength for position without further manipulation. The reinforcement shall then be
fourteen (14) day concrete. If only finishing equipment is carried on the placed directly upon the concrete, after which the top layer of the concrete
existing lane, paving in adjoining lanes may be permitted after three (3) shall be placed, struck off and screeded. Any portion of the bottom layer
days. of concrete which has been placed more then 30 minutes without being
covered with the top layer shall be removed and replaced with freshly
Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated against and along the mixed concrete at the Contractor’s expense. When reinforced concrete
faces of all forms and along the full length and on both sides of all joint is placed in one layer, the reinforcement may be firmly positioned in
assemblies, by means of vibrators inserted in the concrete. Vibrators advance of concrete placement or it may be placed at the depth shown on
shall not be permitted to come in contact with a joint assembly, the grade, the Plans in plastic concrete, after spreading by mechanical or vibratory
means.
73
 on the Plans. Suitable guide lines or devices shall be used
Reinforcing steel shall be free from dirt, oil, paint, grease, mill to assure cutting the longitudinal joint on the true line. The
scale and loose or thick rust which could impair bond of the steel with the longitudinal joint shall be sawed before the end of the
concrete. curing period or shortly thereafter and before any
equipment or vehicles are allowed on the pavement. The
311.3.12 Joints sawed area shall be thoroughly cleaned and, if required,
the joint shall immediately be filled with sealer.
Joints shall be constructed of the type and dimensions, and at the
locations required by the Plans or Special Provisions. All joints shall be Longitudinal pavement insert type joints shall be formed
protected from the intrusion of injurious foreign material until sealed. by placing a continuous strip of plastic materials which will
not react adversely with the chemical constituent of the
1. Longitudinal Joint concrete.

Deformed steel tie bars of specified length, size, spacing 2. Transverse Expansion Joint
and materials shall be placed perpendicular to the
longitudinal joints, they shall be placed by approved The expansion joint filler shall be continuous from form
mechanical equipment or rigidly secured by chair or other to form, shaped to subgrade and to the keyway along the
approved supports to prevent displacement. Tie bars shall form. Preformed joint filler shall be furnished in lengths
not be painted or coated with asphalt or other materials or equal to the pavement width or equal to the width of one
enclosed in tubes or sleeves. When shown on the Plans lane. Damaged or repaired joint filler shall not be used.
and when adjacent lanes of pavement are constructed
separately, steel side forms shall be used which will form a The expansion joint filler shall be held in a vertical
keyway along the construction joint. Tie bars, except those position. An approved installing bar, or other device, shall
made of rail steel, may be bent at right angles against the be used if required to secure preformed expansion joint
form of the first lane constructed and straightened into final filler at the proper grade and alignment during placing and
position before the concrete of the adjacent lane is placed, finishing of the concrete. Finished joint shall not deviate
or in lieu of bent tie bars, approved two-piece connectors more than 6 mm from a straight line. If joint fillers are
may be used. assembled in sections, there shall be no offsets between
adjacent units. No plugs of concrete shall be permitted
Longitudinal formed joints shall consist of a groove or anywhere within the expansion space.
cleft, extending downward from and normal to, the surface
of the pavement. These joints shall be effected or formed 3. Transverse Contraction Joint/Weakened Joint
by an approved mechanically or manually operated device
to the dimensions and line indicated on the Plans and while When shown on the Plans, it shall consist of planes of
the concrete is in a plastic state. The groove or cleft shall weakness created by forming or cutting grooves in the
be filled with either a premolded strip or poured material as surface of the pavement and shall include load transfer
required. assemblies. The depth of the weakened plane joint should
at all times not be less than 50 mm, while the width should
The longitudinal joints shall be continuous, there shall not be more than 6 mm.
be no gaps in either transverse or longitudinal joints at the
intersection of the joints. a. Transverse Strip Contraction Joint. It shall be
formed by installing a parting strip to be left in place
Longitudinal sawed joints shall be cut by means of as shown on the Plans.
approved concrete saws to the depth, width and line shown
74
 b. Formed Groove. It shall be made by depressing an
approved tool or device into the plastic concrete. Dowel, when used, shall be held in position parallel to
The tool or device shall remain in place at least until the surface and center line of the slab by a metal device
the concrete has attained its initial set and shall then that is left in the pavement.
be removed without disturbing the adjacent concrete,
unless the device is designed to remain in the joint. The portion of each dowel painted with one coat of lead
or tar, in conformance with the requirements of Item 404,
c. Sawed Contraction Joint. It shall be created by Reinforcing Steel, shall be thoroughly coated with approved
sawing grooves in the surface of the pavement of the bituminous materials, e.g., MC-70, or an approved
width not more than 6 mm, depth should at all times lubricant, to prevent the concrete from binding to that
not be less than 50 mm, and at the spacing and lines portion of the dowel. The sleeves for dowels shall be
shown on the Plans, with an approved concrete saw. metal designed to cover 50 mm plus or minus 5 mm (1/4
After each joint is sawed, it shall be thoroughly inch), of the dowel, with a watertight closed end and with a
cleaned including the adjacent concrete surface. suitable stop to hold the end of the sleeves at least 25 mm
(1 inch) from the end of the dowel.
Sawing of the joint shall commence as soon as
the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit In lieu of using dowel assemblies at contraction joints,
sawing without excessive ravelling, usually 4 to 24 dowel may be placed in the full thickness of pavement by a
hours. All joints shall be sawed before uncontrolled mechanical device approved by the Engineer.
shrinkage cracking takes place. If necessary, the
sawing operations shall be carried on during the day 311.3.13 Final Strike-off (Consolidation and Finishing)
or night, regardless of weather conditions. The
sawing of any joint shall be omitted if crack occurs at 1. Sequence
or near the joint location prior to the time of sawing.
Sawing shall be discounted when a crack develops The sequence of operations shall be the strike-off and
ahead of the saw. In general, all joints should be consolidation, floating and removal of laitance, straight-
sawed in sequence. If extreme condition exist which edging and final surface finish. Work bridges or other
make it impractical to prevent erratic cracking by devices necessary to provide access to the pavement
early sawing, the contraction joint groove shall be surface for the purpose of finishing straight-edging, and
formed prior to initial set of concrete as provided make corrections as hereinafter specified, shall be
above. provided by the Contractor.

4. Transverse Construction Joint In general, the addition of water to the surface of the
concrete to assist in finishing operations will not be
It shall be constructed when there is an interruption of permitted. If the application of water to the surface is
more than 30 minutes in the concreting operations. No permitted, it shall be applied as fog spray by means of an
transverse joint shall be constructed within 1.50 m of an approved spray equipment.
expansion joint, contraction joint, or plane of weakness. If
sufficient concrete has been mixed at the time of 2. Finishing Joints
interruption to form a slab of at least 1.5 m long, the excess
concrete from the last preceding joint shall be removed and The concrete adjacent to joints shall be compacted or
disposed off as directed. firmly placed without voids or segregation against the joint
material assembly, also under and around all load transfer
5. Load Transfer Device devices, joint assembly units, and other features designed
75
 to extend into the pavement. Concrete adjacent to joints b. Vibratory Method. When vibration is specified,
shall be mechanically vibrated as required in Subsection vibrators for full width vibration of concrete paving
311.3.9, Placing Concrete. slabs, shall meet the requirements in Subsection
311.3.2, Equipment. If uniform and satisfactory
After the concrete has been placed and vibrated density of the concrete is not obtained by the
adjacent to the joints as required in Subsection 311.3.9, the vibratory method at joints, along forms, at structures,
finishing machine shall be brought forward, operating in a and throughout the pavement, the Contractor will be
manner to avoid damage or misalignment of joints. If required to furnish equipment and method which will
uninterrupted operation of the finishing machine, to over produce pavement conforming to the Specifications.
and beyond the joints causes segregation of concrete, All provisions in item (a) above not in conflict with the
damage to, or misalignment of the joints, the finishing provisions for the vibratory method shall govern.
machine shall be stopped when the front screed is
approximately 20 cm (8 inches) from the joint. Segregated 4. Hand Finishing
concrete shall be removed from in front of and off the joint.
The front screed shall be lifted and set directly on top of the Hand finishing methods may only be used under the
joint and the forward motion of the finishing machine following conditions:
resumed. When the second screed is close enough to
permit the excess mortar in front of it to flow over the joint, it a. In the event of breakdown of the mechanical
shall be lifted and carried over the joint. Thereafter, the equipment, hand methods may be used to finish the
finishing machine may be run over the joint without lifting concrete already deposited on the grade.
the screeds, provided there is no segregated concrete
immediately between the joint and the screed or on top of b. In narrow widths or areas of irregular dimensions
the joint. where operations of the mechanical equipment is
impractical, hand methods may be used.
3. Machine Finishing
Concrete, as soon as placed, shall be struck off and
a. Non-vibratory Method. The concrete shall be screeded. An approved portable screed shall be used. A
distributed or spread as soon as placed. As soon as second screed shall be provided for striking off the bottom
the concrete has been placed, it shall be struck off layer of concrete if reinforcement is used.
and screeded by an approved finishing machine.
The machine shall go over each area of pavement as The screed for the surface shall be at least 60 cm (2
many times and at such intervals as necessary to feet) longer than the maximum width of the slab to be
give the proper compaction and leave a surface of struck off. It shall be of approved design, sufficiently rigid
uniform texture. Excessive operation over a given to retain its shape, and constructed either of metal or other
area shall be avoided. The tops of the forms shall suitable material shod with metal.
be kept clean by an effective device attached to the
machine and the travel of the machine on the forms Consolidation shall be attained by the use of suitable
shall be maintained true without wobbling or other vibrator or other approved equipment.
variation tending to affect the precision finish.
In operation, the screed shall be moved forward on the
During the first pass of the finishing machine, a forms with a combined longitudinal and transverse shearing
uniform ridge of concrete shall be maintained ahead motion, moving always in the direction in which the work is
of the front screed in its entire length. progressing and so manipulated that neither end is raised
from the side forms during the striking off process. If
76
 necessary, this shall be repeated until the surface is of c. Alternative Mechanical Method. As an alternative,
uniform texture, true to grade and cross-section, and free the Contractor may use a machine composed of a
from porous areas. cutting and smoothing float or floats suspended from
and guided by a rigid frame. The frame shall be
5. Floating carried by four or more visible wheels riding on, and
constantly in contact with the side forms. If
After the concrete has been struck off and consolidated, necessary, following one of the preceding method of
it shall be further smoothed, trued, and consolidated by floating, long handled floats having blades not less
means of a longitudinal float, either by hand or mechanical than 150 cm (5 feet) in length and 15 cm (6 inches) in
method. width may be used to smooth and fill in open-textured
areas in the pavement. Long-handled floats shall
a. Hand Method. The hand-operated longitudinal float not be used to float the entire surface of the
shall be not less than 365 cm (12 feet) in length and pavement in lieu of, or supplementing, one of the
15 cm (6 inches) in width, properly stiffened to preceding methods of floating. When strike off and
prevent flexibility and warping. The longitudinal float, consolidation are done by the hand method and the
operated from foot bridges resting on the side forms crown of the pavement will not permit the use of the
and spanning but not touching the concrete, shall be longitudinal float, the surface shall be floated
worked with a sawing motion while held in a floating transversely by means of the long-handled float.
position parallel to the road center line, and moving Care shall be taken not to work the crown out of the
gradually from one side of the pavement to the other. pavement during the operation. After floating, any
Movement ahead along the center line of the excess water and laitance shall be removed from the
pavement shall be in successive advances of not surface of the pavement by a 3-m straight-edge or
more than one-half the length of the float. Any more in length. Successive drags shall be lapped
excess water or soupy material shall be wasted over one-half the length of the blade.
the side forms on each pass.
6. Straight-edge Testing and Surface Correction
b. Mechanical Method. The mechanical longitudinal
float shall be of a design approved by the Engineer, After the floating has been completed and the excess
and shall be in good working condition. The tracks water removed, but while the concrete is still plastic, the
from which the float operates shall be accurately surface of the concrete shall be tested for trueness with a
adjusted to the required crown. The float shall be 300 cm long straight-edge. For this purpose, the
accurately adjusted and coordinated with the Contractor shall furnish and use an accurate 300-cm
adjustment of the transverse finishing machine so straight-edge swung from handles 100 cm (3 feet) longer
that a small amount of mortar is carried ahead of the than one-half the width of the slab. The straight-edge shall
float at all times. The forward screed shall be be held in contact with the surface in successive positions
adjusted so that the float will lap the distance parallel to the road center line and the whole area gone
specified by the Engineer on each transverse trip. over from one side of the slab to the other as necessary.
The float shall pass over each areas of pavement at Advances along the road shall be in successive stages of
least two times, but excessive operation over a given not more than one-half the length of the straight-edge.
area will not be permitted. Any excess water or Any depressions found shall be immediately filled with
soupy material shall be wasted over the side forms freshly mixed concrete, struck off, consolidated and
on each pass. refinished. High areas shall be cut down and refinished.
Special attention shall be given to assure that the surface
across joints meets the requirements for smoothness.
77
 Straight-edge testing and surface corrections shall continue full width of pavement surface while the drag is used. The
until the entire surface is found to be free from observable drag shall consist of not less than 2 layers of burlap with the
departures from the straight-edge and the slab conforms to bottom layer approximately 15 cm wider than the layer. The
the required grade and cross-section. drag shall be maintained in such condition that the resultant
surface is of uniform appearance and reasonably free from
7. Final Finish grooves over 1.5 mm in depth. Drag shall be maintained
clean and free from encrusted mortar. Drags that cannot be
If the surface texture is broom finished, it shall applied cleaned shall be discarded and new drags be substituted.
when the water sheen has practically disappeared. The
broom shall be drawn from the center to the edge of the Regardless of the method used for final finish, the
pavement with adjacent strokes slightly overlapping. The hardened surface of pavement shall have a coefficient of
brooming operation should be so executed that the friction of 0.25 or more. Completed pavement that is found
corrugations produced in the surface shall be uniform in to have a coefficient of friction less than 0.25 shall be
appearance and not more than 1.5 mm in depth. Brooming grounded or scored by the Contractor at his expense to
shall be completed before the concrete is in such condition provide the required coefficient of friction.
that the surface will be unduly roughened by the operation.
The surface thus finished shall be free from rough and 8. Edging at Forms and Joints
porous areas, irregularities, and depressions resulting from
improper handling of the broom. Brooms shall be of the After the final finish, but before the concrete has taken
quality size and construction and be operated so as to its initial set, the edges of the pavement along each side of
produce a surface finish meeting the approval of the each slab, and on each side of transverse expansion joints,
Engineer. Subject to satisfactory results being obtained and formed joints, transverse construction joints, and
approval of the Engineer, the Contractor will be permitted to emergency construction joints, shall be worked with an
substitute mechanical brooming in lieu of the manual approved tool and rounded to the radius required by the
brooming herein described. Plans. A well – defined and continuous radius shall be
produced and a smooth, dense mortar finish obtained.
If the surface texture is belt finished, when straight- The surface of the slab shall not be unduly disturbed by
edging is complete and water sheen has practically tilting the tool during the use.
disappeared and just before the concrete becomes non-
plastic, the surface shall be belted with 2-ply canvass belt At all joints, any tool marks appearing on the slab
not less than 20 cm wide and at least 100 cm longer than adjacent to the joints shall be eliminated by brooming the
the pavement width. Hand belts shall have suitable handles surface. In doing this, the rounding of the corner of the
to permit controlled, uniform manipulation. The belt shall be slab shall not be disturbed. All concrete on top of the joint
operated with short strokes transverse to the center line filler shall be completely removed.
and with a rapid advances parallel to the center line.
All joints shall be tested with a straight-edge before the
If the surface texture is drag finished, a drag shall be concrete has set and correction made if one edge of the
used which consists of a seamless strip of damp burlap or joint is higher than the other.
cotton fabric, which shall produce a uniform of gritty texture
after dragging it longitudinally along the full width of 311.3.14 Surface Test
pavement. For pavement 5 m or more in width, the drag
shall be mounted on a bridge which travels on the forms. As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the pavement
The dimensions of the drag shall be such that a strip of surface shall be tested with a 3-m straight-edge or other specified device.
burlap or fabric at least 100 cm wide is in contact with the Areas showing high spots of more than 3 mm but not exceeding 12 mm in
78
3 m shall be marked and immediately ground down with an approved The top surface and sides of the pavement shall be
grinding tool to an elevation where the area or spot will not show surface entirely covered with waterproof paper, the units shall be
deviations in excess of 3 mm when tested with 3 m straight-edge. Where lapped at least 45 cm. The paper shall be so placed and
the departure from correct cross-section exceeds 12 mm, the pavement weighted down so as to cause it to remain in intimate
shall be removed and replaced by and at the expense of the Contractor. contact with the surface covered. The paper shall have
such dimension but each unit as laid will extend beyond the
Any area or section so removed shall be not less than 1.5 m in edges of the slab at least twice the thickness of the
length and not less than the full width of the lane involved. When it is pavement, or at pavement width and 60 cm strips of paper
necessary to remove and replace a section of pavement, any remaining for the edges. If laid longitudinally, paper not manufactured
portion of the slab adjacent to the joints that is less than 1.5 m in length, in sizes which will provide this width shall be securely
shall also be removed and replaced. sewed or cemented together, the joints being securely
sealed in such a manner that they do not open up or
311.3.15 Curing separate during the curing period. Unless otherwise
specified, the covering shall be maintained in place for 72
Immediately after the finishing operations have been completed hours after the concrete has been placed. The surface of
and the concrete has sufficiently set, the entire surface of the newly the pavement shall be thoroughly wetted prior to the
placed concrete shall be cured in accordance with either one of the placing of the paper.
methods described herein. Failure to provide sufficient cover material of
whatever kind the Contractor may elect to use, or the lack of water to 3. Straw Curing
adequately take care of both curing and other requirements, shall be a
cause for immediate suspension of concreting operations. The concrete When this type of curing is used, the pavement shall be
shall not be left exposed for more than ½ hour between stages of curing cured initially with burlap or cotton mats, until after final set
or during the curing period. of the concrete or, in any case, for 12 hours after placing
the concrete. As soon as the mats are removed, the
In all congested places, concrete works should be designed so surface and sides of the pavement shall be thoroughly
that the designed strength is attained. wetted and covered with at least 20 cm of straw or hay,
thickness of which is to be measured after wetting. If the
1. Cotton of Burlap Mats straw or hay covering becomes displaced during the curing
period, it shall be replaced to the original depth and
The surface of the pavement shall be entirely covered saturated. It shall be kept thoroughly saturated with water
with mats. The mats used shall be of such length (or for 72 hours and thoroughly wetted down during the
width) that as laid they will extend at least twice the morning of the fourth day, and the cover shall remain in
thickness of the pavement beyond the edges of the slab. place until the concrete has attained the required strength.
The mat shall be placed so that the entire surface and the
edges of the slab are completely covered. Prior to being 4. Impervious Membrane Method
placed, the mats shall be saturated thoroughly with water.
The mat shall be so placed and weighted down so as to The entire surface of the pavement shall be sprayed
cause them to remain in intimate contact with the covered uniformly with white pigmented curing compound
surface. The mat shall be maintained fully wetted and in immediately after the finishing of the surface and before the
position for 72 hours after the concrete has been placed set of the concrete has taken place, or if the pavement is
unless otherwise specified. cured initially with jute or cotton mats, it may be applied
upon removal of the mass. The curing compound shall not
2. Waterproof Paper be applied during rain.

79
 Curing compound shall be applied under pressure at the less than the distance between weakened plane joint nor less than the full
rate 4 L to not more than 14 m2 by mechanical sprayers. width of the lane involved.
The spraying equipment shall be equipped with a wind
guard. At the time of use, the compound shall be in a 311.3.17 Sealing Joints
thoroughly mixed condition with the pigment uniformly
dispersed throughout the vehicle. During application, the Joints shall be sealed with asphalt sealant soon after completion
compound shall be stirred continuously by effective of the curing period and before the pavement is opened to traffic,
mechanical means. Hand spraying of odd widths or including the Contractor’s equipment. Just prior to sealing, each joint
shapes and concrete surface exposed by the removal of shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign materials including membrane
forms will be permitted. Curing compound shall not be curing compound and the joint faces shall be clean and surface dry when
applied to the inside faces of joints to be sealed, but the seal is applied.
approved means shall be used to insure proper curing at
least 72 hours and to prevent the intrusion of foreign The sealing material shall be applied to each joint opening to
material into the joint before sealing has been completed. conform to the details shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
The curing compound shall be of such character that the Material for seal applied hot shall be stirred during heating so that
film will harden within 30 minutes after application. Should localized overheating does not occur. The pouring shall be done in such
the film be damaged from any cause within the 72 hour a manner that the material will not be spilled on the exposed surfaces of
curing period, the damaged portions shall be repaired the concrete. The use of sand or similar material as a cover for the seal
immediately with additional compound. will not be permitted.

5. White Polyethylene Sheet Preformed elastomeric gaskets for sealing joints shall be of the
cross-sectional dimensions shown on the Plans. Seals shall be installed
The top surface and sides of the pavement shall be by suitable tools, without elongation and secured in placed with an
entirely covered with polyethylene sheeting. The units approved lubricant adhesive which shall cover both sides of the concrete
used shall be lapped at least 45 cm. The sheeting shall be joints. The seals shall be installed in a compressive condition and shall
so placed and weighted down so as to cause it to remain at time of placement be below the level of the pavement surface by
intimate contact with the surface covered. The sheeting as approximately 6 mm.
prepared for use shall have such dimension that each unit
as laid will extend beyond the edges of the slab at least The seals shall be in one piece for the full width of each
twice the thickness of the pavement. Unless otherwise transverse joint.
specified, the covering shall be maintained in place for 72
hours after the concrete has been placed. 311.3.18 Protection of Pavement

311.3.16 Removal of Forms The Contractor shall protect the pavement and its appurtenances
against both public traffic and traffic caused by his own employees and
After forms for concrete shall remain in place undisturbed for not agents. This shall include watchmen to direct traffic and the erection of
less than twenty four (24) hours after concrete pouring. In the removal of and maintenance of warning signs, lights, pavement bridges or cross-
forms, crowbars should be used in pulling out nails and pins. Care overs, etc. The Plans or Special Provisions will indicate the location and
should be taken so as not to break the edges of the pavement. In case type of device or facility required to protect the work and provide
portions of the concrete are spalled, they shall be immediately repaired adequately for traffic.
with fresh mortar mixed in the proportion of one part of Portland Cement
and two parts fine aggregates. Major honeycomb areas will be All boreholes after thickness and/or strength determinations of
considered as defective work and shall be removed and replaced at the newly constructed asphalt and concrete pavements shall be immediately
expense of the Contractor. Any area or section so removed shall not be
80
filled/restored with the prescribed concrete/asphalt mix after completion of such a distance that no appreciable slumping of the
the drilling works. concrete will occur, and that necessary final finishing can
be accomplished while the concrete is still within the forms.
Any damage to the pavement, occurring prior to final acceptance, Any edge slump of the pavement, exclusive of edge
shall be repaired or the pavement be replaced. rounding, in excess of 6 mm shall be corrected before the
concrete has hardened.
311.3.19 Concrete Pavement – Slip Form Method
The concrete shall be held at a uniform consistency,
If the Contract calls for the construction of pavement without the having a slump of not more than 40 mm (1-12/ inches).
use of fixed forms, the following provisions shall apply: The slip form paver shall be operated with as nearly as
possible a continuous forward movement and that all
operations of mixing, delivering and spreading concrete
1. Grade shall be coordinated so as to provide uniform progress with
stopping and starting of the paver held to a minimum. If,
After the grade or base has been placed and compacted for any reason, it is necessary to stop the forward
to the required density, the areas which will support the movement of the paver the vibratory and tamping elements
paving machine shall be cut to the proper elevation by shall also be stopped immediately. No tractive force shall
means of a properly designed machine. The grade on be applied to the machine, except that which is controlled
which the pavement is to be constructed shall then be from the machine.
brought to the proper profile by means of properly designed
machine. If the density of the base is disturbed by the 3. Finishing
grading operation, it shall be corrected by additional
compaction before concrete is placed. The grade should The surface smoothness and texture shall meet the
be constructed sufficiently in advance of the placing of the requirements of Subsections 311.3.13 and 311.3.14.
concrete. If any traffic is allowed to use the prepared
grade, the grade shall be checked and corrected 4. Curing
immediately before the placing of concrete.
Unless otherwise specified, curing shall be done in
2. Placing Concrete accordance with one of the methods included in Subsection
311.3.15. The curing media shall be applied at the
The concrete shall be placed with an approved slip-form appropriate time and shall be applied uniformly and
paver designed to spread, consolidate, screed and float- completely to all surfaces and edges of the pavement.
finish the freshly placed concrete in one complete pass of
the machine in such a manner that a minimum of hand 5. Joints
finish will be necessary to provide a dense and
homogenous pavement in conformance with the Plans and All joints shall be constructed in accordance with
Specifications. The machine shall vibrate the concrete for Subsection 311.3.12.
the full width and depth of the strip of pavement
being placed. Such 6. Protection Against Rain
vibration shall be accompanied with vibrating tubes or arms
working in the concrete or with a vibrating screed or pan In order that the concrete may be properly protected
operating on the surface of the concrete. The sliding forms against rain before the concrete is sufficiently hardened,
shall be rigidly held together laterally to prevent spreading the Contractor will be required to have available at all times,
of the forms. The forms shall trail behind the paver for materials for the protection of the edges and surface of the
81
 unhardened concrete. Such protective materials shall Less than 5 100
consist of standard metal forms or wood planks having a 5 to less than 10 80
nominal thickness of not less than 50 mm (2 inches) and a 10 to less than 15 70
nominal width of not less than the thickness of the 15 to less than 20 60
pavement at its edge for the protection of the pavement 20 to less than 25 50
edges, and covering material such as burlap or cotton 25 or more 0
mats, curing paper or plastic sheeting materials for the
protection of the surface of the pavement. When rain 311.3.23 Opening to Traffic
appears imminent, all paving operations shall stop and all
available personnel shall begin placing forms against the The Engineer will decide when the pavement may be opened to
sides of the pavement and covering the surface of the traffic. The road will not be opened to traffic until test specimens molded
unhardened concrete with the protective covering. and cured in accordance with AASHTO T 23 have attained the minimum
strength requirements in Subsection 311.2.11. If such tests are not
311.3.22 Acceptance of Concrete conducted prior to the specified age the pavement shall not be operated
to traffic until 14 days after the concrete was placed. Before opening to
The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory traffic, the pavement shall be cleaned and joint sealing completed.
if the averages of all sets of three (3) consecutive strength test results
equal or exceed the specified strength, fc’ and no individual strength test 311.3.24 Tolerance and Pavement thickness
result is deficient by more than 15% of the specified strength, fc’.
1. General
Concrete deemed to be not acceptable using the above criteria
may be rejected unless the Contractor can provide evidence, by means of The thickness of the pavement will be determined by
core tests, that the quality of concrete represented by failed test results is measurement of cores from the completed pavement in
acceptable in place. At least three (3) representative cores shall be accordance with AASHTO T 148.
taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered
deficient. The location of cores shall be determined by the Engineer so The completed pavement shall be accepted on a lot
that there will be at least impairment of strength of the structure. The basis. A lot shall be considered as 1000 linear meters of
obtaining and testing of drilled cores shall be in accordance with AASHTO pavement when a single traffic lane is poured or 500 linear
T 24. meters when two lanes are poured concurrently. The last
unit in each slab constitutes a lot in itself when its length is
Concrete in the area represented by the cores will be considered at least ½ of the normal lot length. If the length of the last
adequate if the average strength of the cores is equal to at least 85% of, unit is shorter than ½ of the normal lot length, it shall be
and if no single core is less than 75% of, the specified strength, fc’. included in the previous lot.
If the strength of control specimens does not meet the Other areas such as intersections, entrances,
requirements of this Subsection, and it is not feasible or not advisable to crossovers, ramp, etc., will be grouped together to form a
obtain cores from the structure due to structural considerations, payment lot. Small irregular areas may be included with other unit
of the concrete will be made at an adjusted price due to strength areas to form a lot.
deficiency of concrete specimens as specified hereunder:
Each lot will be divided into five (5) equal segments and one
Deficiency in Strength of Percent (%) of Contract core will be obtained from each segment in accordance with
Concrete Specimens, Price Allowed AASHTO T 24.
Percent (%)
2. Pavement Thickness
82
 When the average thickness of the pavement per lot is
It is the intent of this Specification that the pavement has deficient, payment for the lot shall be adjusted as follows:
a uniform thickness as called for on the Plans for the
average of each lot as defined. After the pavement has Deficiency in the Percent (%) of Contract
met all surface smoothness requirements, cores for Average Thickness per Price Per Lot
thickness measurements will be taken. lot (mm)
0–5 100% payment
In calculating the average thickness of the pavement, 6 – 10 95% payment
individual measurements which are in excess of the 11 – 15 85% payment
specified thickness by more than 5 mm will be considered 16 – 20 70% payment
as the specified thickness plus 5 mm and measurement 21 – 25 50% payment
which are less than the specified thickness by more than 25 More than 25 Remove and replace/ No
mm shall not be included in the average. When the payment
average thickness for the lot is deficient, the contract unit
price will be adjusted for thickness in accordance with No acceptance and final payment shall be made on
paragraph (3 below). completed pavement unless core test for thickness
determination is conducted, except for Barangay Roads
Individual areas within a segment found deficient in where the implementing office is allowed to waive such test.
thickness by more than 25 mm shall be evaluated by the
Engineer, and if in his judgment, the deficient areas warrant 311.4 Method of Measurement
removal, they shall be removed and replaced by the
Contractor with pavement of the specified thickness at his The area to be paid for under this Item shall be the number of
entire expense. However, if the evaluation of the Engineer square meters (m2) of concrete pavement placed and accepted in the
is that the deficient area should not be removed and completed pavement. The width for measurements will be the width from
replaced, such area will not be paid. outside edge to outside edge of completed pavement as placed in
accordance with the Plans or as otherwise required by the Engineer in
When the measurement of any core is less than the writing. The length will be measured horizontally along the center line of
specified thickness by more than 25 mm, the actual each roadway or ramp. Any curb and gutter placed shall not be included
thickness of the pavement in this area will be determined by in the area of concrete pavement measured.
taking additional cores at no less than 5 m intervals parallel
to the center line in each direction from the affected location 311.5 Basis of Payment
until a core is found in each direction, which is not deficient
in thickness by more than 25 mm. The area of slab for The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section
which no payment will be made shall be the product of the 311.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Portland Cement
paving width multiplied by the distance along the center line Concrete Pavement, which price and payment shall be full compensation
of the road between transverse sections found not deficient for preparation of roadbed and finishing of shoulders, unless otherwise
in thickness by more than 25 mm. The thickness of the provided by the Special Provisions, furnishing all materials, for mixing,
remainder of the segment to be used to get the average placing, finishing and curing all concrete, for furnishing and placing all
thickness of each lot shall be determined by taking the joint materials, for sawing weakened plane joints, for fitting the
average thickness of additional cores which are not prefabricated center metal joint, for facilitating and controlling traffic, and
deficient by more than 25 mm. for furnishing all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the Item.
3. Adjustment for Thickness

83
 Payment will be made under: 400.1.2 Test Piles

For his own information, the Contractor may drive at the location
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement of the regular piles indicated on the Plans such test piles as he may
consider necessary in addition to the test piles specified in the Contract
311 (1) PCC Pavement (Plain) Square meter and shall be considered as regular piles. When called for in the Bill of
311 (2) PCC Pavement Square meter Quantities, a pile if required to be subjected to load test shall conform to
(Reinforced) the provision as provided in Subsection 400.1.3, Load Tests. The
Contractor shall furnish and drive test piles of the dimensions and at the
locations designated by the Engineer. They shall be of the material
PART F – BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION shown in the Bill of Quantities and shall be driven to refusal or to such tip
elevation or approximate bearing value as the Engineer may request.
ITEM 400 – PILING Test piles shall be driven with the same hammer that is used for driving
foundation piles.
400.1 Description
When the Engineer requests a load test to determine a bearing
400.1.1 Scope value, the first load test pile shall be driven to the specified bearing value
as determined by the applicable formula in Subsection 400.1.4 for Timber
This Item shall consist of piling, furnished, driven or placed, cut Pile Bearing Value by Formula. Subsequent test piles to be load-tested
and spliced in accordance with this Specification and in reasonably close shall be driven to the specified bearing value as determined by the
conformity with the Plans. applicable formula modified by the results of prior test loads and
foundation data. The ground at each test pile shall be excavated to the
The Contractor shall furnish the piles in accordance with an elevation of the bottom of the footing before the pile is driven.
itemized list, which will be provided by the Engineer, showing the number
and lengths of all piles. When cast-in-place concrete piles are specified 400.1.3 Load Tests
on the Plans, the Engineer will not furnish the Contractor an itemized list
showing the number and length of piles. When test piles and load tests Load tests for files shall be either Static or Pile Testing by Low-
are required in conformance with Sub-section 400.1.2 and 400.1.3, Strain Dynamic Method, High-Strain Dynamic Method and Cross-Hole
respectively, the data obtained from driving test piles and making test Sonic Logging.
loads will be used in conjunction with other available sub-soil information
to determine the number and lengths of piles to be furnished. The When load tests are specified, the number and location of piles to
Engineer will not prepare the itemized list of piles for any portion of the be tested will be designated by the Engineer. Load tests shall be done by
foundation area until all specified loading tests in the Contract methods approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit to the
representative of the portion have been completed. Engineer for approval detailed plans of the loading apparatus he intends
to use. The apparatus shall be so constructed as to allow the various
In determining lengths of piles for ordering and to be included for increments of the load to be placed gradually without causing vibration to
payment, the lengths given in the order list will be based on the lengths the test piles. If the approved method requires the use of tension
which are assumed to remain in the completed structure. The Contractor, (anchor) piles, such tension piles shall be of the same type and diameter
shall, without added compensation, increase the lengths to provide for the as the permanent piles and shall be driven in the location of permanent
fresh heading and for such additional length as maybe necessary to suit piles when feasible. Piling not a part of the structure shall be removed or
the Contractor’s method of operation. cut off at least 300mm below the bottom of the footing or finished
elevation of the ground upon completion of the test load. Permanent
piling used as anchor piling which is raised during the test load shall be
redriven to original grade and bearing.
84
400.1.3.1Static Testing When diesel or other types of hammers requiring calibration are
to be used, the Contractor shall make load tests even though no load
Suitable approved apparatus for determining accurately the load tests are called for in the Bill of Quantities, except that load tests will not
on pile and the settlement of the pile under increment of load shall be be required when the hammer is to be used only for driving piles to
supplied by the Contractor. refusal, rock or a fixed tip elevation or the hammer is of a type and model
that has been previously calibrated for similar type, size and length of pile,
Test loading shall consist of the application of incremental static and foundation material. Calibration data must have been obtained from
loads to a pile and measuring the resultant settlement. The loads shall be sources acceptable to the Engineer.
applied by a hydraulic jack acting against suitable anchorage, transmitting
the load directly to the pile, or other methods designated by the Plans or 400.1.3.2 Pile Testing
approved by the Engineer.
Pile testing shall be done by Low-Strain Dynamic Method, High-
The load shall be applied in increments of 5 or 10 tonnes as Strain Dynamic Method or Cross-Hole Sonic Logging Method as required
directed by the Engineer. Gross settlement readings, loads and other in the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
data shall be recorded by the Engineer immediately before and after the
applications of each load increment. 400.1.3.2.1 Low-Strain dynamic Method

Each load increment shall be held for an interval of two and one- Pile integrity testing by Low-Strain Dynamic Method shall conform
half minutes. Each succeeding increment shall be as directed by the to ASTM D-5882-96. It is a so-called Low Strain Method, since it requires
Engineer or as shown on the Plans and shall be applied immediately after the impact of only a small hand-held hammer, and also referred to as a
the two and one-half minute interval readings have been made. Non-Destructive Method.

When a load-settlement curve obtained from these data shows 400.1.3.2.2 High-Strain Dynamic Testing
that the pile has failed; i.e., the load can be held only by the constant
pumping and the pile or shaft is being driven into the ground, pumping Pile Integrity testing by High-Strain Dynamic Method shall
shall cease. Gross settlement readings, loads and other data shall be conform to ASTM D4945-97. High-Strain Dynamic Method shall be
recorded immediately after pumping has ceased and again after an applied to confirm the design parameters and capacities assumed for the
interval of two and one-half minutes for a total period of five (5) minutes. piles as well as to confirm the normal integrity of testing of the piles. It is
All loads shall then be removed and the member allowed to recover. considered supplemental to the low-strain and sonic-type integrity testing
Gross settlement readings shall be made immediately after all loads have of the cast-in-place piles. It is a non-destructive relatively quick test and it
been removed and at each interval of two and one-half minutes for a total is intended that the test shaft be left in a condition suitable for use in
period of five (5) minutes. production. The shaft used for the test will be instrumented and tested by
the testing specialist, as approved by the Engineer, meeting requirements
All load tests shall be carried to failure or to the capacity of the in accordance to ASTM D4945-97.
equipment, unless otherwise noted on the Plans.
400.1.3.2.3 Cross-Hole Sonic Logging of Bored Holes
After the completion of loading tests, the load used shall be
removed and the piles including tension piles, shall be utilized in the By sending ultrasonic pulses through concrete from one probe to
structure if found by the Engineer to be satisfactory for such use. Test another (probes located in parallel tubes), the Cross-hole Sonic Logging
piles not loaded shall be utilized similarly. If any pile, after serving its (CSL) procedure inspects the drilled shaft structural integrity, and extent
purpose as a test or tension pile, is found unsatisfactory for utilization in and location of defects, if any. At the receiver probe, pulse arrival time
the structure, it shall be removed if so ordered by the Engineer or shall be and signal the concrete affects strength. For equidistant tubes, uniform
cut off below the ground line of footings, whichever is applicable. concrete yields consistent arrival times with reasonable pulse wave speed
85
and signal strengths. Non – uniformities such as contamination, soft
concrete, honeycombing, voids, or intrusions of foreign objects exhibit P = Safe load per pile in Newton or kg
delayed arrival time with reduced signal strength. W = Weight of the striking part of the
hammer in Newton or kg
400.1.4 Timber Pile Bearing Value by Formula H = Height of fall of ram in metres
` S = Average penetration per blow in mm
When load tests are called for in the Bill of Quantities and when for the last 5 to 10 blows for gravity
diesel or other hammers to be calibrated are used, the minimum number hammers and the last 10 to 20 blows
of hammer blows per unit of pile penetration needed to obtain the for steam hammers
specified bearing value of piles shall be determined by load tests, as E = Hammer energy, N.m or kg.m
provided in Subsections 400.1.2 and 400.1.3. In the absence of load Wp = Weight of pile
tests, the safe bearing value of each timber pile shall be determined by
whichever of the following approximate formulas is applicable: The above formula are applicable only when:
1000 WH
For gravity hammer, P = ------------- x --------------- 1. The hammer has a free fall.
6 S+25.4 2. The head of the pile is free from broomed or crushed
wood fiber or other serious impairment.
For single-action steam or air hammers, and for diesel hammers 3. The penetration is reasonably quick and uniform.
having unrestricted rebound of ram, 4. There is no measurable bounce after the blow.
5. A follower is not used.
1000 WH
If there is a measurable bounce, twice the height of bounce shall
P = ----------- x -----------------
be deducted from H to determine its value in the formula.
6
S+2.54
The bearing power as determined by the appropriate
formula listed in this Subsection, will be considered effective
For double-action steam or air hammers, and diesel hammers having
only when it is less than the crushing strength of the pile. Other
enclosed ram,
recognized formulas may be used if fully detailed in the Special
Provisions.
1000 E
P = ------------ x ----------------- When bearing power is determined by a formula, timber
6 piles shall be driven until a computed safe bearing power of
S+2.54 each is not less than 18 tonnes.

For diesel or steam hammers on very heavy piles, 400.1.5 Concrete and Steel Pile Bearing Values

The bearing values for concrete and steel pile will be determined
1000 E by the Engineer using the following formulas:
P = ---------- x --------------------
---- a. Modified Hiley’s Formula or any formula from
6 brochures of the equipment used, shall be used when the ratio
S+2.54
of weight of ram or hammer to weight of pile is greater than one
(Wp/W) fourth (1/4).
Where:

86
 2WH (W) head and cap (refer to table)
Ru = ---------------------------- C2 = RuL/AEp
(S+K) (W+Wp) C3 = range from 2.54mm to 5.08mm (0.1” to 0.2”)
for resilient soil to 0 for hard pan (rock, very
Ru dense sand and gravel)
Ra = --------------- L = length of pile
FS A = cross-sectional area of pile
Ep = modulus of elasticity of pile
Where: n = coefficient of restitution (refer to table)
FS = factor of safety (min. = 3)
Ru = ultimate capacity of piles (KN)
Ra = capacity of pile (KN)–shall be greater than the Required minimum penetration of all piles shall
W = required weight of ram or hammer (KN) be six (6) meters. However, for exposed piles, the
H = height of fall of ram (mm) embedded length shall be equal or greater than the
Wp = weight of pile (KN) exposed length but not less than 6.0m.
S = average penetration for the last ten blows
K = (mm)
10 mm (unless otherwise observed/computed Note:
FS = during Formula for other pile hammers with suggested factor of
driving) safety should be as provided/recommended by their
factor of safety (min. = 3) respective manufacturer.

b. Hiley’s Formula shall be used when the ratio of the weight of

ram or hammer to weight of pile is less than one fourth (1/4).

efWH (W) (W + n2 Wp)

Ru = ------------------------------ x ---------------------------
S+1/2 (C1+C2+C3) (W + Wp) Values of C1 for Hiley Formula

Ru Temporary Compression Allowance C1 for Pile Head and Cap

Ra = --------------
FS Materials to Easy Driving: Medium Hard Driving: Very Hard
which blow is P1 = 3.45 Driving: P1 = 10.34 Driving:
where: applied MPa P1 = 6.90 MPa (1500 psi) P1 = 13.88
(500 psi) MPa on Head or MPa
Ru = ultimate capacity of pile (KN) on Pile Butt If (1000 psi) Cap. (2000 psi)
Ra = capacity of pile (KN) no cushion, on Head or mm (in.) on Head or
ef = efficiency of hammer (refer to table) mm (in.) Cap. Cap.
W = weight of ram (KN) mm (in.) mm (in.)
Wp = weight of pile (KN)
H = height of fall of ram (mm) Head of 1.27 (0.05) 2.54 (0.10) 3.81 (0.15) 5.08 (0.20)
S = average penetration for last ten blows (mm) timber pile
C1 = temporary compression allowance for pile
87
76–100mm Hammer Type ef
(3-4 in.) 1.27 + 1.778b 2.54 + 3.81b 3.81 + 5.588b 5.08 + 7.62b
packing (0.05 + 0.07)b (0.10 + 0.15)b (0.015 + 0.22)b (0.20 + 0.30)b Drop Hammer released by trigger 1.00
inside cap on Drop Hammer actuated by rope and friction winch 0.75
head of 0.635 (0.025) 1.27 (0.05) 1.905 (0.075) 2.54 (0.10) McKiernan-Terry Single-acting hammers 0.85
precast Warrington-Vulcan Single –acting hammers 0.75
concrete Differential-acting hammers 0.75
piles McKiernan-Terry, Industrial B. Ownhoist, National and 0.85
Union double-acting hammers
Concrete Pile 1.016 (0.04) 2.032 (0.08) 3.048 (0.12) 4.064 (0.16) Diesel Hammers 1.00

Steel-
covered cap.
containing
wood packing Values of Coefficient of Restitution, n
but steel Pile Type Head Condition Drop, Single Double
piling at pipe Acting or Acting
0.508 (0.02) 1.016 (0.04) 1.524 (0.06) 2.032 (0.08) Diesel Hammers
4.76mm Hammer
(3/16 in.) red Reinforced Helmet with composite
electrical 0 0 0 0 Concrete plastic or green heart 0.40 0.50
tuber disk dolly on top of pile
between two
10mm (3/8”) Helmet with Timber dolly, 0.25 0.40
steel plates, and packing on top of pile
for use with - 0.50
severe Hammer direct on pile
driving on with pad only
Monotube Steel Driving cap with Standard
pile plastic or greenheart 0.50 0.50
dolly
Head of steel 0.30 0.30
piling of pipe Driving cap with Timber
dolly - 0.50
b
The first figure represent the compression of the cap Hammer direct on pile
and wood dolly or packing above the cap, whereas the Timber Hammer direct on pile 0.25 0.40
second figure represent the compression of the wood
packing between the cap and the pile head. The formulas specified in the preceding Subsection for timber
piling may be used in determining a rough approximation for the bearing
P1 = Ru/A power of precast and cast-in-place concrete piles and of steel piles.
Values of Efficiency of Hammer, ef

88
 In all cases when the bearing power of concrete and steel piles is Unless otherwise specified, all piles shall be peeled removing all
determined by formula, the piles shall be driven until the safe bearing rough bark and at least 80 percent of the inner bark. Not less than 80
power of each is computed to be not less than 27 tonnes. percent of the surface on any circumference shall be clean wood. No
strip of inner bark remaining on the pile shall be more than 20mm wide
400.1.6 Safe Loads and 200mm long. All knots shall be trimmed close to the body of the pile.

When the safe bearing power of any pile is found by test or The pile sizes shall conform to the dimensions shown in Table
computation to be less than the design load, longer piles or additional 400.1.
piles shall be driven as ordered in writing by the Engineer.
Table 400.1 – Dimension of Piles
400.1.7 Jetted Piles
Length of Pile Diameter (1 metre from the Butt) Minimum Tip
The safe bearing power of jetted piles shall be determined by Diameter, mm
actual tests or by the appropriate methods and formulas given in the Minimum Maximum
preceding Subsections. No jet shall be used during the test blows. mm mm
Less than 12 300 450 200
400.2 Material Requirements metres 320 450 180
12 to 18 metres 350 500 150
The kind and type of piles shall be as specified on the Plans and More than 18
Bill of Quantities. No alternative type or kind of piling shall be used. metres

400.2.1 Untreated Timber Piles The diameter of the piles shall be measured in their peeled
condition. When the pile is not exactly round, the average of three
Timber shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated measurements may be used. For any structure, the butt diameters for the
and Untreated Timber. The specie shall be specified on the Plans. Unless same lengths of pile shall be as uniform as possible.
otherwise noted on the Plans or Special Provisions, only the best grade
shall be used. It shall be free from loose knots, splits, wormholes, decay, Square piles shall have the dimensions shown on the Plans.
warp, ring separation or any defect which will impair its strength or render
it unfit for its intended use. Any specie specified on the Plans may be 400.2.2 Treated Timber Piles
used for untreated timber and if the specie is not available, a specie of
equivalent strength and durability may be used if authorized by the Timber shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated
Engineer. and Untreated Timber. Treatment shall consist of the forcing of either
creosote oil or creosote petroleum oil mixture into the outer fibers of the
Round piles shall be cut above the ground swell and shall taper timber by a heat and pressure process. The process shall be in
from butt to tip. A line drawn from the center of the tip to the center of the accordance with ASTM D-1760 Standard Specification for Pressure
butt shall not fall outside of the cross-section of the pile at any point more Treatment of Timber Products, but with such changes as temperatures,
than one percent of the length of the pile. pressures, duration of treatment and other factors affecting the final
treatment that experience has shown to be necessary in the treatment of
In short bends, the distance from the center of the pile to a line structural timbers sawn from woods native to the Philippines. The
stretched from the center of the pile above the bend to the center of the treatment shall be so regulated that the curing process will not induce
pile below the bend shall not exceed four percent of the length of the excessive checking. The minimum penetration of the preservative into the
bend or a maximum of 65mm. surface of the timber shall be 20 mm. All piles shall retain the minimum
amount of preservative specified in Table 400.2.

89
 wire conforming to AASHTO M 204 or other high-tensile metals
Table 400.2 – Minimum Preservative Per Cubic Metre of Wood conforming to AASHTO Standards.

Type of Processing
Use Empty Cell Process Full Cell Process 400.2.4 Steel Shells
General Use 195 kg
Marine Use 320 kg 1. Shells Driven Without a Mandrel

The Engineer shall inspect the timber prior to the treatment to Unless otherwise called for on the Plans or Special Provisions,
determine conformance with the Specifications and suitability of shells for cast-in-place concrete piles shall have a minimum 305mm
conditions for treatment. He shall be permitted free access to the plant in diameter at cut off and a minimum 203mm diameter at tip: made from not
order that temperatures, pressures and quantities and type of treatment less than 4.55mm in thickness plate stock conforming to AASHTO M 183.
materials used may be observed. Samples of the creosote or creosote Shells may either be spirally welded or longitudinally welded and may
petroleum mixtures shall be furnished as required for test. either be tapered or constant in section. Tips shall be sealed as shown
The timber shall be checked to determine penetration of on the Plans.
treatment, quantity of free preservative remaining on the timber and any
visual evidence that the treatment has been performed in a satisfactory 2. Shells Driven With a Mandrel
manner. The penetration of treatment shall be determined by boring a
sufficient number of well-distributed holes to determine the average The shell shall be of sufficient strength and thickness to withstand
penetration. All such holes shall be plugged with plugs approximately 2 driving without injury and to resist harmful distortion and/or buckling due
mm larger in diameter than the bit used in boring the holes. to soil pressure after driven and the mandrel removed. Butt and tip
dimension shall be as called for on the Plans or Special Provisions.
If the penetration of preservative is less than the required amount,
the entire charge, or such parts thereof shall be retreated. If after 400.2.5 Steel Pipes
treatment the penetration is still insufficient, the treated pieces shall be
rejected. Filled Steel Pipes (filled with concrete) shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A 252, Grade 2, Welded and Seamless Pipe Piles.
400.2.3 Concrete Piles Closure Plates for closed piles shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 183.
Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Item 405,
Structural Concrete. Concrete shall be Class “C” unless otherwise Unfilled Tubular Steel Piles shall conform to the requirements of
specified in the Plans. ASTM A 252, Grade 2, with chemical requirements meeting ASTM
Designation A 53, Grade B. The wall thickness shall not be less than
Concrete shall be proportioned to achieve a range of 6”-8” (150 4.76mm.
mm to 200 mm) slump, self-compacting mix.
400.2.6 Steel H-Piles
The use of appropriate plasticizer/additives to assure mix fluidity
and consistency shall be allowed and with the Engineer’s approval. A Steel H-Piles shall be rolled steel sections of the weight and
retardant of proven adequacy and approved by the Engineer may be used shape called for on the Plans. They shall be structural steel meeting the
to ensure that early hardening of concrete during operation will not occur. requirements of AASHTO M 183 provided that, where the Special
Provisions called for copper-bearing structural steel, the steel shall not
Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of Item 404, contain less than one-fifth percent nor more than zero point thirty five
Reinforcing Steel. Prestressing reinforcing steel shall be high-tensile steel percent (0.35%) of copper, except that steel manufactured by the acid-
bessemer process shall not be used.
90
 The criterion for pile length may be one of the following:
400.2.7 Sheet Piles
1. Piles in sand and gravel shall be driven to a bearing power
Steel sheet piles shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 202 determined by the use of the pile driving formula or as
(ASTM A 328), or AASHTO M 223. All other sheet piles shall meet the decided by the Engineer.
requirements prescribed above the particular material specified. The 2. Piles in clay shall be driven to the depth ordered by the
joints shall be practically water-tight when the piles are in place. Engineer. However, the bearing power shall be controlled by
the pile driving formula if called for by the Engineer.
400.2.8 Pile Shoes 3. Piles shall be driven to refusal on rock or hard layer when so
ordered by the Engineer.
Pile shoes shall be as called for on the Plans.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the correct pile
length and bearing capacity according to the criteria given by the
Engineer.
400.2.9 Splices
400.3.3 Pile Driving
Material for pile splices, when splicing is allowed, shall be of the
same quality as the material used for the pile itself and shall follow the All piles shall be driven as shown on the Plans or as ordered in
requirements given on the Plans. writing by the Engineer. They shall be driven within an allowed variation
of 20mm per metre of pile length from the vertical or batter as shown on
400.2.10 Paint the Plans. The maximum allowable variation at the butt end of the pile
shall be 75mm in any direction from the location shown on the Plans or as
It shall conform to Item 709, Paints. directed by the Engineer. Each pile shall, after driving, be within 150mm
from the theoretical location underneath the pile cap or underneath the
400.3 Construction Requirements superstructure in case of pile bents. All piles pushed up by the driving of
adjacent piles or any other cause shall be redriven.
400.3.1 Location and Site Preparation
Piles shall be used only in places where the minimum penetration
Piles shall be driven where indicated on the Plans or as directed of 3m in firm materials, or 5m in soft materials can be obtained. Whereas
by the Engineer. soft upper stratum overlies a hard stratum, the piles shall penetrate the
hard materials at sufficient depths to fix the ends rigidly.
All excavations for the foundation on which the piles are to be
driven shall be completed before the pile driving, unless otherwise All pile driving equipment is subject to the Engineer’s approval.
specified or approved by the Engineer. After driving is completed, all The Contractor is responsible for sufficient weight and efficiency of the
loose and displaced materials shall be removed from around the piles by hammers to drive the piles down to the required depth and bearing
hand excavation, leaving clean solid surface to receive the concrete of the capacity. Hammers shall be gravity hammers, single and double acting
foundation. Any requirement for granular fill and lean concrete shall be steam or pneumatic hammers or diesel hammers. Gravity hammers shall
indicated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. not weigh less than 60 percent of the combined weight of the pile and
driving head but not less than 2,000 kg. The fall shall be regulated so as
400.3.2 Determination of Pile Length to avoid injury to the pile and shall in no case exceed 4.50m for timber
and steel piles and 2.50m for concrete piles unless otherwise specified or
Pile length and bearing capacity shall be determined by the approved by the Engineer.
Engineer from the results of the test piling and load tests.

91
 The plant and equipment furnished for steam hammers shall have
sufficient capacity to maintain, under working condition, the pressure at Piles shall not be driven within 7 m of concrete less than 7 days
the hammer specified by the manufacturer. The boiler or pressure tank old.
shall be equipped with an accurate pressure gauge and another gauge
shall be supplied at the hammer intake to determine the drop in pressure 400.3.4 Timber Piles
between the gauges. When diesel hammers or any other types requiring
calibration are used, they shall be calibrated with test piling and/or test Piles shall be strapped with three metal straps: one about
loads in accordance with Subsection 400.1.2, Test Piles. 450mm from the butt, one about 600mm from the butt, and the third,
about 300mm from the tip. Additional straps shall be provided at about
Water jets shall be used only when permitted in writing by the 4.5m on centers between tip and butt. Strapping should encircle the pile
Engineer. When water jets are used, the number of jets and the nozzle once and be tensioned as tightly as possible. Straps shall be 38mm wide,
volume and pressure shall be sufficient to erode freely the material 0.8mm thick, cold rolled, fully heat treated, high tensile strapping, painted
adjacent to the pile. The plant shall have sufficient capacity to deliver at and waxed.
all time a pressure equivalent to at least 690 KPa at two 19 mm (3/4 inch)
jet nozzles. The jets shall be shut off before the required penetration is Treated piles shall be strapped after treatment.
reached and the piles shall be driven solely by hammers to final
penetration as required by the Engineer. Point protection shall be considered for all timber piles. Where
timber piles must penetrate dump fill, or may encounter obstructions or be
Piles shall be supported in line and position with leads while driven to hard strata, point protection shall be used. A boot that
being driven. Pile driving leads shall be constructed in such a manner as encompasses and utilizes the entire end area of the pile is preferred.
to afford freedom of movement of the hammer, and shall be held in
position by guys or steel braces to insure rigid lateral support to the pile 400.3.5 Timber Pile Bents
during driving. The leads shall be of sufficient length to make the use of a
follower unnecessary and shall be so designed as to permit proper Piles for any one bent shall be carefully selected as to size, to
placing of batter piles. The driving of the piles with followers shall be avoid undue bending or distortion of the sway bracing. Care shall be
avoided if practicable and shall be done only under written permission exercised in the distribution of piles of various sizes to obtain uniform
from the Engineer. strength and rigidity in the bents of any given structure.

The method used in driving piles shall not subject them to Cut offs shall be made accurately to insure full being between
excessive and undue abuse producing crushing and spalling of the caps and piles of bents.
concrete, injurious splitting, splintering and brooming of the wood or
deformation of the steel. Manipulation of piles to force them into proper 400.3.6 Precast Concrete Piles
position if considered by the Engineer too excessive will not be permitted.
Precast concrete piles shall be of the design shown on the Plans.
The pile tops shall be protected by driving heads, caps or Prestressed concrete piles shall be prestressed as prescribed in Item
cushions in accordance with the recommendation of the manufacturer of 406, Prestressed Concrete Structures. The piles shall be cast separately
the pile hammer and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The driving head and concrete in each pile shall be place continuously. The completed
shall be provided to maintain the axis of the pile with the axis of the piles shall be free from stone pockets, honeycombs, or other defects, and
hammer and provide a driving surface normal to the pile. shall be straight and true to the form specified. The forms shall be true to
line and built of metal, plywood or dressed lumber. A 25mm chamfer strip
Full length piles shall be used where practicable. Splicing of piles shall be used in all corners. Form shall be water-tight and shall not be
when permitted, shall be in accordance with the provisions of Subsection removed until at least twenty-four (24) hours after the concrete is placed.
400.3.7 and 400.3.8. All piles shall be continuously driven unless
otherwise allowed by the Engineer.
92
 Piles shall be cured and finished in accordance with Items 405, any reinforcing cage, whichever is greater, shall be consolidated by
Structural Concrete and 406, Prestressed Concrete Structures. acceptable vibratory equipment,

Cylinder specimens shall be made and tested in accordance with Casing, if used in drilling operations, may be left in place or
Item 405. Piles shall not be moved until the tests indicate that the removed from the hole as concrete is placed. The bottom of the casing
concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least 80 percent shall be maintained not more than 1.5m nor less than 0.3m below the top
(80%) of the design 28-day compressive strength and they shall not be of the concrete during withdrawal and placing operations unless otherwise
transported or driven until the design 28-day compressive strength has permitted by the Engineer. Separation of the concrete during withdrawal
been attained. operations shall be avoided by vibrating the casing.

If testing equipment is not available, as in isolated areas, piles 2. Steel Shells and Pipes
shall not be moved until after fourteen (14) days after casting and shall
not be transported or driven prior to 28 days after casting. If high early The inside of shells and pipes shall be cleaned and all loose
strength cement is used, piles shall not be moved, transported or driven materials removed before concrete is placed. The concrete shall be
prior to 7 days after casting. placed in one continuous operation from tip to cut-off elevation and shall
be carried on in such a manner as to avoid segregation.
When concrete piles are lifted or moved, they shall be supported
at the points shown on the Plans; if not shown, they shall be supported at The top 3m of concrete filled shells, or to the depth of any
the quarter points. reinforcing cage, whichever is greater, shall be consolidated by
acceptable vibratory equipment.
400.3.7 Cast-in-place Concrete Piles
Pipes shall be of the diameter shown on the Plans. The pipe wall
1. Drilled Holes thickness shall not be less than that shown on the Plans but in no case
less than 5mm. The pipe, including end closures, shall be of sufficient
All holes for concrete piles cast in drilled holes shall be drilled dry strength to be driven by the specified methods without distortion.
to tip elevation shown on the Plans. All holes will be examined for
straightness and any hole which on visual inspection from the top shows Closure plates and connecting welds shall not project more than
less than one-half the diameter of the hole at the bottom of the hole will 12.5mm beyond the perimeter of the pile tips.
be rejected. Suitable casings shall be furnished and placed when
required to prevent caving of the hole before concrete is placed. No shell or pipe shall be filled with concrete until all adjacent
shells, pipes, or piles within a radius of 1.5m or 4 ½ times the average pile
All loose material existing at the bottom of the hole after drilling diameter, whichever is greater, have been driven to the required
operations have been completed shall be removed before placing resistance.
concrete.
After a shell or pipe has been filled with concrete, no shell, pipe or
The use of water for drilling operations or for any other purpose pile shall be driven within 6m thereof until at least 7 days have elapsed.
where it may enter the hole will not be permitted. All necessary action
shall be taken to prevent surface water from entering the hole and all 3. Drilled Shafts
water which may have infiltrated into the hole shall be removed before
placing concrete. Drilled shafts are deep foundations formed by boring a cylindrical
hole into soil and/or rock and filling the hole with concrete. Drilled shafts
Concrete shall be placed by means of suitable tubes. Prior to the are also commonly referred to as caissons, bored piles or drilled piers.
initial concrete set, the top 3m of the concrete filled pile or the depth of

93
 Drilled shafts, like driven piles, transfer structural loads to bearing
stratum well below the base of the structure by passing soils having Particular attention should be given to the potential for
insufficient strength to carry the design loads. deposition of loose or wet material in the bottom of the hole, or the
buildup of a cake of soft material around the shaft perimeter prior to
Drilled shafts are classified according to their primary mechanism concrete placement. Adequate cleaning and inspection of rock sockets
for deriving load resistance either as floating shafts (i.e., shafts should always be performed to assure good contact between the rock and
transferring load primarily by side resistance), or end-bearing shafts (i.e., shaft concrete. If good contact along the shaft cannot be confirmed, it
shafts transferring load primarily by tip resistance). Occasionally, the may be necessary to assume that all load is transferred to the tip. If the
bases of shafts are enlarged (i.e., belled or underreamed) to improved the deposition of soft or loose material in the bottom of the hole is expected,
load capacity of end bearing shafts on less than desirable soils, or to the shaft may have to be designed to carry the entire design load through
increase the uplift resistance of floating shafts. side resistance.

Effects of ground and ground water conditions on shaft A number of methods can be used to prevent caving during the
construction operations should be considered and delineated, when drilling of holes and the placement of concrete. It is preferred that drilled
necessary, the general method of construction to be followed to ensure shafts be constructed in stable non-sloughing soil without excessive
the expected performance. Because shafts derive their capacity from ground water. If impossible, consider the following three different
side and tip resistance which are a function of the condition of the construction methods:
materials in direct contact with the shaft, it is important that the
construction procedures be consistent with the material conditions a. The construction of the pile or shaft in a wet condition while
assumed in the design. Softening, loosening or other changes in soil and the walls of the excavation are stabilized by hydrostatic pressure of water
rock conditions caused by the construction method could result in a or a mineral slurry until the concrete is placed by tremie methods for the
reduction in shaft capacity and an increase in shaft displacement. full length of the pile.
Therefore, evaluation of the effects of shaft construction procedure on
load capacity must be considered an inherent aspect of the design. Mineral slurry used in the drilling process shall have both a
mineral grain size that will remain in suspension and sufficient viscosity
Drilled shafts are normally sized in 15.24cm (6-inch diameter and gel characteristics to transport excavated material to a suitable
increments with a minimum diameter of 45.72cm (18”). The diameter of a screening system. The percentage and specific gravity of the material
shaft socketed into rock should be a minimum of 15.24cm (6”) larger than used to make the suspension shall be sufficient to maintain the stability of
the socket diameter. If a shaft must be inspected by the entry of a the excavation and to allow proper concrete placement. The level of the
person, the shaft diameter shall not be less than 76.20cm (30”). slurry shall be maintained at a height sufficient to prevent caving of the
hole.
Drilled shafts constructed in dry, noncaving soils can usually be
excavated without lateral support of the hole. Other ground conditions The mineral slurry shall be premixed thoroughly with clean fresh
where caving, squeezing or sloughing soils are present require installation water and adequate time allotted for hydration prior to introduction into the
of a steel casing or use of a slurry for support of the hole. Such shaft excavation. Adequate slurry tanks will be required when specified.
conditions and techniques may result in loosening of soil around the shaft, No excavated slurry pits will be allowed when slurry tanks are required on
or altering of frictional resistance between the concrete shaft and the project without written permission of the Engineer. Adequate
surrounding soil. desanding equipment will be required when specified. Steps shall be
taken as necessary to prevent the slurry from “setting up” in the shaft
The center-to-center spacing between shafts is normally excavation, such as agitation, circulation, and adjusting the properties of
restricted to a minimum of 3B to minimize the effects of interaction the slurry.
between adjacent shafts during construction or in service. However,
larger spacings may be required where drilling operations are difficult or Control tests using suitable apparatus shall be carried out by the
where construction must be completed in very short time frames. Contractor on the mineral slurry to determine density, viscosity, and pH.
94
An acceptable range of values for those physical properties is shown in
the following table. The base of the shaft excavation may be cleaned using a
cleaning bucket followed by airlifting. Reverse circulation techniques may
Range of Values (At 20o [68oF]) also be used to clean the base of the shaft.

Property Time of Slurry Time of Test The shaft excavation shall be cleaned so that a minimum of 50
(Units) Introduction Concreting Method percent of the base will have less than 12.5mm of sediment and at no
(In Hole) place on the base more than 37.5mm of sediment. The Engineer will
Density 10.10 to 10.86 10.10 to 11.79 Density determine shaft cleanliness.
(KN/m3) 64.3 to 69.1 64.3 to 75.0 Balance
(pcf) b. The use of steel casing which is installed during drilling
operations to hold the hole open and usually withdrawn during concrete
Viscosity 28 to 45 28 to 45 Marsh placement.
(sec. per quart) Cone
Casing, if used in operation, shall be metal, smooth, clean,
pH 8 to 11 8 to 11 pH Paper watertight, and of ample strength to withstand both handling and driving
or Meter stresses and the pressure of both concrete and the surrounding earth
materials. The outside diameter of casing shall not be less than the
Note: specified size of the shaft. It shall conform to AASHTO M 270 (ASTM A
a) Increase density values by 0.314 KN/m3 (2 pcf) in salt 709) Grade 36 unless otherwise specified.
water.
Temporary casings shall be removed while the concrete remains
b) If desanding is required; sand content shall not workable. Generally the removal of temporary casing shall not be started
exceed 4 percent (by volume) at any point in the until concrete placement in the shaft is at or above ground surface.
shaft excavation as determined by the American Movement of casing by rotating, exerting downward pressure and tapping
Petroleum Institute sand content test. to facilitate extraction or extraction with a vibratory hammer will be
permitted. Casing extraction shall be at a slow, uniform rate with the pull
Tests to determine density, viscosity and pH values shall be done in line with the shaft axis.
during the shaft excavation to establish a consistent working pattern.
A sufficient head of concrete shall be maintained above the
Prior to placing shaft concrete, slurry samples shall be taken from bottom of the casing to overcome the hydrostatic pressure of water or
the bottom and at intervals not exceeding 3.05m (10 feet) for the full drilling fluid outside of the casing.
height of slurry. Any heavily contaminated slurry that has accumulated at
the bottom of the shaft shall be eliminated. The mineral slurry shall be c. The use of a permanent casing which is left in place within
within specification requirements immediately before shaft concrete the portion of the pile which is in unstable material.
placement.
A permanent casing is applied as protection from the presence of
Excavation Inspection surface water during drilling and as support later for the installation of the
rebar cage and as a concrete form in drilling under water.
The Contractor shall provide equipment for checking the
dimensions and alignment of each shaft excavation. The Contractor Reinforcing Steel Cage Construction and Placement
under the direction of the Engineer shall determine the dimensions and
alignment of the drilled shaft. Final shaft depth shall be measured after The reinforcing steel cage consisting of the steel shown on the
final cleaning. Plans plus cage stiffener bars, spacers, centralizers and any other
95
necessary appurtenances shall be completely assembled and placed as a
unit immediately after the shaft excavation is inspected and accepted and After placement, the temporarily exposed surfaces of the shaft
prior to shaft concrete placement. concrete shall be cured in accordance with the provision in Sub-section
407.3.8 – Curing Concrete.
Where the reinforcing cage length is too long for placement as a
single unit the cage may be placed in separate units such that appropriate For at least 48 hours after pile concrete has been placed, no
means of splicing the longitudinal steel is provided for. The Contractor construction operations that would cause soil movement adjacent to the
shall submit his plans for such splices to the Engineer for approval. shaft, other than mild vibration, shall be conducted.

The reinforcing steel in the hole shall be tied and supported so Construction Tolerances:
that the reinforcing steel will remain within allowable tolerances until the
concrete will support the reinforcing steel. When concrete is placed by The following tolerances shall be maintained in constructing
suitable tubes, temporary hold-down devices shall be used to prevent drilled shaft.
uplifting of the steel cage during concrete placement. Concrete spacers
or other approved noncorrosive spacing devices shall be used at a. The drilled shaft shall be within 7.62cm (6”) of the plan position
sufficient intervals not exceeding 1.50 meters along the shaft to insure in the horizontal plane at the plan elevation for the top of the
concentric location of the cage within the shaft excavation. When the size shaft.
of the longitudinal reinforcing steel exceeds 25mm, such spacing shall not
exceed 3.0 meters. b. The vertical alignment of the shaft excavation shall not vary
from the plan alignment by more than 20.83 mm/m (1/4 inch
Concrete Placement, Curing and Protection per foot) of depth.

Concrete shall be placed as soon as possible after reinforcing steel c. After all the shaft concrete is placed, the top of the
cage placement. Concrete placement shall be continuous in the shaft to reinforcing steel cage shall be no more than 15.24 cm (6”)
the top elevation of the shaft. Placement shall continue after the shaft is above and no more than 7.62 cm (3”) below plan position.
full until good quality concrete is evident at the top of the shaft. Concrete
shall be placed through a suitable tube. d. When casing is used, its outside diameter shall not be less
than the shaft diameter shown on the plans. When casing is
For piles less than 2.5 meters in diameter, the elapsed time from not used, the minimum diameter of the drilled shaft shall be
the beginning of concrete placement in the shaft to the completion of the diameter shown on the plans for diameters 60.96 cm (24”)
placement shall not exceed 2 hours. For piles 2.50 meters and greater in or less, and not more than 2.54 cm (1 inch) less than the
diameter, the concrete placing rate shall not be less than 9.0 meters of diameter shown on the plans for diameters greater than 60.96
pile height per each 2-hour period. The concrete mix shall be of such cm (24”).
design that the concrete remains in a workable plastic state throughout
the 2-hour placement limit. e. The bearing area of bells shall be excavated to the plan
bearing area as a minimum. All other plan dimensions shown
When the top of pile elevation is above ground, the portion of the for the bells may be varied, when approved, to accommodate
pile above ground shall be formed with a removable form or permanent the equipment used.
casing when specified.
f. The top elevation of the shaft shall be within 2.54 cm (1 inch)
The upper 1.5 meters of concrete shall be vibrated or rodded to a of the plan top of shaft elevation.
depth of 1.5 meter below the ground surface except where soft uncased
soil or slurry remaining in the excavation will possibly mix with the
concrete.
96
 g. The bottom of the shaft excavation shall be normal to the axis a. By using prefabricated joints mounted in the forms and cast
of the shaft within 62.5 mm/m (3/4 inch per foot) of shaft together with the piles sections and joined together as
diameter. specified by the manufac-turer and approved by the
Engineer. The joints shall be of the design and type as
Drilled shaft excavations constructed in such a manner that the specified or shown on the Plans.
concrete shaft cannot be completed within the required tolerances are
unacceptable. b. By cutting away the concrete at the end of the pile, leaving the
reinforcing steel exposed for a length of 40 bar diameters for
400.3.8 Steel H-Pile corrugated or deformed bars and 60 bar diameters for plain
bars. The final cut of the concrete shall be perpendicular to
Steel H-Pile shall consist of structural steel shapes of the sections the axis of the pile. Reinforcement of the same size as that
indicated on the Plans. used in the pile shall be spliced to the projecting steel in
accordance with Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, and the
When placed in the leads, the pile shall not exceed the camber necessary formwork shall be placed, care being taken to
and sweep permitted by allowable mill tolerance. Piles bent or otherwise prevent leakage along the pile. The concrete shall be of the
damaged will be rejected. same quality as that used in the pile. Just prior to placing
concrete, the top of the pile shall be wetted thoroughly and
The loading, transporting, unloading, storing and handling of steel covered with a thin coating of neat cement, retempered
H-pile shall be conducted so that the metal will be kept clean and free mortar, or other suitable bonding material to the satisfaction
from damage. of the Engineer. The forms shall remain in place not less
than seven (7) days. The pile shall not be driven until the
400.3.9 Unfilled Tubular Steel Piles safe design has been reached.

The tubular steel piles should be or as specified by the Engineer. c. By any other method shown on the Plans or approved by the
Engineer. Curing and finishing of extensions shall be the
The minimum wall thickness shall be as indicated in the following same as in the original pile.
table:
2. Prestressed Piles

Outside Diameter Less than 355 mm 355 mm and over Splicing of prestressed precast piles will generally not be
permitted, but when permitted, it shall be made in accordance
Minimum wall thickness 6.5 mm 9.5 mm with (1) above, but only after driving has been completed.
Reinforcement bars shall be included in the pile head for splicing
Cutting shoes for piles driven open end may be inside or outside to the extension bars. No additional driving will be permitted.
of the pipe. They may be high carbon structural steel with a machined The Contractor, at his option, may submit alternative plans of
ledged for pile bearing or cast steel with a ledge, designed for attachment splicing for consideration by the Engineer.
with a simple weld.
400.3.10 Splicing 3. Steel Piles, Shells or Pipes

Splicing when permitted shall be made as shown on the Plans If the length of the steel pile, shell or pipe driven is insufficient
and in accordance with this Subsection. to obtain the specified bearing power, an extension of the same
cross-section shall be spliced to it. Unless otherwise shown on
1. Precast Concrete Piles the Plans, splices shall be made by butt-welding the entire cross-
sections to form an integral pile using the electric arc method.
97
 The sections connected shall be properly aligned so that the axis
of the pile shall be straight. Bent and/or damaged piles shall be 3. The pile shall be spliced or built-up as otherwise provided
rejected. herein on the underside of the footing lowered to properly
embed the pile.
400.3.11 Cutting Off and Capping Piles
A precast concrete pile shall be considered defective if it has a
The top of foundation piles shall be embedded in the concrete visible crack, extending around the four sides of the pile, or any defect
footing as shown on the Plans. which, in the opinion of the Engineer, affects the strength or life of the
pile.
Concrete piles shall, when approved by the Engineer, be cut off
at such a level that at least 300mm of undamaged pile can be embedded When a new pile is driven or cast to replace a rejected one, the
in the structure above. If a pile is damaged below this level, the Contractor at his own expense, shall enlarge the footing as deemed
Contractor shall repair the pile to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The necessary by the Engineer.
longitudinal reinforcement of the piles shall be embedded in the structure
above to a length equal to at least 40 times the diameter of the main
reinforcing corrugated bars (60 diameters for plain bars). The distance 400.3.13 Protecting Untreated Timber Trestle Piles
from the side of any pile to the nearest edge of the cap shall not be less
than 200mm. The heads of untreated piles shall be treated as follows:

When the cut off elevation for a precast pile or for the steel shell The sawed surface shall be thoroughly brush-coated with two (2)
or pile for a cast in place concrete pile is below the elevation of the bottom applications of hot creosote oil or other approved preservative.
of the pile cap, the pile may be built-up from the butt of the pile to the
elevation of the bottom of the cap by means of reinforced concrete 400.3.14 Protecting Treated Timber Trestle Piles
extension constructed in accordance with Subsection 400.3.10 or as
approved by the Engineer. All cuts and abrasions in treated timber piles shall be protected by
a preservative approved by the Engineer.
Cut-offs of structural steel piles shall be made at right angles to
the axis of the pile. The cuts shall be made in clear, straight lines and any 400.3.15 Painting Steel Piles
irregularity due to cutting or burning shall be leveled-off with deposits of
weld metal prior to placing bearing caps. Unless otherwise provided, when required steel piles extend
above the ground surface or water surface, they shall be protected by
400.3.12 Defective Piles paint as specified for cleaning and painting metal surfaces in accordance
with Item 403, Metal Structures. This protection shall extend from the
Any pile delivered with defects, or damaged in driving due to elevation shown on the Plans to the top of the exposed steel.
internal defects or by improper driving, or driven out of its proper location,
or driven below the elevation fixed by the Plans or by the Engineer, shall 400.3.16 Pile Records
be corrected at the Contractor’s expense by one of the following methods
approved by the Engineer for the pile in question: The Contractor shall keep records of all piles driven or installed.
A copy of the record shall be given to the Engineer within two (2) days
1. Any pile delivered with defects shall be replaced by a new after each pile is driven. The record form to be used shall be approved by
pile. the Engineer. The pile records shall give full information on the following:

2. Additional pile shall be driven/casted at the location as

directed by the Engineer.
98
 400.4 Method of Measurement
Driven Piles Cast-in-Place Piles
1. Pile type and dimension 1. Date of boring or driving 400.4.1 Timber, Steel and Precast Concrete Piles
(For steel shell) & casting
2. Date of casting and concrete 2. Pile type and nominal 1. Piles Furnished
quality (for concrete piles) dimension
3. Date of driving 3. Length of finished pile and The quantity to be paid for will be the sum of the lengths in
tip metres of the piles of the several types and lengths ordered in
elevation writing by the Engineer, furnished in compliance with these
4. Driving equipment: type, 4. Details of penetration during Specifications and stockpiles in good condition at the project site
weight & efficiency of boring or driving of steel by the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer. The length to
hammer, shell be paid for will include test and tension piles ordered by the
etc. (driving records as for Engineer, but not those furnished by the Contractor at his option.
driven No allowance will be made for piles, including test piles, furnished
piles) by the Contractor to replace piles previously accepted by the
5. Description of cushion on 5. Concrete quality and Engineer that are subsequently lost or damaged while in
pile consis- stockpile, or during handling or driving, and are ordered by the
head tency Engineer to be removed from the site of work.

6. Depth driven and tip 6. Time interval between In case extensions of piles are necessary, the extension
elevation boring length will be included in the length of pile furnished, except for
or driving and concreting cut off lengths used for extensions and already measured for
payment.
7. Final set for the last 20 blows 7. Volume of concrete placed
(for every 10 piles and when in 2. Piles Driven
the Engineer so requires the concrete
penetration along the whole The quantity to be paid for will be the sum of the lengths in
depth driven shall be metres of the piles driven in the completed work measured from
recorded) the pile tip elevation to the bottom of pile caps, footings or bottom
8. For gravity and single-acting of concrete superstructure in the case of pile bents.
hammers: the height of drop Measurement will not include additional piles or test piles driven
9. For double acting-hammers - that may be necessary to suit the Contractor’s method of
-- construction and were driven at his option.
the frequency of blows
10. Details of any interruption in Unless otherwise provided for, preboring, jetting or other
driving methods used for facilitating pile driving operations will not be
11. Level of pile top immediately measured directly but will be considered subsidiary to pay items.
after driving and the level
when all piles in the group 400.4.2 Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles
are
driven The quantity to be paid for will be the sum of actual lengths in
12. Details of re-driving meters of the piles cast and left in-place in the completed and accepted
work. Measurements will be from the pile tip to the bottom of cap or
footing. Portions of
99
piles cast deeper than the required length through over-drilling will not be
measured for payment. Pay Item Description Unit of
Number Measurement
400.4.3 Pile Shoes
400 (1) Untreated Timber Piles, furnished Meter
The quantity to be paid for, including test pile shoes, will be the 400 (2) Treated Timber Piles, preservative, Meter
number of pile shoes driven shown on the Plans or ordered in writing by 400 (3) furnished Meter
the Engineer, furnished by the Contractor in accordance with these 400 (4) Steel H-Piles, furnished Meter
Specifications and accepted by the Engineer. Pile shoes furnished by the 400 (5) Precast Concrete Piles, furnished Meter
Contractor at his option or to replace those that are lost or damaged in 400 (6) Precast, Prestresssed Concrete Piles, Meter
stockpile or handling will not be measured for payment. 400 (7) furnished Meter
400 (8) Structural Steel Sheet Piles, furnished Meter
400.4.4 Load Tests 400 (9) Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, furnished Meter
400 (10) Untreated Timber Piles, driven Meter
The quantity of the load tests to be paid for will be the number of 400 (11) Treated Timber Piles, driven Meter
tests completed and accepted except that load tests made to calibrate 400 (12) Steel H-Piles, driven Meter
different types of hammers, if not included in the Bill of Quantities, will not 400 (13) Steel Pipes Piles Meter
be measured for payment. 400 (14) Structural Steel Sheet Piles, driven Meter
400 (15) Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, driven Meter
Anchor and test piling which are not part of the completed 400 (16) Precast Concrete Piles, driven Meter
structure, will be included in the unit bid price for each “Load Test”. 400 (17) Precast, Prestresssed Concrete Piles, Meter
Anchor and test piling or anchor and test shafts which are a part of the 400 (18) driven Meter
permanent structure will be paid for under the appropriate Item. 400 (19) Test Piles, furnished and driven Meter
400 (20) Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes Each
400.4.5 Splices 400 (21) Concrete Piles cast in Steel Shells Each
400 (22) Concrete Piles cast in Steel Pipes Each
The quantity to be paid for will be the number of splices which 400 (23) Pile Shoes Meter
may be required to drive the pile in excess of the estimated length shown 400 (24) Splices Meter
on the Plans for cast-in-place steel pipes or shells or in excess of the Load Tests
order length furnished by the Engineer for all other types of piling. Splices Bored Piles (dia. __m)
made for the convenience of the Contractor or to fabricate piles cut offs Permanent Casing (dia. ___m)
will not be paid for.

400.5 Basis of Payment ITEM 401 – RAILINGS

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 401.1 Description

400.4 shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the particular
item listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities, which price and This Item shall consist of furnishing or fabricating and/or placing
payment shall be full compensa-tion for furnishing and placing all railings, for bridges and other structures of the material or combination of
materials, including all labor, equipment tools and incidentals as well as materials shown on the Plans, constructed in reasonably close conformity
temporary works, staging areas or craneway necessary to complete the with this Specification and to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on
work prescribed in this Item. the Plans. Railings shall be classified as concrete, steel, aluminum or
timber in accordance with the predomi-nating material contained in each.
Payment will be made under:
100
 posts shall be set plumb in hand or mechanically dug holes, unless
401.2 Material Requirements driving is permitted. In the latter case, the manner of driving shall be such
as to avoid battering or distorting of post. Post holes shall be backfilled
401.2.1 Concrete with acceptable material placed in layers and thoroughly compacted.
When it is necessary to cut post holes in existing pavement, all loose
It shall conform to the applicable requirements prescribed in Item materials shall be removed and the paving replaced in kind. Bridge
405, Structural Concrete. railings shall not be placed on a span until centering or falsework has
been removed, rendering the span self-supporting.
401.2.2 Reinforcing Steel
Rail elements shall be erected according to Plans and in a
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel manner resulting in a smooth, continuous installation with laps in the
and Wire Rope. direction of traffic flow. All bolts except adjustment bolts shall be drawn
tight. Bolts shall be of sufficient length to extend beyond the nuts by more
401.2.3 Steel than 25 mm.

Structural steel consisting of steel and iron plates, shapes, pipes, Where painting of railing component is specified, any damage to
fittings and castings shall conform to the requirements of Item 403, Metal the shop coat of paint shall be corrected by an application of an approved
Structures. rust-inhibitive primer prior to painting. Ungalvanized surfaces
inaccessible to painting after erection shall be field painted before
401.2.4 Aluminum erection. The railing components shall be given the specified number of
coats of paint uniformly applied by thorough brushing or by approved
It shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 193, ASTM B pressure spray.
221 or ASTM B 308 or as called for on the Plans.
Galvanized surfaces which have been abraded so that the base
401.2.5 Timber metal is exposed, threaded portions of all fittings and fasteners and cut
ends of bolts shall be painted with two (2) coats of zinc-dust and zinc
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated and oxide paint.
Untreated Timber.
401.3.2 Metal Railing
401.2.6 Stones and Bricks
Fabrication and erection shall be done in accordance with the
These shall conform to the requirements of Item 505, Stone requirements of Item 403, Metal Structures. In the case of welded
Masonry and Item 704, Masonry Units. railings, all exposed joints shall be finished by grinding or filing after
welding to give a neat appearance.
401.2.7 Paint
Metal railing shall be carefully adjusted prior to fixing in-place to
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 709, Paints. insure proper matching of abutting joints, correct alignment and camber
throughout their length. Holes for field connection shall be drilled with the
401.3 Construction Requirements railing in-place in the structure at proper grade and alignment. Welding
may be substituted for rivets or bolts in field connections with the approval
401.3.1 General of the Engineer.

Railings shall be constructed to the lines and grades shown on 401.3.3 Concrete Railing
the Plans and shall not reflect any unevenness in the structure. All railing
101
 1. Railing Cast-In-Place The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of linear meters of
specified railing actually completed and accepted measured from center
The portion of the railing or parapet which is to be cast-in- to center of end posts.
place shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of
Item 405, Structural Concrete. Special care shall be exercised to 401.5 Basis of Payment
secure smooth and tight fitting forms which can be rigidly held in
line and grade and removed without injury to the concrete. The accepted quality, measured as prescribed in Section 401.4,
shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Railing, which price and
Forms shall either be of single width boards or shall be lined payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials
with suitable material to have a smooth surface which shall meet including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
the approval of the Engineer or as shown on the Plans. complete this Item.

All moldings, panel work and bevel strips shall be constructed Payment will be made under:
according to the detailed Plans with metered joints, and all
corners in the finished work shall be true, sharp and clean-cut
and shall be free from cracks, spalls and other defects. Pay Description Unit of
Item Number Measurement
2. Precast Railings
401 Railing Meter
Moist tamped mortar precast members shall be removed from
the molds as soon as practicable and shall be kept damp for a
period of at least ten (10) days. Any member that shows ITEM 402 – TIMBER STRUCTURES
checking of soft corners of surfaces shall be rejected.

Expansion joints shall be constructed as to permit freedom of 402.1 Description

movement. After all work is completed, all loose or thin shells of
mortar likely to spall under movement shall be carefully removed This Item shall consist of the construction of timber structures to
from all expansion joints by means of a sharp chisel. the dimensions, lines and grades as shown on the Plans or as ordered by
the Engineer in accordance with these Specifications. The timber shall be
401.3.4 Wooden Railing treated or untreated as called for on the Plans or Special Provisions.

Wooden railing shall be constructed in accordance with the 402.2 Material Requirements
requirements of Item 402, Timber Structures.
402.2.1 Timber
401.3.5 Stone and Brick Railing
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated and
The materials used in masonry brick railing and parapet and the Untreated Timber.
work to be done shall conform to the requirements of this Specification.
The workmanship shall be first class and the finished construction shall 402.2.2 Hardware
be neat in appearance and true to line and grade.
All hardware shall be of the kind and size specified on the Plans.
401.4 Method of Measurement All bolts, including drift bolts, shall be either wrought iron or medium steel.
Washers shall be either ogee gray iron casting or malleable cast iron
unless cut washers are specified on the Plans.
102
 has been damaged by the Contractor shall be replaced by him without
Bolts shall have square heads and nuts, unless otherwise extra compensation.
specified. Nails shall be cut or round wire of standard form. Spikes shall
be cut wire or spikes, or boat spikes, as specified. All hardware shall be Any cut made or hole bored in treated timber that shall expose
galvanized in conformity with AASHTO M 232 or cadmium plated per untreated wood shall be given three coats of hot creosote or carbolineum
ASTM M 165 Type OS, unless otherwise specified on the Plans or before the exposed part is assembled.
Special Provisions.
402.3.3 Timber Treatment
402.2.3 Paint
Treatment shall consist of the forcing of either creosote oil or a
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 709, Paints or Item 411, Paint. creosote-petroleum oil mixture into the outer fibers of the timber by a heat
and pressure process. The treatment shall be so regulated that the
402.2.4 Structural Steel curing process will not induce excessive checking.

It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 712, The minimum penetration of the preservative with the surface of
Structural Metal. the timber shall be 20mm. The minimum retention of preservative per
cubic metre of timber shall be as follows:
402.2.5 Preservatives
For general use, 195 kg by empty cell process
The preservative shall be creosote oil or creosote petroleum oil
blend as called for on the Plans or by the Special Provisions, and shall For marine use, 320 kg by full cell process
conform to the Specifications for timber preservatives of the AASHTO M
133. The Engineer shall be notified at least ten (10) days in advance of
the date that the treating process will be performed in order that the
When timber is intended for marine use, creosote petroleum oil untreated timber, the treatment process, and the finished treated timber
blend shall not be used. may all be inspected. The Engineer will inspect the timber prior to
treatment to determine conformance with the Specifications and suitability
402.3 Construction Requirements of conditions for treatment. He shall be permitted free access to the plant
in order that temperatures, pressures and quantities and types of
402.3.1 Storage of Materials treatment materials used may be observed. Samples of the creosote or
creosote-petroleum mixture shall be furnished as required for tests.
All timber which is to be stored on the job for any length of time
prior to its use in the structure shall be neatly stacked in piles to prevent After completion of the treatment, the timber shall be checked to
warping or distortion. Untreated timber shall be open-stacked at least determine penetration of treatment, amount of checking, quantity of free
300mm above the ground and the stack shall be sloped so as to shed preservative remaining of the timber and any other visual evidence that
water. Creosote-treated timber shall be close-stacked and piled to the treatment has been performed in a satisfactory manner. The
prevent warping. The ground under-neath and in the vicinity of all penetration of treatment shall be determined by boring a sufficient number
material piles shall be cleared of all weeds and rubbish. of well-distributed holes to determine the average penetration. All such
holes shall be plugged with plugs approximately 2mm larger in diameter
402.3.2 Treated Timber than the bit used in boring the holes.

All treated timber shall be framed prior to treating. Care shall be If the penetration of preservative is less than the required amount,
exercised in handling all treated timber so as not to break or penetrate the the entire charge, or such parts thereof as are determined by the
treatment with any tool or handling equipment. Any piece of timber that Engineer or his authorized representative to be unsatisfactory, may be
103
retreated. If after retreatment, the penetration is still insufficient, the The piles for any one bent shall be carefully selected as to size
retreatment pieces shall be rejected. and quality to avoid undue bending or distortion of the sway bracing.
However, care shall be exercised in the distribution of piles of various
Any excessive checking caused by the treating process shall be sizes to secure uniform strength and rigidity in the bents of any given
cause for rejection of the pieces in which the excessive checking occurs. structure. Cut offs shall be accurately made to insure perfect hearing
between caps and piles.
The treating plant shall be equipped with adequate thermometers
and pressure gages so that the process can be accurately controlled and 402.3.7 Frame Bents
a continuous record made of stages of the treating process. If requested
by the Engineer, records shall be furnished showing the duration, Concrete pedestal for the support of framed bents shall be
maximum and minimum temperatures and pressures used during all finished carefully so that sills or posts will take even bearing on them.
stages of the process. Dowels for anchoring sills or posts shall be set the concrete is cast and
shall project at least 150mm above the tops of the pedestals.
402.3.4 Untreated Timber
Sills shall have true and even bearing on piles or pedestals. They
In structures of untreated timber, all of the following surfaces shall shall be drift-bolted with bolts extending into the piles or pedestals at least
be coated thoroughly with two (2) coats of hot creosote oil or carbolineum 150mm. When possible, all earth shall be removed from contact with sills
before the timber are assembled: ends, tops and all contact surfaces of so that there will be free circulation of air around the sills.
posts, sills, caps, floor beams and stringers, all ends, joints and contact
surfaces of bracing. The back surface of all bulkheads and any other 402.3.8 Caps
timber in direct contact with earth shall be similarly treated.
Timber caps shall be placed to obtain even and uniform bearing
402.3.5 Bolts and Washers over the tops of the supporting posts or piles with their ends in alignment.
All caps shall be secured by driftbolts, set approximately at the center
Washers of the size and type specified shall be used under all extending at least 230mm into the post or piles.
bolt heads and nuts that would otherwise be in contact with wood. Cast
iron washers shall have a thickness equal to one fourth the diameter of 402.3.9 Bracing
the bolt and the diameter of the washer shall be four times its thickness.
For malleable or plate washers, the diameter or side size of the square Bracing shall be bolted through at intersections to the pile, posts, caps or
shall be equal to four times the diameter of the bolt. Cap washers shall sills.
be used when the timber is in contact with earth. All nuts shall be
checked effectively after being finally tightened. 402.3.10 Stringers

402.3.6 Pile Bents Stringers shall be sized at bearings and shall be placed in
position so that knots near the edges will be in the top portions of the
The pile shall be driven as indicated on the Plans, with a variation stringers. Outside stringers may have butt joints but interior stringers
of the portion above the ground of not more than 6mm per 300mm from shall be lapped to take bearing over the full width of the floor beam or cap
the vertical or batter indicated, or so that the cap may be placed in its at each end. The lapped ends of untreated stringers shall be securely
proper location without inducing excessive stresses on the piles. fastened to caps by driftbolts. When stringers are two panels in length,
Excessive manipulation of piles will not be permitted and the Contractor the joints shall be staggered. Cross-bridging between stringers shall be
will be required to redrive or use other satisfactory methods to avoid such neatly and accurately framed and securely toe-nailed with at least two
manipulations. No shimming on tops of piles will be permitted. nails at each end. All cross-bridging members shall have full bearing at
each end against the sides of stringers. Unless otherwise specified, cross
bridging shall be placed at the center of each span.
104
 Timber structures shall be measured by the completed span and
402.3.11 Plank Floors shall include all materials, equipment and labor used to finish the
structure as called for in the Bid, Plans and Specifications.
Roadway and sidewalk floor planks, unless otherwise stipulated,
shall be surfaced one side and one edge (SISIE). The planks shall be 402.5 Basis of Payment
laid heartside down, with 7mm openings between them for seasoned
materials and with tight joints for unseasoned material. Each plank shall Payment for the timber structure measured in Section 402.4,
be spiked securely to each joint or supporting member. The planks shall Method of Measurement, shall constitute full compensation for furnishing
be graded carefully as to thickness, and so laid that no two adjacent all materials, preservative treatment, if called for in the Contract,
planks shall vary in thickness by more than 1.6mm. equipment, hardware and other metal parts, tools and labor necessary
for the completion of the structure and painting, if required in a
402.3.12 Laminated or Strip Floors satisfactory manner and all incidentals necessary to complete the Item.

Planks for laminated or strip floors shall have a nominal thickness

of 50mm and shall be surfaced to a uniform width (SIE), and when so Payment will be made under:
specified, to a uniform thickness (SIS). Unless otherwise stipulated, no
splicing of planks will be allowed.
Pay Item Description Unit of
Planks shall be laid with the surfaced edge down and each plank Number Measurement
shall be toe-nailed to each alternative stringer. The nailing of successive
planks shall be staggered so that the spacing of nails along each stringer 402 (1) Timber Span
shall not be less than 100mm. In addition, each piece shall be nailed Structure
horizontally to adjacent pieces at 450mm centers, and staggered both
horizontally and vertically with nails in adjacent pieces. All floors shall be
cut to a straight line along the sides of the roadway. ITEM 403 – METAL STRUCTURES

402.3.13 Railing and Rail Posts 403.1 Description

Railing and rail posts shall be built as shown on the Plans and This work shall consist of steel structures and the steel structure
shall be constructed in a workmanlike and substantial manner. All railing portions of composite structures, constructed in reasonably close
and rail post materials shall be surfaced on four sides (S4S). All rails conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Plans or
shall be continuous and squarely butt-joined at the post. established by the Engineer.

402.3.14 Wheel Guards The work will include the furnishing, fabricating, hauling, erecting,
welding and painting of structural metals called for in the Special
Wheel guards shall be accurately constructed true to line and Provision or shown on the Plans. Structural metals will include structural
grade in accordance with the Plans. steel, rivet, welding, special and alloy steels, steel forgings and castings
and iron castings. This work will also include any incidental metal
Unless otherwise specified, wheel guards shall be surfaced on construction not otherwise provided for, all in accordance with these
one side and one edge (SISIE). Wheel guards shall be laid in sections Specifications, Plans and Special Provisions.
not less than 3.60mm long.
403.2 Material Requirements
402.4 Method of Measurement

105
 Materials shall meet the requirements of Item 712, Structural directed, the Contractor shall select such material as he wishes to use
Metal; Item 409, Welded Structural Steel, and Item 409, Welded from stock, and place it in such position that it will be accessible for
Structural Steel; and Item 709, Paints. inspection and sampling. The Contractor shall select identified material
from as few heat numbers as possible, and furnish the certified mill test
403.3 Construction Requirements reports on each of such heat numbers. Two samples shall be taken from
each heat number as directed, one for a tension test and one for a bend
403.3.1 Inspection test.

The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least fifteen (15) days In the case of unidentified stock, the Engineer may, at his
notice prior to the beginning of work at the mill or shop, so that the discretion, select any number of random test specimens.
required inspection may be made. The term “mill” means any rolling mill,
shop or foundry where material for the work is to be manufactured or Each bin from which rivets or bolts are taken shall subject to
fabricated. No material shall be rolled or fabricated until said inspection random test. Five rivets or bolts may be selected by the Engineer from
has been provided. each bin for test purposes.

The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with copies of the Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored
certified mill reports of the structural steel, preferably before but not later above the ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports. It shall be
than the delivery of the steel to the job site. kept free from dirt, grease, or other foreign matter, and shall be protected
as far as practicable from corrosion.
The Contractor shall furnish all facilities for inspection and the
Engineer shall be allowed free access to the mill or shop and premises at 403.3.3 Fabrication
all times. The Contractor shall furnish, without charge, all labor,
machinery, material and tools necessary to prepare test specimens. These Specifications apply to riveted, bolted and welded
construction. The Contractor may, however, with approval of the
Inspection at the mill or shop is intended as a means of facilitating Engineer, substitute high tensile strength steel bolts equivalent to the
the work and avoiding errors and it is expressly understood that it will not rivets in any connection.
relieve the Contractor from any responsibility for imperfect material or
workmanship and the necessity for replacing same. The acceptance of Workmanship and finish shall be in accordance with the best
any material or finished member at the mill or shop by the Engineer shall general practice in modern bridge shops. Portions of the work exposed
not preclude their subsequent rejection if found defective before final to view shall be finished neatly. Shearing, flame cutting, and chipping
acceptance of the work. Inspection of welding will be in accordance with shall be done carefully and accurately.
the provision of Section 5 of the “Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding
in Building Construction” of the American Welding Society. Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored
above the ground upon platforms, skids or other supports. It shall be
403.3.2 Stock Material Control kept free from dirt, grease or other foreign matter, and shall be protected
as far as practicable from corrosion.
When so specified in the Contract, stock material shall be
segregated into classes designated as “identified” or “unidentified”. Rolled material before being laid off or worked must be straight.
Identified material is material which can be positively identified as having If straightening is necessary, it shall be done by methods that will not
been rolled from a given heat for which certified mill test can be produced. injure the metal. Sharp kinks and bends will be cause for rejection of the
Unidentified material shall include all other general stock materials. When material.
it is proposed to use unidentified material, the Engineer shall be notified of
such intention at least fifteen (15) days in advance of commencing Preparation of material shall be in accordance with AWS
fabrication to permit sampling and testing. When so indicated or (American Welding Society) D 1.1, paragraph 3.2 as modified by
106
AASHTO Standard Specification for Welding of Structural Steel Highway Floor beams, stringers and girders having end
Bridges. connection angles shall be built to plan length back to back
of connection angles with a permissible tolerance of 0 mm
403.3.4 Finishing and Shaping to minus 1.6 mm. If end connections are faced, the
finished thickness of the angles shall not be less than that
Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists, shown on the detail drawings, but in no case less than 9.5
bends and open joints. mm.

1. Edge Planing 5. Lacing Bars

Sheared edges of plates more than 15.9 mm in The ends of lacing bars shall be neatly rounded unless
thickness and carrying calculated stresses shall be planed another form is required.
to a depth of 6.3 mm. Re-entrant cuts shall be filleted
before cutting. 6. Fabrication of Members

2. Facing of Bearing Surfaces Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, steel plates for
main members and splice plates for flanges and main
The surface finish of bearing and based plates and other tension members, not secondary members, shall be cut
bearing surfaces that are to come in contact with each and fabricated so that the primary direction of rolling is
other or with concrete shall meet the American National parallel to the direction of the main tensile and/or
Standards Institute surface roughness requirements as compressive stresses.
defined in ANSI B-46.1-47, Surface Roughness Waviness
and Lay, Part I: Fabricated members shall be true to line and free from
twists, bends and open joints.
Steel slabs ANSI 2,000
Heavy plates in contact in shoes to 7. Web Plates (Riveted or Bolted)
Be welded ANSI 1,000
Milled ends of compression In girders having no cover plates and not to be encased
members, ANSI 500 in concrete, the top edges of the web shall not extend
stiffeners and fillers above the backs of the flange angles and shall not be more
Bridge rollers and rockers ANSI 250 than 3.2 mm below at any point. Any portion of the plate
Pins and pin holes ANSI 125 projection beyond the angles shall be chipped flush with the
Sliding bearings ANSI 125 backs of the angles. Web plates of girders having cover
plates may not be more than 12.7 mm less in width than the
3. Abutting Joints distance back to back of flange angles.

Abutting joints in compression members and girders Splices in webs of girders without cover plates shall be
flanges, and in tension members where so specified on the sealed on top with red lead paste prior to painting.
drawings, shall be faced and brought to an even bearing.
Where joints are not faced, the opening shall not exceed At web splices, the clearance between the ends of the
6.3 mm. plates shall not exceed 9.5 mm. The clearance at the top
and bottom ends of the web slice plates shall not exceed
4. End Connection Angles 6.3 mm.

107
 8. Bent Plates A588
2t 3t 5t a--- a---
Cold-bent load-carrying rolled-steel plates shall conform A514b 2t 2t 3t
to the following: 2t 3t
a
a. They shall be so taken from the stock plates that the It is recommended that steel in this thickness range be bent hot.
bendline will be at right angles to the direction of rolling, Hot bending however, may result in a slight decrease in the as-
except that cold-bent ribs for orthotropic deck bridges rolled mechanical properties.
may be bent in the direction of rolling if permitted by the
b
Engineer. The mechanical properties of ASTM A 514 steel results from a
quench-and-temper-operation. Hot bending may adversely affect
b. The radius of bends shall be such that no cracking of these mechanical properties. If necessary to hotbend, fabricator
the plate occurs. Minimum bend radii, measured to should discuss procedure with steel supplier.
the concave face of the metal, are shown in the
following table: c. Before bending, the corners of the plate be rounded to
a radius of 1.6 mm throughout that portion of the plate
ASTM THICKNESS, t in mm where the bending is to occur.
DESIG- U O Over 12.7 Over 25.4 Over 38.1
ATION p to ver 6.3 To 25.4 to 38.1 9. Fit of Stiffeners
6.3 to 50.08
To 12.7
End stiffeners of girders and stiffeners intended as
A36 1.5t 2t 4t supports for concentrated loads shall have full bearing
1.5t 3t (either milled, ground or on weldable steel in compression
A242 2t areas of flanges, welded as shown on the Plans or
3t 5t a--- a--- specified) on the flanges to which they transmit load or from
A4 which they receive load. Stiffeners not intended to support
40 2.5t 3.5t 6t a--- a--- concentrated loads shall, unless shown or specified
A441 3t otherwise, fit sufficiently tight to exclude water after being
2t 5t a--- a--- painted, except that for welded flexural members, the ends
A529 2t 2t of stiffeners adjacent to the tension flanges shall be cut
---- ---- ---- back as shown on the Plans. Fillers under stiffeners shall
2t fit within 6.3 mm at each end.
r.42 2t 3t 4t 5t
---- Welding will be permitted in lieu of milling or grinding if
r.45 2t 2t 3t 4t noted on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. Brackets,
2.5t 4t a--- ---- clips, gussets, stiffeners, and other detail material shall not
r.50 2.5t be welded to members or parts subjected to tensile stress
3t a--- unless approved by the Engineer.
A r.55 3t 5t ----
57 3.5t 10. Eyebars
2 r.60 3.5t 6t ---- ----
4t Pin holes may be flame cut at least 50.8 mm smaller in
r.65 4t ---- ---- ---- diameter than the finished pin diameter. All eyebars that
are to be placed side by side in the structure shall be
108
 securely fastened together in the order that they will be shall be stress relieved in accordance with the provisions of
placed on the pin and bored at both ends while so clamped. Subsection 403.3.11 when required by the Plans,
Eyebars shall be packed and matchmarked for shipment Specifications or Special Provisions governing the Contract.
and erection. All identifying marks shall be stamped with
steel stencils on the edge of one head of each member 12. Tests
after fabrication is completed so as to be visible when the
bars are nested in place on the structure. The eyebars When full size tests of fabricated structural members or
shall be straight and free from twists and the pin holes shall eyebars are required by the Contract, the Plans or
be accurately located on the centerline of the bar. The Specifications will state the number and nature of the tests,
inclination of any bar to the plane of the truss shall not the results to be attained and the measurements of
exceed 1.6 mm to 305 mm. strength, deformation or other performances that are to be
made. The Contractor will provide suitable facilities,
The edges of eyebars that lie between the transverse material, supervision and labor necessary for making and
centerline of their pin holes shall be cut simultaneously with recording the tests. The members tested in accordance
two mechanically operated torches abreast of each other, with the Contract will be paid for in accordance with
guided by a substantial template, in such a manner as to Subsection 403.3.5.1. The cost of testing, including
prevent distortion of the plates. equipment handling, supervision labor and incidentals for
making the test shall be included in the contract price for
11. Annealing and Stress Relieving the fabrication or fabrication and erection of structural steel,
whichever is the applicable item in the Contract, unless
Structural members which are indicated in the Contract otherwise specified.
to be annealed or normalized shall have finished
machining, boring and straightening done subsequent to 403.3.5 Pins and Rollers
heat treatment. Normalizing and annealing (full annealing)
shall be in accordance with ASTM E 44. The temperatures Pins and rollers shall be accurately turned to the dimensions
shall be maintained uniformly throughout the furnace during shown on the Plans and shall be straight, smooth, and free from flaws.
heating and cooling so that the temperature at no two Pins and rollers more 228.6 mm or less in diameter may either be forged
points on the member will differ by more than 37.80C at any and annealed. Pins and rollers 228.6 mm or less in diameter may either
one time. be forged and annealed or cold-finished carbon-steel shafting.

Members of A514/A517 steels shall not be annealed or In pins larger than 228.6 mm in diameter, a hole not less than
normalized and shall be stress relieved only with the 50.8 mm in diameter shall be bored full length along the axis after the
approval of the Engineer. forging has been allowed to cool to a temperature below the critical range
under suitable conditions to prevent injury by too rapid cooling and before
A record of each furnace charge shall identify the pieces being annealed.
in the charge and show the temperatures and schedule
actually used. Proper instruments including recording Pin holes shall be bored true to the specified diameter, smooth
pyrometers, shall be provided for determining at any time and straight, at right angles with the axis of the member and parallel with
the temperatures of members in the furnace. The records each other unless otherwise specified. The final surface shall be
of the treatment operation shall be available to and meet produced by a finishing cut.
the approval of the Engineer.
The distance outside to outside of holes in tension members and
Members, such as bridge shoes, pedestals, or others inside to inside of holes in compression members shall not vary from that
which are built up by welding sections of plate together
109
specified more than 0.8 mm. Boring of holes in built-up members shall be done with twist drills. If required by the Engineer, assembled parts
be done after the riveting is completed. shall be taken apart for removal of burrs caused by drilling. Connecting
parts requiring reamed or drilled holes shall be assembled and securely
The diameter of the pin hole shall not exceed that of the pin by held while being reamed or drilled and shall be matchmarked before
more than 0.51 mm for pins 127 mm or less in diameter, or 0.8 mm for disassembling.
larger pins.
Unless otherwise specified, holes for all field connections and
The pilot and two driving nuts for each size of pin shall be field splices of main truss or arch members, continuous beams, towers
furnished, unless otherwise specified. (each face), bents, plate girders and rigid frames shall be subpunched (or
subdrilled if subdrilling is required) and subsequently reamed while
assembled in the shop in accordance with Subsection 403.3.7.
403.3.6 Fastener Holes (Rivets and Bolts)
All holes for floor-beam and stringer field end connections shall
All holes for rivets or bolts shall be either punched or drilled. be subpunched and reamed to a steel template reamed while being
Material forming parts or a member composed of not more than five assembled.
thickness of metal may be punched 1.6 mm larger than the nominal
diameter of the rivets or bolts whenever the thickness of the material is Reaming or drilling full size of field connection through templates
not greater than 19 mm for structural steel, 15.9 mm for high-strength shall be done after templates have been located with the utmost care as
steel or 12.7 mm for quenched and tempered alloy steel, unless to position and angle and firmly bolted in place. Templates used for the
subpunching and reaming is required for field connections. reaming of matching members, or of the opposite faces of one member,
shall be exact duplicated. Templates for connections which duplicate
When there are more than five thicknesses or when any of the shall be so accurately located that like members are duplicates and
main material is thicker than 19 mm for structural steel, 15.9 mm for high- require no matchmarking.
strength steel, or 12.7 mm for quenched and tempered alloy steel, all
holes shall either be subdrilled or drilled full size. If additional subpunching and reaming is required, it will be
specified in the Special Provisions or on the Plans.
When required for field connections, all holes shall either be
subpunched or subdrilled (subdrilled if thickness limitation governs) 4.8 Alternately, for any field connection or splice designated above in
mm smaller and, after assembling, reamed 1.6 mm larger or drilled full lieu of sub-sized holes and reaming while assembled, or drilling holes full-
size 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the rivets or bolts. size while assembled, the Contractor shall have the option to drill bolt
holes full-size in unassembled pieces and/or connections including
When permitted by design criteria, enlarged or slotted holes are templates for use with matching sub-sized and reamed holes means of
allowed with high-strength bolts. For punched holes, the diameter of the suitable numerically-controlled (N/C) drilling equipment subject to the
die shall not exceed the diameter of the punch by more than 1.6 mm. If specific provisions contained in this Subsection.
any holes must be enlarged to admit the fasteners, they shall be reamed.
Holes shall be clean cut, without torn or ragged edges. Poor matching of If N/C drilling equipment is used, the Engineer, unless otherwise
holes will be cause for rejection. stated in the Special Provisions or on the Plans, may require the
Contractor, by means if check assemblies to demonstrate that this drilling
Reamed holes shall be cylindrical, perpendicular to the member, procedure consistently produces holes and connections meeting the
and not more than 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the requirements of conventional procedures.
fasteners. Where practicable, reamers shall be directed by mechanical
means. Drilled holes shall be 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a
the fasteners. Burrs on the outside surfaces shall be removed. Poor detailed outline of the procedures that he proposes to follow in
matching of holes will be cause for rejection. Reaming and drilling shall accomplishing the work from initial drilling through check assembly, if
110
required, to include the specific members of the structure that may be N/C End connection angles, and similar parts shall be
drilled, the sizes of the holes, the location of common index and other carefully adjusted to correct positions and bolted,
reference points, composition of check assemblies and all other pertinent clamped, or otherwise firmly in place until riveted.
information.
Parts not completely riveted in the shop shall be
Holes drilled by N/C drilling equipment shall be drilled to secured by bolts, in so far as practicable, to prevent
appropriate size either through individual pieces, or any combination of damage in shipment and handling.
pieces held tightly together.
2. Shop Assembling
All holes punched full size, subpunched or subdrilled shall be so
accurately punched that after assembling (before any reaming is done), a The field connections of main members of trusses,
cylindrical pin 3.2 mm smaller in diameter than the nominal size of the arches, continuous beam spans, bents, towers (each
punched hole may be entered perpendicular to the face of the member, face), plate girders and rigid frames shall be assembled
without drifting, in at least 75 percent of the contiguous holes in the same in the shop with milled ends of compression members in
plane. If the requirement is not fulfilled, the badly punched pieces will be full bearing, and then shall have their sub-size holes
rejected. If any hole will not pass a pin 4.8 mm smaller in diameter than reamed to specified size while the connections are
the nominal size of the punched holes, this will cause for rejection. assembled. Assembly shall be “Full Truss or Girders
Assembly” unless “Progressive Chord Assembly” or
When holes are reamed or drilled, 85 percent of the holes in any “Special Complete Structure Assembly” is specified in the
continuous group shall, after reaming or drilling, show no offset greater Special Provisions or on the Plans.
than 0.8 mm between adjacent thickness of metal.
Check assemblies with Numerically-Controlled Drilled
All steel templates shall have hardened steel bushings in holes Fields Connections shall be in accordance with the
accurately dimensioned from the center lines if the connections as provision of 2 (f) of this Subsection.
inscribed on the template. The center lines shall be used in locating
accurately the template from the milled or scribed ends of the members. Each assembly, including camber, alignment,
accuracy of holes and fit of milled joints, shall be
403.3.7 Shop Assembly approved by the Engineer before reaming is commenced
or before an N/C drilled check assembly is dismantled.
1. Fitting for Riveting and Bolting
Surfaces of metal in contact shall be cleaned before The fabricator shall furnished the Engineer a camber
assembling. The parts of a member shall be assembled, diagram showing the camber at each panel point in the
well pinned and firmly drawn together with bolts before cases of trusses or arch ribs and at the location of field
reaming or riveting is commenced. Assembled pieces splices and fractions of span length (0.25 points
shall be taken apart, if necessary, for the removal of burrs minimum, 0.10 points maximum) in case of continuous
and shavings produced by the reaming operation. The beam and girders or rigid frames. When the shop
member shall be free from twists, bends and other assembly is Full Truss or Girder Assembly or Special
deformation. Preparatory to the shop riveting of full- Complete Structure Assembly, the camber diagram shall
sized punched material, the rivet holes, if necessary, show the camber measured in assembly. When any of
shall be spear-reamed for the admission of the rivets. the other methods of shop assembly is used, the camber
The reamed holes shall not be more than 1.6 mm larger diagram shall show calculated camber.
than the nominal diameter of the rivets.
Methods of assembly shall be described below:

111
a. Full of Truss or Girders Assembly shall consist of e. Special Complete Structure Assembly shall
assembling all members of each truss, arch rib, consist of assembling the entire structure,
bent, tower face, continuous beam line, plate including the floor system. (This procedure is
girder or rigid frame at one time. ordinarily needed only for complicated structures
such as those having curbed girders, or extreme
b. Progressive Truss or Girder Assembly shall skew in combination with severe grade or
consist of assembling initially for each truss, arch camber). The assembly including camber,
rib, bent, tower face, continuous beam line, plate alignment, accuracy of holes and fit of milled
girder, or rigid frame all members in at least three joints shall be approved by the Engineer before
continuous shop sections or panels but not less reaming is commenced.
than the number of panels associated with three
continuous chord lengths (i.e., length between A Contractor shall furnished the Engineer a
field splices) and not less than 45.72 m in case of camber diagram showing the camber at each
structures longer than 45.72 m. At least one panel point of each truss, arch rib, continuous
shop section or panel or as many panels as are beam line, plate girder or rigid frame. When
associated with a chord length shall be added at shop assembly is Full Truss or Girder Assembly
the advancing end of the assembly before any or Special Complete Structure Assembly, the
member is removed from the rearward end so camber diagram shall show the camber
that the assembled portion of the structure is measured in assembly. When any of the other
never less than that specified above. methods of shop assembly is used, the camber
diagram shall show calculated camber.
c. Full Chord Assembly shall consist of assembling
with geometric angles at the joints, the full length f. Check Assemblies with Numerically-Controlled
of each chord or each truss or open spandrel Drilled Field Connections. A check assembly
arch, or each leg of each bent or tower, than shall be required for each major structural type of
reaming their field connection holes while the each project, unless otherwise designated on the
members are assembled; and reaming the web Plans or in the Special Provisions, and shall
member connections to steel templates set at consist of at least three contiguous shop sections
geometric (not cambered) angular relation to the or, in a truss, all members in at least three
chord lines. Field connection holes in web contiguous panels but not less than the number
members shall be reamed to steel templates. At of panels associated with three contiguous chord
least one end of each web member shall be lengths (i.e., length between field splices).
milled or shall be scribed normal to the Check assemblies should be based on the
longitudinal axis of the member and the proposed order erection, joints in bearings,
templates of both ends of the member shall be special complex points, and similar
accurately located from one of the milled ends or considerations. Such special points could be the
scribed line. portals of skewed trusses, etc.

d. Progressive Chord Assembly shall consist of Use of either geometric angles (giving theoretically zero
assembling contiguous chord members in the secondary stresses under deadload conditions after erection)
manner specified for Full Chord Assembly, and in or cambered angles (giving theoretically zero secondary
the number and length specified for Progressive stresses under no-load conditions) should be designated on
Truss or Girder Assembly. the Plans or in the Special Provisions.

112
 The check assemblies shall be preferably be the first such
sections of each major structural type to be fabricated. 403.3.9 Bolted Connections, Unfurnished, Turned and Ribbed
Bolts
No matchmaking and no shop assemblies other than the
check assemblies shall be required. 1. General

If the check assembly fails in some specific manner to Bolts under this Subsection shall conform to
demonstrate that the required accuracy is being obtained, “Specifications for Carbon Steel Externally and Internally
further check assemblies may be required by the Engineer for Threaded Standard Fasteners”, ASTM A 307.
which there shall be no additional cost to the contracting Specifications for high strength bolts are covered under
authority. Subsection 403.3.10.

403.3.8 Rivets and Riveting Bolts shall be unfinished, turned or an approved form
of ribbed bolts with hexagonal nuts and heads except that
The size of rivets called for on the Plans shall be the size before ribbed bolts shall have button heads. Bolted
heating. Rivet heads shall be of standard shape, unless otherwise connections shall be used only as indicated by the Plans
specified, and of uniform size for the same diameter of rivet. They shall or Special Provisions. Bolts not tightened to the proof
be full, neatly made, concentric with the rivets holes, and in full contact loads shall have single self locking nuts or double nuts.
with the surface of the member. Sufficient rivets for field connections Bevel washers shall be used where bearing faces have a
shall be furnished to rivet the entire structure with an ample surplus to slope or more than 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to
replace all rivets burned, lost or cut out. the bolt axis. Bolts shall be of such length that will
extend entirely through their nuts but not more than 6.3
Rivets shall be heated uniformly to a “light cherry red color” and mm beyond them.
shall be driven while hot. Any rivet whose point is heated more than the
remainder shall not be driven. When a rivet is ready for driving, it shall Bolts shall be driven accurately into the holes without
be free from slag, scale and other adhering matter. Any rivet which is damage to the threads. A snap shall be used to prevent
sealed excessively, will be rejected. damage to the heads. The heads and nuts shall be
drawn tight against the work with the full effort of a man
All rivets that are loose, burned, badly formed, or otherwise using a suitable wrench, not less than 381 mm long for
defective shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory rivets. Any bolts of nominal diameter 19 mm and over. Heads of
rivet whose head is defective in size or whose head is driven off center bolts shall be tapped with a hammer while the nuts are
will be considered defective and shall be removed. Stitch rivets that are being tightened.
loosened by driving of adjacent rivets shall be removed and replaced with
satisfactory rivets. Caulking, recapping, or double gunning of rivets 2. Unfinished Bolts
heads will not be permitted.
Unfinished bolts shall be furnished unless other types
Shop rivets shall be driven by direct-acting rivet machines are specified. The number of bolts furnished shall be 5
when practicable. Approved bevelled rivet sets shall be used for forming percent more than the actual number shown on the Plans
rivet heads on sloping surfaces. When the use of a direct-acting rivet for each size and length.
machine is not practicable, pneumatic hammers of approved size shall be
used. Pneumatic bucking tools will be required when the size and length 3. Turned Bolts
of the rivets warrant their use.
The surface of the body of turned bolts shall meet the
Rivets may be driven cold provided their diameter is not over 9.5 mm. ANSI roughness rating value of 125. Heads and nuts
113
 shall be hexagonal with standard dimensions for bolts of nominal dimensions prescribed above, may be used
the nominal size specified or the next larger nominal size. subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Diameter of threads shall be equal to the body of the bolt
or the nominal diameter of the bolt specified. Holes for Bolts lengths shall be determined by adding the grip-
turned bolts shall be carefully reamed with bolts furnished length values given in Table 403.1 to the total thickness
to provide for a light driving fit. Threads shall be entirely of connected material. The values of Table 403.1
outside of the holes. A washer shall be provided under compensate for manufacturer’s tolerance, the use of
the nut. heavy semi-finished hexagon nut and a positive “stick-
through” at the end of the bolt. For each hardened flat
4. Ribbed Bolts washer that is used and 4 mm to the tabular value and for
each bevelled washer add 7.9 mm. The length
The body of ribbed shall be of an approved form with determined shall be adjusted to the next longer 6.3 mm.
continuous longitudinal ribs. The diameter of the body
measured on a circle through the points of the ribs shall Table 403.1 – Grip-Length Values
be 1.98 mm greater than the nominal diameter specified
for the bolts. Bolts Size (mm) To determine required
bolt length, add grip (mm) *
Ribbed bolts shall be furnished with round heads 9.5 17.5
conforming to ANSI B 18.5 unless otherwise specified. 12.7 22.2
Nuts shall be hexagonal, either recessed or with a 19.0 25.4
washer of suitable thickness. Ribbed bolts shall make a 22.2 28.6
driving fit with the holes. The hardness of the ribs shall 25.4 31.7
be such that the ribs do not mash down enough to permit 28.6 38.1
the bolts to turn in the holes during tightening. If for any 31.7 41.3
reason the bolt twists before drawing tight, the holes shall 34.9 44.4
be carefully reamed and an oversized bolt used as a
38.1 47.6
replacement. The Contractor shall provide and supply
himself with oversize bolts and nuts for this replacement
* Does not include allowance for washer thickness
in an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the
number of ribbed bolts specified.
2. Bolted Parts
403.3.10 Bolted Connections (High Tensile-Strength Bolts)
The slope of surface of bolted parts in contact with the
bolt head and nut shall not exceed 1:20 with respect to a
1. Bolts
plane normal to the bolt axis. Bolted parts shall fit solidly
together when assembled and shall not be separated by
Bolts shall be AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325 or
gaskets or any other interposed compressible material.
AASHTO M 253) tensioned to a high tension. Other
When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those
fasteners which meet the chemical requirements of
adjacent to the bolt head, nuts or washers, shall be free
AASHTO M 164 or M 253 and which meet the
of scale, except tight mill scale, and shall also be free of
mechanical requirements of the same specification in full
burrs, dirt and other foreign material that would prevent
size tests and which have body diameter and bearing
solid seating of the parts. Paint is permitted
areas under the head and nut, or their equivalents, not
unconditionally in bearing-type connections.
less than those provided by a bolt and nut of the same

114
 In friction-type connections, the Class, as defined 3. Installation
below, indicating the condition of the contact surfaces
shall be specified on the Plans. Where no Class is a. Bolt Tension. Each fastener shall be tightened to
specified, all joint surfaces shall be free of scale, except provide, when all fasteners in the joints are tight at
tight mill scale and shall not have a vinyl wash. least the minimum bolt tension shown in Table 403.2
for the size of fastener used.
a. Classes A, B and C (uncoated). Contact surfaces
shall be free of oil, paint, lacquer or other coatings. Threaded bolts shall be tightened with properly
calibrated wrenches or by the turn-of-nut method. If
b. Class D (hot-dip galvanized and roughened). required, because of bolt entering and wrench
Contact surfaces shall be tightly scored by wire operation clearances, tightening by either procedure
brushing or blasting after galvanizing and prior to may be done by turning the bolt while the nut is
assembly. The wire brushing treatment shall be a prevented from rotating. Impact wrenches, if used,
light application of manual or power brushing that shall be of adequate capacity and sufficiently
marks or scores the surface but remove relatively supplied with air to perform the required tightening of
little of the zinc coating. The blasting treatment shall each bolt in approximately ten seconds.
be a light “brush-off” treatment which will produce a
dull gray appearance. However, neither treatment AASHTO M 253 and galvanized AASHTO M 164
should be severed enough to produce any break or (ASTM A 325) bolts shall not be reused. Other
discontinuity in the zinc surface. AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) bolts may be reused,
but not more than once, if approved by the Engineer.
c. Classes E and F (blast-cleaned, zinc rich paint). Retightening previously tightened bolts which may
Contact surfaces shall be coated with organic or have been loosened by the tightening of adjacent
inorganic zinc rich paint as defined in the Steel bolts shall not be considered as a reuse.
Structures Painting Council Specification SSPC
12.00. b. Washers. All fasteners shall have a hardened
washer under the element (nut or bolt head) turned in
d. Classes G and H (blast-cleaned, metallized zinc or tightening except that AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325)
aluminum). Contact surfaces shall be coated in bolts installed by the turn of the nut method in holes
accordance with AWS C2.2, Recommended Practice which are not oversized or slotted may have the
for Metallizing with Aluminum and Zinc for Protection washer omitted. Hardened washers shall be used
of Iron and Steel, except that subsequent sealing under both the head and nut regardless of the
treatments, described in Section IV therein shall not element turned in the case of AASHTO M 253 bolts if
be used. the material against which it bears has a specified
yield strength less than 275.76 MPa.
e. Class I (vinyl wash). Contact surfaces shall be
coated in accordance with the provisions of the Steel Table 403.2 – Bolt Tension
Structure Painting Council Pretreatment
Specifications SSPC PT3. Minimum Bolt Tension1, kg.
AASHTO M 164 AASHTO M 253
AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) Type 2 and Bolt Size, mm (ASTM A 325) (ASTM A 420)
AASHTO M 253 bolts shall not be galvanized nor Bolts Bolts
shall they be used to connect galvanized material. 12.7 5 466 6 758
15.9 8 709 10 569
115
 19.0 12 882 15 821 man using an ordinary spud wrench. Following this
22.2 13 268 21 999 initial operation, bolts shall be placed in any
25.4 23 360 24 312 remaining holes in the connection and brought to
28.6 25 605 36 786 snug tightness.
31.7 32 522 45 858
34.9 38 760 55 111 All bolts in the joints shall then be tightened
38.1 47 174 66 905 additionally, by the applicable amount of nut rotation
specified in Table 403.3 with tightening progressing
1
Equals to 70 percent of specified minimum systematically from the most rigid part of the joint to
tensile strength bolts. Where an outer face of its free edges. During this operation, there shall be
the bolted parts has a slope of more than 1:20 no rotation of the part not turned by the wrench.
with respect to a Plane normal to the bolt axis, a
smooth bevelled washer shall be used to e. Lock Pin and Collar Fasteners. The installation of
compensate for the lack of parallel line. lock pin and collar fasteners shall be by methods
approved by the Engineer.
c. Calibrated Wrench Tightening. When Calibrated
wrenches are used to provide the bolt tension as Table 403.3 – Nut Rotation From Snug Tight Condition1
specified above, their setting shall be such as to
induce a bolt tension 5 to 10 percent in excess of this Disposition of Outer Faces of
value. These wrenches shall be calibrated at least Bolted Parts
once each working day by tightening, in a device Bolt Length Both faces One face Both faces
capable of indicating actual bolt tension, not less than measured normal to normal to sloped not
three typical bolts of each diameter from the bolts to from faces bolt axis more than
be installed. Power wrenches shall be adjusted to underside of normal to and other 1:20 from
installed or cut-out at the selected tension. If manual head to bolt axis face sloped normal to
torque wrenches are used, the torque indication extreme end not more bolt axis
corresponding to the calibrating tension shall be of point 1:20 (bevel (bevel
noted and used in the installation of all the tested lot. washer not washers not
Nuts shall be turned in the tightening direction when used) used)
torque is measured. When using calibrated Up to and
wrenches to install several bolts in a single joint, the including 4 0.33 turn 0.5 turn 0.66 turn
wrench shall be returned to “touch-up” bolts diameters
previously tightened which may have been loosened Over 4
by the tightening of adjacent bolts, until all are diameters but 0.5 turn 0.66 turn 0.625 turn
tightened to the prescribed amount. not
exceeding 8
d. Turn-of-Nut Tightening. When the turn-of-nut diameters
method is used to provide the bolt tension specified Over 8
in (a) above, there shall first be enough bolts brought diameters but 0.66 turn 0.83 turn 1 turn
to a “snug tight” condition to insure that the parts of not
the joint are brought into full contact with each other. exceeding 12
Snug tight is defined as the tightness attained by a diameters2
few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a

116
1
Nut rotation is relative to bolt, regardless of the c. When the inspecting wrench is a torque wrench, each
element (nut or bolt) being turned. For bolts installed of the three bolts specified above shall be tightened
by ½ turn and less the tolerance should be plus or in the calibration device by any convenient means to
minus 300, for bolts installed by 2/3 turn and more, the minimum tension specified for its size in Table
the tolerance should be plus or minus 450. 403.2. The inspecting wrench shall then be applied
to the tightened bolt and the torque necessary to run
2
No research work has been performed by the the nut or head 5 degrees (approximately 25.4 mm at
Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural 304.8 mm radius) in the tightening direction shall be
joints to establish the turn-of-nut procedure when determined. The average torque measured in the
bolt lengths exceed 12 diameters. Therefore, the tests of three bolts shall be taken as the job
required rotation must be determined by actual tests inspection torque to be used in the manner specified
in a suitable tension device simulating the actual below.
conditions.
d. When the inspecting wrench is a power wrench, it
4. Inspection shall be adjusted so that it will tighten each of the
three bolts specified to a tension at least 5 but not
The Engineer will determine that the requirements of more than 10 percent greater than the minimum
these Specifications are not in the work. When the tension specified for its size in Table 403.2. This
calibrated wrench method of tightening is used, the setting of wrench shall be taken as the job inspecting
Engineer shall have full opportunity to witness the torque to be used in the manner specified below.
calibration tests.
e. Bolts, represented by the three samples bolts
The Engineer will observe the installation and prescribed above, which have been tightening in the
tightening of the bolts to determine that the selected structure shall be inspected by applying, in the
tightening procedure is properly used and will determine tightening direction, the inspecting wrench and its job
that all bolts are tightened. inspecting torque to 10 percent of the bolts, but not
less than two bolts selected at random in each
The following inspection shall be used unless a more connection. If no nut or bolt head is turned by this
extensive or different procedure is specified: application of the job inspecting torque, the
connection shall be accepted as properly tightened.
a. The Contractor shall use an inspecting wrench which If any nut or bolt head is turned by the application of
may either be a torque wrench or a power wrench the job inspecting torque, this torque shall be applied
that can be accurately adjusted in accordance with to all bolts in the connection, and all bolts whose nut
the requirements of Subsection 403.3.10(3) (c) or head is turned by the job inspecting torque shall be
above, in the presence of the Engineer. tightened and re-inspected, or alternatively, the
fabricator or erector, at his option may re-tighten all
b. Three bolts of the same grade, size and condition as the bolts in the connection and then resubmit the
those under inspection shall be placed individually in connection for the specified inspection.
a calibration device capable of indicating bolt tension.
Length may be any length representative of bolts 403.3.11 Welding
used in the structure. There shall be a washer under
the part turned in tightening each bolt. Welding shall be done in accordance with the best modern
practice and the applicable requirements at AWS D1.1 except as modified

117
by AASHTO “Standard Specifications for Welding of Structural Steel be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The approval of the Engineer
Highway Bridges”. shall not be considered as relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for
the safety of his method or equipment or from carrying out the work in full
403.3.12 Erection accordance with the Plans and Specifications. No work shall be done
until such approval by the Engineer has been obtained.
1. General
403.3.16 Straightening Bent Materials
The Contractor shall provide the falsework and all tools,
machinery and The strengthening of plates, angles, other shapes and built-up
appliances, including driftpins and fitting-up bolts, necessary for the members, when permitted by the Engineer, shall be done by methods that
expeditious handling of the work and shall erect the metal work, remove will not produce fracture or other injury. Distorted members shall be
the temporary construction, and do all work necessary to complete the straightened by mechanical means or, if approved by the Engineer, by the
structure as required by the Contract and in accordance with the Plans carefully planned and supervised application of a limited amount of
and these Specifications. localized heat, except that heat straightening of AASHTO M 244 (ASTM A
514) or ASTM A 517 steel members shall be done only under rigidly
If shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, the Contractor controlled procedures, each application subject to the approval of the
shall dismantle the old structure on the bridge site in accordance with Engineer. In no case shall the maximum temperature of the AASHTO M
Item 101, Removal of Structures and Obstructions. 244 (ASTM A 514) or ASTM A 517 steels exceed 607.20C, nor shall the
temperature exceed 5100C at the weld metal or within 152.4 mm of weld
403.3.13 Handling and Storing Materials metal. Heat shall not be applied directly on weld metal. In all other steels,
the temperature of the heated area shall not exceed 648.90C (a dull red)
Materials to be stored shall be placed on skids above the ground. as controlled by temperature indicating crayons, liquids or bimetal
It shall be kept clean and properly drained. Girders and beams shall be thermometers.
placed upright and shored. Long members, such as columns and
chords, shall be supported on skids placed near enough together to Parts to be heat-straightened shall be substantially free of stress
prevent injury from deflection. If the Contract is for erection only, the and from external forces, except stresses resulting from mechanical
Contractor shall check the material turned over to him against the means used in conjunction with the application of heat.
shipping lists and report promptly in writing any shortage or damage
discovered. He shall be responsible for the loss of any material while in Following the straightening of a bend or buckle, the surface of the
his care, or for any damage caused to it after being received by him. metal shall be carefully inspected for evidence of fracture.

403.3.14 Falsework 403.3.17 Assembling Steel

The false work shall be properly designed and substantially The parts shall be accurately assembled as shown on the
constructed and maintained for the loads which will come upon it. The working drawings and any matchmarks shall be followed. The material
Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer working drawings for shall be carefully handled so that no parts will be bent, broken or
falsework and working drawings for changes in any existing structure for otherwise damaged. Hammering which will injure or distort the members
maintaining traffic, in accordance with Clause 45 of Part G, Div. II, Vol. I. shall not be done. Bearing surfaces and surfaces to be in permanent
contact shall be cleaned before the members are assembled. Unless
403.3.15 Method and Equipment erected by the cantilever methods, truss spans shall be erected on
blocking so placed as to give the trusses proper camber. The blocking
Before starting the work of erection, the Contractor shall inform shall be left in place until the tension chord splices are fully connected
the Engineer fully as to the method of erection he proposes to follow, and with permanent fasteners and all other truss connections pinned and
the amount and character of equipment he proposes to use, which shall erection bolted. Splices of butt joints of compression members, that are
118
milled to bear and of railing shall not be permanently fastened until the set level in exact position and shall have full and even bearing. The
spans have been swung, except that such permanent fastening may be shoes and bearing plates may be set by either of the following methods:
accomplished for the truss members at any time that joint holes are fair.
Splices and field connections shall 1. Method 1
have one-half of the holes filled with erection bolts and cylindrical erection
pins (half bolts and half pins) before placing permanent fasteners. The bridge seat bearing area shall be heavily coated
Splices and connections carrying traffic during erection shall have three- with red lead paint and then covered with three layers of
fourths of the holes so filled, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. 405 to 472 g/m2 duck, each layer being coated thoroughly
on its top surface with red lead paint. The shoes and
Fitting-up bolts shall be of the same nominal diameter as the bearing plates shall be placed in position while the paint
permanent fasteners and cylindrical erection pins will be 1.6 mm larger. is plastic.

403.3.18 Riveting As alternatives to canvas and red lead, and when so

noted on the Plans or upon written permission by the
Pneumatic hammers shall be used for field riveting except when Engineer, the following may be used:
the use of hand tools is permitted by the Engineer. Rivets larger than
15.9 mm in diameter shall not be driven by hand. Cup-faced dollies, a. Sheet lead of the designated thickness
fitting the head closely to insure good bearing, shall be used.
Connections shall be accurately and securely fitted up before the rivets b. Preformed fabric pad composed of multiple layers of
are driven. 270 g/m2 duck impregnated and bound with high
quality natural rubber or of equivalent and equally
Drifting shall be only such as to draw the parts into position and suitable materials compressed into resilient pads of
not sufficient to enlarge the holes or distort the metal. Unfair holes shall uniform thickness. The number of plies shall be
be reamed or drilled. Rivets shall be heated uniformly to a “light cherry such as to produce the specified thickness, after
red” color and shall be driven while hot. They shall not be overheated or compression and vulcanizing. The finished pads
burned. Rivet heads shall be full and symmetrical, concentric with the shall withstand compression loads perpendicular to
shank, and shall have full bearing all around. They shall not be smaller the plane of the laminations of not less than 7
than the heads of the shop rivets. Rivets shall be tight and shall grip the kg/mm2 without detrimental reduction in thickness or
connected parts securely together. Caulking or recupping will not be extension.
permitted. In removing rivets, the surrounding metal shall not be injured.
If necessary, they shall be drilled out. c. Elastomeric bearing pads

403.3.19 Pin Connections 2. Method 2

Pilot and driving nuts shall be used in driving pins. They shall be The shoes and bearing plates shall be properly
furnished by the Contractor without charge. Pins shall be so driven that supported and fixed with grout. No load shall be placed
the members will take full bearing on them. Pin nuts shall be screwed up on them until the grout has set for at least 96 hours,
tight and the threads burred at the face of the nut with a pointed tool. adequate provision being made to keep the grout well
moistened during this period. The grout shall consist of
403.3.20 Setting Shoes and Bearings one part Portland Cement to one part of fine-grained
sand.
Shoes and bearing shall not be placed on bridge seat bearing
areas that are improperly finished, deformed, or irregular. They shall be The location of the anchor bolts in relation to the
slotted holes in expansion shoes shall correspond with
119
 the temperature at the time of erection. The nuts on 1. Time of Application
anchor bolts at the expansion ends shall be adjusted to
permit the free movement of the span. The prime coat of paint or pretreatment when
specified, shall be applied as soon as possible after the
403.3.21 Preparing Metal Surfaces for Painting surface has been cleaned and before deterioration of the
surface occurs. Any oil, grease, soil, dust or foreign
All surfaces of new structural steel which are to be painted shall matter deposited on the surface after the surface
be blast cleaned unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or preparation is completed shall be removed prior to
approved in writing by the Engineer. painting. In the event the rusting occurs after completion
of the surface preparation, the surfaces shall be again
In repainting existing structures where partial cleaning is required, cleaned.
the method of cleaning will be specified in the Special Provision.
Particular care shall be taken to prevent the
The steel surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as outlined in contamination of cleaned surfaces with salts, acids,
the “Steel Structures Painting Council Specifications” (SSPC) meeting alkali, or other corrosive chemicals before the prime coat
one of the following classes of surface preparation. is applied and between applications of the remaining
coats of paint. Such contaminants shall be removed
a. SSPC – SP – 5 White Metal Blast Cleaning from the surface. Under these circumstances, the
b. SSPC – SP – 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning pretreatments or, in the absence of a pretreatment, the
c. SSPC – SP – 8 Pickling prime coat of paint shall be applied immediately after the
d. SSPC – SP – 10 Near White Blast Cleaning surface has been cleaned.

2. Storage of Paint and Thinner

Blast cleaning shall leave all surfaces with a dense and uniform
anchor pattern of not less than one and one-half mills as measured with All paint and thinner should preferably be stored in a
an approved surface profile comparator. separate building or room that is well ventilated and free
from excessive heat, sparks, flame or the direct ray of the
Blast cleaned surfaces shall be primed or treated the same day sun.
blast cleaning is done. If cleaned surface rust or are contaminated with
foreign material before painting is accomplished, they shall be recleaned All containers of paint should remain unopened until
by the Contractor at his expense. required for use. Containers which have been opened
shall be used first.
When paint systems No. 1 or 3 are specified, the steel surfaces
shall be blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC – SP – 10. When paint Paint which has livered, gelled, or otherwise
systems No. 2, 4 or 5 are specified, the steel surface shall be blast deteriorated during storage shall not be used.
cleaned in accordance with SSPC – SP – 6. Thixotropic materials which may be stirred to attain
normal consistency are satisfactory.
403.3.22 System of Paint
3. Mixing and Thinning
The paint system to be applied shall consist of one as set forth in
Table 403.4 and as modified in the Special Provisions. All ingredients in any container of paint shall be
thoroughly mixed before use and shall be agitated often
403.3.23 Painting Metal Surfaces enough during application to keep the pigment in
suspension.
120
 but shall be gathered into a container and remixed before
Paint mixed in the original container shall not be use.
transferred until all settled pigment is incorporated into
the vehicle. This does not imply that part of the vehicle No thinner shall be added to the paint unless
cannot be poured off temporarily to simplify the mixing. necessary for proper application. In no case shall more
than 0.5 litres of thinner be added per 3.8 litres unless the
Mixing shall be by mechanical methods, except that paint is intentionally formulated for greater thinning.
hard mixing will be permitted for container up to 19 litres
in size. The type of thinner shall comply with the paint
specification.
Mixing in open containers shall be done in a well
ventilated area away from sparks or flames. When the use of thinner is permissible, thinner shall
be added to paint during the mixing process. Painters
Paint shall not be mixed or kept in suspension by shall not add thinner to paint after it has been thinned to
means of an air stream bubbling under the paint surface. the correct consistency.

When a skin has formed in the container, the skin shall All thinning shall be done under supervision of one
be cut loose from the sides of the container, removed, acquainted with the correct amount and type of thinner to
and discarded. If such skins are thick enough to have a be added to the paint.
practical effect on the composition and quality of the
paint, the paint shall not be used. Table 403.4 – Paint System
Paint System
The paint shall be mixed in manner which will insure
breaking up of all lumps, complete dispersion of settled 1 2 4
pigment, and a uniform composition. If mixing is done by High Pollution or Coastal x x x
hand, most of the vehicle shall be poured off into a clean Mild Climate x
container. The pigment in the paint shall be lifted from
the bottom of the container with a broad, flat paddle,
lumps shall be broken up, and the pigment thoroughly Note:
mixed with the vehicle. The poured off vehicle shall be 1. Paint system shown for severe areas are
returned to the paint with simultaneous stirring, or pouring satisfactorily in less severe areas.
repeatedly from one container to another until the 2. Coastal - within 304.8 m of ocean or tidal water.
composition is uniform. The bottom of the container High pollution-air pollution environment such as
shall be inspected for unmixed pigment. Tinting pastes industrial areas.
or colors shall be wetted with a small amount of thinner, Mild-other than coastal areas not in air pollution
vehicle, or paint and thoroughly mixed. The thinned environment.
mixture shall be added to the large container of paint and
mixed until the color is uniform. All structural steel shall be painted by one of the
following systems. The required system or choice of
Paint which does not have a limited pot life, or does systems will be shown in the Contract.
not deteriorate on standing, may be mixed at any time
before using, but if settling has occurred, it must be System 4 is intended for use in mild climates or to
remixed immediately before using. Paint shall not repaint existing structures where the other systems are
remain in spray pots, painter’s buckets, etc., overnight, not compatible.

121
 Epoxy
Coating Specifications Min. Dry Intermediate Coat 708.03 (d) 40.80 –
Thickness Film 76.20
System 1 – Vinyl Paint System Finish Coat
Wash 708.03 (b) 12.7 708.03 (d) 38.10 –
Prime 50.80
Intermedia 708.03 (b) Total 177.80 –
te Coat 38.10 – thickness 254
50.80 Alternate System
3rd Coat 708.03 (b) Prime Coat
38.10 – 708.03 (d) 88.90 – 127
50.80 Wash
4th Coat 708.03 (b) Primer Tie Coat 708.03 (d) 12.70
38.10 – Finish Coat
50.80 708.03 (d) 38.10 –
Finish 708.03 (b) 50.80
Coat 38.10 – Total 139.70 –
50.80 thickness 190.50
Total 165.10 – System 4 – Alkyd-Oil-Basic Lead-Chromate System
thickness 203.20 Prime Coat
System 2 – Epoxy-Polymide System 708.03 (e) 38.10 –
Prime 708.03 (c) 50.80
Coat 50.80 – Intermediate
76.20 Coat 708.03 (e) 38.10 –
Intermedia 708.03 (c) 50.80
te Coat 50.80 – Finish Coat
76.20 708.03 (e) 38.10 –
3rd Coat 708.03 (c) 50.80
50.80 – Total thickness 114.30 –
76.20 152.40
Finish 708.03 (c) * The paint system may be specified as four coats for
Coat 38.10 – new structure steel in mild climate, with a
50.80 minimum thickness of 152.40 mm.
Total 190. System 5 – Organic Zinc-Rich Paint System
thickness 50 – 279.40 Prime Coat
* The third coat may be eliminated in mild climates 708.03 (f) 38.10 –
50.80
Coating Specifications Min. Dry Intermediate
Thickness Film Coat 708.03 (f) 50.80 –
System 3 – Inorganic Zinc-Rich Coating 63.50
System Wash
Prime Coat Primer Tie Coat 708.03 (f) 12.70
708.03(d) 88.90 – 127 Finish Coat
122
 708.03 (f) 38.10 –
50.80 Any applied paint exposed to excess humidity, rain or
Total thickness 139.70 – condensation shall first be permitted to dry. Then
177.80 damaged areas of paint shall be removed, the surface
again prepared and then repainted with the same number
4. Application of Paint of coats of paint of the same kind as the undamaged
areas.
a. General
If stripe painting is stipulated in the Special Provisions
The oldest of each kind of paint shall be used first. or if the Contractor chooses to do so at his option, all
Paint shall be applied by brushing or spraying or a edges, corners, crevices, rivets, bolts, weld and sharp
combination of these methods. Daubers or sheepskins edges shall be painted with the priming paint by brush
may be used when no other method is practicable for before the steel receives first full prime coat of paint.
proper application in places of difficult access. Dipping, Such striping shall extend for at least 25.4 mm from the
roller coating, or flow coating shall be used only when edge. When practicable, this stripe coat shall be
specifically authorized. All paints shall be applied in permitted to dry before the prime coat is applied,
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. otherwise the stripe coat shall set to touch before the full
prime coat is applied. However, the stripe coat shall not
Open seams at contact surfaces of built up members be permitted to dry for a period of long enough to allow
which would retain moisture shall be caulked with red rusting of the unprimed steel. When desired, the stripe
lead paste, or other approved material, before the second coat may be applied after a complete prime coat.
undercoat of paint is applied.
To the maximum extent practicable, each coat of paint
Paint shall not be applied when the surrounding air shall be applied as continuous film of uniform thickness
temperature is below 4.40C. Paint shall not be applied free of pores. Any thin spots or areas missed in the
when the temperature is expected to drop to 00C before application shall be repainted and permitted to dry before
the paint has dried. Paint shall not be applied to steel at the next coat of paint is applied. Film thickness is
a temperature over 51.70C unless the paint is specifically included in the description of paint systems. Each coat
formulated for application at the proposed temperature, of paint shall be in a proper state of cure or dryness
nor shall paint be applied to steel which is at a before application of the succeeding coat.
temperature that will cause blistering or porosity or
otherwise will be detrimental to the life of the paint. b. Brush Application

Paint shall not be applied in fog or mist, or when it is Paint shall be worked into all crevices and corners
raining or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. where possible and surfaces not accessible to brushes
Paint shall not be applied to wet or damp surfaces. shall be painted by spray, doubers, or sheepskins. All
runs or rags shall be brushed out. There shall be a
When paint must be applied in damp or cold weather, minimum of brush marks left in the paint.
the steel shall be painted under cover, or protected, or
sheltered or the surrounding air and the steel heated to a
satisfactory temperature. In such cases, the above c. Spray Application of Paint
temperature and humidity conditions shall be met. Such
steel shall remain under cover or be protected until dry or The equipment used for spray application of paint
until weather conditions permit its exposure. shall be suitable for the intended purpose, shall be
123
capable of properly atomizing the paint to be applied and All rums and sags shall be brushed out immediately or
shall be equipped with suitable pressure regulators and the paint shall be removed and the surface repainted.
gages. The air caps, nozzles, and needles shall be those Spray application of prime coats shall in all cases be
recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment for immediately followed by brushing
the material being sprayed. The equipment shall be kept
in satisfactory condition to permit proper paint application. Areas inaccessible to the spray gun shall be painted
In closed or recirculating paint spray system, where gas by brush, if not accessible by brush, daubers or
under pressure is used over the liquid, the gas shall be sheepskins shall be used. Brushes shall be used to
an inert, one such as nitrogen. Traps or separators shall work paint into cracks, crevices and blind spots where
be provided to remove oil and water from the are not adequately painted by spray.
compressed air. These traps or separators shall be
adequate size and shall be drained periodically during d. Shop Painting
operations. The air from the spray gun impinging
against the surface shall show no water or oil. Shop painting shall be done after fabrication and
before any damage to the surface occurs from weather or
Paint ingredients shall be kept properly mixed in the other exposure. Shop contact surfaces shall not be
spray pots or containers during paint applications either painted unless specified.
by continuous mechanical agitation or by intermittent
agitation as frequently as necessary. Surfaces not to be in contact but which will be
inaccessible after assembly shall receive the full paint
The pressure on the material in the pot and of the air system specified or three shop coats of the specified
at the guns shall be adjusted for optimum spraying before assembly.
effectiveness. The pressure on the material in the pot
shall be adjusted when necessary for changes in The areas of steel surfaces to be in contact with
elevation of the gun above the pot. The atomizing air concrete shall not be painted, unless otherwise shown on
pressure at the gun shall be high enough to atomize the the Plans, the areas of steel surfaces to be in contact
paint properly but not so high as to cause excessive with wood shall receive either the full paint coats
fogging of paint, excessive evaporation of solvent or loss specified or three shop coats of the specified primer.
by overspray.
If paint would be harmful to a welding operator or
Spray equipment shall be kept sufficiently clean so would be detrimental to the welding operation or the
that dirt, dried paint and other foreign material are not finished welds, the steel shall not be painted within a
deposited in the paint film. Any solvents left in the suitable distance from the edges to be welded. Welding
equipment shall be completely removed before applying through inorganic zinc paint systems will not be permitted
paint to the surface being painted. unless approved by the Engineer.

Paint shall be applied in uniform layer, with Antiweld spatter coatings shall be removed before
overlapping at the edge of the spray pattern. The spray painting. Weld slag and flux shall be removed by
shall be adjusted so that the paint is deposited uniformly. methods at least as effective as those specified for the
During application, the gun shall be held perpendicular to cleaning.
the surface and at a distance which will insure that a wet
layer of paint is deposited on the surface. The trigger of Machine-finished or similar surfaces that are not to be
the gun should be released at the end of each stroke. painted, but do not require protections, shall be protected

124
with a coating of rust inhibitive petroleum, other coating condensation, contamination, and freezing until dry, to
which may be more suitable, for special conditions. the fullest extent practicable.

Erection marks and weight marks shall be copied on g. Handling of Painted Steel
area that have been previously painted with the shop
coat. Painted steel shall not be handled until the paint has
dried, except for necessary handling in turning for
e. Field Painting painting or stacking for drying.

Steel structures shall be painted as soon as Paint which is damaged in handling shall be scraped
practicable after erection. off and touched-up with the same number of the coats
and kinds of paint as were previously applied to the steel.
Metal which has been shop coated shall be touched
up with the same type of paints as the shop coat. This Painted steel shall not be loaded for shipment or
touch-up shall include cleaning and painting of field shipped until it is dry.
connections, welds, rivets and all damaged or defective
paint and rusted areas. The Contractor may, at his Precautions shall be taken to minimize damage to
option, apply an overall coat of primer in place of touch- paint films resulting from stocking members.
up spot painting.
5. Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Paints
Surfaces (other than contact surfaces) which are
accessible before erection but which will not be a. Instrumentation
accessible after erection shall receive all field coats of
paint before erection. Dry paint film thickness shall be measured using Pull-
If possible the final coat of paint shall not be applied Off (Type 1) or Fixed Probe (Type 2) Magnetic Gages.
until all concrete work is finished. If concreting or other Type 1 gages include Tinsley, Elcometer, Microtest and
operations damage any paint, the surfaces shall be Inspector models. Type 2 gage include Elcometric,
cleaned and repainted. All cement or concrete spatter Minitector, General Electric, Verimeter and Accuderm
and dripping shall be removed before any paint is models.
applied.
b. Calibration
Wet paint shall be protected against damage from
dust or other detrimental foreign matter to the extent 1. Type 1 (Pull-Off) Magnetic Gages
practicable.
Measure the coating thickness on a series of
f. Drying of Painted Metal reliable standards covering the expected range of
paint thickness. Record the calibration correction
The maximum practicable time shall be allowed for either plus (+) or minus (-) required at each
paint to dry before recoating or exposure. No drier shall standard thickness. To guard against gage drift
be added to paint on the job unless specifically called for during use, re-check occasionally with one or more
in the Specifications for the paint. No painted metal shall of the standards.
be subjected to immersion before the paint is dried
through. Paint shall be protected from rain, When the gage adjustment has drifted so far
that large corrections are needed, it is advisable to
125
 re-adjust closer to the standard values and re- 1. Measurement with Type 1 (Pull-Off) Gage
calibrate.
Measure (A), the bare substrate, at a number of
For Type 1 gages, the preferred basic standards spots to obtain a representative average value.
are small, chromeplated steel panels that may be Measure (B), the dry paint film, at the specified
available from the National Bureau of Standards in number of spots.
coating thickness from 12.70 mm to 203.20 mm.
Correct the (A) and (B) gage readings or
Plastic shims of certified thickness in the averages as determined by calibration of the gage.
appropriate ranges may also be used to calibrate Subtract the corrected readings (A) from (B) to
the gages. The gage is held firmly enough to obtain the thickness of the paint above the peaks of
press the shim tightly against the steel surface. the surface.
Record the calibration correction as above.
2. Measurement with Type 2 (Fixed Probe) Gage
2. Type 2 (Fixed Probe) Magnetic Gages
Place a standard shim of the expected paint
Shims of plastic or non-magnetic metals laid on thickness on the bare substrate that is to be
the appropriate steel base (at least 76.2 x 76.2 x painted. Adjust the gage in place on the shim so
3.2 mm) are suitable working standards. These that it indicates the known thickness of the shim.
gages are held firmly enough to press the shim
tightly against the steel surface. One should avoid Conform the gage setting by measuring the
excessive pressure that might indent the plastic or, shim at several other area of the bare substrate.
on a blast cleaned surface, might impress the steel Re-adjust the gage as needed to obtain an average
peaks into the undersurface of the plastic. setting representative of the substrate.

The National Bureau of Standards – standards With the gage adjustment as above, measure
panels shall not be used to calibrate Type 2 gages. the dry paint film at three points. The gage
readings indicate the paint film thickness at the
c. Measurement Procedures three points. The gage readings indicate the paint
thickness above the peaks of the surface profile.
To determine the effect of the substrate surface
condition on the gage readings, access is required to Re-check the gage setting at frequent intervals
some unpainted areas. during a long series of measurements. Make five
separate spot measurements spaced evenly over
Repeated gage readings, even at points close each section of the structure 9.29 square metres in
together, may differ considerably due to small surface area, or of other area as may be specified. The
irregularities. Three gage readings should therefore be average of five spot measurements for each such
made for each spot measurement of either the substrate section shall not be less than the specified
or the paint. Move the probe a short distance for each thickness. No single spot measurement (average
new gage reading. Discard any unusually high of flow of three readings) in any section shall be less than
gage reading that cannot be repeated consistently. Take 80% of the specified thickness.
the average of the three gage readings as the spot
measurement. Since paint thickness is usually specified (or
implied) as a minimum, greater thickness that does
126
 not cause defects of appearance or functions such below the finished ground line, excavated or unused materials, rubbish
as mud cracking, wrinkling, etc., is permitted unless and temporary buildings. He shall replace or renew any fences damaged
otherwise specified. and restored in an acceptable manner all property, both public and
private, which may have been damaged during the prosecution of the
d. Special Notes work and shall leave the work site and adjacent highway in a neat and
presentable condition, satisfactory to the Engineer. All excavated
All of the above magnetic, if properly adjusted and in material or falsework placed in the stream channel during construction
good condition, are inherently accurate to within +15% of shall be removed by the Contractor before final acceptance.
the true thickness of the coating.
403.4 Method of Measurement
Much larger, external errors may be caused by
variations in method of use of the gages or by 403.4.1 Unit Basis
unevenness of the surface of the substrate or of the
coating. Also, any other film present on the steel (rust or The quantity of structural steel to be paid for shall be the number
mill scale or even a blast cleaned profile zone) will add to of kilos complete in place and accepted. For the purpose of
the apparent thickness of the applied paint film. measurement for payment components fabricated from metals listed in (1)
below, such as casting, alloy steels, steel plates, anchor bolts and nuts,
The surface of the paint and the probe of the gage shoes, rockers, rollers, pins and nuts, expansion dams, roadway drains
must be free from dust, grease and other foreign matter and souppers, welds metal, bolts embedded in concrete, cradles and
in order to obtain close contact of the probe with the paint brackets, posts, conduits and ducts, and structural shapes for expansion
and also to avoid adhesion of the magnet. The accuracy joints and pier protection will be considered as structural steel.
of the measurement will be affected if the coating is tacky
or excessively soft. Unless otherwise provided, the mass of metal paid for shall be
computed and based upon the following mass:
The magnetic gages are sensitive to geometrical
discontinuities of the steel, as at holes, corners or edges. 1. Unit Density kg/m3
The sensitivity to edge effects and discontinuities varies
from gage to gage. Measurements closer than 25.4 mm Aluminum, cast or rolled 2771.2
from the discontinuity may not be valid unless the gage is Bronze or copper alloy 8585.9
calibrated specifically for that location. Copper sheet 8938.3
Iron, cast 7128.2
Magnetic gage readings also may be affected by Iron, malleable 7528.7
proximity to another mass of steel close to the body of Lead, sheet 11229
the gage, by surface curvature and presence of other Steel, cast or rolled, including alloy
magnetic fields. copper bearing and stainless 7849
Zinc 7208.3
All of the magnets or probe must be held
perpendicular to the painted surface to produce valid 2. Shapes, Plates Railing and Flooring
measurements.
The mass of steel shapes and plates shall be computed on the
403.3.24 Clean-up basis of their nominal mass and dimensions as shown on the
approved shop drawings, deducting for copes, cuts and open
Upon completion and before final acceptance, the Contractor holes, exclusive of rivets holes. The mass of all plates shall be
shall remove all falsework, falsework piling down to at least 609.6 mm
127
computed on the basis of nominal dimensions with no additional 28.6
for overrun. 16.33
31.7 21.8
The mass of railing shall be included as structural steel unless
the Bill of Quantities contains as pay item for bridge railing under 6. High-Strength Bolts
Item 401, Railings.
High-strength steel bolts shall be considered for purpose of
The mass of steel grid flooring shall be computed separately. payment, the same as rivets of the same diameter, with the mass
of the bolt heads and nuts the same as the corresponding rivet
3. Casting heads.

The mass of casting shall be computed from the dimensions 7. Welds

shown on the approved drawings, deducting for open holes. To
this mass will be added 5 percent allowable for fillets and The mass of shop and field fillet welds shall be assumed as
overruns. Scale mass may be substituted for computed mass in follows:
the case of castings of small complex parts for which accurate
computations of mass would be difficult. Size kg per
of Weld linear metre
4. Miscellaneous (mm)
6.3 0.984
The mass of erection bolts, shop and field paint, galvanizing 7.9 1.213
the boxes, crates and other containers used for shipping, together 9.5 1.771
with sills, struts, and rods used for supporting members during 12.7 2.690
the transportation, bridge hardware as defined in Subsection 5.9 3.936
402.2.2 excluding steel plates and bearings, connectors used for 19.0 5.379
joining timber members, nails, spikes and bolts, except anchor
22.2 7.314
bolts will be excluded.
25.4 9.774
5. Rivets Heads
The mass of other welds will be computed on the basis of the
theoretical volume from dimensions of the welds, with an addition
The mass of all rivet heads, both files and shop, will be
assumed as follows: of 50 mass percent as an allowance for overrun.

8. Other Items
Diameter kg per
of rivet 100 heads
The quantities of other Contract Items which enter into the
(mm)
completed and accepted structure shall be measured for payment
12.7 1.80
in the manner prescribed for the Items involved.
15.9
3.20
403.4.2 Lump Sum Basis
19.0 5.44
22.2 8.16 Lump sum will be the basis of payment unless noted otherwise in
25.4 the bidding documents. No measurements of quantities will be made
11.80 except as provided in Subsection 403.5.1 (4).

128
 furnishing and fabrication, and except as provided in
403.5 Basis of Payment Subsections 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4.

403.5.1 Structural Steel 4. Lump Sum

1. Furnished, Fabricated and Erected When the Bill of Quantities calls for lump sum price for
“Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated and erected”, the Item
The quantity, determined as provided above, shall be paid will be paid for at the contract lump sum price and payment
for at the contract unit price per kilogram for “Structural Steel, shall be full compensation for furnishing, fabricating and
furnished, fabricated and erected”, which price and payment erecting material and for all work herein before prescribed in
shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, galvanizing, connection therewith, including all labor, equipment, tools and
fabricating, radiographing, magnetic particle inspection, incidentals necessary to complete the work, except as
delivering, erecting ready for use, and painting all steel and provided in Subsections 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4.
other metal including all labor, equipment, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the work, except as The estimate of the mass of structural steel shown on the
provided in Subsections 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4. Plans is approximate only and no guarantee is made that it is
the correct mass to be furnished. No adjustment in the
2. Furnished and Fabricated contract price will be made if the mass furnished is more or
less than estimated mass.
When a quantity and unit price for “Structural Steel,
furnished and fabricated” are shown in the Bill of Quantities, If changes in the work are ordered by the Engineer, which
the quantity, determined as provided above, will be paid for at vary the mass of steel to be furnished, the lump sum payment
the contract unit price per kilogram which price and payment shall be adjusted as follows:
shall be full compensation for furnishing, galvanizing,
fabricating, radiographing, magnet particle inspection, shop a. The value per kilogram of the increase or decrease in
painting and delivering the structural steel and other metal mass of structural steel involved in the change shall be
free of charges at the place designated in the Special determined by dividing the contract lump sum amount by
Provisions and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals the estimate of mass shown on the Plans. The adjusted
necessary to complete the work, save erection and except as contract lump sum payment shall be the contract lump
provided in Subsection 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4. sum plus or minus the value of the steel involved in the
change, and no additional compensation shall be made
3. Erected on account of said change.

When a quantity and unit price for “Structural Steel b. Full-size members which are tested in accordance with
Erected” are shown in the Bill of Quantities, the quantity, the Specifications when such tests are required by the
determined as provided above, will be paid for at the said Contract, shall be paid for at the same rate as for
contract unit price per kilogram which price and payment shall comparable members in the structure. Members which
be full compensation for unloading all the structural steel and fail to meet the Contract requirements, and members
other metal, payment of any demurrage charges, transporting rejected as a result of test shall not be paid for.
to the bridge site, erecting, magnetic particle inspection and
radiographing, complete ready for use including furnishing
and applying the field paint including all labor, equipment, 403.5.2 Material Considered as Structural Steel
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work, save

129
 For the purpose of Subsection 403.5.1 and unless otherwise erected
shown on the Plans, castings, forgings, special alloy steels and steel 403 (6) Structural Steel kilogram
plates, wrought iron, and structural shapes of expansion joints and pier erected
protection shall be considered as structural steel except that when 403 (7) Structural Steel,
quantities and unit price for certain alloy steels, forgings, castings or other furnished, kilogram
specific categories of metal are called for in the Bill of Quantities, the fabricated
mass of such selected material, determined as provided above, shall be and erected
paid for at the respective contract unit price per kilogram for “Structural
Steel (Alloy steel, forgings, castings, and/or other category), furnished Where separate payment is to be made for certain metals or for
and fabricated, and erected” or “Structural Steel (Subsection 403.4.1), certain particular components, other than under the general provision for
furnished and fabricated” as named in the Bill of Quantities. structural steel, designation of those particular cases shall be inserted in
the spaces provided in the pay names for Item 403 (2), 403 (4) or 403 (6),
403.5.3 Other Items as the case may be.

The quantities of all other Contract Items which enter into the
completed and accepted structure shall be paid for at the contract unit
prices for the several Pay Items as prescribed for the Items involved.
ITEM 404 – REINFORCING STEEL
403.5.4 Payment as Reinforcing Steel
404.1 Description
When the Bill of Quantities does not contain a pay item for
structural steel, the quantities of metal drains, scuppers, conduits, ducts This Item shall consist of furnishing, bending, fabricating and
and structural shapes for expansion joints and pier protection, measured placing of steel reinforcement of the type, size, shape and grade required
as provided above will be paid for as Reinforcing Steel under Item 404. in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the
requirements shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
Payment will be made under:
404.2 Material Requirements
Pay Item Unit of
Number Description Measurement Reinforcing steel shall meet the requirements of item 710,
403 (1) Structural Steel, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope.
furnished, kilogram
fabricated 4.4.3 Construction Requirements
and erected
403 (2) Structural Steel, 404.3.1 Order Lists
furnished, kilogram
fabricated Before materials are ordered, all order lists and bending diagrams
and erected shall be furnished by the Contractor, for approval of the Engineer. The
403 (3) Structural Steel, approval of order lists and bending diagrams by the Engineer shall in no
furnished, kilogram way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the correctness of such
fabricated lists and diagrams. Any expense incident to the revisions of materials
403 (4) Structural Steel, furnished in accordance with such lists and diagrams to make them
furnished, kilogram comply with the Plans shall be borne by the Contractor.
fabricated
403 (5) Structural Steel kilogram 404.3.2 Protection of Material
130
 Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the
Distance from the forms shall be maintained by means of stays,
ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports and shall be protected as
blocks, ties, hangers, or other approved supports, so that it does not vary
far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused
from the position indicated on the Plans by more than 6mm. Blocks for
by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the work,
holding reinforcement from contact with the forms shall be precast mortar
reinforcement shall be free from dirt, detrimental rust, loose scale, paint,
blocks of approved shapes and dimensions. Layers of bars shall be
grease, oil, or other foreign materials. Reinforcement shall be free from
separated by precast mortar blocks or by other equally suitable devices.
injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. Rust, surface seams,
The use of pebbles, pieces of broken stone or brick, metal pipe and
surface irregularities or mill scale will not be cause for rejection, provided
wooden blocks shall not be permitted. Unless otherwise shown on the
the minimum dimensions, cross sectional area and tensile properties of a
Plans or required by the Engineer, the minimum distance between bars
hand wire brushed specimen meets the physical requirements for the size
shall be 40mm. Reinforcement in any member shall be placed and then
and grade of steel specified.
inspected and approved by the Engineer before the placing of concrete
begins. Concrete placed in violation of this provision may be rejected and
removal may be required. If fabric reinforcement is shipped in rolls, it
404.3.3 Bending
shall be straightened before being placed. Bundled bars shall be tied
together at not more than 1.8m intervals.
All reinforcing bars requiring bending shall be cold-bent to the
shapes shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer. Bars shall be
bent around a circular pin having the following diameters (D) in relation to 404.3.5 Splicing
the diameter of the bar (d):
All reinforcement shall be furnished in the full lengths indicated on
the Plans. Splicing of bars, except where shown on the Plans, will not be
Nominal diameter, d, mm Pin diameter (D)
permitted without the written approval of the Engineer. Splices shall be
10 to 20 6d staggered as far as possible and with a minimum separation of not less
than 40 bar diameters. Not more than one-third of the bars may be
25 to 28 8d spliced in the same cross-section, except where shown on the Plans.
32 and greater 10d

Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, bars shall be lapped a

Bends and hooks in stirrups or ties may be bent to the diameter minimum distance of:
of the principal bar enclosed therein.

Splice Type Grade 40 Grade 60 But not less than

404.3.4 Placing and Fastening min. lap min. lap
Tension 24 bar dia 36 bar dia 300 mm
All steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed in the position
shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer and firmly held there Compression 20 bar dia 24 bar dia 300 mm
during the placing and setting of the concrete. Bars shall be tied at all
intersections except where spacing is less than 300mm in each
directions, in which case, alternate intersections shall be tied. Ties shall In lapped splices, the bars shall be placed in contact and wired
be fastened on the inside. together. Lapped splices will not be permitted at locations where the
concrete section is insufficient to provide minimum clear distance of one
131
and one-third the maximum size of coarse aggregate between the splice Payment will be made under:
and the nearest adjacent bar. Welding of reinforcing steel shall be done
only if detailed on the Plans or if authorized by the Engineer in writing. Pay Item Description Unit of
Spiral reinforcement shall be spliced by lapping at least one and a half Number Measurement
turns or by butt welding unless otherwise shown on the Plans. 404 Reinforcing Steel Kilogram
ITEM 405 – STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
404.3.6 Lapping of Bar Mat
405.1 Description

Sheets of mesh or bar mat reinforcement shall overlap each other 405.1.1 Scope
sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be securely fastened
at the ends and edges. The overlap shall not be less than one mesh in This Item shall consist of furnishing, bending, placing and
width. finishing concrete in all structures except pavements in accordance with
this Specification and conforming to the lines, grades, and dimensions
shown on the Plans. Concrete shall consist of a mixture of Portland
404.4 Method of Measurement Cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, admixture when specified,
and water mixed in the proportions specified or approved by the Engineer.
The quantity of reinforcing steel to be paid for will be the final
quantity placed and accepted in the completed structure. 405.1.2 Classes and Uses of Concrete

Five classes of concrete are provided for in this Item, namely: A,

B, C, P and Seal. Each class shall be used in that part of the structure as
No allowance will be made for tie-wires, separators, wire chairs
called for on the Plans.
and other material used in fastening the reinforcing steel in place. If bars
are substituted upon the Contractor’s request and approved by the
The classes of concrete will generally be used as follows:
Engineer and as a result thereof more steel is used than specified, only
the mass specified shall be measured for payment.
Class A – All superstructures and heavily reinforced
substructures. The important parts of the structure included are slabs,
beams, girders, columns, arch ribs, box culverts, reinforced abutments,
No measurement or payment will be made for splices added by
retaining walls, and reinforced footings.
the Contractor unless directed or approved by the Engineer.
Class B – Footings, pedestals, massive pier shafts, pipe bedding,
and gravity walls, unreinforced or with only a small amount of
When there is no item for reinforcing steel in the Bill of Quantities, reinforcement.
costs will be considered as incidental to the other items in the Bill of
Quantities. Class C – Thin reinforced sections, railings, precast R.C. piles
404.5 Basis of Payment and cribbing and for filler in steel grid floors.

Class P – Prestressed concrete structures and members.

The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 404.4,
shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Reinforcing Steel which price Seal – Concrete deposited in water.
and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all
materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary 405.2 Material Requirements
to complete the work prescribed in this Item.
132
 It shall conform to the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel
405.2.1 Portland Cement and Wire Rope.

It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.1. 405.2.6 Admixtures

Admixtures shall conform to the requirements of Subsection

311.2.7
405.2.2 Fine Aggregate
405.2.7 Curing Materials
It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.2.
Curing materials shall conform to the requirements of Subsection
405.2.3 Coarse Aggregate 311.2.8.

It shall conform all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.3 except

405.2.8 Expansion Joint Materials
that gradation shall conform to Table 405.1.
Expansion joint materials shall be:
Table 405.1 – Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate
Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing 1. Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork, conforming to AASHTO
Standard Alternate Class Class Class Class Class M 153.
Mm US A B C P Seal
Standard 2. Hot-Poured Elastic Type, conforming to AASHTO M 173.

63 2-1/2” 100 3. Preformed Fillers, conforming to AASHTO M 213.

50 2” 100 95 –
37.5 1-1/2” 95 – 100 100 405.2.9 Elastomeric Compression Joint Seals
25 1” 100 - 100 95 –
19.0 ¾” - 35 – 70 100 95 – 100 These shall conform to AASHTO M 220.
12.5 ½” 35 – - 90 – 100 -
9.5 3/8” 70 10 – 30 100 - 25 – 60
4.75 No.4 - - 40 – 70 20 – 55 - 405.2.10 Elastomeric Bearing Pads
10 – 0-5 0 – 15* 0 – 10* 0 – 10*
30 These shall conform to AASHTO M 251 or Item 412 –
0-5 Elastomeric Bearing Pads.

* The measured cement content shall be within plus (+) or minus (-) 2
mass percent of the design cement content. 405.2.11 Storage of Cement and Aggregates

405.2.4 Water Storage of cement and aggregates shall conform to all the
requirements of Subsection 311.2.10.
It shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.4
405.3 Sampling and Testing of Structural Concrete
405.2.5 Reinforcing Steel

133
 As work progresses, at least one (1) sample consisting of three
(3) concrete cylinder test specimens, 150 x 300mm (6 x 12 inches), shall Minimum Maxim Consiste Designated Minimum
be taken from each seventy five (75) cubic meters of each class of Class Cement um ncy Size of Compressive
concrete or fraction thereof placed each day. Of Content Water/ Range in Coarse Strength of
Conc Per m3 Cemen Slump Aggregate 150x300mm
rete t Concrete
Compliance with the requirements of this Section shall be
kg Ratio Square Cylinder
determined in accordance with the following standard methods of
(bag**) mm Opening Specimen at
AASHTO:
kg/kg (inch) Std. mm 28 days,
MN/m2 (psi)
Sampling of fresh concrete T 141
Weight per cubic metre and air content (gravi-
Metric) of concrete T 121 A 360 0.53 50 – 100 37.5 – 4.75 20.7
(9 bags) (2 – 4) (1-1/2” – (3000)
Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates T 27
Slump of Portland Cement Concrete T 119 No. 4)
Specific gravity and absorption of fine T 84 B 320 0.58 50 – 100 16.5
(8 bags) (2 – 4) 50 – 4.75 (2400)
aggregate
(2” – No. 4)
Tests for strength shall be made in accordance with the following: C 380 0.55 50 – 100 20.7
(9.5 bags) (2 – 4) 12.5 – 4.75 (3000)
Making and curing concrete compressive and (1/2” – No.
flexural tests specimens in the field T 23 P 440 0.49 100 max. 4) 37.7
(11 bags) (4 max.) (5000)
Compressive strength of molded concrete
Cylinders T 22 19.0 – 4.75
Seal 380 0.58 100 – (3/4” – No. 20.7
(9.5 bags) 200 4) (3000)
405.4 Production Requirements
(4 - 8)
25 – 4.75
405.4.1 Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete
(1” – No. 4)
The concrete materials shall be proportioned in accordance with
the requirements for each class of concrete as specified in Table 405.2, * The measured cement content shall be within plus or minus 2
using the absolute volume method as outlined in the American Concrete mass percent of the design cement content.
Institute (ACI) Standard 211.1. “Recommended Practice for Selecting ** Based on 40 kg/bag
Proportions for Normal and Heavyweight Concrete”. Other methods of
proportioning may be employed in the mix design with prior approval of 405.4.2 Consistency
the Engineer. The mix shall either be designed or approved by the
Engineer. A change in the source of materials during the progress of Concrete shall have a consistency such that it will be workable in
work may necessitate a new mix design. the required position. It shall be of such a consistency that it will flow
around reinforcing steel but individual particles of the coarse aggregate
when isolated shall show a coating of mortar containing its proportionate
The strength requirements for each class of concrete shall be as amount of sand. The consistency of concrete shall be gauged by the
specified in Table 405.2. ability of the equipment to properly place it and not by the difficulty in
mixing and transporting. The quantity of mixing water shall be determined
Table 405.2 - Composition and Strength of Concrete for Use in by the Engineer and shall not be varied without his consent. Concrete as
Structures dry as it is practical to place with the equipment specified shall be used.
134
405.4.3 Batching
Batching shall be conducted as to result in a 2 mass
percent maximum tolerance for the required materials.
Measuring and batching of materials shall be done at a batching
plant.
4. Bins and Scales
1. Portland Cement
The batching plant shall include separate bins for bulk
cement, fine aggregate and for each size of coarse
Either sacked or bulk cement may be used. No fraction
aggregate, a weighing hopper, and scales capable of
of a sack of cement shall be used in a batch of concrete
determining accurately the mass of each component of the
unless the cement is weighed. All bulk cement shall be
batch.
weighed on an approved weighing device. The bulk cement
weighing hopper shall be properly sealed and vented to
preclude dusting operation. The discharge chute shall not be
suspended from the weighing hopper and shall be so Scales shall be accurate to one-half (0.5) percent
throughout the range used.
arranged that cement will neither be lodged in it nor leak from
it.
5. Batching
Accuracy of batching shall be within plus (+) or minus (-)
1 mass percent. When batches are hauled to the mixer, bulk cement shall
be transported either in waterproof compartments or between
the fine and coarse aggregate. When cement is placed in
2. Water contact with moist aggregates, batches will be rejected unless
mixed within 1-1/2 hours of such contact. Sacked cement
may be transported on top of the aggregates.
Water may be measured either by volume or by weight.
The accuracy of measuring the water shall be within a range
of error of not more than 1 percent.
Batches shall be delivered to the mixer separate and
intact. Each batch shall be dumped cleanly into the mixer
without loss, and, when more than one batch is carried on the
3. Aggregates
truck, without spilling of material from one batch compartment
into another.
Stockpiling of aggregates shall be in accordance with
Subsection 311.2.10. All aggregates whether produced or
handled by hydraulic methods or washed, shall be stockpiled 6. Admixtures
or binned for draining for at least 12 hours prior to batching.
Rail shipment requiring more than12 hours will be accepted
as adequate binning only if the car bodies permit free The Contractor shall follow an approved procedure for
adding the specified amount of admixture to each batch and
drainage. If the aggregates contain high or non-uniform
moisture content, storage or stockpile period in excess of 12 will be responsible for its uniform operation during the
hours may be required by the Engineer. progress of the work. He shall provide separate scales for
the admixtures which are to be proportioned by weight, and
135
 accurate measures for those to be proportioned by volume. be permitted, provided concrete test data for strength, segregation, and
Admixtures shall be measured into the mixer with an uniform consistency are satisfactory and provided no spillage of concrete
accuracy of plus or minus three (3) percent. takes place. The batch shall be so charge into the drum that a portion of
the water shall enter in advance of the cement and aggregates. The flow
of water shall be uniform and all water shall be in the drum by the end of
The use of Calcium Chloride as an admixture will not be the first 15 seconds of the mixing period. Mixing time shall be measured
permitted. from the time all materials, except water, are in the drum. Mixing time
shall not be less than 60 seconds for mixers having a capacity of 1.5m3 or
less. For mixers having a capacity greater than 1.5m3, the mixing time
405.4.4 Mixing and Delivery shall not be less than 90 seconds. If timing starts, the instant the skip
reaches its maximum raised position, 4 seconds shall be added to the
specified mixing time. Mixing time ends when the discharge chute opens.
Concrete may be mixed at the site of construction, at a central
point or by a combination of central point and truck mixing or by a
combination of central point mixing and truck agitating. Mixing and The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed as shown on the
delivery of concrete shall be in accordance with the appropriate manufacturer’s name plate on the mixer. Any concrete mixed less than
requirements of AASHTO M 157 except as modified in the following the specified time shall be discarded and disposed off by the Contractor
paragraphs of this section, for truck mixing or a combination of central at his own expenses.
point and truck mixing or truck agitating. Delivery of concrete shall be
regulated so that placing is at a continuous rate unless delayed by the
placing operations. The intervals between delivery of batches shall not be The timing device on stationary mixers shall be equipped with a
so great as to allow the concrete inplace to harden partially, and in no bell or other suitable warning device adjusted to give a clearly audible
case shall such an interval exceed 30 minutes. signal each time the lock is released. In case of failure of the timing
device, the Contractor will be permitted to continue operations while it is
being repaired, provided he furnishes an approved timepiece equipped
In exceptional cases and when volumetric measurements are with minute and second hands. If the timing device is not placed in good
authorized, for small project requiring less than 75 cu.m. per day of working order within 24 hours, further use of the mixer will be prohibited
pouring, the weight proportions shall be converted to equivalent until repairs are made.
volumetric proportions. In such cases, suitable allowance shall be made
for variations in the moisture condition of the aggregates, including the
bulking effect in the fine aggregate. Batching and mixing shall be in Retempering concrete will not be permitted. Admixtures for
accordance with ASTM C 685, Section 6 through 9. increasing the workability, for retarding the set, or for accelerating the set
or improving the pumping characteristics of the concrete will be permitted
only when specifically provided for in the Contract, or authorized in writing
Concrete mixing, by chute is allowed provided that a weighing by the Engineer.
scales for determining the batch weight will be used.

1. Mixing Concrete: General

For batch mixing at the site of construction or at a central point, a
batch mixer of an approved type shall be used. Mixer having a rated
Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in a mixer of an
capacity of less than a one-bag batch shall not be used. The volume of approved size and type that will insure a uniform distribution
concrete mixed per batch shall not exceed the mixer’s nominal capacity of the materials throughout the mass.
as shown on the manufacturer’s standard rating plate on the mixer except
that an overload up to 10 percent above the mixer’s nominal capacity may
136
 All concrete shall be mixed in mechanically operated
mixers. Mixing plant and equipment for transporting and
Concrete mixers may be of the revolving drum or the
placing concrete shall be arranged with an ample auxiliary
revolving blade type and the mixing drum or blades shall be
installation to provide a minimum supply of concrete in case
operated uniformly at the mixing speed recommended by the
of breakdown of machinery or in case the normal supply of
manufacturer. The pick-up and throw-over blades of mixers
concrete is disrupted. The auxiliary supply of concrete shall
shall be restored or replaced when any part or section is worn
be sufficient to complete the casting of a section up to a
20mm or more below the original height of the manufacturer’s
construction joint that will meet the approval of the Engineer.
design. Mixers and agitators which have an accumulation of
hard concrete or mortar shall not be used.
Equipment having components made of aluminum or
magnesium alloys, which would have contact with plastic
When bulk cement is used and volume of the batch is
concrete during mixing, transporting or pumping of Portland
0.5m3 or more, the scale and weigh hopper for Portland
Cement concrete, shall not be used.
Cement shall be separate and distinct from the aggregate
hopper or hoppers. The discharge mechanism of the bulk
cement weigh hopper shall be interlocked against opening
Concrete mixers shall be equipped with adequate water
before the full amount of cement is in the hopper. The
storage and a device of accurately measuring and
discharging mechanism shall also be interlocked against
automatically controlling the amount of water used.
opening when the amount of cement in the hopper is
underweight by more than one (1) mass percent or
overweight by more than 3 mass percent of the amount
Materials shall be measured by weighing. The apparatus specified.
provided for weighing the aggregates and cement shall be
suitably designed and constructed for this purpose. The
accuracy of all weighing devices except that for water shall be
When the aggregate contains more water than the
such that successive quantities can be measured to within
quantity necessary to produce a saturated surface dry
one percent of the desired amounts. The water measuring
condition, representative samples shall be taken and the
device shall be accurate to plus or minus 0.5 mass percent.
moisture content determined for each kind of aggregate.
All measuring devices shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer. Scales and measuring devices shall be tested at
the expense of the Contractor as frequently as the Engineer
The batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some
may deem necessary to insure their accuracy.
water will enter in advance of cement and aggregate. All
water shall be in the drum by the end of the first quarter of the
specified mixing time.
Weighing equipment shall be insulated against vibration
or movement of other operating equipment in the plant.
When the entire plant is running, the scale reading at cut-off
Cement shall be batched and charged into the mixer so
shall not vary from the weight designated by the Engineer
that it will not result in loss of cement due to the effect of
more than one mass percent for cement, 1-1/2 mass percent
wind, or in accumulation of cement on surface of conveyors
for any size of aggregate, or one (1) mass percent for the
or hoppers, or in other conditions which reduce or vary the
total aggregate in any batch.
required quantity of cement in the concrete mixture.

2. Mixing Concrete at Site

137
 The entire content of a batch mixer shall be removed readily verified. The mixing water may be added directly to
from the drum before materials for a succeeding batch are the batch, in which case a tank is not required. Truck mixers
placed therein. The materials composing a batch except may be required to be provided with a means of which the
water shall be deposited simultaneously into the mixer. mixing time can be readily verified by the Engineer.

All concrete shall be mixed for a period of not less than 1- The maximum size of batch in truck mixers shall not
1/2 minutes after all materials, including water, are in the exceed the minimum rated capacity of the mixer as stated by
mixer. During the period of mixing, the mixer shall operate at the manufacturer and stamped in metal on the mixer. Truck
the speed for which it has been designed. mixing, shall, unless other-wise directed be continued for not
less than 100 revolutions after all ingredients, including water,
are in the drum. The mixing speed shall not be less than 4
Mixers shall be operated with an automatic timing device rpm, nor more than 6 rpm.
that can be locked by the Engineer. The time device and
discharge mechanics shall be so interlocked that during
normal operation no part of the batch will be charged until the Mixing shall begin within 30 minutes after the cement has
specified mixing time has elapsed. been added either to the water or aggregate, but when
cement is charged into a mixer drum containing water or
surface wet aggregate and when the temperature is above
The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer 32oC, this limit shall be reduced to 15 minutes. The limitation
shall contain a sufficient excess of cement, sand, and water in time between the introduction of the cement to the
to coat inside of the drum without reducing the required aggregate and the beginning of the mixing may be waived
mortar content of the mix. When mixing is to cease for a when, in the judgement of the Engineer, the aggregate is
period of one hour or more, the mixer shall be thoroughly sufficiently free from moisture, so that there will be no harmful
cleaned. effects on the cement.

3. Mixing Concrete at Central Plant When a truck mixer is used for transportation, the mixing
time specified in Subsection 405.4.4 (3) at a stationary mixer
may be reduced to 30 seconds and the mixing completed in a
Mixing at central plant shall conform to the requirements
truck mixer. The mixing time in the truck mixer shall be as
for mixing at the site. specified for truck mixing.

4. Mixing Concrete in Truck

5. Transporting Mixed Concrete

Truck mixers, unless otherwise authorized by the Mixed concrete may only be transported to the delivery
Engineer, shall be of the revolving drum type, water-tight, and point in truck agitators or truck mixers operating at the speed
so constructed that the concrete can be mixed to insure a designated by the manufacturers of the equipment as
uniform distribution of materials throughout the mass. All
agitating speed, or in non-agitating hauling equipment,
solid materials for the concrete shall be accurately measured provided the consistency and workability of the mixed
and charged into the drum at the proportioning plant. Except concrete upon discharge at the delivery point is suitable point
as subsequently provided, the truck mixer shall be equipped
for adequate placement and consolidation in place.
with a device by which the quantity of water added can be
138
 The quantity of structural concrete to be paid for will be the final
quantity placed and accepted in the completed structure. No deduction
Truck agitators shall be loaded not to exceed the
will be made for the volume occupied by pipe less than 100mm (4 inches)
manufacturer’s guaranteed capacity. They shall maintain the
in diameter or by reinforcing steel, anchors, conduits, weep holes or
mixed concrete in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass
expansion joint materials.
during hauling.

405.6 Basis of Payment

No additional mixing water shall be incorporated into the
concrete during hauling or after arrival at the delivery point.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section
405.5, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the Pay Item
The rate of discharge of mixed concrete from truck listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities.
mixers or agitators shall be controlled by the speed of rotation
of the drum in the discharge direction with the discharge gate
fully open. Payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, placing
and finishing concrete including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work prescribed in the item.
When a truck mixer or agitator is used for transporting
concrete to the delivery point, discharge shall be completed
within one hour, or before 250 revolutions of the drum or Payment will be made under:
blades, whichever comes first, after the introduction of the
cement to the aggregates. Under conditions contributing to
quick stiffening of the concrete or when the temperature of Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement
the concrete is 30oC, or above, a time less than one hour will Number
be required.
405 (1) Structural Concrete, Cubic Meter
Class A
405 (2) Cubic Meter
6. Delivery of Mixed Concrete Structural Concrete,
405 (3) Cubic Meter
Class B
The Contractor shall have sufficient plant capacity and 405 (4) Cubic Meter
Structural Concrete,
transportation apparatus to insure continuous delivery at the 405 (5) Class C Cubic Meter
rate required. The rate of delivery of concrete during
concreting operations shall be such as to provide for the Structural Concrete,
proper handling, placing and finishing of the concrete. The Class P
rate shall be such that the interval between batches shall not Seal Concrete
exceed 20 minutes. The methods of delivering and handling
the concrete shall be such as will facilitate placing of the
minimum handling.

ITEM 406 – PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES

405.5 Method of Measurement
406.1 Description

139
 This Item shall consist of prestressed concrete structures and the or form, or when permitted by the Engineer, may be applied directly to the
prestressed concrete portions of composite structures, constructed in steel. The corrosion inhibitor shall have no deleterious effect on the steel
reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions shown or concrete or bond strength of concrete to steel. Packaging or forms
on the Plans or established by the Engineer and in accordance with this damaged from any cause shall be immediately replaced or restored to
Specification. It shall also include the furnishing and installing of any original condition.
appurtenant items necessary for the particular prestressing system to be
used, including but not limited to ducts, anchorage assemblies and grouts
used for pressure grouting ducts. This shipping package or form shall be clearly marked with a
statement that the package contains high-strength prestressing steel and
the care to be used in handling, and the type, kind and amount of
406.2 Material Requirements corrosion inhibitor used, including the date when placed, safety orders
and instructions for use.

406.2.1 Concrete and Grout

406.2.5 Elastomeric Bearing Pads
The materials for concrete and grout shall conform to Item 405,
Structural Concrete. The concrete shall be Class P as shown in Table This shall conform to Item 412, Elastomeric Bearing Pads.
405.2, unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special
Provisions. The proportions of the grout will be as set out in Subsection 406.2.6 Water
406.3.11, Bonding Steel.
It shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.4, Water.

406.2.2 Prestressing Reinforcing Steel

It shall conform to Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope. 406.2.7 Enclosures

406.2.3 Prestressing Steel Duct enclosures for prestressing steel shall be galvanized ferrous
metal or of a type approved by the Engineer, mortartight and accurately
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel placed at the locations shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer.
and Wire Rope. Transition couplings connecting said ducts to anchoring devices need not
be galvanized.

All prestressing steel shall be protected against physical damage

406.2.8 Sampling and Testing
and rust or other results of corrosion at all times from manufacture to
grouting. Prestressing steel that has sustained physical damage at any
All wire, strand, anchorage assemblies or bars to be shipped to
time shall be rejected.
the site shall be assigned a lot number and tagged for identification
purposes.
406.2.4 Packaging, Storing and Shipping
All samples submitted shall be representative of the lot to be
Prestressing steel shall be packaged in containers or other
furnished and in the case of wire or strand, shall be taken from the same
shipping forms for the protection of the steel against physical damage and
master roll.
corrosion during shipping and storage. A corrosion inhibitor which
prevents rust or other results of corrosion shall be placed in the package

140
 All of the materials specified for testing shall be furnished free of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, subject to the modifications and amendments
cost and shall be delivered in time for tests to be made well in advance of contained herein.
anticipated time of use.

The Contractor shall furnish for testing the following samples 406.3.2 Prestressing Method
selected from each lot, if ordered by the Engineer. The selection of
samples will be made at the manufacturer’s plant by the Engineer or his
The method of prestressing to be used shall be optional with the
representative.
Contractor subject to all requirements hereinafter specified.
1. For pretensioning work-samples at least 2 m long shall be
furnished of each size of wire or strand proposed.
The Contractor, prior to casting any members to be prestressed,
2. For post-tensioning work-samples of the following lengths shall submit to the Engineer for approval complete details of the methods,
shall be furnished of each size of wire proposed. materials and equipment he proposes to use in the prestressing
operations. Such details shall outline the method and sequence of
a. For wire requiring heading, 2 m. stressing, complete specifications and details of the prestressing, steel
b. For wires not requiring heading, sufficient length to and anchoring devices proposed for use, anchoring stresses, type of
make up one parallel-lay cable of 1.50 m long enclosures and all other data pertaining to the prestressing operations,
consisting of the same number of wires as the cable including the proposed arrangement of the prestressing units in the
to be furnished. members, pressure grouting materials and equipment.
c. For strand to be furnished with fittings, 1.50 m
between near ends of fittings. 406.3.3 Prestressing Equipment
d. For bars to be furnished with thread ends and nuts,
1.5 m between threads at ends. Hydraulic jacks used to stress tendons shall be equipped with
either a pressure gauge or a load cell for determining the jacking stress.
3. Anchorage assemblies – If anchorage assemblies are not The pressure gauge, if used, shall have an accurate reading dial at least
attached to reinforcement samples, two (2) anchorage 154 mm (6 inches) in diameter and each jack and its gauge shall be
assemblies shall be furnished, completed with distribution calibrated as a unit with the cylinder extension in the approximate position
plates of each size and type to be used. that it will be at final jacking force, and shall be accompanied by a certified
calibration chart. The load cell, if used, shall be calibrated and shall be
When prestressing system has been previously tested and provided with an indicator by means of which the prestressing force in the
approved for similar projects by an agency acceptable to the Engineer, tendon may be determined. The range of the load cell shall be such that
complete tendon samples need not be furnished, provided there is no the lower ten (10) percent of the manufacturer’s rated capacity will not be
change whatsoever in the materials, design or details previously used in determining the jacking stress.
approved.

406.3 Construction Requirements Safety measures shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent
accidents due to possible breaking of the prestressing steel or the slipping
406.3.1 General of the grips during the prestressing process.

Prestressed concrete structural members shall be constructed in

accordance with the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete and 406.3.4 Casting Yard
Reinforcing Steel shall be placed in accordance with the requirements of

141
 The precasting of prestressed concrete structural members may and dimensions. Layers of units shall be separated by mortar blocks or
be done at a location selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval other equally suitable devices. Wooden blocks shall not be left in the
of the Engineer. concrete.

When acceptable prestressing steel for post-tensioning is

406.3.5 Placing Enclosures
installed in ducts after completion of concrete curing, and if stressing and
grouting are completed within ten (10) calendar days after the installation
Enclosures for prestressed reinforcement shall be accurately
of the prestressing steel, rust which may form during said ten (10) days
placed at locations shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer.
will not be caused for rejection of the steel. Prestressing steel, installed,
tensioned and grouted in this manner, all within ten (10) calendar days,
406.3.6 Placing Steel shall be subject to all the requirements in this Item pertaining to corrosion
protection and rejection because of rust.
Steel units shall be accurately placed at the position shown on
the Plans and firmly held during the placing and setting of the concrete. No welds or grounds for welding equipment shall be made on the
forms or on the steel in the manner after the prestressing steel has been
installed.
Ducts may be fabricated with either welded or interlocked seams.
Galvanizing of the welded steel will not be required. Ducts shall have Wires, wire groups, parallel-lay cables and any other prestressing
sufficient strength to maintain their correct alignment and shape during
elements shall be straightened to insure proper positioning in the
placing of concrete. Joints between sections of ducts shall be positive enclosures.
metallic connections which do not result in angle changes at the joints.
Waterproof tape shall be used at the connections.
Suitable horizontal and vertical spacers shall be provided, if
required, to hold the wires in place in true position in the enclosures.
All ducts or anchorage assemblies shall be provided with pipes or
other suitable connections for the injection of grout after prestressing.
406.3.7 Pretensioning
Ducts for prestressing steel shall be securely fastened in place to The prestressing elements shall be accurately held in position
prevent movement.
and stressed by jacks. A record shall be kept of the jacking force and the
elongations produced thereby. Several units may be cast in one
After installation in the forms, the end of ducts shall at all times be continuous line and stressed at one time. Sufficient space shall be left
covered as necessary to prevent the entry of water of debris.
between ends of units to permit access for cutting after the concrete has
attained the required strength. No bond stress shall be transferred to the
All ducts for continuous structures shall be vented over each concrete, nor end anchorages released until the concrete has attained a
intermediate support, and at additional locations as shown on the Plans. compressive strength, as shown by cylinder tests, of at least 28 MPa
Vents shall be 12.7 mm (1/2 inch) minimum diameter standard pipe. unless otherwise specified. The elements shall be cut or released in such
Connections to ducts shall be made with metallic structural fasteners.
an order that lateral eccentricity or prestress will be a minimum.
The vents shall be mortar tight, taped as necessary, and shall provide
means for injection of grout through the vents and for sealing the vents.
Ends of vents shall be removed 25.4 mm (1 inch) below the roadway 406.3.8 Placing Concrete
surface after grouting has been completed.
Concrete shall not be deposited in the forms until the Engineer
Distances from the forms shall be maintained by stays, blocks, has inspected the placing of the reinforcement, enclosures, anchorages
ties, hangers or other approved supports. Blocks for holding units from and prestressing steel and given his approval thereof. The concrete shall
contact with the forms shall be precast mortar blocks of approved shape

142
be vibrated with care and in such a manner as to avoid displacement of curing shall be done under a suitable enclosure to contain the heat and
reinforcement, conduits, or wires. moisture loss shall be minimized by covering all exposed concrete
surfaces with plastic sheeting or by applying an approved liquid
membrane curing compound to all exposed concrete surfaces. Top
Prior to placing concrete, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the
surface of concrete members to be used in composite construction shall
Engineer that all ducts are unobstructed.
be clear of residue of the membrane curing compound so as not to
reduce bond below design limits.
406.3.9 Curing

Steam curing process may be used as an alternative to water If the Contractor proposes to cure by any other special method,
curing. The casting bed for any unit cured with steam shall be completely the method and its details shall be subject to the approval of the
enclosed by a suitable type of housing, tightly constructed so as to Engineer.
prevent the escape of steam and simultaneously exclude outside
atmosphere. Two to four hours after placing concrete and after the
406.3.10 Post-tensioning
concrete has undergone initial set, the first application of steam or radiant
heat shall be made unless retarders are used, in which case the waiting
Tensioning of the prestressing reinforcement shall not be
period before application of the steam or radiant heat shall be increased
commenced until tests on concrete cylinders, manufactured of the same
to from four to six hours.
concrete and cured under the same conditions, indicate that the concrete
of the particular member to be prestressed has attained compressive
During the waiting period, the temperature within the curing strength of at least 28 MPa unless otherwise specified.
chamber shall not be less than 10.0oC (50oF) and live steam or radiant
heat may be used to maintain the curing chamber at the proper minimum
After all concrete has attained the required strength, the
temperature. The steam shall be at 100 percent relative humidity to
prestressing reinforcement shall be stressed by means of jacks to the
prevent loss of moisture and to provide moisture for proper hydration of
desired tension and the stress transferred to the end anchorage.
the cement. Application of the steam shall not be directly on the concrete.
During application of the steam, or of radiant heat, the ambient air
Cast-in-place concrete shall not be post-tensioned until at least
temperature shall increase at a rate not to exceed 4.41oC per hour until
ten (10) days after the last concrete has been placed in the member to be
the curing temperature is reached. The maximum curing temperature
the post-tensioned and until the compressive strength of said placed
within the enclosure shall not exceed 71.1oC. The maximum temperature
concrete has reached the strength specified for the concrete at the time of
shall be held until the concrete has reached the desired strength.
stressing.
Detensioning shall be accomplished immediately after the steam curing or
the heat curing has been discontinued and additional curing is not
All side forms for girders shall be removed before post-tensioning.
required after detensioning.
The falsework under the bottom slab supporting the superstructure shall
not be released until a minimum of 48 hours have elapsed after grouting
1. Curing with Low Pressure Steam
of the post-tension tendons nor until all other conditions of the
Specifications have been met. The supporting falsework shall be
Application of live steam shall not be directed on the concrete forms
constructed in such a manner that the superrestructure will be free to lift
as to cause localized high temperatures.
off the falsework and shorten during post-tensioning. Formwork left inside
box girders to support the roadway slab shall be detailed in such a
2. Curing with Radiant Heat manner so as to offer minimum resistance to girder shortening due to
shrinkage and post-tensioning.
Radiant heat may be applied by means of pipes circulating
steam, hot oil or hot water, or by electric heating elements. Radiant heat

143
 The tensioning process shall be so conducted that the tension
being applied and the elongation of the prestressing elements may be Standby flushing equipment capable of developing a pumping
measured at all times. The friction loss in the element, i.e., the difference pressure of 1.72 MPa (250 psi) and of sufficient capacity to flush out any
between the tension of the jack and the minimum tension, shall be partially grouted ducts shall be provided.
determined in accordance with Article 1.6.7 of AASHTO Standard
Specifications for Highway Bridges. All ducts shall be clean and free of deleterious materials that
would impair bonding of the grout or interfere with grouting procedures.
Suitable shims or other approved devices shall be used to insure All grout shall pass through a screen with a 2 mm (0.0787 inch) maximum
that the specified anchor set loss is attained. clear openings prior to being introduced into the grout pump.

Prestressing tendons in continuous post-tensioned members Grout injection pipes shall be fitted with positive mechanical
shall be tensioned by jacking at each end of the tendon. Such jacking of shutoff valves. Vents and ejection pipes shall be fitted with valves, caps
both ends need not be done simultaneously. or other devices capable of withstanding the pumping pressures. Valves
and caps shall not be removed or opened until the grout has set.
A record shall be kept of gage pressure and elongation at all
times and submitted to the Engineer for his approval. Post-tensioned steel shall be bonded to the concrete. All
prestressing steel to be bonded to the concrete shall be free of dirt, loose
406.3.11 Bonding Steel rust, grease or other deleterious substances.

Prestressing steel shall be bonded to the concrete by filling the Immediately after completion of the concrete pour, the metal
void space between the duct and the tendon with grout conduit shall be blown out with compressed oil free air to the extent
necessary to break up and remove any mortar in the conduit before it
.
hardens. Approximately 24 hours after the concrete pour, the metal
Grout shall consist of Portland Cement, water and an expansive conduits shall be flushed out with water and then blown out with
admixture approved by the Engineer. compressed oil free air.

Water shall be potable. Prior to placing forms for roadway slabs of box girder structures,
the Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that
No admixture containing chlorides or nitrates shall be used. all ducts are unobstructed and if the prestressing reinforcement has been
placed, that the steel is free and unbonded in the duct.
Water shall first be added to the mixer followed by cement and
admixture. After the tendons have been stressed to the required tension,
each conduit encasing the prestressing steel shall be blown out with
The grout shall be mixed in mechanical mixing equipment of a compressed oil free air. The conduit shall then be completely filled from
type that will produce uniform and thoroughly mixed grout. The water the low end with grout under pressure. Grout shall be pumped through
content shall be not more than 19 litres (5 gallons) per sack of cement. the duct and continuously wasted at the outlet until no visible slugs of
Retempering of grout will not be permitted. Grout shall be continuously water or air are ejected and the efflux time of ejected grout is not less
agitated until it is pumped. than 11 seconds. All vents and openings shall then be closed and the
grouting pressure at the injection end shall be raised to a minimum of
Grouting equipment shall be capable of grouting at a pressure of 0.6894 MPa (100 psi) and held for a minimum of 10 seconds.
at least 0.6894 MPa (100 psi).
If aluminum powder is used to expand the grout, it shall be added
Grouting equipment shall be furnished with a pressure gauge as follows:
having a full-scale reading of not more than 2.07 MPa (300 psi).
144
 From 2 to 4 grams of the unpolished variety (about 1 to 2 The manufacturing tolerances for pre-cast members shall not
teaspoons) shall be added for each sack of cement used in the grout. exceed those given for length, cross-section and straightness on the
The exact amount of aluminum powder will be designated by the Plans, as specified in the Contract or as approved by the Engineer. In
Engineer. The dosage per batch of grout shall be carefully weighed. A addition, where beams are laid side by side in a deck:
number of weighings may be made in the laboratory and doses placed in
glass vials for convenient use in the mix. The aluminum powder shall be
1. The difference on soffit level between adjacent units before
blended with pumicite or other inert powder in the proportion of one (1)
the in-situ
part powder to fifty (50) parts pumicite (or other inert powder) by weight.
concrete is placed shall not exceed 5 mm for units up to 10
The blend shall be thoroughly mixed with the cement. The amount of the
mm for longer units.
blend used should vary from 120 g (4-1/2 ounces) per sack of cement for
2. The width of the deck soffit shall be within ±25 mm.
concrete having a temperature of 21.1oC to 190 g (7 ounces) for a
3. In adjacent span, the continuity of the outside beams shall be
temperature of 4.44oC after all ingredients are added, the batch shall be
maintained.
mixed for 3 minutes. Batches of grout shall be placed within 45 minutes
4. The width of gap between individual beams shall not exceed
after mixing.
twice the nominal gap.
5. The alignment of transverse holes shall permit the
406.3.12 Unbonded Steel
reinforcement or prestressing cables to be placed without
distortion.
Where the steel is not to be bonded to the concrete, it shall be
carefully protected against corrosion by a coating of tar of other
406.4 Method of Measurement
waterproofing material, in addition to any galvanizing which may be
specified in addition to the requirements of ASTM A 416 (AASHTO M
406.4.1 Structural Members
203) and ASTM A 421 (AASHTO M 204.)
The quantity to be measured for payment will be the actual
406.3.13 Handling number of precast prestressed concrete structural members, except
piling, of the several types and sizes, installed in place, completed and
Extreme care shall be exercised in handling and moving precast accepted. Each member will include the concrete, reinforcement and
prestressed concrete mortar members. Precast girders and slabs shall prestressing steel, anchorages, plates, nuts, elastomeric bearing pads,
be transported in an upright position and the points of support and and other such material contained within or attached to the unit.
directions of the reactions with respect to the member shall be
approximately the same during transportation and storage as when the
Piling will be measured as provided in Item 400.
members are in their final position. If the Contractor deems it expedient
to transport or store precast units in other than this position, it shall be
406.4.2 Other Items
done at his own risk after notifying the Engineer of his intention to do so.
The quantities of other Contract items which enter into the
Prestressed concrete girders shall not be shipped until tests on completed and accepted structure will be measured for payment in the
concrete cylinders, manufactured of the same concrete and cured under manner prescribed for the several items involved.
the same conditions as the girders, indicate that the concrete of the
particular girder has attained a compressive strength equal to the
specified design compressive strength of the concrete in the girder and 406.5 Basis of Payment
has attained a minimum age of 14 days.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section
406.3.14 Composite Slab Construction
406.4 shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the particular

145
item listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities, which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all 2. Reinforcing Steel
materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary
to complete the work prescribed in this Item. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements in Item 404,
Reinforcing Steel.

Payment will be made under:

3. Structural Steel

Structural steel shall conform to the requirements of

corresponding materials in Item 403, Metal Structures.
Pay Item Description Unit of
Number Measurement 4. Bridge Bearing (Elastomeric Bearing Pad)
406 (1) Prestressed Structural
Concrete Members Elastomeric bearing pads shall conform to Item 412, Elastomeric
Each Bearing Pads.
(Identification)

406 (2) Lump Sum

Prestressed Concrete 5. Paints

Paints shall conform to the requirements in Item 411, Paint.

ITEM 407– CONCRETE STRUCTURES

407.1 Description 6. Waterproofing and Dampproofing

This Item shall consist of the general description of the materials, Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or indicated in Special
equipment, workmanship and construction requirements of concrete Provisions, materials for waterproofing and dampproofing shall conform to
structures and the concrete portions of composite structures conforming the requirements of the following specifications:
to the alignment, grades, design, dimensions and details shown on the
Plans and in accordance with the Specifications for piles, reinforcing
steel, structural steel, structural concrete and other items which constitute a. AASHTO M 115 Asphalt for dampproofing and waterproofing.
the completed structure. The class of concrete to be used in the structure
or part of the structure shall be as specified in Item 405, Structural b. AASHTO M 116 Primer for the use with Asphalt in
Concrete. dampproofing and waterproofing.
c. AASHTO M 117 Woven cotton fabrics saturated with
407.2 Material Requirements bituminous substances for use in waterproofing.
d. AASHTO M 118 Coal-Tar pitch for roofing, dampproofing and
1. Concrete and Concrete Ingredients water-proofing.
e. AASHTO M 121 Creosote for priming coat with coal-tar pitch
Concrete and concrete materials shall conform to the damp-proofing and waterproofing.
requirements in Item 405, Structural Concrete. Unless otherwise shown f. AASHTO M 159 Woven burlap fabric saturated with
on the Plans or specified in Special Provisions, concrete shall be of Class bituminous substances for use in waterproofing.
A. g. AASHTO M 166 Numbered cotton duck and array duck.

146
 h. AASHTO M 239 Asphalt for use in waterproofing membrane Concrete shall not be placed until forms and reinforcing steel
construction. have been checked and approved by the Engineer.

7. Concrete Curing Compound

If lean concrete is required in the Plan or as directed by the
Curing compound shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO Engineer prior to placing of reinforcing steel bar, the lean concrete should
M 148 Liquid membrane-forming compounds for curing concrete. have a minimum compressive strength of 13.8 MPa (2,000 psi)..

8. Joint Filler In preparation for the placing of concrete all sawdust, chips and
other construction debris and extraneous matter shall be removed from
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or in Special Provisions, inside the formwork, struts, stays and braces, serving temporarily to hold
materials for expansion joint filler shall conform to the requirements of the the forms in correct shape and alignment, pending the placing of concrete
following specifications: at their locations, shall be removed when the concrete placing has
reached an elevation rendering their service unnecessary. These
temporary members shall be entirely removed from the forms and not
a. AASHTO M 33 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete.
buried in the concrete.
b. AASHTO M 153 Preformed sponge rubber and cork
No concrete shall be used which does not reach its final position
expansion joint fillers for concrete paving and structural
in the forms within the time stipulated under “Time of Hauling and Placing
construction.
Mixed Concrete”.
c. AASHTO M 173 Concrete joint sealer hot poured elastic type.
Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the
materials and the displacement of the reinforcement. The use of long
d. AASHTO M 213 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete
troughs, chutes, and pipes for conveying concrete to the forms shall be
paving and structural construction-non-extruding and resilient
permitted only on written authorization of the Engineer. The Engineer
bituminous types.
shall reject the use of the equipment for concrete transportation that will
allow segregation, loss of fine materials, or in any other way will have a
e. AASHTO M 220 Preformed elastomeric compression joint
deteriorating effect on the concrete quality.
seals for concrete.
Open troughs and chutes shall be of metal lined; where steep
407.2.1 Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete
slopes are required, the chutes shall be equipped with baffles or be in
short lengths that reverse the direction of movement to avoid segregation.
This shall be in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete.
All chutes, troughs and pipes shall be kept clean and free from
407.2.2 Sampling and Testing coatings of hardened concrete by thoroughly flushing with water after
each run. Water used for flushing shall be discharged clear of the
This shall be in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete. structure.

When placing operations would involve dropping the concrete

407.3 Construction and Requirements
more than 1.5 m, concrete shall be conveyed through sheet metal or
approved pipes. As far as practicable, the pipes shall be kept full of
407.3.1 Handling and Placing Concrete: General
concrete during placing and their lower end shall be kept buried in the
newly placed concrete. After initial set of the concrete, the forms shall not

147
be jarred and no strain shall be placed on the ends of projecting Concrete shall not be placed in water except with approval of the
reinforcement bars. Engineer and under his immediate supervision. In this case the method
of placing shall be hereinafter specified.
The concrete shall be placed as nearly as possible to its final
position and the use of vibrators for moving of the mass of fresh concrete
shall not be permitted. Concrete deposited in water shall be Class A concrete with a
minimum cement content of 400 kg/m3 of concrete. The slump of the
407.3.1.1 Placing Concrete by Pneumatic Means concrete shall be maintained between 10 and 20 cm. To prevent
segregation, concrete shall be carefully placed in a compact mass, in its
final position, by means of a tremie, a bottom-dump bucket, or other
Pneumatic placing of concrete will be permitted only if specified
approved means, and shall not be disturbed after being placed.
in the Special Provisions or authorized by the Engineer. The equipment
shall be so arranged that vibration will not damage freshly placed
concrete.
A tremie shall consist of a tube having a diameter of not less than
250 mm constructed in sections having flanged couplings fitted with
Where concrete is conveyed and placed by pneumatic means, gaskets with a hopper at the top. The tremie shall be supported so as to
the equipment shall be suitable in kind and adequate in capacity for the permit free movement of the discharge and over the entire top surface of
work. The machine shall be located as close as practicable to the work. the work and so as to permit rapid lowering when necessary to retard or
The discharge lines shall be horizontal or inclined upwards from the stop the flow of concrete. The discharge end shall be closed at the start
machine. The discharge end of the line shall not be more than 3 m from of work so as to prevent water entering the tube and shall be completely
the point of deposit. submerged in concrete at all times; the tremie tube shall be kept full to the
bottom of the hopper. When a batch is dumped into the hopper, the flow
At the conclusion of placing the concrete, the entire equipment of concrete shall be induced by lightly raising the discharge end, but
shall be thoroughly cleaned. always keeping it in the placed concrete. The flow shall be continuous
until the work is completed.
407.3.1.2 Placing of Concrete by Pumping

The placing of concrete by pumping will be permitted only if When the concrete is placed with a bottom-dump bucket, the top
specified or if authorized by the Engineer. The equipment shall be so of the bucket shall be open. The bottom doors shall open freely
arranged that vibration will not damage freshly placed concrete. downward and outward when tripped. The buckets shall be completely
filled and slowly lowered to avoid backwash. It shall not be dumped until
it rests on the surface upon which the concrete is to be deposited and
Where concrete is conveyed and placed by mechanically applied
pressure the equipment shall be suitable in kind and adequate in capacity when discharged shall be withdrawn slowly until well above the concrete.
for the work. The operation of the pump shall be such that a continuous
stream of concrete without air pockets is produced. When pumping is
completed, the concrete remaining in the pipeline, if it is to be used, shall 407.3.2 Compaction of Concrete
be ejected in such a manner that there will be no contamination of the
concrete or separation of the ingredients. After this operation, the entire Concrete during and immediately after placing shall be thoroughly
equipments shall be thoroughly cleaned. compacted. The concrete in walls, beams, columns and the like shall be
placed in horizontal layers not more than 30 cm thick except as
407.3.1.3 Placing Concrete in Water hereinafter provided. When less than a complete layer is placed in one
operation, it shall be terminated in a vertical bulkhead. Each layer shall
be placed and compacted before the preceding layer has taken initial set

148
to prevent injury to the green concrete and avoid surfaces of separation When the placing of concrete is temporarily discontinued, the
between the layers. Each layer shall be compacted so as to avoid the concrete, after becoming firm enough to retain its shape, shall be cleaned
formation of a construction joint with a preceding layer. of laitance and other objectionable material to a sufficient depth to expose
sound concrete. Where a “faster edge” might be produced at a
construction joint, as in the sloped top surface of a wingwall, an inset
The compaction shall be done by mechanical vibration. The formwork shall be used to produce an edge thickness of not less than 15
concrete shall be vibrated internally unless special authorization of other cm in the succeeding layer. Work shall not be discontinued within 50 cm
methods is given by the Engineer or is provided herein. Vibrators shall be of the top of any face, unless provision has been made for a coping less
of a type, design, and frequency approved by the Engineer. The intensity than 50 cm thick, in which case if permitted by the Engineer, the
of vibration shall be such as to visibly affect a mass of concrete with a 3 construction joint may be made at the underside of coping.
cm slump over a radius of at least 50 cm. A sufficient number of vibrator
shall be provided to properly compact each batch immediately after it is
placed in the forms. Vibrators shall be manipulated so as to thoroughly Immediately following the discontinuance of placing concrete, all
work the concrete around the reinforcement and embedded fixtures and accumulations of mortar splashed upon the reinforcing steel and the
into the corners and angles of the forms and shall be applied at the point surfaces of forms shall be removed. Dried mortar chips and dust shall not
of placing and in the area of freably placed concrete. The vibrators shall be puddled into the unset concrete. Care shall be exercised, during the
be inserted into and withdrawn from the concrete slowly. The vibration cleaning of the reinforcing steel, not to injure or break the concrete-steel
shall be of sufficient duration and intensity to compact the concrete bond at and near the surface of the concrete.
thoroughly but shall not be continued so as to cause segregation and at
any one point to the extent that localized areas of grout are formed.
Application of vibrators shall be at points uniformly spaced, and not 407.3.4 Casting Box Culverts
farther apart than twice the radius over which the vibration is visibly
effective. Vibration shall not be applied directly or thru the reinforcement
to sections or layers of concrete that have hardened to the degree that In general, the base slab of box culverts shall be placed and
the concrete ceases to be plastic under vibration. It shall not be used to allowed to set before the remainder of the culvert is constructed. In the
construction of box culverts the side walls and top slab may be
make concrete flow in the forms over distances so great as to cause
segregation, and vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete in the constructed as a monolith.
forms of troughs or chutes.
If the concrete in the walls and top slab is placed in two separate
operations, special care shall be exercised in order to secure bonding in
407.3.3 Casting Sections and Construction Joints
the construction joint and appropriate keys shall be left in the sidewalls for
anchoring the top slab. Each wingwall shall be constructed, if possible,
The concrete in each form shall be placed continuously. Placing as a monolith. Construction joints where unavoidable, shall be horizontal
of concrete in any such form shall not be allowed to commence unless and so located that no joints will be visible in the exposed face of the
sufficiently inspected and approved materials for the concrete is at hand, wingwall above the ground line.
and labor and equipment are sufficient to complete the pour without
interruption.
Vertical construction joints shall be at right angles to the axis of
the culverts.
Joints in the concrete due to stopping work shall be avoided as
much as possible. Such joints, when necessary, shall be constructed to
meet the approval of the Engineer. 407.3.5 Casting Columns, Slabs and Girders

149
 Concrete in columns shall be placed in one continuous operation,
unless otherwise directed. The concrete shall be allowed to set for at
407.3.6 Construction Joints
least 20 hours before the caps are placed.

Construction joints shall be made only where shown on the Plans

Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, no concrete shall be or called for in the pouring schedule, unless otherwise approved by the
placed in the superstructure until the column forms have been stripped Engineer. Shear keys or reinforcement shall be used, unless otherwise
sufficiently to determine the condition of the concrete in the column. The specified, to transmit shear or to bond the two sections together.
load of the super-structure shall not be allowed to come upon the bents
until they have been in place at least 14 days, unless otherwise permitted
by the Engineer. Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete which has
hardened, the forms shall be retightened. The surface of the hardened
concrete shall be roughened as required by the Engineer, in a manner
Concrete in slab spans shall be placed in one continuous that will not leave loose particles of aggregate or damage concrete at the
operation for each span unless otherwise provided. surface. It shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter and laitance.
When directed by the Engineer, the surface of the hardened concrete
which will be in contact with new concrete shall be washed with water to
Concrete in T-Beam or deck girder spans shall be placed in one this satisfaction, and to insure an excess of mortar at the juncture of the
continuous operation unless otherwise directed. If it is permitted to place hardened and the newly deposited concrete, the cleaned and saturated
the concrete in two separate operations, each of the operations, shall be surfaces, including vertical and inclined surfaces shall first be thoroughly
continuous: first, to the top of the girder stems, and second, to covered with a coating of mortar of the same proportion of sand and
completion. In the latter case, the bond between stem and slab shall be cement as the class of concrete used against which the new concrete
secured by means of suitable shear keys which may be formed by the shall be placed before the grout or mortar has attained its initial set.
use of timber blocks approximately 50 mm x 100 mm in cross-section
having a length of 100 mm less than the width of the girder stem. These
key blocks shall be placed along the girder stems as required, but the The placing of concrete shall be carried continuously from joint to
spacing shall not be greater than 300 mm center to center. The blocks joint. The face edges of all joints which are exposed to view shall be
shall be beveled and oiled in such a manner as to insure their ready carefully finished true to line and elevation.
removal, and they shall be removed as soon as the concrete has set
sufficiently to retain its shape. If the contractor wishes to place the
concrete in two separate operations, he shall, with his request for 407.3.7 Concrete Surface Finishing
permission to do so, submit plans and proposals of the required changes
to the reinforcement, which plans and proposals shall be subject to the
Surface finishing shall be classified as follows:
approval of the Engineer.

In box girders, the concrete in the bottom slab be poured first, as Class 1, Ordinary Finish
a separate operation. Class 2, Rubbed Finish
Class 3, Floated Finish
The concrete in the webs and the top slab shall be placed in one
continuous operation unless otherwise specified. If it is permitted to place All concrete shall be given Class 1, Ordinary Finish and
the concrete in more than one operation, the requirements for T-beam additionally any further finish as specified.
shall apply.
150
 The resulting surface shall be true and uniform. All repaired
Unless otherwise specified, the following surfaces shall be given surfaces, the appearance of which is not satisfactory to the Engineer,
a Class 2, Rubbed Finish. shall be “rubbed” as specified below.

1. The exposed faces of piers, abutments, wingwalls, and

retaining walls. Class 2, Concrete Rubbed Finish
2. The outside faces of girders, T-beams, slabs, columns,
brackets, curbs, headwalls, railings, arch rings, spandrel walls
and parapets. After removal of forms, the rubbing of concrete shall be started as
soon as its condition will permit. Immediately before starting this work,
Excluded, however, are the tops and bottoms of floor slabs and the concrete shall be kept thoroughly saturated with water for a minimum
sidewalks, bottoms of beams and girders, sides of interior beams and period of three hours. Sufficient time shall have elapsed before the
girders, backwalls above bridge seats or the underside of copings. The wetting down to allow the mortar used in the pointing of road holes and
surface finish on piers and abutments shall include all exposed surfaces defects to thoroughly set. Surfaces to be finished shall be rubbed with a
below the bridge seats to 20 cm below low water elevation or 50 cm minimum coarse carborundum stone using a small amount of mortar on
below finished ground level when such ground level is above the water each face. The mortar shall be composed of cement and fine sand mixed
surface. Wingwalls shall be finished from the top to 50 cm below the in the proportions used in the concrete being finished. Rubbing shall be
finished slope lines on the outside face and shall be finished on top and continued until all form marks, protections and irregularities have been
for a depth of 20 cm below the top on the back sides. removed, all voids have been filled, and a uniform surface has been
obtained. The face produced by this rubbing shall be left in place at this
time.
Unless otherwise specified, the surface of the traveled way shall
be Class 3, Floated Finish.
After all concrete above the surface being created has been cast,
the final finish shall be obtained by rubbing with a fine carborundum stone
Class 1, Concrete Ordinary Finish and water. This rubbing shall be continued until the entire surface is of
smooth texture and uniform color.

Immediately following the removal of forms, all fins and irregular

protection shall be removed from all surface except from those which are After the final rubbing is completed and the surface has dried, it
not to be exposed or are not to be waterproofed. On all surfaces the should be rubbed with burlap to remove loose powder and shall be left
cavities produced by form ties and all other holes, honeycomb spots, free from all unsound patches, paste, powder and objectionable marks.
broken corners or edges and other defects shall be thoroughly cleaned,
and after having been kept saturated with water for a period of not less
than three hours shall be carefully pointed and made true with a mortar of Class 3, Concrete Floated Finish
cement and fine aggregate mixed in the proportions used in the grade of
the concrete being finished. Mortar used in pointing shall not be more
than one hour old. The mortar patches shall be cured as specified under After the concrete is compacted as specified in Subsection
Subsection 407.3.8. All construction and expansion joints in the 407.3.2, Compaction of Concrete, the surface shall be carefully struck off
completed work shall be left carefully tooled and free of all mortar and with a strike board to conform to the cross-section and grade shown on
concrete. The joint filler shall be left exposed for its full length with a the Plans. Proper allowance shall be made for camber if required. The
clean and true edges. strike board may be operated longitudinally or transversely and shall be
moved forward with a combined longitudinal and transverse motion, the
manipulation being such that neither is raised from the side forms during
151
the process. A slight excess of concrete shall be kept in front of the When the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the surface shall be
cutting edge at all times. given a broom finish. The broom shall be an approved type. The strokes
shall be square across the slabs from edge to edge, with adjacent strokes
slightly overlapped, and shall be made by drawing the broom without
After striking off and consolidating as specified above, the surface tearing the concrete, but so as to produce regular corrugations not over 3
shall be made uniform by longitudinal or transverse floating or both. mm in depth. The surface as thus finished shall be free from porous
Longitudinal floating will be required except in places where this method spots, irregularities, depressions and small pockets or rough spots such
is not feasible. as may be caused by accidental disturbing, during the final brooming of
particles of coarse aggregate embedded near the surface.

The longitudinal float, operated from foot bridges, shall be worked

with a sawing motion while held in a floating position parallel to the road Concrete Surface Finish for Sidewalk.
centerline and passing gradually from one side of the pavement to the
other. The float shall then be moved forward one-half of each length and
the above operation repeated. Machine floating which produces an After the concrete has been deposited in place, it shall be
equivalent result may be substituted for the above manual method. compacted and the surface shall be struck off by means of strike board
and floated with a wooden or cork float. An edging tool shall be used on
all edges and at all expansion joints. The surface shall not vary more
The transverse float shall be operated across the pavement by than 3 mm under a 3 m straight-edge. The surface shall have a granular
starting at the edge and slowly moving to the center and back again to the or matted texture which will not slick when wet.
edge. The float shall then be moved forward one-half of each length and
the above operation repeated. Care shall be taken to preserve the crown
and cross-section of the pavement. 407.3.8 Curing Concrete

All newly placed concrete shall be cured in accordance with this

After the longitudinal floating has been completed and the excess
Specification, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The curing
water removed, but while the concrete is still plastic, the slab surface shall
method shall be one or more of the following:
be tested for trueness with a straight-edge. For the purpose, the
Contractor shall furnish and use an accurate 3 m straight-edge swing
handless 1 m longer than one half the width of the slab.
1. Water Method

The straight-edge shall be held in successive positions parallel to The concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the
the road centerline and in contact with the surface and the whole area application of water for a minimum period of 7 days after the
gone over from one side of the slab to the other as necessary concrete has been placed.
advancement along the deck shall be in successive stages of not more
than one-half the length of the straight-edge. Any depression found shall
be immediately filled with freshly mixed concrete, struck off, consolidated The entire surface of the concrete shall be kept dump by
and refinished. The straight-edge testing and refloating shall continue applying water with an atomizing nozzle. Cotton mats, rugs,
until the entire surface is found to be free from observable departure from carpets, or earth or sand blankets may be used to retain the
the straight-edge and the slabs has the required grade and contour, until moisture. At the expiration of the curing period the concrete
there are no deviations of more than 3 mm under the 3 m straight-edge. surface shall be cleared of the curing medium.

152
2. Curing Compound manufacture, the Engineer may require additional testing
before the use to determine compliance to requirements.
Surfaces exposed to the air may be cured by the
application of an impervious membrane if approved by the
An anti-setting agent or a combination of anti-setting
Engineer.
agents shall be incorporated in the curing compound to
prevent caking.
The membrane forming compound used shall be
practically colorless liquid. The use of any membrane-
The curing compound shall be packaged in clean barrels
forming compound that will alter the natural color of the
or steel containers or shall be supplied from a suitable
concrete or impart a slippery surface to any wearing surface
storage tank located on the Site. Storage tank shall have a
shall be prohibited. The compound shall be applied with a
permanent system designed to completely redisperse any
pressure spray in such a manner as to cover the entire
settled material without introducing air or any other foreign
concrete surface with a uniform film and shall be of such
substance. Containers shall be well-sealed with ring seals
character that it will harden within 30 minutes after
and lug type crimp lids. The linings of the containers shall be
application. The amount of compound applied shall be ample
of a character that will resist the solvent of the curing
to seal the surface of the concrete thoroughly. Power-
compound. Each container shall be labeled with a
operated spraying equipment shall be equipped with an
manufacturer’s name, specification number, batch number,
operational pressure gauge and means of controlling the
capacity and date of manufacture, and shall have label
pressure.
warning concerning flammability. The label shall also warn
that the curing compound shall be well-stirred before use.
When the curing compound is shipped in tanks or tank trunks,
The curing compound shall be applied to the concrete
a shipping invoice shall accompany each load. The invoice
following the surface finishing operation immediately after the
shall contain the same information as that required herein for
moisture sheen begins to disappear from the surface, but
container labels.
before any drying shrinkage or craze cracks begin to appear.
In the event of any delay, in the application of the curing
compound, which results in any drying or cracking of the
Curing compound may be sampled by the Engineer at
surface, application of water with an atomizing nozzle as
the source of supply and on the Site.
specified under “Water Method”, shall be started immediately
and shall be continued until the application of the compound
is resumed or started, however, the compound shall not be
3. Waterproof Membrane Method
applied over any resulting free standing water. Should the
film of compound be damaged from any cause before the
expiration of 7 days after the concrete is placed in the case of The exposed finished surfaces of concrete shall be
structures, the damaged portion shall be repaired sprayed with water, using a nozzle that so atomizes the flow
immediately with additional compound. that a mist and not a spray is formed until the concrete has
set, after which a curing membrane of waterproof paper or
plastic sheeting shall be placed. The curing membrane shall
Curing compound shall not be diluted or altered in any remain in place for a period of not less than 72 hours.
manner after manufacture. At the time of use, the compound
shall be in a thoroughly mixed condition. If the compound
has not been used within 120 days after the date of

153
 Waterproof paper and plastic sheeting shall conform to All newly placed concrete for cast-in-situ structures, other
the specification of AASHTO M 171. than highway bridge deck, shall be cured by the water
method, the forms-in-place method, or as permitted herein,
by the curing compound method, all in accordance with the
The waterproof paper or plastic sheeting shall be formed requirements of Subsection, 407.3.8 Curing Concrete.
into sheets of such width as to cover completely the entire
concrete surface.
The curing compound method may be used on concrete
surfaces which are to be buried under ground and surfaces
All joints in the sheets shall be securely cemented where only Ordinary Surface Finish is to be applied and on
together in such a manner as to provide a waterproof joint. which a uniform color is not required and which will not be
The joint seams shall have a minimum lap of 100 mm. visible from public view.

The sheets shall be securely weighed down by placing a The top surface of highway bridge decks shall be cured
bank of earth on the edges of the sheets or by other means by either the curing compound method or the water method.
satisfactory to the Engineer. The curing compound shall be applied progressively during
the deck finishing operations. The water cure shall be
applied not later than 4 hours after completion of the deck
Should any portion of the sheets be broken or damaged finishing.
within 72 hours after being placed, the broken or damaged
portions shall be immediately repaired with new sheets
properly cemented into place. When deemed necessary by the Engineer during periods
of hot weather, water shall be applied to concrete surface
being cured by the curing compound method or by the forms-
Sections of membrane which have lost their waterproof in-place method until the Engineer determine that a cooling
qualities or have been damaged to such an extent as to effect is no longer required.
render them unfit for curing, the concrete shall not be used.

6. Curing Pre-Cast Concrete (except piles)

4. Forms-in-Place Method

Pre-cast concrete members shall be cured for not less

Formed surfaces of concrete may be cured by retaining than 7 days by the water method or by steam curing. Steam
the form-in-place. The forms shall remain in place for a curing for pre-cast members shall conform to the following
minimum period of 7 days after the concrete has been
provisions:
placed, except that for members over 50 cm in least
dimensions, the forms shall remain in place for a minimum
period of 5 days. Wooden forms shall be kept wet by
a. After placement of the concrete, members shall be held
watering during the curing period.
for a minimum 4-hour pre-steaming period.

5. Curing Cast-In-Situ Concrete b. To prevent moisture loss on exposed surfaces during the
pre-steaming period, members shall be covered
154
 immediately after casting or the exposed surface shall be provisions of Subsection 407.3.8 (6), Curing Pre-Cast
kept wet by fog spray or wet blankets. Concrete (except piles) shall apply except that the concrete
shall be kept wet for at least 7 days including the holding and
steaming period.
c. Enclosures for steam curing shall allow free circulation of
steam about the member and shall be constructed to
contain the live steam with a minimum moisture loss.
407.3.9 Falsework Design and Drawings
The use of tarpaulins or similar flexible covers will be
permitted, provided they are kept in good condition and
secured in such a manner to prevent the loss of steam Detailed working drawings and supporting calculations of the
and moisture. false work shall be furnished by the Contractor to the Engineer. No
falsework construction shall start until the Engineer has reviewed and
approved the design. The Contractor shall provide sufficient time for the
d. Steam at jets shall be low pressure and in a saturated
Engineer to complete this review. Such time shall be proportionate to the
condition. Steam jets shall not impinge directly on the
complexity of the falsework design and in no case be less than two
concrete, test cylinders, or forms. During application of
weeks.
the steam, the temperature rise within the enclosure shall
not exceed 20oC per hour. The curing temperature
throughout the enclosure shall not exceed 65oC and shall
be maintained at a constant level for a sufficient time The Contractor may review the falsework drawings at any time
provided sufficient time is allowed for the Engineer’s review before
necessary to develop the required compressive strength.
Control cylinders shall be covered to prevent moisture construction is started on the revised portion.
loss and shall be placed in a location where temperature
of the enclosure will be the same as that of the concrete.
Assumptions used in design of the falsework shall include but not
be limited to the following:
e. Temperature recording devices that will provide an
accurate continuous permanent record of the curing
temperature shall be provided. A minimum of one 1. The entire superstructure cross-section, except for the
temperature recording device per 50 m of continuous bed railing, shall be considered to be placed at one time,
length will be required for checking temperature. except when in the opinion of the Engineer, a portion of
the load is carried by members previously cast and
f. Curing of pre-cast concrete will be considered completed having attained a specified strength.
after the termination of the steam curing cycle. 2. The loading used on timber piles shall not exceed the
bearing value for the pile and shall in no case exceed 20
tonne per pile.
7. Curing Pre-cast Concrete Piles 3. Soil bearing values and soil condition (wet and dry) shall
be designated by the Contractor on the falsework
drawings. Falsework footings shall be designed to carry
All newly placed concrete for pre-cast concrete piles, the loads imposed upon them without exceeding
conventionally reinforced or prestressed shall be cured by the estimated soil bearing values or allowable settlements.
“Water Method” as described in Subsection 407.3.8, Curing 4. The maximum loadings and deflections used on jacks,
Concrete, except that the concrete shall be kept under brackets, columns and other manufactured devices shall
moisture for at least 14 days. At the option of the Contractor, not exceed the manufacture’s recommendations. If
stream curing may be used in which case the steam curing

155
 requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Deck slab forms between
catalogue or other data verifying these recommendations. girders shall be constructed with no allowance for settlement relative to
5. If the concrete is to be prestressed, the falsework shall be the girders.
designed to support any increased or readjusted loads
caused by the prestressing forces.
6. Joints supporting slabs and overhangs shall be Detailed calculations by the Contractor showing the stresses
considered as falsework and designed as such. deflections, and camber necessary to compensate for said deflections in
all load supporting members shall be supplied.
For the construction of falsework over and adjacent to roadways
where falsework openings are required for maintaining traffic, the
After approving the Contractor’s falsework deflection camber, the
Contractor shall provide any additional features for the work needed to
insure that the falsework will be stable if subjected to impact by vehicles. Engineer will furnish to the Contractor the amounts of camber necessary
to compensate for vertical alignment or anticipated structure deflection, if
these are not shown on the drawings. The total camber used in
constructing falsework shall be the sum of the aforementioned cambers.
The falsework design at the locations where said openings are
required shall include but not be limited to the following minimum
provisions:
407.3.10 Falsework Construction

a. Each exterior stringer in a span shall be securely anchored to The falsework shall be constructed to conform to the falsework
the following cap or framing. drawings. The materials used in the falsework construction shall be of the
quantity and quality necessary to withstand the stresses imposed. The
workmanship used in falsework shall be of such quality that the falsework
b. Adequate bracing shall be used during all stages of falsework
will support the loads imposed on it without excessive settlement or take-
construction and removal over or adjacent to public traffic.
up beyond that shown on the falsework drawings.

c. Falsework members shall be at least 300 mm clear of

temporary protective railing members. When falsework is supported on piles, the piles shall be driven to
a bearing value equal to the total calculated pile loading as shown on the
falsework drawings.
The falsework drawings shall include a superstructure placing
diagram showing proposed concrete placing sequence and construction
joint locations, except that where a schedule for placing concrete is
shown on the Contract Plans, no deviation will be permitted there from Suitable jacks or wedges shall be used in connection with
falsework to set the forms to their required grade and to take up any
unless approved in writing by the Engineer.
excessive settlement in the falsework either before or during the placing
of concrete.
The falsework drawings shall show pedestrian openings which
are required through the falsework.
The Contractor shall provide tell-tales attached to the soffit forms
easily readable and in enough systematically-placed locations to
determine the total settlement of the entire portion of the structure where
Anticipated total settlements of falsework and forms shall be
concrete is being placed.
indicated by the Contractor on the falsework drawings. These should
include falsework footing settlements over 20 mm will not be allowed
156
 Should unanticipated events occur, including settlements that All debris and refuse resulting from work shall be removed and
deviate more than ±20 mm from those indicated on the falsework the site left in a neat and presentable condition.
drawings, which in the opinion of the Engineer would prevent obtaining a
structure conforming to the requirement of the Specification, the placing of
concrete shall be discontinued until corrective measures satisfactory to 407.3.12 Formwork Design and Drawings
the Engineer are provided. In the event satisfactory measures are not
provided prior to initial set of the concrete in the affected area, the placing
The Contractor shall prepare drawings and materials data for the
of concrete shall be discontinued at a location determined by the
Engineer. All unacceptable concrete shall be removed. formwork and shutters to be submitted to the Engineer for approval
unless otherwise directed.

407.3.11 Removing Falsework

The requirements for design of formwork are the same as
described under Section 407.3.9.
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, or permitted by the
Engineer, falsework supporting any span of a supported bridge shall not
be released before 14 days after the last concrete, excluding concrete 407.3.13 Formwork Construction
above the bridge deck, has been placed. Falsework supporting any span
of a continuous or rigid frame bridge shall not be released before 14 days
after the last concrete excluding concrete above the bridge deck, has Concrete forms shall be mortar-tight, true to the dimensions, lines
been placed in that span and in the adjacent portions of each adjoining and grades of the structure and with the sufficient strength, rigidity, shape
span for a length equal to at least half the length of the span where and surface smoothness as to leave the finished works true to the
falsework is to be released. dimensions shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer and with the
surface finish as specified.

Falsework supporting deck overhangs and deck slabs between

girders shall not be released until 7 days after the deck concrete has been Formwork and shutters are to be constructed in accordance with
placed. the approved Plans.
The inside surfaces of forms shall be cleaned of all dirt, mortar
and foreign material. Forms which will later be removed shall be
In addition to the above requirements, no falsework for bridges thoroughly coated with form oil prior to use. The form oil shall be of
shall be released until the supported concrete has attained a compressive commercial quality form oil or other approved coating which will permit the
strength of at least 80% of the required 28-day strength. Falsework for ready release of the forms and will not discolor the concrete.
cast-in place prestressed portion of structure shall not be released until
after the prestressing steel has been tensioned.
Concrete shall not be deposited in the forms until all work in
connection with constructing the forms has been completed, all materials
All falsework materials shall be completely removed. Falsework required for the unit to be poured, and the Engineer has inspected and
piling shall be removed at least 50 cm below the surface of the original approved said forms and materials. Such work shall include the removal
ground or stream bed. When falsework piling is driven within the limits of of all dirt, chips, sawdust and other foreign material from the forms.
ditch or channel excavation areas, the falsework piling within such areas
shall be removed to at least 50 cm below the bottom and side slopes of
said excavated areas.

157
 The rate of depositing concrete in forms shall be such to prevent Form fasteners consisting of form bolts, clamps or other devices
bulging of the forms or form panels in excess of the deflections permitted shall be used as necessary to prevent spreading of the forms during
by the Specification. concrete placement. The use of ties consisting of twisted wire loops to
hold forms in position will not be permitted.

Forms for all concrete surfaces which will not be completely

enclosed or hidden below the permanent ground surface shall conform to Anchor devices may be cast into the concrete for later use in
the requirements herein for forms for exposed surfaces. Interior surfaces supporting forms or for lifting precast members. The use of driven types
of underground drainage structures shall be completely enclosed of anchorage for fastening forms of form supports to concrete will not be
surfaces. permitted.

Formwork for concrete place under water shall be watertight. 407.3.14 Removal of Forms and Falsework
When lumber is used, this shall be planed, tongued and grooved.
Forms and falsework shall not be removed without the consent of
the Engineer. The Engineer’s consent shall not relieve the Contractor of
Forms for exposed concrete surface shall be designed and
responsibility for the safety of the work. Blocks and bracing shall be
constructed so that the formed surface of the concrete does not undulate
removed at the time the forms are removed and in no case shall any
excessively in any direction between studs, joists, form stiffeners, form
portion of the wood forms be left in the concrete.
fasteners, or wales. Undulations exceeding either 2 mm or 1/270 of the
center to center distance between studs, joists, form stiffeners, form
fasteners, or wales will be considered to be excessive. Should any form
Falsework removal for continuous or cantilevered structures shall
of forming system, even though previously approved for use, produce a
be as directed by the Engineer or shall be such that the structure is
concrete surface with excessive undulations, its use shall be discontinued
gradually subjected to its working stress.
until modifications satisfactory to the Engineer have been made. Portions
of concrete structures with surface undulations in excess of the limits
herein specified may be rejected by the Engineer.
When concrete strength tests are used for removal of forms and
supports, such removal should not begin until the concrete has attained
the percentage of the specified design strength shown in the table below.
All exposed surfaces of similar portions of a concrete structure
shall be formed with the same forming material or with materials which
produce similar concrete surface textures, color and appearance.
Minimum Time Minimum
Percentage
Forms for exposed surfaces shall be made of form materials of Design Strength
even thickness and width and with uniform texture. The materials shall
have sharp edges and be mortar-tight. Centering under
girders,
14 days 80%
beams frames or
Forms for exposed surfaces shall be constructed with triangular 14 days 70%
arches
fillets at least 20 mm wide attached so as to prevent mortar runs and to 1 day 70%
produce smooth straight chamfers at all sharp edges of the concrete. Floor slabs
2 days 70%
Walls

158
 Columns to determine the condition of concrete in columns, forms shall always be
removed from them before the removal of shoring from beneath beams
Sides of beams and all 1 day 70% and girders.
other vertical surfaces

Falsework and centering for spandrel-filled arches not be struck

In continuous structures, falsework shall not be released in any until filling at the back of abutments has been placed up to the spring line.
span until the first and second adjoining spans on each side have Falsework supporting the deck of rigid frame structure shall not be
reached the strength specified herein, or in the Special Specifications. removed until fills have been placed back to the vertical legs.
When cast-in-place post tensioned bridges are constructed, falsework
shall remain in place until all post tensioning has been accomplished.
407.4 Method of Measurement
Falsework under all spans of continuous structures shall be
completely released before concrete is placed in railings and parapets. In The quantity of structural steel, structural concrete, reinforcing
order to determine the condition of column concrete, forms shall be
steel or other Contract Pay Items shall constitute the completed and
removed from columns before releasing supports from beneath beams accepted structure which shall be measured for payment in the manner
and girders. prescribed in the several items involved.

Forms and falsework shall not be released from under concrete

407.5 Basis of Payment
without first determining if the concrete has gained adequate strength
without regard to the time element. In the absence of strength
determination, the forms and falsework are to remain in place until The quantities measured as provided in Section 407.4, Method of
removal is permitted by the Engineer. Measurement shall be paid for at the contract price for the several pay
items which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing,
preparing, fabricating, placing, curing and for all labor, equipment, tools
The forms for footings constructed within cofferdams or cribs and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Such payment shall
may be left in place when, in the opinion of the Engineer, their removal constitute full payment for the completed structure ready for use.
would endanger the safety of the cofferdam or crib, and when the forms
so left intact will not be exposed to view in the finished structure. All other
forms shall be removed whether above or below the ground line or water Payment will be made under:
level.

Pay Item Description Unit

All forms shall be removed from the cells of concrete box girders Number
of Measurement
in which utilities are present and all formwork except that necessary to
support the deck slab shall be removed from the remaining cells of the 405 (1) Concrete Class A, C & P Cubic Meter
box girder.
405 (2) Concrete Post/Baluster Each
Railings Linear Meter
To facilitate finishing, forms used on ornamental work, railing,
parapets and exposed vertical surfaces shall be removed in not less than 405 (3) Parapet Walls Cubic Meter
12 nor more than 48 hours, depending upon weather conditions. In order
159
 400 Piling Linear Meter character of equipment he proposes to use, which shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer. The approval of the Engineer shall not be
103 Structure Excavation Cubic Meter considered as relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for the safety
601 Sidewalk Concrete Square Meter or of his method or equipment or from carrying out the work in full
accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Erection diagrams shall be
Cubic Meter approved by the Director, Bureau of Design.
404 Reinforcing Steel Bars Kilogram
408.3.2 Handling and Storing Materials
407 (1) Lean Concrete Cubic Meter
Steel and timber shall be placed on skids above the ground and
shall be kept clean. The underlying ground shall be kept free from
When more than one item is specified, means of identification vegetation and properly drained. Girders and beams shall be placed
shall be inserted in parenthesis immediately after the Pay Item and letter upright and shored. Long members, such as columns and chords, shall
suffixes shall be included within the parenthesis of the Pay Item Number. be supported on skids placed close enough together to prevent injury by
deflection. The Contractor shall be responsible for the loss of any
material, which has been paid for by the Bureau, while it is in his care, or
ITEM 408– STEEL BRIDGES for any damage, resulting from his work. The loading, transporting,
unloading and piling of structural material shall be so conducted that the
408.1 Description metal will be kept free from injury from rough handling.

This Item shall consist of the construction of steel structure

conforming to the lines, grades, dimensions and designs shown on the 408.3.3 Erection
Plans and in accordance with the Specifications for piling, concrete metal
reinforcement, structural steel and other items which constitute the
completed structure. The Contractor shall furnish and place all falsework, erect all
metal work, remove the temporary construction, and do all work required
408.2 Materials to complete the structure as covered by the Contract, including the
removal of the old structure or structures if so stipulated, all in accordance
All materials shall conform to the detailed requirements specified with the Plans and these Specifications.
for the component parts of the completed structure. Where special
materials are required, they shall be shown on the Plans or in the Special
Provisions. If the substructure and superstructure are built under separate
contracts, the Department will provide the substructure, constructed to
408.3 Construction Methods correct lines and elevations and properly finished, and will establish the
lines and elevation required for setting the steel.
408.3.1 Organization and Equipment

During the progress of the work the Contractor shall have a If the fabrication and erection of the superstructure are done
competent foreman or superintendent, experienced in steel erection, in under separate contract, the Department will furnish detail plans for the
personal charge of the work. bridge or bridges to be erected, including shop details, camber diagrams,
erection diagrams, list of field rivets and bolts, and copy of shipping
statements showing a list of parts and their weights.
Before starting work, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer as
to the method of erection he proposes to follow and the amount and
160
 The Contractor shall provide all tools, machinery, and appliances
including drift pins and fitting up bolts, necessary for the expeditious
The straightening of plates, angles, and other shapes shall be
handling of the work.
done by methods not likely to produce fractures or other injury. The metal
shall not be heated. Following the straightening of a bend or buckle, the
surface shall be carefully inspected for evidence of fracture. Sharpkinks
The falsework shall be properly designed, substantially built and
and bends may be cause for the rejection of the material.
maintained for the loads which will come upon it. The Contractor, shall
prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval plans for falsework or for
changes in existing structure necessary for maintaining traffic. Approval
408.3.6 Alignment
of the Contractor’s plans shall not be considered as relieving him of any
responsibility.
Before beginning the field riveting, the structural steel shall be
The parts shall be accurately assembled as shown on the Plans adjusted to correct grade and alignment and elevation of panel points
and any matchmarks shall be followed. The material shall be carefully (end of floor beams) properly regulated. For truss spans a slight excess
handled that no parts will be bent, broken or otherwise damaged. No camber will be permitted while the bottom chords are being riveted.
hammering shall be done that will in any way injure or damage a
member. Bearing surface and surfaces to be in permanent contact shall
be cleaned before the members are assembled. Unless erected by the 408.3.7 Field Riveting
cantilever method, truss spans shall be erected on blocking so placed as
to give the trusses proper camber. The blocking shall be left in place,
until the tension chord splices are fully riveted and all other truss Pneumatic hammers shall be used for field riveting. Cup-faced
connection pinned and bolted. Rivets in splices of butts joints of dollies, fitting the head closely, shall be used to insure good bearing.
compression members and rivets in railings shall not be driven until the Connections shall be secured and accurately fitted up before the rivets
span is swung. Splices and filled connections shall have one-half of the are driven. Drifting shall be only such as to draw the parts into position
holes filled with bolts and cylindrical erection pin (half bolts and half pins) and not sufficient to enlarge the holes or distort the metal. Unfair holes
before riveting. Splices and connections carrying traffic during erection shall be reamed or drilled. Rivets shall be heated uniformly to light
shall have three-fourths of the holes so filled. Fitting up bolts shall be of cherry-red color and shall be driven while hot. They shall not be
the same nominal diameter as the rivets and cylindrical erection pins shall overheated or burned. Rivet heads shall be full and symmetrical,
be 0.75 mm (1/32 inch) larger. concentric with the shank, and shall have full bearing all around. They
shall not be smaller than the heads of the shop rivets. Rivets shall be
tight and shall grip the connected parts securely together. Caulking or
408.3.4 Welding recupping will not be permitted. In removing rivets, the surrounding metal
shall not be injured, and if necessary they shall be drilled out.

Where so indicated on the Plans, structural members shall be

joined by welding. The welds shall be of the size and type indicated and 408.3.8 Bolted Connections
shall be made by competent operators. Shop welding shall conform in all
details to the Standard Specifications for Welded Highway and Railway
Bridges of the American Welding Society. Field welding shall conform to In bolted connections, the nut shall be drawn up tight and set by
the requirement of Item 409, Welded Structural Steel. center punching the threads of the bolt at the face of the nut.

408.3.5 Bent Material 408.3.9 Pin Connections

161
 a. The bridge seat bearing area shall be heavily coated with
lead paint and then covered with three layers of 340.2 to
Pilot and driving nuts shall be used in driving pins. Pins shall be
369.8 g (12 to 14 ounces) duck, each layer being coated
so driven that the members will take full bearing on them. Pin nuts shall
thoroughly on its top surface with red-lead paint. The shoes
be screwed up tight and threads burred at the face of the nut with a center
and bearing plates shall be placed in position while the paint
punch.
is plastic. As an alternate to canvas and red lead 3 mm (1/8
inch) sheet lead may be used if called for on the Plans or is
approved by the Engineer.
408.3.10 Misfits and Shop Errors

b. The shoes and bearing plates shall be properly supported

The connection of minor misfits involving non-harmful amounts of and fixed with grout. No lead shall be placed upon them until
reaming, cutting and chipping will be considered a legitimate part of the the grout has set for at least 96 hours, adequate provision
erection. However, any error in the shop fabrication or deformation being made to keep the grout well moistened during this
resulting from handling and transportation which prevents the proper period. The grout shall consist of one part Portland Cement
assembling and fitting up of parts by the moderate use of drift pins or a to one part fine-grained sand.
moderate amount of reaming and slight chipping and cutting shall be
reported immediately to the Engineer, and his approval of the method of The location of the anchor bolts in relation to the slotted holes in
correction obtained. If the Contract provides for completed fabrication the expansion shoes correspond to the temperature at the time of
and erection, the Contractor shall be responsible for all misfits, errors and
erection. The nuts on the anchor bolts at the expansion end of spans
injuries and shall make the necessary correction and replacements. If the shall be adjusted to permit the free movement of span. Anchor bolt nuts
Contract is for erection only, the inspector, with the cooperation of the shall be set by center punching the threads of the bolts at the face of the
Contractor shall keep a correct record of labor and materials and be used
nut.
in correction of misfits, errors and injuries, not due to actions of the
Contractor, and the Contractor shall render within 30 days of itemized bill
for the approval of the Engineer.
408.3.13 Painting

408.3.11 Placing Anchor Bolts

Unless otherwise specified, metal work shall be given two shop
coats of red lead paint and two field coats of paint as specified under
Anchor bolts shall be placed as provided under Item 407, Item 411, Paint.
Concrete Structures or as shown on the Plans.

408.3.14 Placing Concrete

408.3.12 Setting Shoes and Bearing

Shoes and bearing plates shall not be placed on bridge seat

On steel spans, the concrete floor shall not be placed until the
bearing areas that are improperly finished or that are deformed or
span has been swung or released from the falsework.
irregular. They shall be set level in exact position and elevation and shall
have full even bearing. Unless otherwise specified, the shoes and
bearing plates shall be set by the following methods:
The concrete shall be placed symmetrically on the span
beginning at the center and working simultaneously towards each end or
beginning at the ends and working simultaneously towards the center. In
either case, the concrete shall be placed continuously between
162
construction joints designated on the Plans or approved in writing by the materials for the complete structure; for all shop work, painting and field
Engineer. work; for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete
the item. Such payment shall constitute full payment for the completed
structure ready for use, and no allowance shall be made for cofferdam
Concrete shall be cured specified under Item 407, Concrete construction, falsework, or other erection expenses as provided under
Structures. Subsection 408.3.10.

408.3.15 Timber Floors

ITEM 409 – WELDED STRUCTURAL STEEL

Timber floors of the species and grade indicated on the plans
shall be built as specified under Timber Structures, Item 402. 409.1 Description

This work shall consist of the joining of structural steel members

408.3.16 Field Inspection with welds of the type, dimensions, and design shown on the Plans and in
accordance with the Specifications.
All materials and work of erection shall be subject to the It is the intent of this Specification to provide for work of a quality
inspection of the Engineer, who shall be given all facilities required. comparable to that required under the Standard Specifications for Welded
Highway and Railway Bridges of the American Welding Society. In case
of dispute or for situations not adequately provided for in this
Materials and workmanship not previously inspected will not Specification, those designated Standard Specifications shall be
inspected after its delivery to the site of the work. Any materials inspected considered as the final authority and shall govern except as amended by
and accepted prior to delivery on the work shall be subject to rejection if the Special Provisions.
found defective after delivery.
Welding of Structural Steel shall be done only when shown on the
Plans or authorized in writing by the Engineer.
408.4 Method of Measurement
409.2 Materials Requirements

The quantity of structural steel and other Contract Pay Items Steel base metal to be welded shall be open-hearth or electric
which constitute the completed and accepted structure shall be measured furnace steel conforming to AASHTO M 183.
for payment in the manner prescribed in the several items involved.
All arc-welding electrodes shall conform to the requirements of
American Welding Society Specifications. Electrodes shall be of
408.5 Basis of Payment classification numbers E7016, E7018 or E7028 as required for the
positions, type of current and polarity, and other conditions of intended
use, and to conform to any special requirements indicated on the Plans.
The quantities, measured as prescribed above, shall be paid for
at the contract until price for the several Pay Items which price and Filler material to be used in the repair or strengthening of old
payments shall be full compensation for furnishing, preparing, fabricating, structures or for joining new parts to existing steel members, shall be
transporting, placing and erecting all structural steel and all other

163
adopted to the material to be welded and may depart from the foregoing
requirements only if agreed by the Engineer.
Torches and tips shall be of proper size and type of the work at
hand. Suitable regulators shall afford the welder complete control over
the pressure and rate of flow of each gas.
409.3 Construction Requirements

409.3.1 Equipment 409.3.1.4 Protective Equipment

409.3.1.1 General
All personnel protective equipment shall conform to the American
Standard Association Code for such equipment.
All items of equipment for welding and gas cutting shall be so
designed and manufactured and in such condition as to enable qualified
welders to follow the procedures and attain the results prescribed in this The Contractor shall enforce the use of approved accessories
Specification. necessary for the protection and convenience of the welders and for the
proper and efficient execution of the work.

409.3.1.2 Arc-Welding Equipment

Suitable protection against the light of the arc shall be maintained
Welding generators and transformers shall be designed expressly by the Contractor when arc-welding operation might be viewed within
harmful range by persons other than the actual welders and inspectors.
for welding. They shall be capable of delivering steady currents
adjustable through a range ample for the work requirements. They shall
respond automatically and quickly to changes in power requirements due
to variations in arc length and shall deliver full current promptly on striking 409.3.2 Welding
an arc.
409.3.2.1 General
Welding cable shall have sufficient conductivity to avoid
overheating and inadequate current at the arc and shall be effectively
insulated against welding circuit voltage. Earth or ground connections Welding shall be performed by the metal-arc process, using the
and circuits shall be secured and adequate to carry the welding currents. electrodes specified with either direct or alternating current.

Electrode holders shall grip the electrode firmly and with good Surfaces to be welded shall be smooth, uniform and free from
electrical contact. fins, tears, and other defects which would adversely affect the quality of
the weld. Edges of material shall be trimmed by machining, chipping,
grinding, or machine gas-cutting to produce a satisfactory welding edge
Approved automatic welding heads may be used, with suitable wherever such edge is thicker than: 13 mm for sheared edge of material;
auxiliary handling equipment to provide automatic instead of manual 16 mm for toes of angles or rolled shapes (other than wide flange
control of electrode and welding arc. sections); 25 mm for universal mill plate or edges of flange sections.

409.3.1.3 Gas-Cutting Equipment

164
 The width of root face used, shall be not more than 1.5 mm for Structural steel which is to be welded shall preferably not be
parts less than 10 mm in thickness nor more than 3 mm for parts 10 mm painted until all welding is completed.
or more in thickness.

Preparation of edges by gas-cutting shall, wherever practicable,

Butt welds shall be proportioned so that their surface contours will be done by machine gas-cutting. Machine gas-cutting edges shall be
lie in gradual transition curves. For butt welded joints between base substantially as smooth and regular as those produced by edge planning
metal parts of unequal thickness, a transition shall be provided on a slope and shall be left free of slag. Manual gas cutting shall be permitted only
or level not greater than 1 in 2.5 to join the offset surfaces. This transition where machine gas-cutting is not practicable and with the approval of the
may be provided by sloping the surface of the weld metal or by bevelling Engineer. The edge resulting from manual gas-cutting shall be inspected
the thicker part or by combination of these two methods. and smoothed with special care. All re-entrant corners shall be filleted to
a radius at least 19 mm. The cut lines shall not extend beyond the fillet
and all cutting shall follow closely the line prescribed.
Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust,
grease or other material that will prevent proper welding. Mill scale that
withstands vigorous wire brushing or a light film of drying oil or rust 409.3.2.4 Assembly
inhibitive coating may remain. Surfaces within 50 mm of any weld
location shall be free of any paint or other material that would prevent
proper welding or produce objectionable fumes while welding. The parts to be joined by fillet welds shall be brought into a close
contact as practicable, and no event shall be separated more than 5 mm.
If the separation is 1.5 mm or greater, the leg of the fillet weld shall be
No operation or actual welding or gas-cutting shall be performed increased by the amount of separation. The separation between faying
on a member while it is carrying live load stress or while subject to shock surfaces of lap joints and of butt joints landing on a backing structure shall
and vibration and from moving loads. Welding and gas-cutting shall not exceed 1.5 mm. The fit of joints which are not sealed by welds
cease in advance of the application of such loads. throughout their length shall be sufficiently close to exclude water after
painting. Where irregularities in rolled shape or plates, after straightening,
do not permit contact within the above limits, the procedure necessary to
409.3.2.2 Welders bring the material within these limits shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.

All welding shall be done by approved competent and

experienced and fully qualified welders. Cutting parts to be joined by butt welds shall be carefully aligned.
Where the parts are effectively restrained against bending due to
eccentricity or alignment, a maximum offset of 10 percent of the thickness
409.3.2.3 Preparation of Materials for Welding or the thinner part joined, but in no case more than 3 mm, may be
permitted as a departure from the theoretical alignment. In connecting
alignment in such cases, the parts shall not be drawn into a greater slope
Dimensional tolerance, straightness and flatness of the structural than two degrees (1 in 30). Measurement of offset shall be between
shapes and plates shall be within the limits prescribed in this centerline of parts unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
Specification.

When parts abutting edge to edge differ in thickness, the joint

shall be of such form that the slope of either surface through the transition

165
zone does not exceed 1 in 2.5, the thicker part being bevelled, if 16 mm in thickness, it shall be at least one-half the thickness of the
necessary. material but not less than 16 mm.

Members to be welded shall be brought into correct alignment Tack welds, located where the final welds will later be made, shall
and held in position by bolts, clamps, wedges, guy lines, struts, other be subject to the same quality requirements as the final weld. Tack welds
suitable devices or tack welds until welding has been completed. The use shall be as small as practicable and where encountered in the final
of jigs and fixtures is recommended where practicable. Such fastening welding, shall be cleaned and fused thoroughly with the final weld.
devices as may be used shall be adequate to insure safety. Defective, cracked or broken tack welds shall be removed before final
welding.

Plug and slot welds may be used to transmit shear in a lap joint or
to prevent the buckling or separation of lapped parts. Members or component parts of structures shall be assembled
and matchmarked prior to erection to insure accurate assembly and
adjustment of position on final erection. Painted assembly marks shall be
The diameter of the hole for a plug weld shall not be less than removed from any surface to be welded.
the thickness of the part containing it plus 8 mm nor shall it be greater
than 2.25 times the thickness of the weld.
409.3.2.5 Control of Distortion and Shrinkage Stresses

The minimum center spacing of plug welds shall be four times the
diameter of the hole. In assembling and joining parts of a structure or a built-up
member and in welding reinforcing parts to existing members, the
procedure and sequence of welding shall be such as will avoid distortion
The length of the slot for a slot weld not exceed ten times the and minimize shrinkage stresses.
thickness of the weld. The width of the slot shall not be less than the
thickness of the part containing it plus 8 mm nor shall it be greater than
2.25 times the thickness of the weld. As far as practicable, long parallel lines of welding on a part or
member shall be executed concurrently, and all welds shall be deposited
in a sequence that will balance the applied heat of welding on various
The ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall have the sides as much as possible while the welding progresses.
corners rounded to a radius not less than the thickness of the part
containing it, except those ends which extend to the edge of the part.
Before the commencement of welding on a structural member in
which severe shrinkage stresses or distortion are likely to occur, a
The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a direction complete program for welding sequence and distortion control shall be
transverse to their length shall be 4 times the width of the slot. The submitted to the Engineer and shall be subject to his approval.
minimum center to center spacing in a longitudinal direction on any line
shall be 2 times the length of the slot.
The direction of the general progression in welding on a member
shall be from points where parts are relatively fixed in position, with
The thickness of plug or slot welds in material 16 mm or less in respect to each other, toward points which have a greater relative
thickness shall be equal to the thickness of the material. In material over freedom of movement.

166
 The ends of all butt welds in flanges of beams and girders shall
be made with extension bars regardless of the thickness of such flanges.
Where part or member is to be welded on both ends into a rigid
structure or assembly, the connection at which the greatest shrinkage will
occur in the direction of the length of the part or member, shall be made
Welding shall not be done when surfaces are wet from
while the part or member is free to move in the direction of the shrinkage;
condensation or rain which is falling on the surfaces to be welded; nor
and the connection involving the least shrinkage shall be made last.
during periods of high winds unless the welding operator and the work are
properly protected.
A weld designed to sustain tensile stress shall be made in such a
way that their welding is being performed at any point, all parts that would
409.3.2.6 Technique of Arch-Welding
offer restraint against shrinkage can shrink, deform or move enough to
preclude serious shrinkage stresses.
The welding current shall conform with respect to voltage and
current (and polarity, of direct current is used) to the recommendations of
In welding of built-up members of heavy sections, particularly
the manufacturer of the electrode being used, as indicated in the
those T or H-shapes where the flanges are considerably heavier than the
instructions that are included with each container of electrodes.
stems or webs, and in any case where the component parts are 38 mm or
greater in thickness, special care shall be exercised during welding to
avoid weld cracking. In the welding of members of such heavy section,
the temperature of contiguous areas about a welding operation shall be Arc lengths and electrical potential and current shall be suited to
the thickness of material, type of groove and other circumstances
equal, and not less than 55oC. If necessary, the lighter parts shall be
heated while the weld is cooling, to keep the temperature of contiguous attendant to the work.
parts substantially equal.
The maximum size of electrode permitted shall be 5 mm with the
In the fabrication of cover-plated beams and built-up members, all following exceptions:
shop splices in each component part shall be made before such
component part is welded to other parts of the member.
1. The maximum size for flat position welding of all passes
except the root pass shall be 8 mm.
In making all butt-welded splices in rolled shapes and in making
butt-welded field splices in built-up sections (such as in H or I-sections) 2. The maximum size for horizontal fillet welds shall be 6 mm.
the sequence and procedure of welding shall be such as to take into
account unequal amounts of expansion or contraction in the parts being
welded. The procedure and sequence shall be such that while the weld The electrode for the single pass fillet weld and for the root
and the heated base metal are contracting at any point, any part of the passes of all multiple layer welds in all cases shall be of the proper size to
member that would furnish restraint against such contraction can move or insure thorough fusion and penetration with freedom from slag inclusions.
shrink enough to prevent the shrinkage of the heated metal from
producing harmful internal stresses. The procedure and sequence that is
used for making such splices shall be planned in advance in full detail and A single layer of the weld metal, whether deposited-in one pass
submitted to the Engineer and shall be subject to his approval. or made up of several parallel beads, shall not exceed 3 mm in thickness
except that the bead at the root may be 6 mm in thickness if the position

167
of welding and the viscosity of the weld metal permit control of the latter the making of plug and slot welds, in accordance with the following
so that it does not over flow upon unfused base metal. paragraphs.

The maximum size of fillet weld which may be made in one pass In making plug welds the following techniques shall be used:
shall be 8 mm except that for vertical welds made upward the maximum
size made in one pass shall be 13 mm.
1. For flat welds, the arc shall be carried around the root of the
joint and then weaved along a spiral path to the center of the
In vertical welding the first root pass shall be formed from the hole, fusing and depositing a layer of weld metal in the root
bottom upward. Succeeding passes may be formed by any technique and bottom of the joint. The arc shall then be carried to the
that will fulfill the requirements of the Specification and Plans. periphery of the hole, and the procedure repeated, fusing and
depositing successive layers to fill the hole to the depth
required. The slag covering the weld metal shall be kept
The electrode manipulation during welding shall insure that: molten, or nearly so, until the weld is finished. If the arc is
broken, except briefly for changing electrodes, the slag must
be allowed to cool and shall be completely removed before
1. Complete fusion between the base metal and the deposited restarting the weld.
weld metal is obtained.
2. For vertical welds, the arc shall be started at the root of the
2. The melted base metal is replaced by weld metal so that no joint, at the lower side of the hole and carried upward on the
undercut remains along the edges of the finished weld. zigzag path, depositing a layer about 5 mm thick on the
exposed face at the thinner plate and fused to it and to the
side of the hole. After cleaning the slag from the weld, other
3. The molten weld metal floats all slag, oxide and gases to the layers shall be similarly deposited to fill the hole to the
surface behind the advancing arc. required depth.

Each time the arc is started, either to begin a weld or to continue 3. For overhead welds, the procedure shall be the same as for
partly completed weld, the arch shall be manipulated to obtain complete flat welds except that the slag shall be allowed to cool and
fusion of the deposited weld metal with the base metal and with any shall be completely removed after depositing each
previously deposited weld metal, before any progression of the arc along successive layer until the hole is filled to the required depth.
the joint.

Slot welds shall be made with a technique similar to that specified

At the completion of a pass or weld, the arc shall be manipulated above for plug welds, except that if the length of the slot exceeds three
so as to fill the crater with sound metal. times the width, or if the slot extends to the edges of the part of the
technique specified above for making plug welds shall be followed for the
type of flat position welds.
Before welding over previously deposited metal, the slag shall be
removed and the weld and adjacent base metal shall be brushed clean.
This requirement shall apply not only to cratered areas but also when 409.3.2.7 Details of Welds
welding is resumed after any interruption. It shall not, however, restrict

168
 The following tabulation shows that the relation between weld
size and the maximum thickness of material on which various sizes of
1. At the end of members, there shall preferably be continuous
fillet welds may be used:
longitudinal fillet welds at least as long as the width of the
element or member being connected.

2. The clear spacing in the direction of stress of stitch welds that

Size of Fillet Weld Maximum Thickness of Part connect plates to other plates or to shapes shall not exceed:
5 mm 13 mm
6 mm 19 mm a. For compression members ….10 times the thickness of the thinner
part but not more than 300 mm.
8 mm 32 mm
b. For tension members ….. 14 times the thickness of the thinner part
10 mm 51 mm but not more than 300 mm.
13 mm 152 mm The spacing transverse to the direction of stress shall
16 mm over 152 mm not exceed 24 times the thickness of the thinner part
connected.

The maximum size of fillet weld that may be used along the edge
of material 6 mm or more in thickness shall be 1.5 mm less than the 3. For members composed of two or more rolled shapes in
thickness of the material. contact with one another, the longitudinal spacing of stitch
welds shall not exceed 600 mm.

The minimum effective length of fillet weld shall be four times its Fillet welds in holes or slots may be used to transmit shear in lap
size and in no case less than 38 mm. joints or to prevent the buckling or separation of lapped parts. The fillet
welds in a hole or slot may overlap.

Fillet welds terminating at the corners of parts or members shall,

wherever practicable, be turned continuously full size around the corners Seal welding shall preferably be accomplished by a continuous
for a distance not less than twice the nominal size of the weld. weld combining the function of sealing and strength, changing sections
only as the required strength may necessitate.

Intermittent fillet welds, preferably, shall not be used. They shall

be permitted only where the required weld area is less than that of a Exposed faces of welds shall be made reasonably smooth and
continuous fillet weld of the minimum size. If used on main members, regular, shall conform as closely as practicable to the design
they shall be chain intermittent welds. In all other cases, chain requirements and shall not at any place be inside the intended cross-
intermittent welding is preferable to staggered intermittent welding. section. Weld dimension in excess of the design requirements shall not
be a cause for rejection, but in case excess weld metal involves serious
malformation, such work shall be rejected.
Spacing of intermittent fillet welds shall be measured between the
center of the weld segments. The spacing shall conform to the following
requirements unless calculated stresses between the parts require closer All fillet welds shall be of acceptable types. All fillet welds that
spacing: carry reversed stresses running in a direction perpendicular to their
169
longitudinal axis shall be of the concave type or the 0-gee type when the Welds shall be free from overlap and the base metal free from
fillet weld is flushed with the edge of a member. When one of these types undercutting. All craters shall be filled to the full cross-section of the
is specifically indicated on the Plans for a weld, it shall be of that type. welds.

Butt welds shall preferably be made with a slight reinforcement, 409.3.2.9 Correction
except as may be otherwise provided, and shall have no defects. The
height of reinforcement shall be not more than 3 mm.
In lieu of rejection of an entire piece of member containing
welding which is unsatisfactory or indicates inferior workmanship, the
following corrective measures may be permitted by the Engineer whose
All butt welds, except produced with aid of backing material, shall
specific approval shall be obtained for making each correction:
have the root of the initial layer chipped out or otherwise cleaned to sound
metal and welded in accordance with the requirements of the
Specification. Butt welds made with the use of a backing of the same
1. Removal of part or all of the welds shall be affected by
materials as the base metal shall have the weld metal thoroughly fused
chipping, grinding or gas-gouging.
with the backing materials.

2. Defective or unsound welds shall be corrected either by

Ends of butt welds shall be extended past the edges of the parts removing and replacing the welds, or as follows:
joined by means of extension bars providing a similar joint preparation
and having a width not less than the thickness of the thicker part jointed;
a. Excessive convexity – Reduce to size by removal of excess weld
or for material 19 mm or less in thickness, the ends of the welds shall be
metal.
chipped or cut down to solid metal and side welds applied to fill out the
ends to the same reinforcement as the face of the welds. Extension bars b. Shrinkage crack in base metal, craters and excessive porosity –
shall be removed upon completion and cooling of the weld and the ends Remove defective portion of base and weld metal down to sound
of the weld made smooth and flush with the edges of the abutting parts. metal and deposit additional weld metal.
c. Undercutting, undersize and excessive concavity – Clean
and deposit additional weld metal.
409.3.2.8 Quality of Welds
d. Overlapping and lack of fusion – Remove and replace the
defective length of weld.
e. Slag inclusion – Remove those parts of the weld
Weld metal shall be solid throughout except that very small gas
containing slag and fill with weld metal.
pockets and small inclusions of oxide or slag may be accepted if well
f. Removal of adjacent base metal during welding – Clean
dispersed and if none exceeds 1.5 mm in greatest dimension, and if the
and form full size by depositing additional weld metal.
sum of the greatest dimensions of all such defects of weld metal area
does not exceed 15 mm in an area of 10 cm2.
3. Where corrections require the depositing of additional weld
metal, the electrode used shall be smaller than the electrode
There shall be complete fusion between the weld metal and the used in making the original weld.
base metal and between successive passes throughout the joint.
4. A cracked weld shall be removed throughout its length,
unless by the use of acid etching, magnetic inspection or
other equally positive means, the extent of the crack can be

170
 ascertained to be limited, in which case sound metal 50 mm Welds that are to be galvanized shall be treated to remove every
or more beyond each end of the crack need not be removed. particle of slag.

5. In removing defective parts of a weld, the gas-gouging,

409.3.2.12 Identification
chipping or grinding shall not extend into the base metal any
substantial amount beyond the depth of the web penetration
unless cracks or other defects exist in the base metal.
The operator shall place his identification mark with crayon, or
paint, near the welds made by him.
6. Where the work performed subsequent to the making of a
deficient weld has rendered the weld inaccessible or has
caused new conditions which would make the correction of 409.3.2.13 Inspection
the deficiency dangerous or ineffectual, the original condition
shall be restored by renewal of welds or members, or both
before making the necessary corrections, or else the On completion of the welding work, inspection shall be carried out
deficiency shall be compensated by additional work according by an Inspector appointed by the Engineer.
to a revised design approved by the Engineer.

7. Caulking of welds shall not be done. The size and contour of welds shall be measured with suitable
gauges. The inspector shall identify with a distinguishing mark all welds
that he has inspected and accepted.
8. Before adding weld metal or rewelding, the surfaces shall be
cleaned thoroughly. Where incomplete fusion is disclosed by
chipping, grinding or gas gouging, to correct defects, that part The Contractor shall remove and replace, or correct as instructed,
of the weld shall be removed and rewelded. all welds found defective or deficient. He shall also replace all methods
found to produce inferior results, with methods which will produce
409.3.2.10 Stress Relieving satisfactory work.

Peening to reduce residual stress of multi-layer welds may be In the event that fault welding or the removal for rewelding of
used only if authorized and ordered by the Engineer. Care shall be faulty welding shall damage the base metal, the Contractor shall remove
exercised to prevent overpeening which may cause overlapping, scaling, and replace the damaged material.
flecking or excessive cold working of weld and base metal.
409.4 Measurement and Payment
409.3.2.11 Cleaning and Protective Coatings
Unless otherwise provided in the Special Provisions, welded
Painting shall not be done until the work has been accepted and structural steel structures shall not be measured and paid for separately,
shall be in accordance with the Specification. The surface to be painted but the cost thereof shall be considered as included in the contract price
shall be cleaned of spatter, rust, loose scale, oil and dirt. Slag shall be for other items.
cleaned from all welds.

171
 ITEM 410 – TREATED AND UNTREATED TIMBER
410.3 Construction Requirements
410.1 Description
410.3.1 Timber Treatment
This Item shall consist of structural timber of the specie and size
called for on the Plans, either treated or untreated as called for in the Treatment shall consist of the forcing of either creosote oil or a
Proposal. It shall include the furnishing of the timber, the framing, creosote petroleum oil mixture into the outer fibers of the timber by a heat
erecting, furnishing of hardware and the furnishing of paint and paintings and pressure process. The process shall be in accordance with AASHTO
if paint is called for on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. M 133, preservatives and pressure treatment process for timber, but with
such changes in temperatures, pressures, duration of treatment and other
410.2 Material Requirements factors affecting the final treatment that experience has shown to be
necessary in the treatment of structural timbers sawn from woods native
410.2.1 Timber to the Philippines. The treatment shall be so regulated that the curing
process will not induce excessive checking.
Timber shall be the specie specified on the Plans. Unless
otherwise noted on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, only the best The minimum penetration of the preservative into the surface of
grade shall be used. It shall be free from loose knots, splits, worm holes the timber shall be 20 mm. The minimum retention of the preservative
decay, warp, ring separation, or any defect which will impair its strength per cubic metre of timber shall be as follows:
or render it unfit for its intended use. Any specie specified on the Plans
may be used for untreated timber and if that specie is not available, a For general use, 192 kg by empty cell process
specie of equivalent strength and durability may be used if authorized by For marine use, 320 kg by full cell process
the Engineer. If the timber is to be treated, only those species shall be
used which are known to possess properties which make them favorable The Engineer shall be notified at least 10 days in advance of the
to treatment. date that the treating process will be performed in order that the untreated
timber, the treatment process, and the finished treatment timber may all
410.2.2 Paint be inspected. The Engineer shall inspect the timber prior to treatment to
determine conformance with those Specifications and suitability of
When painting of timber is required, the paint shall conform to the conditions for treatment. He shall be permitted free access to the plant in
requirements of Item 411, Paint. order that temperatures, pressures and quantities and type of treatment
materials used may be observed. Samples of the creosote or creosote
410.2.3 Hardware petroleum oil mixture shall be furnished as required for tests.

Hardware shall conform to the requirements of Item 402, Timber After completion of the treatment, the timber shall be checked to
Structures. determine penetration of treatment, amount of checking quantity of free
preservative remaining on the timber and will check any other visual
410.2.4 Preservatives evidence that the treatment has been performed in a satisfactory manner.
The penetration of treatment shall be determined by boring a sufficient
The preservatives shall be creosote oil or creosote petroleum oil number of well-distributed holes to determine the average penetration. All
blend as called for on the Plans or by the Special Provisions, and shall such holes shall be plugged with plugs approximately 1.6 mm larger in
conform to the Standard Specifications for Pressure Treatment of Timber diameter that the bit used in boring the holes.
Products, ASTM D-1760.
If the penetration of preservative is less than the required amount,
When timber is intended for marine use, the creosote petroleum the entire charge, or such parts thereof as are determined by the
oil blend shall not be used.
172
Inspector to be unsatisfactory, may be retreated. If after retreatment the ITEM 411 – PAINT
penetration is still insufficient, the treated pieces shall be rejected.
411.1 Description
Any excessive checking caused by the treating process shall be
cause for rejection of the pieces in which the excessive checking occurs. This Item shall consist of furnishing and applying all paint
materials including vehicles, pigments, pastes, driers, thinners and mixed
The treating plant shall be equipped with adequate thermometers paints for steel and wooden structures; sampling testing and packing;
and pressure gauges so that the process can be accurately controlled preparation of the surface and application of paint to structures.
and a continuous record made of all stages of the treating process. If
required by the Engineer, records shall be furnished showing the duration, 411.2 Materials Requirements
maximum and minimum temperatures and pressures used during all
stages of the process. 411.2.1 General

410.4 Method of Measurement Paint, except aluminum paint, shall consist of pigments of the
required fineness and composition ground to the desired consistency in
The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meter of linseed oil in a suitable grinding machine, to which shall be added
timber complete in place and accepted. Measurement of timber shall be additional oil, thinner and drier as required.
computed from the nominal dimension of the timber even though the
actual dimensions may be scant. The measurement of timber shall Aluminum paint shall consist of aluminum powder or paste of the
include only such timber as a part of the completed and accepted work required fineness and composition to which shall be added the specified
and will not include any timber required for a falsework, bracing or other amount of vehicle.
timber required in the erection.
The paint shall be furnished for use in ready mixed, paste or
410.4 Basis of Payment powder form.

The quantities, determined as provided in Section 410.4, Method All paints shall meet the following general requirements:
of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic
meter for Timber or Untreated Timber as called for in the Proposal, which 1. The paint shall show no excessive settling and shall easily
price and payment shall constitute full compensate for furnishing all redisperse with a paddle to a smooth, homogeneous state.
timber, for preservative treating when required, and for the delivery, The paint shall show no curdling, livering, caking or color
framing, erecting, painting if required, and for the furnishing of all labor, separation and shall be free from lumps and skins.
hardware, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the
Item. 2. The paint as received shall brush easily, possess good
leveling properties and shall show no running or sagging
Payment will be made under: when applied to a smooth vertical surface.

Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement 3. The paint shall dry to a smooth uniform finish, free from
Number roughness grit, unevenness and other imperfections.
410 (1) Timber Cubic Meter
410 (2) Treated Timber Cubic Meter 4. The paint shall not skin within 48 hours in a ¾ filled tightly
closed container.

411.2.2 The paint shall conform to the requirements of the Specifications

indicated as follows:
173
 Ready Mixed Red Lead AASHTO M 72 and PNS 411.3.1 Proportion of Mixing
Paint Type I, II, III & IV
Aluminum Paint AASHTO M 69 and PNS It is the intent of this Specification to provide a paint of proper
Type I & II brushing consistency, which will not run, steak or sag and which will have
White & Tinted Ready satisfactory drying qualities.
Mixed Paint AASHTO M 70
Foliage Green Bridge 411.3.2 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats On Structural Steel
Paint AASHTO M 67
Black Paint for Bridges The paint shall be mixed in the proportion of 240 grams of
And Timber Structures AASHTO M 68 aluminum powder or paste per liter of vehicle of long oil spar varnish.
Basic Lead-Silico-Chromate This makes a paint containing 21 percent pigment and 79 percent vehicle.
Ready Mixed Primer AASHTO M 229 The weighed amount of powder or paste shall be placed in a suitable
Ready Mixed Aluminum Paint AASHTO M 260 and mixing container and the measured volume of vehicle poured over it. The
PNS paste or powder shall be incorporated in the paint by vigorous stirring with
a paddle. The powder or paste will readily disperse in the vehicle. Before
411.2.3 Drier removing any paint from the container, the paint shall be thoroughly
stirred to insure a uniform mixture, and the paint shall be suitably stirred
This Specification covers both straight oil drier (material free from during use. The paint shall be mixed on the job and only enough for one
resins and gums), and Japan drier (material containing varnish gums). day’s use shall be mixed at one time.
The drier shall be composed of lead manganese or cobalt or a mixture of
any of these elements, combined with a suitable fatty oil, with or without When two field coats of aluminum paint are specified, the first
resins or gums, and mineral spirits or turpentine, or a mixture of these coat shall be tinted with lampblack paste or Prussian blue paste in the
solvents. The drier shall conform to the following requirements: quantity of 24 grams/liter of paint. The exact quantity used shall be
sufficient to give a contrast in color which can be readily distinguished.
1. Appearance – Free from sediment and suspended matter. When three field coats of aluminum paint are specified, the second coat
shall be tinted.
2. Flash Point – (Tag Close Up) Not less than 30oC.
411.3.3 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Creosoted Timber
3. Elasticity – The drier when flowed on metal and baked for 2
hours at 100oC shall have an elastic film. The paint shall be mixed as specified for Aluminum Paint for
Structural Steel except that the proportions shall be 270 grams of
4. Drying – It shall mix with pure raw linseed oil in the proportion aluminum powder or paste to one litre of vehicle.
of 1 volume of drier to 19 volume of oil without curdling and
the resulting mixture when flowed on glass shall dry in not Other paint composition may be used when and as stipulated in
more than 18 hours. the Special Provisions.

5. Color – When mixed with pure, raw linseed oil in the 411.3.4 Containers and Markings
proportion of 1 volume of drier to 8 volume of oil, the resulting
mixture shall be darker than a solution of 6 grams of All paints shall be shipped to strong substantial containers plainly
Potassium Dichromate in 13 cc of pure Sulfuric Acid (sp.gr. marked with the weight, color and volume in litres of the paint content, a
1.84). true statement of the percentage composition of the pigment, the
proportions of the pigment to vehicle, the name and address of the
411.3 Construction Requirements
174
manufacturers, and the stencil of the authorized inspecting agency. Any
package or container not so marked will not be accepted for use. On surfaces inaccessible to brushes, the paint shall be applied by
spray gun or with sheepskin daubers specially constructed for the
411.3.5 Sampling and Testing purposes.

Method of sampling shall be as follows: Paint shall be thoroughly stirred, preferably by means of
mechanical mixers, before being removed from the containers, and, to
1. One 20-litre can sample in original unopened container shall keep the pigments in suspension, shall be kept stirred while being
be obtained for 100 cans of the delivered material or 10% applied.
fraction thereof.
When a paint gun is used, the equipment used shall be of an
2. One 4-litre can sample in original unopened container shall approved type and shall have provision for agitation of paint in the spray
be obtained for every 100 cans or fraction thereof of the container. In the case of aluminum paint, the pressure used shall be only
delivered material. that necessary to secure adequate atomization. If in the opinion of the
Engineer unsatisfactory results are obtained from the use of a spray gun,
Methods of testing will be in accordance with the applicable its use shall be discontinued and the painting completed by the use of
AASHTO or ASTM Methods. brushes.

411.3.6 Painting 411.3.6.2 Painting Structural Steel

411.3.6.1 Surfaces of metals to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of

rust, loose mill, scale, dirt, oil or grease, and other foreign substances.
The painting of structure shall include the proper preparation of Unless cleaning is to be done by sandblasting, all weld areas, before
the surface; the application, protection and drying of the paint coatings, cleaning is begun, shall be neutralized with a proper chemical, after which
the protection of the pedestrians, vehicular or other traffic upon or they shall be thoroughly rinsed with water. Cleaning may be by any of the
underneath the structures, the protection of all parts of the structure (both following three methods:
superstructure and substructure) against disfigurement by spatters,
splashes and smirches of paint or of paint materials; and the supplying of 1. Hand Cleaning
all tools, tackle, scaffolding labor, paint and materials necessary for the
entire work. The removal of rust, scale and dirt shall be done by the
use of metal brushes, scrapers, chisels, hammers or other
Paint shall not be applied during rain, storms or when the air is effective means. Oil and grease shall be removed by the use
misty, or when, in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions are otherwise of gasoline or benzene. Bristle or wood fiber brushes shall be
unsatisfactory for the work. Paint shall not be applied upon damp used for removing loose dust.
surfaces or upon metal which has absorbed heat sufficient to cause the
paint to blister and produce a pervious paint film. 2. Sandblasting

No wide flat brush shall be used. All brushes preferably shall be Sandblasting shall remove all scale and other substances
either round or oval but if flat brushes are used, they shall not exceed 100 down to the base metal. Special attention shall be given to
mm in width. the cleaning of corners and re-entrant angels. Before
painting, sand adhering to the steel in corners and elsewhere
The paint when applied shall be so manipulated as to produce a shall be removed. The cleaning shall be approved by the
uniform even coating in close contact with the surface being painted, and Engineer prior to any painting. The material shall be painted
shall be worked into all corners and crevices.
175
 before the rust forms and not later than 2 hours after Erection marks for field identifications of members shall
cleaning. be painted upon previously painted surfaces.

3. Flame Cleaning With the exception of abutting joints and base plates,
machine-finished surface shall be coated, as soon as
Oil and grease shall be removed by washing with suitable practicable after acceptance with a hot mixture of white lead
solvent. Excess solvent shall be wiped from the work before and tallow before removal from the shop. The composition
proceeding with subsequent operation. The surface to be used for coating machine-finished surface shall be mixed in
painted shall be cleaned and dehydrated (freed of occluded the following proportions:
moisture) by the passage of oxyacetylene flames which have
an oxygen to acetylene of at least one. The inner cones of
these flames shall have a ratio length to port diameter of at Pure Tallow 1,915 grams
least 8 and shall not be more than 4 mm center to center. Pure White Lead 958 grams
The oxyacetylene flames shall be traversed over the surface Pure Linseed Oil 1.0 liter
of the steel in such manner and at such speed that the
surface is dehydrated, and dirt, rust, loose scale, scale in the 5. Field Painting of Structural Steel
form of blisters or scabs, and similar foreign matter are freed
by the rapid intense heating by the flames. The flames shall When the erection work is complete including riveting and
not be traversed so slowly that loose scale or other foreign straightening of bent metal; all adhering rust, scale, dirt,
matter is fused to the surface of the steel. The number, grease or other foreign material shall be removed as
arrangement and manipulation of the flames shall be such specified under cleaning of surfaces.
that all parts of the surface are adequately cleaned and
dehydrated. Promptly after the application of the flames, the As soon as the Engineer has examined and approved all
surface of the steel shall be wire-brushed, hand scraped field rivets, the heads of such rivets and field bolts, all welds
wherever necessary and then swept and dusted to remove all and any surfaces from which the shop coat of paint has
free materials and foreign particles. Compressed air shall not become worn off or has otherwise become defective, shall be
be used for this operation. Paint shall be applied promptly cleaned and thoroughly covered with one coat of shop coat
after the steel has been cleaned and while the temperature of paint.
the steel is still above that of the surrounding atmosphere, so
that there will be no recondensation of moisture on the When the paint applied for “touching up” rivet heads and
cleaned surfaces. abraded surfaces has become thoroughly dry, such field
coats as called for shall be applied. In no case shall a
4. Shop Painting of Structural Steel succeeding coat be applied until the previous coat has dried
throughout the full thickness of the film. All small cracks and
When all fabrication work is completed and has been cavities which were not sealed in water-tight manner by the
tentatively accepted, all surfaces not painted before first field coat shall be filled with a pasty mixture of red lead
assembling shall be given two coats of Red Lead Shop Paint and linseed oil before the second field coat is applied.
conforming to the requirements of this Specification. (The
inside of top chords for trusses and laced members or The following provisions shall apply to the application of
inaccessible parts, except contact surfaces, may be painted all field coats. To secure a maximum coating on edges of
before assembling). Shipping pieces shall not be located for plates or shapes, rivet heads and other parts subjected to
shipment until thoroughly dry. No painting shall be done after special wear and attack, these parts shall first be stripped,
loading the materials on transport vehicles. followed immediately by the general painting of the whole
surface, including the edges and rivet heads.
176
 1. In 4 litres of soft water, dissolve 60 ml of copper chloride,
The application of the final coats shall be deferred until copper nitrate, and sal ammonia, then add 60 ml of
adjoining concrete work has been placed and finished. If commercial muriatic acid. This should be done in
concreting operations have damaged that paint, the surface earthenware or glass vessel, never in tin or other metal
shall be recleaned and repainted. receptacle. Apply the solution with a wide flat brush to the
galvanized surface, when it will assume a dark almost black
411.3.6.3 Painting and Timber Structures color which on drying becomes a grayish film.

Timber structures shown on the Plans to be painted, shall be 2. The surfaces, when dry, may then be painted as described.
given two coats of the specified materials, which shall be thoroughly
brushed in. Additional coats shall be required when so specified on the 411.3.6.5 Repainting Existing Structures
Plans. All surfaces shall be thoroughly dry before painting, and each coat
shall be allowed to stand for three or four days, or until thoroughly dry When called for on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, existing
before applying the succeeding coat. structures shall be given the number and kind of coats of field paint as
stipulated. The surface to be repainted shall be cleaned as specified
Timber which required painting must be seasoned timber under Subsection 411.3.6.2, Painting Structural Steel, with the added
surfaced on 4 sides. It shall be either untreated or salt-treated timber as provisions that all dead or loose paint shall be removed by scraping,
specified on the Plans. chipping, or brushing as may be necessary. Timber railings, name plates,
planking and other interfering parts shall be removed before cleaning is
The entire surface of all untreated timber that is to be painted, begun and shall be replaced after the painting has been completed and
shall be given a priming coat immediately after the material is delivered to the last coat has thoroughly dried. The application of the coat shall be as
the project. All contact surfaces shall receive the second coat paint. specified under Subsection 411.3.6.2, (5), Field Painting of Structural
Steel.
Special care shall be taken during construction and handling so
that the pieces to be painted do not come in contact, except when 411.4 Measurement and Payment
required, with the creosoted materials and that no oil is brushed on the
same during construction operations. The Contractor shall be required to Painting shall not be measured and paid for separately, but the
pile such pieces separately from the creosoted materials and keep them cost thereof shall be considered as included in the contract unit price of
from contact with same until ready for erection. the items where called for.

Creosoted materials such as guardrails and guide posts which

are to be painted, shall be painted with aluminum paint as specified
above. ITEM 412 – ELASTOMERIC BEARING PADS

411.3.6.4 Painting Galvanized Surface 412.1 Description

For the purpose of conditioning the surface of galvanized 412.1.1 Scope

surfaces to be painted, the painting shall be deferred as long as possible
in order that the surface may weather. This Item shall consist of the requirement for elastomeric bearing
pads whose main function is to transfer loads or accommodate relative
Before painting galvanized surfaces they shall be treated as movement between a bridge superstructure and its supporting structure,
follows: or both while avoiding damaging strain and additional tension.
Elastomeric bearings shall include unreinforced pads (consisting of
elastomer only) and reinforced bearings with steel laminates.
177
 B. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
412.1.2 General Requirements
All elastomeric layers, for example, plain bearing pads, laminates,
All bearings shall be designed in accordance with specifications and covers, shall be of uniform thickness unless otherwise specified in the
contained in the latest edition of the AASHTO Standard contract or purchase order.
Specification for Highway Bridges, 15th Edition, 1992.
All internal steel laminates shall be of uniform thickness. When
412.1.3 Classification and Use specified in the contract or purchase order, the thickness of the outer
steel laminates may differ if not adjacent to an external load plate.
The following are the types of elastomeric bearings:
The minimum thickness of internal steel laminates shall be 1.5
a. Plain Elastomeric Bearing Pad mm or 0.060 in (16 gage) when the greater of the length or width of a
b. Plain Elastomeric Sandwich Bearing rectangular bearing or diameter of a circular bearing is less than 450 mm
or 18 in. In all other cases, the minimum thickness shall be 2 mm or
c. Steel-Laminated Elastomeric Bearing without External Load 0.075 inch (14 gage).
Plates
d. Steel-Laminated Elastomeric Bearing with External Load Bearing dimensions and elastomer layer thicknesses shall satisfy
Plate(s) the tolerances in Table 2, in which D is the length, width or diameter as
appropriate, and T is the total elastomer thickness.
A laminated bearing pad is required when the thickness of the
plain pad is more than 31.75 mm and the compressive strain is more than Variation from a plane parallel to a design surface shall not
15%. exceed an average slope of 0.005 for the upper surface and 0.006 for a
side surface.
412.2 Material Requirements

The elastomer for the manufacture of the bearing is furnished in Table 1 – Quality Control Properties of Elastomer
two types as follows:
Natural Rubber Chloroprene
1. Type CR-Chloroprene Rubber (NR) Rubber (CR)
2. Type NR-Natural Rubber Grade (Durometer)
Physical Properties:
The elastomer compound used in the construction of a bearing A. Before Aging
shall contain only either natural rubber or a chloroprene rubber as the raw Tensile Strength, MPa 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5
polymer. No reclaimed rubber shall be used. (D412) (min.) (min.) (min.) (min.)
Elongation, % (D412) 400 300 350 300
Steel laminates used for reinforcement shall be made from rolled (min.) (min.) (min.) (min.)
mild steel conforming to ASTM A 36, A 570 or equivalent, unless Durometer Hardness, 60±5 70±5 60±5 70±5
otherwise specified by the Engineer. The laminates shall have a Shore Pts. (D2240)
minimum nominal thickness of 20 gage. Tear Resistance, N/mm 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5
(D624) (min.) (min.) (min.) (min.)
412.2.1 Physical Requirements Compression Set , % 25 25 35 35
(D395) (max.) (max.) (max.) (max.)
A. The elastomer compound shall meet the minimum
Method B, Temperature, 70 70 100 100
requirement of Table 1.
178
o
C less -0, +6
B. After Aging Design thickness over 32 mm (1 ¼)
Temperature of the Test, 70 70 100 100 Overall horizontal dimensions
o
C 914 mm (36 in) and less -0, +6
Aging Time, Hours 168 168 70 70 Over 914 mm (36 in) -0, +12
Tensile Strength, % -25 -25 -15 -15 Thickness of individual layers of ±20 percent of design value
(D573) (max.) (max.) (max.) (max.) elastomer (laminated bearing only) at but no more than ±3 mm
Elongation, % -25 -25 -40 -40 any point within the bearing (1/8 in)
(max.) (max.) (max.) (max.) Variation from a plane parallel to the
Durometer Hardness, +10 +10 +15 +15 theoretical surface: (as determined by
Shore Pts. (max.) (max.) (max.) (max.) measurements at the edge of the
Other Properties: bearings)
Ozone Resistance Top Slope relative to the bottom
(D1149) of no more than 0.005 radian
Partial Pressure, MPa 25 25 100 100 Sides 6
Duration, Hours 48 48 100 100 Position of exposed connection 3
Tested at 20% strain 37.7 No No members
o
C ±1 oC - - cracks cracks Edge cover of embedded laminated -0, +3
Mounting procedure connection members
D518 Size of holes, slots or inserts ±3
Procedure A Position of holes, slots, or inserts ±3
Brittleness D2137, low
temp. Pass Pass Pass Pass
Brittleness at -40 oC 412.3 Construction Requirements
Shear Modulus
Nominal Hardness 412.3.1 Handling, Transport, Storage and Installation
Shear
Modulus at 23 oC, 0.85- 1.13- 0.85- 1.13- During handling, transport, storage, and installation, bearings
MPa 1.1 1.84 1.1 1.84 shall be kept clean and protected from mechanical damage, heat,
contaminants and other deleterious effects.
Plain pads and laminated bearings shall be manufactured to the
design dimensions and these specifications with the tolerances listed in Bearings shall be placed on surfaces that are plane to within 1.6
Table 2, unless other tolerances are shown on the design drawings. mm and unless the bearings are placed in opposing pairs, horizontal to
within 0.01 radians.

Any lack of parallelism between the top of bearing and the

underside of the girder that exceeds 0.01 radians shall be corrected either
Table 2 – Tolerances grinding of the surface, grout pack bearing seats or modification of the
bearing such that the intended bearing placement is as originally
designed with the least amount of bearing modification, or as otherwise
Mm directed by the Engineer.
Overall vertical dimensions
Design thickness 32 mm (1 ¼ in) or -0, +3
179
 Exterior plates of the bearing shall not be welded unless at least 5. For each bearing that fails to meet the requirements in
38.1 mm of steel exists between the weld and the elastomer. (1), two additional bearings maybe sampled and shall meet the
requirements in (1) or the lot shall be rejected.
Each completed bearing shall have its components clearly 6. If the lot is not rejected, the bearing of median stiffness (K)
identified, be securely bolted, straffed or otherwise fastened to prevent shall be subjected to the elastomeric material tests in (2).
any relative movement and marked on its top as to location and
orientation in each structure in the projects conformity with the plans. 412.4 Method of Measurement

Dismantling at the site shall not be done unless absolutely The quantity of elastomeric bearing pad to be paid for will be the
necessary for inspecting or installation. final quantity placed and accepted in the completed structure. The
dimensions of elastomeric bearing pads will be the quantity placed in
412.3.2 Sampling accordance with the Plans or as otherwise directed by the Engineer.

Sampling, testing and acceptance consideration will be made on

a lot basis. A lot shall be further defined as the smallest number of
bearings as determined by the following criteria:
412.5 Basis of Payment
a. A lot shall not exceed a single contract or project quantity.
b. A lot shall not exceed 50 bearings. The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 412.4,
c. A lot shall consist of those bearings of the same type shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Elastomeric Bearing Pads
regardless of load capacity. which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
For acceptance purposes, bearing from within the lot shall be necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.
selected at random as samples for inspection and testing.
Payment will be made under:
A minimum of three bearings shall be taken from the lot for
testing. If the number of bearings in the lot exceeds 50 then for each
additional 50 or part thereof, one additional bearing shall be taken for Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
testing.
412 Elastomeric Bearing Pads Each
412.3.3 Acceptance Requirements

1. If lack of elastomer to steel bond is indicated, the bearing

shall be rejected.
2. If laminate placement faults are observed which results in ITEM 413 - PREFORMED SPONGE RUBBER AND CORK
elastomer layer thickness that exceed the tolerances in Table 2, the EXPANSION JOINT
bearing shall be rejected. FILLERS FOR CONCRETE PAVING AND STRUCTURAL
3. If there are at least three separate surface cracks which are CONSTRUCTION
each at least 2 mm wide and 2 mm deep. The bearing shall be rejected.
4. Record the median compressive stiffness (K) of the bearing of Preformed sponge rubber and cork expansion joint fillers for
median stiffness.The compressive stiffness of each bearing tested shall concrete paving and structural construction shall conform to the
not differ form (K) by more than 10%. applicable requirements of AASHTO M 153.

PART G – DRAINAGE AND SLOPE PROTECTION STRUCTURES

180
 Portland Cement and sand shall conform to the requirements of
ITEM 500 – PIPE CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS Item 405, Structural Concrete. Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes
after its preparation.
500.1 Description
Rubber gaskets AASHTO M
This item shall consist of the construction or reconstruction of pipe 198
culverts and storm drains, hereinafter referred to as “conduit” in accordance with Oakum – Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipes shall be made
this Specification and in conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans from hemp (Cannavis Sativa) line or Benares Sunn fiber or from a
or as established by the Engineer. combination of these fibers. The oakum shall be thoroughly corded and
finished and practically free from lumps, dirt and extraneous matter.
500.2 Material Requirements
Hot poured joint sealing AASHTO M
Material shall meet the requirements specified in the following compound 173
specifications:
Bedding material shall conform to the requirements of Subsection
Zinc coated (galvanized) corrugated iron or 500.3.2, Bedding.
steel
culverts and underdrains AASHTO M 36 Backfill material shall conform to the requirements of Subsection
500.3.6, Backfilling.
Cast iron culvert pipe AASHTO M 64
When the location of manufacturing plants allow, the plants will
Concrete sewer, storm drain and culvert pipe AASHTO M 86 be inspected periodically for compliance with specified manufacturing
methods, and material samples will be obtained for laboratory testing for
Reinforced concrete culvert, storm drain and compliance with materials quality requirements. This shall be the basis for
sewer pipe AASHTO M 170 acceptance of manufacturing lots as to quality.

Bituminous coated corrugated metal culvert Prior to and during incorporation of materials in the work, these
pipe materials will be subjected to the latest inspection and approval of the
and pipe arches AASHTO M 190 Engineer.

Reinforced concrete arch culvert, storm drain 500.3 Construction Requirements

and sewer pipe AASHTO M 206
500.3.1 Trenches Excavation
Reinforced concrete elliptical culvert, storm
drain Trenches shall be excavated in accordance with the requirement of Item
and sewer pipe AASHTO M 207 103, Structure Excavation, to a width sufficient to allow for proper jointing of the
conduit and thorough compaction of the bedding and backfill materials under and
Asbestos cement pipe for culverts and storm AASHTO M 217 around the conduit. Where feasible, trench wall shall be vertical.
drains
The completed trench bottom shall be firm for its full length and
Joint Mortar – Joint mortar for concrete pipes shall consist of 1 width. Where required, in the case of crop drains, the trench shall have a
part, by volume of Portland Cement and two (2) parts of approved sand longitudinal camber of the magnitude specified.
with water as necessary to obtain the required consistency.

181
 When so specified on the Plans, the excavation for conduits The conduit laying shall begin at the downstream end of the conduit
placed in embankment fill, shall be made after the embankment has been line. The lower segment of the conduit shall be in contact with the shaped
completed to the specified or directed height above the designed grade of bedding throughout its full length. Bell or groove ends of rigid conduits and
the conduit. outside circumferential laps of flexible conduits shall be placed facing upstream.
Flexible conduit shall be placed with longitudinal laps or seams at the sides.
500.3.2 Bedding
Paved or partially-lined conduit shall be laid such that the
The bedding shall conform to one of the classes specified. When longitudinal center line of the paved segment coincides with the flow line.
no bedding class is specified, the requirements for Class C bedding shall Elliptical and elliptically reinforced conduits shall be placed with the major
apply. axis within 5 degrees of a vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of
the conduit.
Class A bedding shall consist of a continuous concrete cradle
conforming to the plan details. 500.3.4 Jointing Conduit
Class B bedding shall consist of bedding the conduit to a depth
of not less than 30 percent of the vertical outside diameter of the conduit. Rigid conduits may either be of bell and spigot or tongue and groove
The minimum thickness of bedding material beneath the pipe shall be 100 design unless another type is specified. The method of joining conduit sections
mm. The bedding material shall be sand or selected sandy soil all of shall be such that the ends are fully entered and the inner surfaces are reasonably
which passes a 9.5 mm sieve and not more than 10 percent of which flush and even.
passes a 0.075 mm sieve. The layer of the bedding material shall be Joints shall be made with (a) Portland Cement mortar, (b)
shaped to fit the conduit for at least 15 percent of its total height. Portland Cement grout, (c) rubber gaskets, (d) oakum and mortar, (e)
Recesses in the trench bottom shall be shaped to accommodate the bell oakum and joint compound, (f) plastic sealing compound, or by a
when bell and spigot type conduit is used. combination of these types, or any other type, as may be specified.
Mortar joints shall be made with an excess of mortar to form a continuous
Class C bedding shall consist of bedding the conduit to a depth bead around the outside of the conduit and finished smooth on the inside.
of not less than 10 percent of its total height. The foundation surface, For grouted joints, molds or runners shall be used to retain the poured
completed in accordance with Item 103, Structure Excavation, shall be grout. Rubber ring gaskets shall be installed so as to form a flexible
shaped to fit the conduit and shall have recesses shaped to receive the water-tight seal. Where oakum is used, the joint shall be called with this
bells, if any. material and then sealed with the specified material.

For flexible pipe, the bed shall be roughly shaped and a When Portland Cement mixtures are used, the completed joints
bedding blanket of sand or fine granular material as specified above shall shall be protected against rapid drying by any suitable covering material.
be provided as follows:
Flexible conduits shall be firmly joined by coupling bands.
Pipe Corrugation Depth Minimum Bedding Depth
Conduits shall be inspected before any backfill is placed. Any
10 mm 25 mm pipe found to be out of alignment, unduly settled, or damaged shall be
25 mm 50 mm taken up and relaid or replaced.
50 mm 75 mm
500.3.5 Field Strutting
For large diameter structural plate pipes the shaped bed need
not exceed the width of bottom plate. When required by the Plans, vertical diameter of round flexible conduit
shall be increased 5 percent by shop elongation or by means of jacks applied
500.3.3 Laying Conduit after the entire line of conduit has been installed on the bending but before

182
backfilling. The vertical elongation shall be maintained by means of sills and remainder of the backfill shall consist of materials from excavation and
struts or by horizontal ties shall be used on paved invert pipe. borrow that is suitable for embankment construction.

Ties and struts shall be 300 mm in place until the embankment is Compaction to the density specified in Item 104, Embankment,
completed and compacted, unless otherwise shown on the Plans. shall be achieved by use of mechanical tampers or by rolling.

These construction specifications shall also apply in the case of All conduits after being bedded and backfill as specified in this
relaid conduits. In addition, all conduits salvaged for relaying shall be Subsection shall be protected by one metre cover of fill before heavy equipment
cleaned of all foreign materials prior to reinstallation. is permitted to cross during construction of the roadway.

500.3.6 Backfilling 500.3.7 Imperfect Trench

Materials for backfilling on each side of the conduit for the full Under this method, for rigid conduit, the embankment shall be
trench width and to an elevation of 300 mm above the top of the conduit completed as described in Subsection 500.3.6, Backfilling, to a height above the
shall be fine, readily compactible soil or granular material selected from conduit equal to the vertical outside diameter of the conduit plus 300 mm. A
excavation or from a source of the Contractor’s choice, and shall not trench equal in width to the outside horizontal diameter of the conduit and to the
contain stones that would be retained on a 50 mm sieve, chunks of highly length shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer shall then be excavated
plastic clay, or other objectionable material. Granular backfill material to within 300 mm of the top of the conduit, trench walls being as nearly vertical
shall have not less than 95 percent passing a 12.5 mm sieve and not less as possible. The trench shall be loosely filled with highly compressible soil.
than 95 percent retained on a 4.75 mm sieve. Oversized material, if Construction of embankment above shall then proceed in a normal manner.
present, shall be removed at the source of the material, except as
directed by the Engineer. 500.4 Method of Measurement
When the top of the conduit is flushed with or below the top of the
trench, backfill material shall be placed at or near optimum moisture Conduit of the different types and sizes, both new and relaid, will be
content and compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm (compacted) on measured by the linear metre in place. Conduit with sloped or skewed ends will
both sides to an elevation 300 mm above the top of the conduit. Care be measured along the invert.
shall be exercised to thoroughly compact the backfill under the haunches Each section will be measured by the number of units installed.
of the conduit. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the
conduit for the full required length. Except where negative projecting Branch connection and elbows will be included in the length
embankment-type installation is specified, the backfill material shall be measurement for conduit, or they may be measured by the number of units
placed and compacted for the full depth of the trench. installed.

When the top of the conduit is above the top of the trench, backfill Class B bedding material placed and approved shall be measured by the
shall be placed at or near optimum moisture content and compacted in cubic metre in place.
layers not exceeding 300 mm (compacted) and shall be brought up
evenly on both sides of the conduit for its full length to an elevation 300 When the Bid Schedule contains an estimated quantity for “Furnishing
mm above the top of the conduit. The width of the backfill on each side of and Placing Backfill Material, Pipe Culvert”, the quantity to be paid for will be
the conduit for the portion above the top of the trench shall be equal to the number of cubic metre complete in place and accepted, measured in final
twice the diameter of the conduit or 3.5 m, whichever is less. The backfill position between limits as follows:
material used in the trench section and the portion above the top of the
trench for a distance on each side of the conduit equal to the horizontal 1. Measurement shall include backfill material in the trench up
inside diameter and to 300 mm above the top of the conduit shall conform to the top of the original ground line but will not include
to the requirements for backfill materials in this Subsection. The any material placed outside of vertical planes 450 mm up

183
 outside of and parallel to the inside wall of pipe at its widest
horizontal dimension. 500 (2) Storm Drain, - mm Linear Meter
Class -
2. When the original ground line is less than 300 mm above the
top of the pipe, the measurement will also include the
placing of all backfill materials, above the original ground
line adjacent to the pipe for a height of 300 mm above the ITEM 501- UNDERDRAINS
top of pipe and for a distance on each side of the pipe not
greater than the widest horizontal dimension of the pipe. 501.1 Description

3. The measurement shall include the placing of backfill This item shall consist of constructing underdrains, using pipe and
material in all trenches of the imperfect trench method. granular filter materials, underdrain pipe outlets, and blind drains using granular
Materials re-excavated for imperfect trench construction material in accordance with this Specification and in reasonably close conformity
will be measured for payment under Item 103, Structure with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer.
Excavation.
501.2 Material Requirements
500.5 Basis of Payment
Material shall meet the requirements specified in the following
The accepted quantities of conduit, determined as provided in Section specifications:
500.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per
linear meter for the conduit of the types and sizes specified complete in place. Zinc coated (galvanized) corrugated iron or steel
End sections and, when so specified, branch connections and elbows, shall be Culverts and underdrains AASHTO M 36
paid for at the contract unit price per piece for the kind and size specified
complete in place. Extra strength and standard strength clay pipe
and perforated clay pipe AASHTO M 65
Excavation for culverts and storm drains, including excavation below
flow line grade and for imperfect trench, shall be measured and paid for as Perforated concrete pipe AASHTO M 175
provided in Item 103, Structure Excavation.
Porous concrete pipe AASHTO M 176
Concrete for Class A bedding will be paid for under Item 405,
Structural Concrete. Bituminized-fiber non-pressure sewer drain and
When the Bid Schedule does not contain as estimated quantity for underdrainage pipe systems AASHTO M 177
“Furnishing and Placing Backfill Material, Pipe Culvert” payment for placing
backfill material around pipe culverts will be considered as included in the Asbestos-cement perforated underdrain pipe AASHTO M 189
payment for excavation of the backfill material.
Granular Backfill Filter Material – Granular backfill filter material shall
Payment will be made under: be permeable and shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 6, except that
soundness tests will not be required and minor variation in grading and content of
deleterious substances may be approved by the Engineer.
Payment Item Description Unit of Measurement
Number When the location of manufacturing plants allows, the plants will be
inspected periodically by compliance with specified manufacturing methods, and
500 (1) Pipe Culverts, - mm Linear Meter material sample will be obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with
Class -
184
material quality requirements. This shall be the basis for acceptance of
manufacturing lots as to quality. 501.3.3 Blind Drain

All material shall be subjected to inspection for acceptance as to Trenches for blind drains shall be excavated to the width and depth
condition at the latest practicable time. shown on the Plans. The trench shall be filled with granular backfill material to
the depth required by the Plans. Any remaining upper portion of trench shall be
501.3 Construction Requirements filled with either granular or impervious material in accordance with Item 103,
Structure Excavation.
501.3.1 Pipe Installation
501.4 Method of Measurement
Trenches shall be excavated to the dimensions and grades required by
the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. A minimum of 150 mm bedding layer of Underdrains and outlets shall be measured by the linear meter for pipe
granular backfill material shall be placed and compacted at the bottom of the of the type and size specified. Blind drains shall be measured by the linear meter
trench for its full width and length. including all excavation and backfill materials required.

Subdrainage pipe of the type and size specified shall be embedded Granular backfill filter material, when specified in the Contract as a pay
firmly in the bedding material. item shall be measured in place by the cubic meter, completed and accepted.
Cross-sectional measurements will not exceed the net dimensions shown on the
Perforated pipe shall normally, be placed with the perforations down Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
and the pipe sections shall be joined securely with the appropriate coupling
fittings or bands. Excavation for underdrain pipe will be measured and paid for as
provided in Item 103, Structure Excavation.
Non-perforated pipe shall be laid with the bell end upgrade and with
open joints wrapped with suitable material to permit entry of water, or 501.5 Basis of Payment
unwrapped as may be specified. Upgrade end sections of all subdrainage pipe
installations shall be closed with suitable plugs to prevent entry of soil materials. The accepted quantities determined as provided in Section 501.4,
Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit prices.
After the pipe installation has been inspected and approved, granular
backfill material shall be placed to a height of 300 mm above the top of pipe. Payment will be made under:
Care shall be taken not to displace the pipe or the covering at open joints. The
remainder of the granular backfill material shall then be placed and compacted in
150 mm maximum layers to the required height. Any remaining portion of trench Payment Item Description Unit of Measurement
above the granular backfill shall be filled with either granular or impervious Number
material, as may be specified, and thoroughly compacted.
501 (1) Underdrain - mm Linear Meter

501 (2) Blind drain Linear Meter

501.3.2 Underdrain Outlets
501 (3) Granular Backfill
Trenches for underdrain outlets shall be excavated to the width and filter material for underdrains Cubic Meter
depth shown on the Plans or as otherwise directed. Pipes shall be laid in the ITEM 502 – MANHOLES, INLETS AND CATCH BASINS
trench with all ends firmly joined by the applicable methods and means. After
inspection and approval of the pipe installation, the trench shall be backfilled in 502.1 Description
accordance with Item 103, Structure Excavation.
185
 This item shall consist of the construction, reconstruction or adjustment units and shall be separate casting poured from the same material as the casting
of manholes, inlets and catch basins in accordance with this Specification and in they represent.
reasonably close conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or as
established by the Engineer. Gray iron casting AASHTO M 105

502.2 Material Requirements Mild to medium-strength carbon steel castings

for general application AASHTO M 103
Concrete for these structures shall meet the requirements of Item 405,
Structural Concrete. Other materials shall meet the following specifications: Structural steel AASHTO M 183

Corrugated Metal Units – The units shall conform to Plan dimensions Galvanizing, where specified for these units,
and the metal to AASHTO M 36. Bituminous coating, when specified, shall shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 111
conform to ASTM D 1187, Asphalt-base Emulsion for use as Protective Coating
for Metal. Reinforcing Steel AASHTO M 31

Sewer and manhole brick Pre-cast Concrete Units – These units shall be cast in substantial
(Made from clay or shale) AASHTO M 91 permanent steel forms. Structural concrete used shall attain a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 20.682 MPa (3000 psi). The pre-cast units shall be cured
Building brick (Solid masonry units made in accordance with AASHTO M 171. Water absorption of individual cores taken
from clay or shale) AASHTO M 114 from such units shall not exceed 7 percent. Additional reinforcement shall be
provided as necessary to provide for handling of the pre-cast units.
Joint Mortar- Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, joints mortar
shall be composed of one part Portland Cement and two parts fine aggregate by A sufficient number of cylinders shall be cast from the concrete for each
volume to which hydrated lime has been added in an amount equal to 10 percent unit permit compression tests at 7, 14 and 28 days, and to allow for at least 3
of the cement by weight. All materials for mortar shall meet the requirements of cylinders for each test. If the strength requirement is met at 7 or 14 days, the units
Item 405, Structural Concrete. shall be certified for use 14 days from the date of casting. If the strength is not
met at 28 days, all units made from that batch or load will be rejected.
Frames, Gratings, Covers and Ladder Rungs – Metal units shall conform
to the plan dimensions and to the following specification requirements for the Cracks in units, honeycombed or patched areas in excess of 2,000
designated materials. square millimeters, excessive water absorption and failure to meet strength
requirements shall be the causes for rejection. Pre-cast reinforced concrete
Metal gratings and covers which are to rest on frames shall bear on them manhole risers and tops shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 199.
evenly. They shall be assembled before shipment and so marked that the same
pieces may be reassembled readily in the same position when installed. The plants will be inspected periodically for compliance with specified
Inaccuracy of bearings shall be corrected by machining, if necessary. A frame manufacturing methods, and material samples will be obtained for laboratory
and a grating or cover to be used with it shall constitute one pair. testing for compliance with material quality requirements. This may be the basis
for acceptance of manufacturing lots as the quality.
All castings shall be uniformly coated with asphalt-based emulsion
meeting the requirements of ASTM D 1187, Asphalt-base Emulsion for use as All materials shall be subjected to inspection for acceptance as to
Protective Coating for Metal. condition at the latest practicable time the Engineer has the opportunity to check
for compliance prior to or during incorporation of materials into the work.
Samples of the material in casting shall be taken during the casting of
the 502.3 Construction Requirements

186
 Concrete construction shall conform to the requirements for Item 405, Excavation and backfill will be measured and paid for as provided in
Structural Concrete. Item 103, Structure Excavation.

Metal frames shall be set in full mortar bed. Pipe sections shall be
flushed on the inside of the structure wall and projected outside sufficiently for Payment will be made under:
proper connection with next pipe section. Masonry shall fit neatly and tightly
around the pipe.
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
When grade adjustment or existing structures is specified, the frames,
covers and gratings shall be removed and the walls reconstructed as required. The 502 (1) Manholes Each
cleaned frames shall be reset at the required elevation. Upon completion, each
structure shall be cleaned of any accumulation of silt, debris, or foreign matter of 502 (2) Inlets, type Each
any kind and shall be kept clear of such accumulation until final acceptance of
the work. 502 (3) Catch basins Each

Excavation and backfill shall be done in accordance with Item 103, 502 (4) Concrete covers Each
Structure Excavation.
502 (5) Metal frames and gratings, Pair
type
502.4 Method of Measurement
502 (6) Metal frames and covers Pair
Standard manholes, inlets and catch basins, both new and reconstructed
as applicable, will be measured by the unit. Any additional concrete, reinforcing 502 (7) Adjusting manholes Each
steel, or masonry required for authorized increases in heights of structures paid of
under this Item and in excess of the standard height shown on the Plans will be 502 (8) Adjusting inlets Each
measured and paid for under Item 405, Structural Concrete and Item 404,
Reinforcing Steel, as applicable. Structures noted on the Plans as “junction 502 (9) Adjusting catch basin Each
boxes” will be measured for payment as manholes.

The number of concrete covers, pairs of metal frames and gratings, and
pairs of metal frames and covers will be measured as acceptably completed.
ITEM 503 – DRAINAGE STEEL GRATING WITH FRAME
The number of existing manholes, inlets and catch basins adjusted as
directed will be measured as acceptably completed.
503.1 Description

502.5 Basis of Payment This item shall consist of furnishing all materials, tools, and equipment
including labor required in undertaking the proper application of steel grating
The accepted quantities, determined as provided in Section 502.4, with frame as shown on the plans and in accordance with this specification.
Method of Measurement of the Pay Items in the Bill of Quantities will be paid
for at the contract unit prices, which shall constitute full compensation for 503.2 Classes and Uses of Road Grates and Frames
furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Classes of grates that are commonly use in drainage work are
sump, trench and box.
187
 Sump grates shall be used to create a trafficable ground level entry area For locations subject to vehicles such as large forklifts,
for surface rainwater to flow into the underground stormwater drainage system. earthmoving or container handling equipment and aircraft.
Sump grates shall be used in paved or grassed areas that are graded to direct the Typical locations include wharves, container storage areas, heavy
surface water to a single pit or to a series of pits. Sump grates shall be plain or industry or construction sites and domestic or international
hinged. airports.

Trench grates shall be used to collect surface rainwater run off from All loading conditions specified above are applicable to the three classes
areas that cannot be graded to direct flow into a single pit. of grates depending on their specific uses and locations.

Box grates or road drainage shall be used to transfer road surface storm 503.4 Materials Requirement
water into an underground drainage system. Normally used in conjunction with
kerb entry, the addition of the grate significantly increases the hydraulic capacity 503.4.1 Steel Grating
of the inlet, particularly on steep slopes.
The steel grating shall be made of fabricated mild steel provided with
503.3 Strength Classifications and the Loading Conditions for Sump, hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/AASHTO M 232 for
Trench and Box grates superior corrosion protection. Steel grating shall be machine-made grating
comprised of steel flat bars standing on edge equispaced from each other. To
Class A – Test Load 10kN prevent them from falling over and to provide restraint in buckling, a twisted
cross rod (6mm) is forge-welded1 into the top of the flat bars.
For locations trafficked only by pedestrians, wheelchairs and
cyclists – inaccessible to motor vehicles by virtue of barriers, 503.4.2 Steel Frame
narrow passages or stepped or unpaved approaches.
The steel frame clear openings of drainage grates shall be 15mm larger
Class B – Test Load 80kN than nominal sizes of industry standard sized pits. These pits increase in size in
increments of 150mm. This shall be done to allow frames to be placed over
For locations normally trafficked by pedestrians and slow moving standard panel formwork and cast in while pouring the pit walls, to speeds up
passenger cars or light agricultural tractors. These locations installation and ensure the frame is fully embedded in the concrete.
include areas accessible to infrequent slow moving heavy trucks.
Typical locations include footpaths, ground level and multistoried 503.4.3 Drainage Grate Sizes
car parks, suburban driveways and back yards.
The drainage grates shall be identified by their internal clear opening
Class C – Test Load 150kN dimensions of the frame. For square and rectangular grates, the normal
convention shall be the width x length. Metal units shall conform to the
For locations trafficked by slow moving fully laden trucks such as approved plan dimensions and specifications requirement for the designated
pedestrians, malls and industrial or commercial areas. materials.

Class D – Test Load 210kN Grates shall consist of 25mm to 65mm x 3mm, 4.5mm or 5mm thick flat
bars with length of not more than 6.1m spaced at 30mm o.c. with 6mm twisted
For locations trafficked by fast moving fully laden trucks and rod spaced at 100mm o.c.. Angular frame (L 75mm x 75mm x 9mm thick) shall
forklifts with wheel loads to 5.0T. This includes all public roads be coated with hot dipped galvanized for superior corrosion protection finish and
from residential to freeway.
1
Forge-welding is a process of metal fusion using a combination of high
Class E, F or G – Test Load 400kN, 600kN or 900kN temperature and high pressure.
188
extended life. If required, I-Beam support shall be provided in the grates in 503.6 Acceptance Requirement
accordance with the approved plan. It shall also conform to the requirements of
ASTM A 153 or its equivalents AASHTO M 232. A sufficient number of cylinders for concrete construction shall be cast
from the concrete for each unit for compression tests at 7, 14 and 28 days, and to
503.4.4 The metal unit shall conform to ASTM A 36 / AASHTO M 183. allow for at least 3 cylinders for each test. If the strength requirement is met at 7
or 14 days, the units shall be certified for use 14 days from the date of casting. If
Dimension the strength is not met at 28 days, all units made from that batch or load will be
Tolerances: Thickness = ± 0.20mm rejected.
Width = ± 0.80mm
Length = + 50mm/NIL mm The steel grating plants will be inspected periodically for compliance
Straightness = 6mm in each 1.5m length with specified manufacturing and fabricating methods and bars samples will be
obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with material quality requirements.

All draining grates materials shall be subjected to inspection for

503.4.5 Joint Mortar acceptance as to condition at the latest practicable time the Engineer has the
opportunity to check for compliance prior to or during incorporation of materials
Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, joint mortar shall be composed into the work.
of one part Portland Cement and two parts fine aggregate by volume to which
hydrated lime has been added in an amount equal to 10 percent of the cement by 503.7 Method of Measurement
weight. All materials for mortar shall meet the requirements of Item 405,
Structural Concrete. Structural concrete used shall attain a minimum 28-day The quantity to be measured and paid for will be the number of pairs of
compressive strength of 20.682 MPa (3000 psi). metal frames and gratings completed and accepted. Concrete and reinforcing
steel (AASHTO M 31) will be measured and paid for under Item 405, Structural
503.5 Construction Requirements Concrete and Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, respectively.

Concrete construction shall conform to the requirements for Item 405, Excavation and backfill will be measured and paid for as provided in
Structural Concrete. Item 102, Excavation.

Metal gratings which are to rest on frames shall bear on them evenly. 503.8 Basis of Payment
They shall be assembled before shipment and so marked that the same pieces
may be reassembled readily in the same position when installed. Inaccuracy of The accepted quantities, determined as provided in Section 503.7,
bearings shall be corrected by machining, if necessary. The steel grating and its Method of Measurement of the Pay Items in the Bill of Quantities will be
corresponding frame shall constitute one pair. paid for at the contract unit prices, which shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor,
When grade adjustment or existing drainage grates is specified, the equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item.
frames and steel gratings shall be removed and the walls shall be reconstructed as
required. The cleaned frames shall be reset at the required elevation. Upon Payment will be made under:
completion, each drainage grates shall be cleaned of any accumulations of silt,
debris, or foreign matter of any kind and shall be kept clear of such accumulation
until final acceptance of the work. Pay Item No. Description Unit Of Measurement

Excavation and backfill shall be done in accordance with Item 102,

Excavation. 503 Metal frames and Set
grating
189
 reconditioned shall have all debris removed, leaks repaired, missing or broken
metalwork replaced, and each structure left in operating condition.

ITEM 504 - CLEANING AND RECONDITIONING EXISTING 504.4 Method of Measurement

DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES Measurement will be made by the linear meter of pipe acceptably
cleaned, removed, re-laid or stockpile as designated in the Bill of Quantities,
504.1 Description irrespective of the kind or size involved.

This item shall consist of cleaning and reconditioning existing pipes and Pipe removed, cleaned, and re-laid will be measured in their final
appurtenant structures in reasonably close conformity with this Specification and position.
as shown on the Plans.
Pipe removed, cleaned, and stockpiled will be measured by totaling the
504.2 Material Requirements nominal laying lengths of all pipe units acceptably removed, cleaned, and placed
in the stockpile.
Materials used for repair or replacement under the various Pay Items
shall conform the requirements of the applicable Items of this Specification. Pipe cleaned in place will be measured along the flow line of the pipe
line acceptably cleaned a directed.
504.3 Construction Requirements
Measurement of drainage structures reconditioned will be made by
Pipe Removed and Cleaned – The pipe shall be carefully removed and actual count of the total number of units of each type acceptably completed.
cleaned of foreign material both within the barrel and at the jointed ends. 504.5 Basis of Payment

Pipe Cleaned in Place – All foreign materials within the barrel shall be The quantities as provided in Section 504.4, Method of Measurement,
removed and disposed off by methods which will prevent damage to the pipe. shall be paid for at the contract price bid per unit of measurement for each of the
Pay Items listed below that appear in the Bid Schedule, which price and payment
If approved by the Engineer, all or part of the pipe designated to be shall be full compensation for the work of this item except excavation and
cleaned in place may be removed, cleaned, and relaid in accordance with the backfill which is paid for under Item 103, Structure Excavation.
applicable Items. In such cases, the Contractor shall furnish all materials required
to replace damaged pipes and joints, perform all excavation and backfill, and re- Excavation and backfill necessary for pipe removal operations shall be
lay the pipe, all at the contract bid price for this Item. done as part of the work of this Item.

Re-laying or Stockpiling Salvaged Pipe - Relaying of pipe selected by The Contractor shall remove and replace without added compensation
the Engineer to be removed and cleaned shall be done as shown on the Plans, in any pipe damaged by this operations and which cannot be acceptably repaired in
accordance with the appropriate Item for the kind of pipe involved. The place.
Contractor shall furnish all jointing materials and shall replace the pipe broken by
him, in sufficient lengths to complete the designated length to be relaid without Payment will be made under:
added compensation. Salvaged pipe to be stockpiled shall be placed as shown on
the Plans and as directed by the Engineer. No pipe which has sustained structural Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
damage shall be placed in stockpiles. The Contractor shall dispose off such
damaged pipes at an approved locations. 504 (1) Removing, cleaning, stockpiling
Salvaged culvert pipe Linear Meter
Reconditioning Drainage Structures – Structures such as manholes,
inlets, and the likes, designated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer to be 504 (2) Removing, cleaning, and re-
190
 laying Class C - Stones ranging from minimum of 60kg to a
Salvaged culvert pipe Linear Meter maximum of 100kg with at least 50 percent of the
stones weighing more than 80kg
504 (3) Cleaning culvert pipe in place Linear Meter
Class D - Stones ranging from minimum of 100kg to a
504 (4) Reconditioning drainage Each maximum of 200kg with at least 50 percent of the
structures stones weighing more than 150kg
Sound pieces of broken concrete obtained from the removal of bridges,
If more than one type of drainage structure is described for an Item in culverts and other structures may be substituted for stone with the approval of the
the Bid Schedule, letter suffixes shall be added to the item Number differentiate Engineer.
between such structures.
505.2.2 Filter Materials
If no Pay Item from the list above appears in Bid Schedule, the pipe
removed will be considered as included in the work of Item 101, Removal of When required, the riprap shall be placed on a filter layer to prevent fine
Structures and Obstructions. embankment materials to be washed out through the voids of the face stones. The
ITEM 505 – RIPRAP AND GROUTED RIPRAP grading of the filter material shall be as specified on the Plans, or in the Special
Provisions. If not so specified, it will be required that D15 of the filter is at least 4
505.1 Description times the size D85 for the embankment material, where D15 percent and 85
percent, respectively, passing (by mass) in a grain size analysis. Fine aggregate
This Item shall consist of the furnishing and placing of riprap with or passing grading requirements for Item 405, Structural Concrete, will satisfy
without grout as the case may be, with or without filter backing, furnished and foregoing requirements.
constructed in accordance with this Specification and to the lines and grades and
dimensions shown on the Plans.
505.2.3 Mortar
505.2 Material Requirements
Mortar for grouted riprap shall consist of sand, cement and water
505.2.1 Stones conforming to the requirements given under Item 405, Structural Concrete,
mixed in the proportion of one part cement to three parts sand by volume, and
Stones for riprap shall consist of rock as nearly as rectangular in section sufficient water to obtain the required consistency.
as is practical, except that riprap of Class A may consist of round natural stones.
The stones shall be sound, tough, durable, dense, resistant to the action of air and The horizontal and vertical contact surface between stones shall be
water, and suitable in all respects for the purpose intended. embedded by cement mortar having a minimum thickness of 20 mm. Sufficient
mortar shall be used to completely fill all voids leaving the face of the stones
Stones for riprap shall be one of the following classes as shown on the exposed.
Plans or determined by the Engineer.

Class A - Stones ranging from a minimum of 15kg to a 505.3 Construction Requirements

maximum of 25kg with at least 50 percent of the
stones weighing more than 20kg 505.3.1 Excavation

Class B - Stones ranging from minimum of 30kg to a The bed for riprap shall be excavated to the required depths and properly
maximum of 70kg with at least 50 percent of the compacted, trimmed and shaped.
stones weighing more than 50kg

191
 The riprap shall be founded in a toe trench dug below the depth of scour
as shown on the Plans or as ordered by the Engineer. The toe trench shall be 505.3.4 Weepholes
filled with stone of the same class as that specified for the riprap, unless
otherwise specified. All walls and abutments shall be provided with weepholes. Unless
otherwise shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer, the weepholes shall be
505.3.2 Placing placed horizontally at the lowest points where free outlets for water can be
obtained and shall be spaced at not more than 2 m center to center in a staggered
Stones placed below the water line shall be distributed so that the manner . The length of the weepholes shall not be less than the thickness of the
minimum thickness of the riprap is not less than that specified. walls of the abutment and shall be at least 50 mm diameter PVC or other pipe
materials accepted by the Engineer. Weepholes must be provided with filter bags
Stones above the water line shall be placed by hand or individually by as specified in special provision or as directed by the Engineer, and shall be
machines. They shall be laid with close, broken joints and shall be firmly bedded incidental to Pay Item 505.
into the slope and against the adjoining stones. Each stone shall be laid with its
longest axis perpendicular to the slope in close contact with each adjacent stone. 505.4 Method of Measurement
The riprap shall be thoroughly rammed into place as construction progresses and
the finished surface shall present an even, tight surface. Interstices between The quantities to be measured for payment shall be the number of cubic
stones shall be filled with small broken fragments firmly rammed into place. meters of riprap or grouted riprap, as the case may be, including stones placed in
the toe trench laid in position and accepted.
Unless otherwise provided, riprap shall have the following minimum
thickness, measured perpendicular to the slope: Filter layer of granular material, when required, shall be measured
separately by the cubic meter in place and accepted.
Class A – 300 mm
Class B – 500 mm The computation of the quantities will be based on the volume within
Class C – 600 mm the limiting dimensions designated on the Plans or as determined by the
Class D – 800 mm Engineer.

The surface of riprap shall not vary from the theoretical surface by more
than 100 mm at any point. 505.5 Basis of Payment

505.3.3 Grouting The quantities measured as provided under Subsection 505.4 shall be
paid for at the contract unit price, respectively, for each of the Pay Items listed
When grouted riprap is specified, stones shall be placed by hand, or below and shown in the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall be full
individually by machine as specified for riprap placed above the water line. The compensation for excavation and preparation of the bed, for furnishing and
spaces between the stones shall then be filled with cement mortar throughout the placing all materials including backfill and all additional fill to bring the riprap
thickness of the riprap as specified in Subsection 504.2.3, mortar. Sufficient bed up to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the plans, and all labor,
mortar shall be used to completely fill all voids, except that the face surface of equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
the stones shall be left exposed.
Payment will be made under:
Grout shall be placed from bottom to top of the surface swept with a stiff
broom. After grouting is completed, the surface shall be cured as specified in Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
Item 405, Structural Concrete for a period of at least three days.
505 (1) Riprap, Class A Cubic Meter
The stones shall also be laid in a manner that the vertical and horizontal
alignments of the exposed face shall, as possible be maintained in a straight line. 505 (2) Riprap, Class B Cubic Meter
192
 radius. Bed surfaces of the face stones shall be approximately normal to the face
505 (3) Riprap, Class C Cubic Meter of the stones for about 80 mm and from this point may depart from a normal
plane not to exceed 50 mm in 300 mm.
505 (4) Riprap, Class D Cubic Meter
Finish for Exposed Faces – Face stones shall be pitched to the line along
505 (5) Grouted Riprap, Class A Cubic Meter the beds and joints. The maximum projection of rock faces beyond the pitch lines
shall not be more than 50 mm.
505 (6) Grouted Riprap, Class B Cubic Meter
506.2.2 Mortar
505 (7) Grouted Riprap, Class C Cubic Meter
Cement, fine aggregate, and water shall conform to the respective
505 (8) Grouted Riprap, Class D Cubic Meter requirements for those materials as specified under Item 405, Structural
Concrete, except as to the grading of fine aggregate which shall all pass the 2.36
505 (9) Filter layer of granular material Cubic Meter mm (No. 8) sieve, not less than 15 nor more than 40 percent shall pass the 0.3
mm (No. 50 ) sieve, and not more than 10 percent shall pass the 0.15 mm
ITEM 506 – STONE MASONRY (No.100) sieve.

The mortar for the masonry shall be composed of one part of Portland
506.1 Description Cement and two parts of fine aggregate by volume and sufficient water to make
the mortar of such consistency that it can be handled easily and spread with a
This Item shall consist of stone masonry in minor structures, in trowel. Mortar shall be mixed only in those quantities required for immediate
headwalls for culverts, in retaining walls at the toes of slopes, and at other places use. Unless an approved mortar mixing machine is used, the fine aggregate and
called for on the Plans, constructed on the prepared foundation bed, in cement shall be mixed dry in a tight box until the mixture assumes a uniform
accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, color, after which, water shall be added as the mixing continues until the mortar
sections, and dimensions shown on the Plans or as ordered in writing by the attains the proper consistency. Mortar that is not used within 90 minutes after the
Engineer. water has been added shall be discarded. Retempering of mortar will not be
506.2 Material Requirements permitted.

506.2.1 Stone 506.3 Construction Requirement

The stone shall be clean, hard, and durable and shall be subject to the 506.3.1 Selection and Placing
Engineer’s approval. Adobe stone shall not be used unless otherwise specified.
When the masonry is to be placed on a prepared foundation bed, the bed
Sizes and Shapes – Unless other sizes are shown on the Plans, stones shall be firm and normal to, or in steps normal to, the face of the wall, and shall
have a thickness of not less than 150 mm, and widths of not less than one and have been approved by the Engineer before any stone is placed.
one-half times their respective thickness, and lengths of not less than one and one
half times their respective widths. Each stone shall be of good shape and be free Care shall be taken to prevent the bunching of small stone or stones of
of depressions and projections that might weaken or prevent it from being the same size. Large stones shall be used in the corners.
properly bedded.
All stones shall be cleaned thoroughly and wetted immediately before
Dressing – The stone shall be dressed to remove any thin or weak being set, and the bed which is to receive them shall be cleaned and moistened
portions. Face stones shall be dressed to provide bed and joint lines that do not before the mortar is spread. They shall be laid with their longest faces horizontal
vary more than 20 mm from the true lines and to ensure the meeting of bed and in full beds of mortar, and the joints shall be flushed with mortar.
joint lines without the rounding of corners of the stones in excess of 30 mm in
193
 The exposed faces of individual stones shall be parallel to the faces of 506.3.6 Coping
the walls in which the stones are set.
Copings, if called for, shall be finished as shown on the Plans. Where
The stones shall be so handled as not to jar displace the stones already copings are not called for, the top of the wall shall be finished with stones wide
set. Suitable equipment shall be provided for setting stones larger than those that enough to cover the top of the wall from 450 mm to 1000 mm in length, and of
can be handled by two men. The rolling or turning of stones on the walls will not random heights, with a minimum height of 150 mm. Stone shall be laid in such a
be permitted. If a stone is loosened after the mortar has taken initial set, it shall manner that the top course is an integral part of the wall. The tops of top course
be removed, the mortar cleaned off, and the stone relaid with fresh mortar. of stone shall be pitched to line, in both vertical and horizontal planes.

506.3.2 Bed and Joints 506.3.7 Weepholes

Beds for face stones may vary from 20 mm to 50 mm in thickness. They It shall conform to the requirements of Item 504, Riprap and Grouted
shall not extend an unbroken line through more than 5 stones. Joints may vary Riprap under Subsection 504.3.4, Weepholes.
from 20 mm to 50 mm in thickness. They shall not extend in an unbroken line
through more than two stones. They may be at angles with the vertical from 00 to 506.3.8 Cleaning Exposed Faces
450. Face stone shall bond at least 150 mm longitudinally and 50 mm vertically.
At no place shall corners of four stones be adjacent to each other. Immediately after being laid, and while the mortar is fresh, all face
stones shall be thoroughly cleaned of mortar stains and shall be kept clean until
Cross beds for vertical faced walls shall be level, and for battered walls the work is completed.
may vary from level to normal to the batter line of the face of the wall.
506.3.9 Curing
506.3.3 Headers
In hot or dry weather, the masonry shall be satisfactory protected from
Headers shall be distributed uniformly throughout the walls of the the sun and shall be kept wet for a period of at least three days after completion.
structures so as to form at least one-fifth of the exposed faces. They shall be of
such lengths as to extend from the front face of the wall into the backing of at 506.4 Method of Measurement
least 300 mm. When a wall is 450 mm or less in thickness, the headers shall
extend entirely from front to back face. The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters of stone
masonry complete in place and accepted. Projections extending beyond the faces
of the walls shall not be included. In computing the quantity for payment, the
506.3.4 Backing. dimensions used shall be those shown on the Plans or ordered in writing by the
Engineer. No deductions shall be made for weepholes, drain pipes or other
Backing shall be built mostly of large stones as shown in the approved openings of less than one square meter in area.
Plans or as directed by the Engineer. The individual stones composing the
backing and hearting shall be well bonded with the stones in the face wall and 506.5 Basis of Payment
with each other. All openings and interstices in the backing shall be filled
completely with mortar or with spalls surrounded completely by mortar. The quantity of masonry, determined as provided in Section 506.4,
Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic
506.3.5 Pointing meter for Stone Masonry, which price and payment shall be full compensation
for furnishing and placing all materials, including mortar for masonry, for all
Both bed and vertical joints shall be finished as shown on the Plans or as necessary excavations, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
directed by the Engineer. The mortar in joints on top of surface of masonry shall necessary to complete the Item.
be crowned slightly at the center of the masonry to provide drainage.
Payment will be made under:
194
 507.3.2 Falsework and Formwork Construction
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

Falsework/formwork shall be constructed so as to withstand the stresses

506 Stone Masonry Cubic Meter imposed.

ITEM 507 – RUBBLE CONCRETE

Formwork used shall be constructed with sufficient strength, rigidity
and shape as to leave the finished works true to the dimensions shown on the
507.1 Description Plans and with the surface finished as specified.

This item shall consist of the construction of rubble concrete in

The inside surface of the forms shall be cleaned of all dirt, water and
accordance with this specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, slopes foreign materials. Forms shall be thoroughly coated with form oil prior to use.
and dimensions shown in the Plans or established by the Engineer.
The form oil shall be commercial quality form oil or other approved coating
which will permit the ready release of forms and will not discolor the concrete.
507.2 Material Requirements
507.3.3 Placing
507.2.1 Stone
One layer of concrete Class “B” shall be placed at the prepared bed
The stone shall be cleaned, hard, and durable and shall be subject to the prior to placing of stones. Clearance between stones shall not be less than 2-1/2
Engineer’s approval. Adobe stone shall not be used unless otherwise specified. inches or the maximum size of concrete aggregate for Class “B”.
Stones to be used shall be more than 0.015 cubic metre in volume and not less
than 75 percent of the total volume of rock embankment and shall consist of
stones 0.03 cubic metre in volume as described in Item 506.2. Stones obtained Concrete Class “B” shall be placed after each layer of stone and shall
from excavation performed under this contract may be used. be thoroughly consolidated by means of a vibrator inserted in each layer of
concrete. In no case shall the vibrator be operated longer than 10 seconds in any
location.
507.2.2 Concrete Class “B”

After removal of forms, any cavities, voids and honeycomb spots shall
Concrete shall be Class “B” in accordance with Item 405, Structural
be filled up with mortar composed of one part cement and two parts sand.
Concrete.
507.3 Construction Requirements
All debris and refuse resulting from work shall be removed and the site
left in a neat and presentable condition.
507.3.1 Preparation of Foundation Bed

The foundation bed shall be excavated to the lines and grades as shown 507.3.4 Weepholes
in the plans as directed by the Engineer, and shall be thoroughly compacted in
accordance with Item 104.3.3.
195
 It shall conform to the requirements of Item 504, Riprap and Grouted This Item shall consist of hand-laid rock embankment, as designated in
Riprap under Subsection 504.3.4, Weepholes. the Bid Schedule, constructed in accordance with this Specification and in
conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or established by the
Engineer.

508.2 Material Requirements

507.4 Method of Measurement
Stones shall be sound and durable and furnished in a well-balanced
ranged of sizes meeting the requirements herein.
The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters of rubble concrete
complete in place and accepted. In computing the quantity of payment the Unless otherwise provided by the Plans or Special provisions, all stones shall be
dimension used shall be those shown on the plans or ordered in writing by the more than 0.015 cubic meter in volume and not less than 75 percent of the total
Engineer. No reduction shall be made for weepholes. volume of rock embankment and shall consist of stones 0.03 cubic meter in
volume. Stones obtained from excavation performed under this contract may be
used. Adobe stone shall not be used, unless otherwise specified.
507.5 Basis of Payment 508.3 Construction Requirements

The quantity of rubble concrete determined as provided in the Sufficient excavation shall be made to expose a foundation bed that is
preceding section 507.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the satisfactory to the Engineer. The stones shall be founded on this bed and laid to
contract unit price per cubic meter for rubble concrete, which price and payment the lines and dimensions required.
shall be full compensation for the preparation of the bed, furnishing, necessary
excavations, falsework, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals Stones shall be laid flat and securely placed with broken joint lines. The
necessary to complete the Item. larger stones shall generally be located in the lower part of the structure and
voids shall be eliminated to the extent possible. Spalls smaller than the minimum
stone size specified in Section 506.2, Material Requirements, shall be used to
Payment will be made under: check the larger stones solidly in position and to substantially fill voids between
the major stones as laid in the embankment. The exposed face of the rock mass
shall be reasonably uniform, with no projections of more than 150 mm, beyond
the neat lines shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement Backfill adjacent to the hand-laid rock embankment shall be filled
entirely with acceptable material coming from excavation items and compacted.

507 Rubble Concrete Cubic Meter 508.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity to be paid for will be the number of cubic meter of hand-
laid rock embankment measured in place, completed and accepted.
ITEM 508 – HAND-LAID ROCK EMBANKMENT
508.5 Basis of Payment
508.1 Description
The quantity determined, as provided in Section 508.4, Method of
Measurement , will be paid for at the contract price per cubic meter for Hand-
196
Laid Rock Embankment, which price and payment shall constitute full 509.3 Construction Requirements
compensation for furnishing, selecting, and transporting stones, for placing
stones by hand, for backfilling, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals Sheet piles shall be driven to elevation shown on the Plans or as
necessary to complete the Item including foundation excavation. directed by the Engineer. Where impractical to drive to plan elevation due
to subsurface conditions, the driving of piles may be stopped at a higher
Payment will be made under: elevation with the written permission of the Engineer. However, before
granting such permission, the Engineer shall ascertain that the Contractor
has adequate equipment for the required driving and that the piles can be
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement driven to the plan elevation with the proper use of this equipment.

The top of the piling shall be driven or cut-off to a straight line at

508 Hand-Laid Rock Cubic Meter the elevation indicated on the Plans.
Embankment
ITEM 509 – SHEET PILES The requirements governing the installation of sheet piling shall
conform in general to those governing bearing piles as set forth under
509.1 Description Item 400, Piling.
509.4 Method of Measurement
This shall consist of furnishing, driving and cutting off of sheet piling
covered by this Specification. Sheet piling will be measured by the linear meter of sheet piling as
shown on the Plans or as directed in writing by the Engineer, complete in place
509.2 Material Requirements and accepted. However, measurement of piling which has been delivered to plan
length and cannot be driven according to plan or directed elevation because of
509.2.1 Timber Sheet Piles subsurface condition shall be measured as if driven to that elevations.

The timber, unless otherwise definitely noted on the Plans or in the

Special Provisions, may consist of any species which will satisfactorily stand 509.5 Basis of Payment
driving. It shall be sawn or hewn with square corners and shall be free from
worm holes, loose knots, wing shakes, decay or unsound portions or other Payment of steel piles as determined in Section 509.4, Method of
defects which might impair its strength or tightness.
Measurement, shall be made at the contract unit price per linear meter. Such
payment shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor,
509.2.2 Concrete Sheet Piles equipment, tools, paint, bolts, wales and incidentals necessary to complete the
Item.
Concrete, reinforcement, and manufacture of concrete sheet piles
shall conform to the requirements of Item 400, Piling, Subsection 400.2.3,
Concrete Piles.
Payment will be made under:
509.2.3 Steel Sheet Piles
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
Steel sheet piles shall be of the type, weight and Section Modulus
indicated on the Plans or Special Provisions, and shall conform to the
requirement of Item 400, Piling, Subsection 400.2.7, Sheet Piles, Painting
shall conform to the requirements for Item 411, Paint, Subsection 411.6.2, 509 (a) Sheet Piles (Timber) Linear Meter
Painting Structural Steel.

197
 509 (b) Sheet Piles (Steel) Linear Meter Concrete shall be Class B as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete,
unless otherwise specified or required by the Engineer.

509 (c) Sheet Piles (Concrete) Linear Meter

510.3 Construction Requirements

ITEM 510 – CONCRETE SLOPE PROTECTION 510.3.1 Excavation

510.1 Description The ground shall be excavated where necessary in accordance with the
dimensions, lines and grades shown on the Plans.
This Item shall consist of the furnishing and placing of concrete slope
protection including all necessary excavation, a bed course and reinforced
concrete to the required thickness and extent to protect slopes against erosion. 510.3.2 Bed Course
Construction details shall be as shown on the Plans.

Where shown on the Plans or ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor

510.2 Material Requirements shall provide and lay a bed course, to the depth required, and as specified in Item
200, Aggregate Subbase Course, compacted at least 100 percent of the maximum
dry density as determined by AASHTO T 180, Method D.
510.2.1 Bed Course

510.3.3 Concrete
A bed course, where required, shall be granular material which satisfies
the requirements for Item 200, Aggregate Sub-base, Grading A.
The Contractor shall provide and place concrete in accordance with the
requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete, to the required depths in the
510.2.2 Formwork positions and to the grades and elevations shown on the Plans. Unless otherwise
specified, the concrete slabs shall not be greater than 4m by 4m and shall have
between slabs, plain vertical straight joints with no joint filler or sealer.
Formwork, where necessary, shall be as specified in Item 407, Concrete
Structures.
The toe of the concrete slope protection shall be constructed and
protected a shown on the Plans.
510.2.3 Steel Reinforcement

510.3.4 Drainage
Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Item 404, Reinforcing Steel.

Drainage of the bed course or backfill shall be provided as shown on the

510.2.4 Concrete Plans or as required by the Engineer.

198
 511.1 Description
510.4 Method of Measurement
This Item shall consist of furnishing, forming wire mesh baskets, and
placing rocks installed at the locations designated, in accordance with this
The quantity of granular material in the bed course to be paid for shall Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions, and
be measured by the cubic meter in-place and accepted as shown on the Plans. arrangements shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.

The quantity of concrete to be paid for shall be measured by the cubic 511.2 Material Requirements
meter in-place and accepted as shown on the Plans.

511.2.1 General

510.5 Basis of Payment Gabions shall be constructed of wire mesh and shall be supplied in
various lengths and heights. A double twisted wire mesh container of variable
sizes, uniformly partitioned into internal cells, interconnected with other similar
The accepted quantities as provided in Section 510.4, Method of units, and filled with stones at the project site to form flexible, permeable,
Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price according to the Pay
monolithic structures such as retaining walls, sea walls, channel linings,
Item in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall constitute full revetments and weirs for erosion control. The lengths shall be multiples of 2, 3
compensation for the necessary excavation, for all labor, equipment, tools, all or 4 times the width of the gabion and heights shall be 0.50 m to 1.00 m or as
materials including formwork and reinforcing steel, and incidentals necessary to
shown on the plans. The horizontal width shall not be less than one meter.
complete this Item. Gabion furnished shall be of uniform width.

Payment will be made under:

The width, height and length of the gabion as manufactured shall not
differ more than ±5% from the ordered size prior to filling.
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
Mattresses are double twisted wire mesh container uniformly partitioned
into internal cells with relatively small height in relation to other dimensions,
510 (1) Bed Course Cubic meter in-place having smaller mesh openings than the mesh used for gabions. Mattresses are
Granular Material generally used for riverbank protection and channel linings. The length shall be
3.00 m to 6.00 m, the width shall be 2.00 m and the height shall be 0.17 m, 0.23
m or 0.30 m or as shown on the Plans.
510 (2) Concrete Cubic meter in-place

The width and length of the revet mattress as manufactured shall not
differ more than ±5%, and the height shall not differ more than ±10% from the
ordered size prior to filling.

ITEM 511 – GABIONS AND MATTRESSES

511.2.2 Wire

199
 511.2.2.4 Style 4 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from aluminum-
coated steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 809, soft
The wire used in the manufactured of double-twisted mesh for use in
temper.
gabions and mattresses shall conform to the specifications as shown below as
appropriate for the style ordered.
511.2.3 Lacing Wire and Stiffener

511.2.2.1 Style 1 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from zinc-

Lacing wire and stiffeners shall be made of wire having the same
coated steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 641, Class 3
coating material as the double-twisted wire mesh conforming to
coating, soft temper.
Specification ASTM A 641, A 856/A 856 M or A 809 with a tensile
strength in accordance with subsection 509.2.7.
511.2.2.2 Style 2 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from Zn-5A1-
MM-coated steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 856/A
856 M, Class 3 coating, soft temper. 511.2.4 Fasteners made from zinc-coated steel wire, zinc - 5% aluminum
mischmetal alloy-coated steel wire and aluminum-coated steel shall
conform to specification A 764, Type A, B, or C, Table 2 or Table
511.2.2.3 Style 3 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from the same
3.
type of metallic-coated steel wire as style 1 with an additional PVC
coating extruded into the metallic-coated steel wire. The PVC
coating shall conform to the following requirements:
511.2.5 Gabion and mattresses shall be manufactured with all components
mechanically connected at the production facility with the
Test Method exception of the mattresses lid which is produced separately from
the base. All gabions and mattresses shall be supplied in the
collapsed form, either folded and bundled or rolled, for shipping.
1. Specific Gravity 1.30 to 1.35 D 792
2. Tensile Strength, min 20.6 MPa D 412 511.2.6 Dimensions
3. Modulus of Elasticity, min 18.6 MPa D 412
The minimum size of the galvanized and PVC coated wire to be used in the
4. Hardness, shore “D” between 50 & D 2240 fabrication of the gabion and mattresses shall be as follows:
60
5. Brittleness Temp, max 90C (150F) or D 746
lower temp. Diameter,
mm
6. Resistance to Abrasion, % 12% D 1242
Gabion Mattresse
weight loss, max.
Metallic PVC Metallic PVC
Coated Coated Coated
The PVC coating shall not show cracks or breaks after the wires are twisted Body Wire 3.05 2.70 2.20
in the fabrication of the mesh.
Selvedge or Perimeter Wire 3.80 3.40 2.70
Tying and Connecting Wire 2.20 2.20 2.20

200
 Diameter Tolerances for Galvanized Wire to be used in the Rock used in the gabions and mattresses shall consist of hard, durable
fabrication of gabion and mattress shall be ± .10. rock pieces that will not deteriorate when submerged in water or exposed to
severe weather conditions. Rock pieces shall be generally uniformly graded in
The nominal and the minimum thickness of PVC coating shall be sizes ranging from 100 mm to 200 mm. Filled gabions shall have a minimum
0.50 mm and 0.38 mm, respectively. density of 1,400 kg/m3. Voids shall be evenly distributed.

511.2.7 Mechanical Properties No rock size shall exceed 2/3 the mattress depth and at least 85% by
weight of the stone shall have a size greater than 80 mm. No stones shall be able
Tensile Strength – The tensile strength of Zinc-coated wire used in the to pass through the mesh.
fabrication of gabion and mattresses when tested in accordance with Test
Methods ASTM A 370, shall be as follows:
The rock shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 63 except that the
sodium sulphate soundness loss shall not exceed 9% after 5 cycles.
Strength, max, Mpa
Gabion Mattresses 511.2.10 Filter Fabric
Body Wire 485 515
Selvedge or Perimeter Wire 485 485 Filter cloth shall consist of 70% polypropylene and 30% polyethylene.
Tying and Connecting Wire 515 515

511.3 Construction Requirements

511.2.8 Weight of Coating
511.3.1 Fabrication
The minimum weight of zinc per unit area of uncoated wire surface shall be
in accordance with ASTM A 975 or as follows: 1. Gabions and mattresses shall be in the form of rectangular baskets
of the required dimensions and shall be manufactured from wire
as specified in Subsection 509.2.2. Gabions shall be made of steel
Wire Diameter, mm Class 3 or A Coating, g/m2, ASTM A 641 wire double twisted forming a uniform hexagonal mesh type 8 x
10 having a nominal mesh openings of 83 by 114 mm. Mattresses
Over 1.90 to 2.30 220 shall be made of steel wire double twisted forming a uniform
Over 2.30 to 2.70 230 hexagonal mesh type 6 x 8 having a nominal mesh openings of 64
by 83 mm. Tolerances on the hexagonal, double-twisted wire
Over 2.70 to 3.10 240 mesh opening shall not exceed ±10% on the nominal dimension D
Over 3.10 to 3.50 260 values, 64 mm for mattresses and 83 mm for gabions. The edges
shall be formed into a securely connected selvedge adequate to
Over 3.50 to 3.90 270 prevent raveling.

511.2. 9 Rock Fill

201
 Individual basket ties and connections shall be made by using a 1. Gabions shall be installed in a workmanlike manner. The
quantity of wire not less than 8% of the weight of each basket. gabions shall be placed on a smooth foundation. Final line and
grade shall be approved by the Engineer.

2. When the gabion length exceeds its width, it shall have securely
Each gabion unit shall be assembled by binding together all
tied diaphragms connected at all edges to form individual cells of
vertical edges with wire ties on approximately 152 mm (6 inches)
equal length and width.
spacing or by a continuous piece of connecting wire stitched
around the vertical edges with a coil every 102 mm ( 4 inches).
Gabions shall be fabricated in such a manner that the sides, ends, Empty gabion units shall be set to line and grade as shown on the
lids and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into Plans or as described by the Engineer. Wire ties or connecting
rectangular baskets of the specified sizes. Gabions shall be of wires shall be used to join the units together in the same manner
single unit construction, base, lids, ends and sides shall be either as described above for assembling. Internal tie wires shall be
woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected uniformly spaced and securely fastened in each cell of the
to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength structure.
and flexibility at the point of connection is at least equal to that of
the mesh.
A standard fence stretcher, chain fall, or iron rod may be used to
stretch the wire baskets and hold alignment.
The gabion shall be equally divided by diaphragms, placed at not
more than 1.0 m intervals, and of the same mesh and gauge as the
body of the gabions, into cells the length of which does not 2. When possible the subgrade of the mattress and gabion shall be
exceed the horizontal width. The gabion shall be furnished with properly compacted to a depth of 150 mm. The Contractor shall
the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base consider the cost of subgrade preparation in the unit prices. Filter
in such a manner that no additional tying at this junction will be fabric as beds of gabions and mattresses forming the structure
necessary. shall be suitably leveled and shall be securely connected along
the complete length of all contact edges by means of the above
specified tying and connecting wire.
3. Four cross-connecting wires shall be provided in each cell having
a height of one half the width or less, and eight cross-connecting
3. Before the filling material is placed, the gabions and mattresses
wires shall be provided in each cell having a height greater than
shall be carefully selected for uniformity of size, and the pieces
one half the width.
shall be handplaced to provide a neat appearance as approved by
the Engineer.
All perimeter edge of the mesh forming the gabion shall be
securely selvedged so that the joints, by tying the selvedges, have
The gabions shall be filled with stone carefully placed by hand or
at least the same strength as the body of the mesh.
machine to assure alignment and avoid bulges with a minimum
Selvedge wire used through all the edges (perimeter wire) shall voids. Alternate placing of rock and connection wires shall be
not be less than 3.80 mm diameter and shall meet the same performed until the gabion is filled. After a gabion has been
specifications as the wire mesh. filled, the lid shall be bent over until it meets the sides and edges.
The lid shall then be secured to the sides, ends and diaphragms
with the wire ties or connecting wire in the manner described for
511.3.2 Assembly and Construction: assembling.

202
 The vertical joints of gabions and mattress baskets shall be Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
staggered as in running bond in brickwork.

511 (1) Gabions Cubic Meter

4. The cells in any row shall be filled in stage so that local
deformation may be avoided. That is at no time shall the cell be 511 (2) Mattresses Cubic Meter
filled to a depth exceeding 30 cm more than the adjoining cell. 511 (3) Filter Cloth Square Meter

5. Filter fabric shall be placed between earth surface and gabion or

mattress structures. Filter fabric shall be rolled out into a flat non-
rutted surface free from sharp objects, weighing down the edges.
Construction equipment shall not be allowed into unprotected
fabric. Jointing is normally affected by overlapping not less than
300 mm, but it is preferable to joint by sewing or industrial
stapling. Joint edges should be facing downwards to avoid
protruding through the surface material. PART H – MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES

ITEM 600 – CURB AND GUTTER

511.4 Method of Measurement 600.1 Description

The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meter This Item shall consist of the construction of curb and gutter either
of gabions and mattresses and the area of filter cloth completed and accepted.
Precast or Cast in place, made of concrete in accordance with this Specification

at the location, and in conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions and design,

511.5 Basis of Payment shown on the Plans or as required by the Engineer.

Quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for at the

appropriate contract unit price per unit of measurement for the Pay Item shown 600.2 Material Requirements
in the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation
for all necessary excavation, subgrade preparation, for furnishing, placing wire 600.2.1 Material for Bed Course
baskets and fill materials and for all labor, equipment accessories, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Bed course materials as shown on the Plans shall consist of
cinders, sand, slag, gravel, crushed stone, or other approved porous
material of such grading that all the particles will pass through 12.5 mm
Payment will be made under: (1/2 inch) sieve.

600.2.2 Concrete

203
 Concrete shall be of the class indicated on the Plans and shall have forms of either wood or metal and they shall be accurately shaped to
conform to the the curvature shown on the Plans.
requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete.
Mixing, placing, finishing and curing of concrete shall conform to
600.2.3 Expansion Joint Filler the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete, as modified by the
requirements below.
Expansion joint filler shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 153/ Item 705. The concrete shall be placed in the forms in layers of 100 or 125
mm each, and to the depth required. It shall be tamped and spaded until
600.2.4 Cement Mortar mortar entirely covers the top and surfaces of the forms. The top of the
concrete shall be finished to a smooth and even surface and the edges
Cement mortar shall consist of one part of Portland cement and rounded to the radii shown on the Plans. Before the concrete is given the
two parts of fine aggregates with water added as necessary to obtain the final finishing, the surface of the gutter shall be tested with a 3-m straight-
required consistency. The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of edge and any irregularities of more than 10 mm in 3 m shall be corrected.
preparation.
The curb and gutter shall be constructed in uniform sections of
600.2.5 Bonding Compound not more than 50 m in length except where shorter sections are required
to coincide with the location of weakened planes or contraction joints of
Where bonding compound is used, it shall conform to AASHTO M 200. the concrete pavement, or for closures, but no section shall be less than 2
m long. The sections shall be separated by sheet templates set
600.3 Construction Requirements perpendicular to the face and top of the curb and gutter. The templates
shall be approximately 5 mm in thickness and of the same width as that of
600.3.1 Bedding the curb and/or gutter and not less than 50 mm deeper than the depth of
the curb and/or gutter. Templates shall be set carefully and held firmly
Excavation shall be made to the required depth and the base during the placing of the concrete and shall remain in place until the
upon which the curb and/or gutter is to be set shall be compacted to a concrete has set sufficiently to hold its shape but shall be removed while
firm and even surface. All the forms are still in place. A preformed joint filler approved by the
soft and unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with suitable Engineer may be used in lieu of the sheet template mentioned above. In
material. this event the fiber board shall be pre-cut to the shape of the curb so that
Bed course material shall be placed and compacted to form a bed its outer edge will be flushed with the abutting curb and/or gutter.
of the required thickness as shown on the Plans.
Expansion joints shall be formed at intervals shown on the Plans.
600.3.2 Cast in Place Curb and Gutter Where a curb is placed next to a concrete pavement, expansion joints in
the curb shall be located opposite expansion joints in the pavement.
600.3.2.1 Placing The form shall be removed within 24 hours after the concrete has
been placed. Minor defects shall be repaired with mortar containing one
Forms shall conform to the requirements of Item 407, Concrete part of Portland Cement and two parts of fine aggregate. Plastering shall
Structures. Metal forms shall be of an approved section. not be permitted and all rejected portions shall be removed and replaced
at the Contractor’s expense. The exposed surface shall be finished while
Forms to hold the concrete shall be built and set-in-place as the concrete is still fresh by rubbing the surfaces with a wetted soft brick
described in Item 407, Concrete Structures. Forms for at least 50 m of or wood until they are smooth. The surfaces shall be wetted thoroughly,
curb and gutter shall be in-place and checked for alignment and grade either by dipping the brick or wood in water, or by throwing water on the
before concrete is placed. Curbs and gutters constructed on curves shall surfaces with a brush. After the concrete has been rubbed smooth using
water, it shall then be rubbed with a thin grout containing one part of
204
Portland Cement and one part of fine aggregates. Rubbing with grout
shall continue until uniform color is produced. When completed, the 1. In preparation for the handling of precast curb and gutter, all
concrete shall be covered with suitable material and kept moist for a fabricated curb and gutter of one (1) meter in length shall be
period of 3 days, or a membrane-forming material may be applied as provided or inserted with 2-1ӯ PVC pipes for fitting at their
provided in Item 405, Structural Concrete. The concrete shall be suitably required locations. The PVC pipes shall be placed 25 mm from
protected from the weather until thoroughly hardened. both edge during the fresh concrete is in plastic state.

After the concrete has set sufficiently, the spaces on the back of 2. Precast curb and gutter shall be lifted on upright position and not
the curb which were excavated for placing the curb shall be refilled to the at the points of support and shall be the same during transporting
required elevation with suitable material which shall be tamped in layers and storage.
of not more than 150 mm until consolidated.
3. Extreme care shall be exercised in handling and moving precast
600.3.3 Precast Curb and Gutter curb and gutter to avoid cracking.

600.3.3.1 Placing 4. No precast curb and gutter shall be used that does not reach its
final position in the forms with the required time stipulated prior to
The precast concrete curb and gutter shall be set in 20mm of installation.
cement mortar as specified in Subsection 600.2.4 to the line level and
grade as shown on the approved Plans. 5. Precast curb and gutter shall be transferred to the construction
site. Fresh curb and gutter shall not be placed against in-situ
The precast curb shall not be more than 20cm in width at the top concrete which has been in a position for more than 30 minutes.
portion and not be more than 25cm at the base. The precast curb and
gutter shall be 1.0 m in length and shall be put side by side consecutively 6. Precast curb and gutter may only be transported to the delivery
with joint in between. point in truck agitators or truck mixer operating at the speed
designated by the manufacturer of the equipment, provided that
Joints between consecutive curb and gutter shall be filled with the consistency and workability of the mix concrete upon
cement mortar to the full section of the curb and gutter. Expansion joints discharge at the delivery point is suitable for adequate placement.
shall be formed at intervals shown on the Plans. Where a curb and gutter
is placed next to a concrete pavement, expansion joints in the curb and 600.4 Method of Measurement
gutter shall be located opposite expansion joints in the pavement.
The length of curb and gutter to be paid for shall be the number of
Minor defects shall be repaired with mortar containing one part of linear meters of curb and gutter (cast in place) or the number of pieces of
Portland Cement and two parts of fine aggregates. Plastering shall not be precast curb and gutter of the required dimensions shown on the Plans
permitted and all rejected portions shall be removed and replaced at the measured along its front face in-place, completed and accepted. No
Contractor’s expense. The exposed surface shall be finished by rubbing deductions shall be made for flattening of curbs at entrances and no
the surfaces with a wetted soft brick or wood until they are smooth. The additional allowances shall be made for curbs and gutters constructed on
surfaces shall be wetted thoroughly, either by dipping the brick or wood in curves.
water, or by throwing water on the surfaces with a brush. After the
concrete has been rubbed smooth using water, it shall then be rubbed 600.5 Basis of Payment
with a thin grout containing one part of Portland Cement and one part of
fine aggregate. Rubbing with grout shall continue until uniform color is The length of curb and gutter determined in Subsection 600.4,
produced. Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per
linear meter for Curb and Gutter which price and payment shall constitute
600.3.3.2 Handling Precast Curb and Gutter full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials for concrete,
205
reinforcing steel if required on the Plans, expansion joint materials, forms Asphaltic material shall be as specified in Item 308, Bituminous
for drainage openings, excavation for curb and gutter, backfilling, Plant-Mix Surface Course, Cold-Laid, or Item 310, Bituminous Concrete
dumping and disposal of surplus materials, and for all labor, equipment, Surface Course, Hot-Laid.
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
601.2.3 Expansion Joint Filler
Payment will be made under:
Unless otherwise ordered, the preformed joint filler shall have a
thickness of 5 mm and shall conform to the requirements of Item 311,
Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement Portland Cement Concrete Pavement.
Number
601.2.4 Forms
600 (1) Concrete Curb (Cast in place) Linear Meter
600 (2) Concrete Gutter (Cast in Linear Meter Forms shall be of wood or metal as approved by the Engineer
place) and shall extend to the full depth of the concrete. All forms shall be
600 (3) Curb and Gutter (Cast in Linear Meter straight, free from warps and of adequate strength to resist distortion.
place)
600 (4) Concrete Curb (Precast) Piece 601.2.5 Bed Course Material
600 (5) Concrete Gutter (Precast) Piece
600 (6) Curb & Gutter (Precast) Piece Bed course material consists of cinders, sand, slag, gravel,
crushed stone or other approved permeable granular material of such
grading that all particles shall pass a 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) sieve.

ITEM 601 – SIDEWALK 601.2.6 Asphaltic Prime Coat

Prime coat shall be cut-back asphalt conforming to the

601.1 Description requirements of Item 301, Bituminous Prime Coat.

This Item shall consist of the construction of asphalt or Portland 601.3 Construction Requirements
Cement concrete sidewalk in accordance with this Specification and to
the lines, grades, levels and dimensions shown on the Plans, or as 601.3.1 Asphalt Sidewalk
required by the Engineer.
Excavation shall be made to the depth and width required that will
601.2 Material Requirements permit the installation and bracing of the forms. The foundation shall be
shaped and compacted to a firm and even surface conforming to the
601.2.1 Portland Cement Concrete section shown on the Plans. All materials from soft areas shall be
removed and replaced with suitable materials.
The cement concrete shall be Class A as specified in Item 405,
Structural Concrete. The bed course shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 100
mm to the depths, lines and levels shown on the Plans.
601.2.2 Asphalt
The prepared bed course material shall receive an application of
prime coat in accordance with the requirements of Item 301, Bituminous
Prime Coat.

206
 compensation for furnishing and placing all materials for asphalt sidewalk,
The asphalt mixture shall be placed on the previously primed and concrete sidewalk, expansion joint material, for excavating and
prepared bed only when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the bed is compacting the foundation bed, for furnishing and placing cinders, gravel
sufficiently dry and weather conditions are suitable. The mixture shall be or other permeable bed course material, for prime coat material, for
placed in one or more layers of uniform thickness to the total depth shown forms, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
on the Plans. Each layer shall be smoothed by raking or screeding and complete the Item.
shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling with a hand operated roller of a
type satisfactory to the Engineer. After compaction, the surfacing shall be Payment will be made under:
of the thickness and section shown on the Plans and shall be smooth,
even and of a dense uniform texture. Forms, if used, shall be removed
and the shoulders shaped and compacted to the required section. Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement

601.3.2 Cement Concrete Sidewalk

601 Sidewalk Square Meter
Excavation shall be as specified above. The bed course material
shall be placed in accordance with the Item 200, Aggregate Subbase
Course.
All forms shall be staked securely in position at the correct line ITEM 602 – MONUMENTS, MARKERS AND GUIDE POSTS
and level. Preformed joint filler shall be set in position shown on the
Plans before placing of the concrete is started. The top of the joint filler
shall be placed 5 mm below the top surface of the finished sidewalk. 602.1 Description

The mixing, placing, finishing and curing of concrete shall be as This Item shall consist of right-of-way monuments, maintenance
specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete. The Portland Cement marker posts, kilometer posts and/or guide posts, furnished and installed
concrete shall be placed to the total depth shown on the plans. in accordance with this Specification at the locations, and in conformity
with the sizes, dimensions and design, shown on the Plans, or as
The surface shall be cut through to a depth of 10 mm with a trowel at required by the Engineer.
intervals of 1 m or, were required, in straight lines perpendicular to the edge of
sidewalk. The surface shall then be brushed. The edges of the sidewalk and the
transverse cuts shall be shaped with a suitable tool so formed as to round the 602.2 Material Requirements
edges to a radius of 15 mm
Concrete shall be the class designated on the Plans and shall be
601.4 Method of Measurement composed of materials conforming to the requirements of Item 405,
Structural Concrete.
The area to be paid for shall be the number of square meters of
sidewalk measured, completed in-place and accepted. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of Item 404,
Reinforcing Steel.

601.5 Basis of Payment Timber shall be of the species and grade shown on the Plans.
Treated timber, if required, shall conform to the requirements of Item 410,
The quantity as determined in Subsection 601.4, Method of Treated and Untreated Timber.
Measurement, shall be paid for all the contract unit price per square
meter for Sidewalk which price and payment shall constitute full The metal material shall conform to the requirements shown on
the Plans, or as stipulated in the Special Provisions.
207
 602 (1) Right-of-Way Each
Paints, if required, shall conform to the requirements shown on monuments
the Plans, or as stipulated in the Special Provisions. 602 (2) Maintenance marker Each
posts
Warning reflectors, if required, shall conform to the requirements 600 (3) Kilometer posts Each
shown on the Plans, or as stipulated in the Special Provisions. 600 (4) Guide posts Each

(When more than one design is specified for any of the pay items, their
602.3 Construction Requirements
respective dimensions, material types or other means of identification shall be
Construction or fabrication and installation of monuments and
posts shall be as shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions and inserted in parenthesis immediately after the name of the pay item, and letter
shall include the attaching of warning reflectors and the painting of posts,
if required. Each monument and post shall be set accurately at the suffixes shall be included within the parenthesis of the pay item numbers)
required location and elevation and in such manner as to insure its being
held firmly in place. In constructing precast monuments, the forms shall
not be removed until after the concrete has hardened. Monuments that
are warped shall be rejected. The exposed surface of the finished ITEM 603 – GUARDRAIL
monuments shall be uniform, of even texture, and shall be free from
holes, cracks and chipped edges. The precast monuments shall not be
transported to the work until the concrete has been cured. 603.1 Description

602.4 Method of Measurement This item shall consist of furnishing and constructing posts and
guardrails of the types called for in the contract and in accordance with
The quantities to be paid for shall be the actual number of right- this Specification, at the locations, and in conformity with the lines and
of-way monuments, maintenance marker posts, kilometer posts and/or grades shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.
guide posts furnished, placed and accepted.

602.5 Basis of Payment 603.2 Material Requirements

The quantities determined as provided in Subsection 602.4, Materials for the desired type of guardrail shall meet the
Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract price per unit of requirements specified in the following specifications:
measurement respectively, for each of the particular Pay Item listed below
and as shown in the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall 1. Wire rope or wire cable AASHTO M 30
constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, 2. Chain link fabric AASHTO M 181
including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to 3. Metal beam rail AASHTO M 180
complete the work prescribed in this Item. 4. Timber rail, unless otherwise indicated in the Plans or Special
Provisions, any of the following first group Philippine Timber
Payment will be made under: shall be used: Ipil, Molave, Tindalo or Yacal. Only one specie
of timber shall be used in the construction of any one
continuous length of guardrail.
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement\

208
 Timber guardrail shall be well-seasoned, straight and free of 603.3 Construction Requirements
injurious defects. They shall be dressed and of sufficient length so that
joints shall be on the rail posts. 603.3.1 Posts

Guardrail Hardware. Offset brackets of the resilient and non- Posts shall be set vertically in the position shown on the Plans
resilient types shall be of the type specified, or as shown on the Plans, and, where embedded in a concrete foundation block, shall remain
and shall meet the strength requirements specified. undisturbed for a minimum of 48 hours. The space around the post shall
be backfilled to the ground line with approved material in layers not
Splices and end connections shall be of the type and design exceeding 100 mm and each layer shall be moistened and thoroughly
specified or as shown on the Plans, and shall be of such strength as to compacted.
develop the full design strength of the rail elements.
603.3.2 Rail Elements
Unless otherwise specified, all fittings, bolts, washers and other
accessories shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of Rail elements shall be erected in a manner resulting in a smooth
AASHTO M 111 or ASTM A 153, whichever may apply. All galvanizing continuous installation. All bolts, except adjustment bolts, shall be drawn
shall be done after fabrication. tight. Bolts shall be of sufficient length to extend beyond the nuts at least
5 mm but not more than 10 mm.
Guardrail Post. Posts shall be of either wood, steel, or concrete,
as may be specified. Only one kind of post shall be used for any one Where painting of railing components is specified, any damage
continuous guardrail. to the shop coat of paint shall be corrected by an application of an
approved rust-inhibitive primer prior to further painting. Any surface
Wood post shall be fabricated from an approved or specified timber inaccessible to painting after erection shall be given the specified number
specie and shall be of the quality, diameter or section and length as specified, or of coats of paint uniformly applied by thorough brushing using an
as shown on the Plans. approved pressure spray.

Galvanized surfaces which have been abraded so that the base

Steel post shall be of the section and length as specified, or as shown on
material is exposed, threaded portions of all fittings and fasteners and cut
the Plans. They shall be of a copper bearing steel when so specified. Steel shall
ends of bolts shall be protected in a manner as may be specified or
conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 183 for the grade specified. The
directed.
posts shall be galvanized or shop painted as may be specified.
The surfaces and sawed edges of untreated or salt-treated
Pre-cast reinforced concrete posts shall be of a section and guardrail shall be painted with three coats of white paint to within 200 mm
length as specified or as shown on the Plans. Concrete shall conform of the ground line. The first 200 mm of posts above the ground shall be
with the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete, for class painted with two coats of black paint. Painting shall be done only when
specified. Reinforcement shall conform with the requirements of the timber is dry and clean. Each coat of paint shall be thoroughly dry
AASHTO M 31 Grade 60. All bars shall be of the deformed type. before the next coat is applied. Paint shall be applied in heavy coats,
completely covering every part of the surface and shall be worked well
Concrete deadmen for end anchorages shall be as specified, or into the joints and open spaces. It shall be thoroughly and evenly spread
as shown on the Plans. Concrete and reinforcement shall conform to the that no excess paint collects at any point.
requirements as stated above the precast reinforced concrete posts.
Guardrail and posts, after erection has been completed, shall be
Paints for steel and wood shall be specified and conform to the stained with two applications of approved creosote stain, covering the
requirements specified in Item 411, Paint. rails and the exposed portions of the posts. The wood shall be dry before

209
being stained. The first coat shall be thoroughly dry before the second is 603 (1) Guardrail (Wire rope or Wire Linear Meter
applied. Stain shall not be applied in damp weather. 603 (2) cable) Linear Meter
603 (3a) Cable Guardrail 9Chain Link Linear Meter
For beam type guardrails, metal works not galvanized shall be Fabric)
given one shop coat of red lead, zinc chromate paint or an approved fast- 603 (3b) Metal Guardrail (Metal Beam) Each
drying rust-inhibitive primer and two field coats of white or aluminum 604 (4) Including Post Linear Meter
paint. Untreated wood posts shall be given three coats of paints of the Metal Beam End Piece
color indicated on the Plans, or as specified. Painting shall conform to the Guardrail (Timber)
requirements of Item 411, Paint.

ITEM 604 – FENCING

603.4 Method of Measurement

Guardrail shall be measured by linear meter from center to center 604.1 Description
of end posts, except where end connections are made on masonry or
steel structures, in which case measurement will be to the face of such This Item shall consist of furnishing and constructing posts and
structures. barbed wire or chain link fences in accordance with the details, and at the
locations, shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.
End anchorages and terminal sections will be measured as units
of each kind shown in Bid Schedule. If no pay item for anchorages or
terminal sections appear in the Bid Schedule, measurement therefore 604.2 Material Requirements
shall be included in the linear meter measurement for completed
guardrail. 604.2.1 Barbed Wire

Barbed wire shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 121,

603.5 Basis of Payment Class I. The barbed wire shall consist of 2 strands of 12.5 gauge wire,
twisted with 2 points, 14 gauge barbs spaced 100 mm apart.
The accepted quantities of guardrail, determined in Subsection
603.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price 604.2.2 Chain Link Fence Fabric
per linear meter for the type specified, complete in place, which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all Chain link fence fabric shall be fabricated from 10 gauge
materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary galvanized wire conforming to AASHTO M 181 and shall be of the type
to complete the Item. When so specified, end anchorages and terminal shown on the Plans. Before ordering the chain link fence fabric, the
sections will be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the kind Contractor shall submit a sample of the material to the Engineer for
specified and completed in place. testing and for approval.

Payment will be made under: 604.2.3 Concrete Post

Concrete posts shall be made of Class A concrete in accordance

with Item 405, Structural Concrete. The posts shall be cast to a tapered
section 3 m long, or to the length shown on the detailed Plans, and shall
Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement
have a smooth surface finish.

604.2.4 Steel Post

210
 Steel posts shall be of the sections and length as specified or as The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of linear meter
shown on the Plans. The posts shall be copper bearing steel and shall measured center to center of posts, of fencing erected in place and
conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 183 for the grade specified. accepted.

604.2.5 Steel Reinforcement

604.5 Basis of Payment
Steel reinforcement for concrete posts shall be deformed steel
bars conforming to the provisions of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. The quantity, as determined in Subsection 604.4, Method of
Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract price per unit of
604.2.6 Hardwares measurement respectively for each of the particular items listed below
and as shown in the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall be full
Nuts, bolts, washers and other associated hardware shall be compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor,
galvanized after fabrication as specified as ASTM 153. equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
604.3 Construction Requirements

The Contractor shall perform such clearing and grubbing as may Payment will be made under:
be necessary to construct the fence to the required grade and alignment.
Fence shall generally follow the contour of the ground. Grading
shall be performed where necessary to provide a neat appearance. Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement

Gates shall be constructed as shown on the Plans

604 (1) Fencing (Barbed wire) Linear Meter
604.3.1 Erection Post 604 (2) Fencing (Chain Link
Fence Fabric) Linear Meter
The post shall be erected vertically in position inside the formwork 604 (3) Fencing (Posts) Each
of the foundation block prior to the placing of concrete and shall be 604 (4) Fencing (Gates) Each
adequately supported by bracing to prevent movement of the post during
the placing and setting of the concrete. The posts shall be erected to the
height and location shown on the Plans, or as ordered by the Engineer.
ITEM 605 – ROAD SIGN
604.3.2 Installation of Chain Link Fence fabric

The chain link fence fabric shall be set to line and elevation and 605.1 Description
pulled taut between each post before spot welding, or other method of
fixing, is carried out. Where splicing of the fence fabric is necessary, or at This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing road signs
joints, the lapping of the chain link fence fabric shall be for a minimum of in accordance with this Specification and to the details shown on the
100 mm and shall occur only at the post. No horizontal splicing will be Plans, or as required by the Engineer.
permitted. The fence fabric shall be fixed to the posts as shown on the
Plans. Any surface protective layer damaged during welding and/or The road signs shall comply in all respects with the “Philippine
construction shall be restored properly. International Road Signs Manual” published by the Department of Public
Works and Highways, Manila. The categories of road signs are
designated in the Manual, namely, danger warning signs, regulatory signs
604.4 Method of Measurement
211
and informative signs, or guide signs. These are referred to in the White -40 0.50 75
Contract as warning signs and informatory signs, respectively. 200 0.50 70
500 0.50 70
Road signs shall be classified as standard or non-standard. Yellow -40 0.50 35
Standard signs consist of all warning signs, regulatory signs and 200 0.50 35
informatory signs with the exception of direction signs, place identification 500 0.50 10
signs and the line. Non-standard signs consist of all informatory signs Blue -40 0.50 6
which are not classified as standard signs. 200 0.50 4.5
The size of warning and regulatory signs is the length of the side 500 0.50 0.5
of triangular signs (measured from the points of intersection of the
extension of the edges), the horizontal width of octagonal signs and the The reflective sheeting shall be sufficiently flexible to permit
diameter of circular signs. application and adhesion to a moderately embossed surface. It shall show
no damage when bent 900 over a 50 mm diameter mandrel.

605.2 Material Requirements The sheeting shall be solvent-resistant so as to be capable of

withstanding cleaning with petrol, diesel fuel, mineral spirits, turpentine
605.2.1 Sign Panels methanol.

Sign panels for warning, regulatory, and informatory signs shall The sheeting shall show no cracking or reduction in reflectivity
be manufactured from aluminum sheeting at least 3 mm thick. after being subjected to the dropping of a 25 mm diameter steel ball from
a height of 2 m into its surface.
605.2.2 Reflective Sheeting
The adhesive shall permit the reflective sheeting to adhere
The reflective sheeting used on the road signs shall consist of accurately 48 hours after application of temperatures of up to 900.
spherical lens elements embedded within a transparent plastic having a
smooth, flat surface with a protected precoat adhesive which shall be
pressure sensitive for manual application, or tack free heat activated for The reflective material shall be weather-resistant and, following
mechanical vacuum-heat application. cleaning in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, shall
show no discoloration,
The minimum reflective brightness values of the reflective cracking, blistering, peeling or any dimensional change.
sheeting as compared to a magnesium oxide (MgO) shall be as given in
Table 605.1. The brightness of the reflective sheeting totally wet by rain, Samples of reflective sheeting shall be submitted to the Engineer
shall be not less than 90% of the given values. for approval.

Table 605.1 – Reflective Brightness of Traffic Signs Surfaces 605.2.3 Posts and Frames

Color Angle of Angle of Minimum Wide flange posts and frames shall be fabricated from structural
Incidence Divergence Reflective steel conforming to ASTM A 283 Grade D. In lieu of wide flange steel
Brightness Value posts, the Contractor may use tubular steel posts conforming to ASTM A
Compared with 501. All posts shall be thoroughly cleaned, free from grease, scale and
MgO rust and shall be given one coat of rust-inhibiting priming paint and two
Red -40 0.50 15 coats of gray paint in accordance with Item 411, Paint.
200 0.50 10
500 0.50 3 605.2.4 Nuts and Bolts
212
 Nuts, bolts, washers and other metal parts shall be hot-dip
All newly erected traffic road signs shall be covered until ordered
galvanized after fabrication in accordance with the requirements of
removed by the Engineer.
AASHTO M 111.

605.2.5 Concrete Foundation Blocks

605.4 Method of Measurement
The concrete for the foundation blocks shall be Class A in
accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete and shall be of the size The quantities of standard reflective warning and regulatory road
shown on the Plans. signs shall be the number of such signs of the size specified, including the
necessary posts and supports erected and accepted.

605.3 Construction Requirements

The quantities for standard reflective informatory signs and non-
605.3.1 Excavation and Backfilling standard reflective informatory signs shall be the number of such,
including the necessary posts and supports, erected and accepted.
Holes shall be excavated to the required depth to the bottom of
the concrete foundation as shown on the Plans.
605.5 Basis of Payment

Backfilling shall be carried out by using suitable material The quantities measured as determined in Subsection 605.4,
approved by the Engineer and shall be compacted in layers not Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the
exceeding 150 mm in depth. Surplus excavated material shall be Pay Items shown in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall be
disposed of by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer. full compensation for furnishing and installing road signs, for excavation,
backfilling and construction of foundation blocks, and all labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
605.3.2 Erection of Posts

The posts shall be erected vertically in position inside the

formwork of the foundation block prior to the placing of the concrete and Payment will be made under:
shall be adequately supported by bracing to prevent movement of the
post during the placing and setting of concrete. The posts shall be
located at the positions shown on the Plans. Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement

605.3.3 Sign Panel Installation

605 (1) Warning Signs Each
Sign panels shall be installed in accordance with the details
shown on the Plans. Any chipping or bending of the sign panels shall be 605 (2) Regulatory Signs Each
considered as sufficient cause to require replacement of the panels at the
Contractor’s expense. 605 (3) Informatory Signs Each

ITEM 606 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS

The exposed portion of the fastening hardware on the face of the
signs shall be painted with enamels matching the background color.
606.1 Description
213
 d. Flexibility – The dried paint film shall not show cracking or flaking
This item shall consist of placing markings on the finished after being bent about 180 degrees over a 12.7 mm mandrel.
pavement. The work shall include the furnishing of premixed reflectorized e. Resistance to Water – The dried paint film shall not show
traffic paint or reflectorized pavement marking paint conforming to the blistering, peeling, wrinkling and discoloration when immersed in
requirements of AASHTO M 248, whichever is called for in the Contract, water for 18 hours.
sampling and packing, preparing the surface, and applying the paint to f. The paint shall also conform to the physical properties specified
the pavement surface, all in accordance with this Specification. in Table 1.

The paint shall be applied to the size, shape and location of the Table 1 – Physical Properties
markings shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.

606.2 Premixed Reflectorized Traffic Paints Properties Type I and Type II

Premixed reflectorized traffic paint is a paint in which the glass Minimum Maximum
beads are mixed in the paint during the process of manufacture, so that Specific Gravity 1.5 -
upon application and drying, the paint line is capable of retroreflection of Drying Time, No Pick Up,
the light beams. Minutes - 40
Consistency (Kreb Units) at 65 95
Premixed reflectorized traffic paints which are available in both 20 C
white and yellow are paints that provide reflective marking for concrete,
bituminous, bricks or stone surface of highways, bridges, tunnels, streets, g. Premixed reflectorized traffic paint composition shall conform to
parking lots and airports. the requirements given in Table 2.
606.2.1 Classification Table 2 – Composition Requirements
Requirements
Premixed reflectorized traffic paint shall be classified according to Paint Composition
Type I Type II
the following types based on the vehicles used: Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximu
m
Type I – Alkyd
Total Dry Solids, percent
Type II – Chlorinated Rubber Alkyd
By weight 60 - 60 -
Titanium Dioxide, Rutile
Percent by weight 16.0 - -
606.2.2 Material Requirements
16.0
The paint shall consist of pigments, vehicles and glass beads so Medium Chrome Yellow,
Percent by weight 12.0 - -
combined as to produce a paint that will conform to the following
requirements. 12.0
Extenders, percent by wt.,
a. Condition in container – The packaged material shall be free from White 13.0 - 13.0
lumps and mixed readily to a smooth homogenous state. Yellow - 17.0 - 17.0
b. Skinning – The packaged material shall not skin within 48 hours Non-volatile Content
in a ¾ filled, tightly closed container. (based on the vehicle)
c. Appearance of Dried Film – The paint film shall dry to a smooth percent by weight 40 - 41 -
uniform finish. Glass Beads, percent by

214
 Weight 31.0 35.0 unfavorable for the work. Paint shall not be applied upon damp pavement
35.0
31.0 surfaces, or upon pavement which has absorbed heat sufficient to cause
the paint to blister and produce a porous film of paint.
h. Glass Spheres or Beads Requirements:

Quantity: The amount of glass beads to be mixed with the paint shall be The application of paint shall preferably be carried out by a
500 machine specially made for this purpose but where brushes are used,
grams per liter of paint. only round or oval brushes not exceeding 100 mm in width will be
permitted. The paint shall be so applied as to produce a uniform, even
coating in close contact with the surface being painted.
Beads Diameter: The percentage of beads that will pass through the US
Standard Sieves shall be as follows:
Traffic paint shall be applied to the pavement at the rate of 0.33 L
Sieve No. (um) Mass Percent Passing /m2 and shall dry sufficiently to be free from cracking in from 15 to 30
minutes.
70 (212 – um) – 0.850 100
80 (186 – um) – 0.600 85-100
140 (106 – um) – 0.300 15-55 All markings shall present a clean cut, uniform and workmanlike
230 ( 63 – um) – 0.150 0-10 appearance. Markings that fail to have a uniform, satisfactory
appearance either by day or night, shall be corrected by the Contractor in
Index of Refraction: The index of refraction of the beads shall be a manner acceptable to the Engineer and at no cost to the Government.
within the range of 1.50 to 1.60 when
tested 606.2.4 Sampling
o
by the liquid immersion method at 29 C.
The paint shall be sampled in accordance with PNS 484/ISO
Appearance: The glass beads shall be transparent, colorless and 1512 or other Philippine Standard Method of Sampling Paints and
the sum of particles that are fused, plane, Varnishes.
angular
and colored and contains bubble shall not
exceed 606.2.5 Test Methods
20 percent

606.2.3 Construction Requirements The paints shall be tested in accordance with the methods
specified in PNS 461 or other Philippine Standard Method of Tests for
The painting of lane markers and traffic strips shall include the Paints and Varnishes.
cleaning of the pavement surfaces, the application, protection and drying
of the paint coatings, the protection of pedestrians, vehicular or other
traffic, the protection of all parts of the road structure and its 606.2.6 Packing, Packaging and Marking
appurtenances against disfigurement by spatters, splashes or smirches of
paints or of paint materials, and the supplying of all tools, labor and traffic The paints shall be packed, packaged and marked in accordance
paint necessary for the entire work. with PNS 140.

The paint shall not be applied during rain or wet weather or when
the air is misty, or when in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions are
215
 ITEM 607 – REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT STUDS
606.3 Method of Measurement
607.1 Description
The quantity of pavement markings to be paid for shall either be
the length as shown on the Plans of painted traffic line of the stated width This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing reflective
or the area as shown on the plans of symbols, lettering, hatchings, and pavement studs on the surface of the pavement in accordance with this
the like, completed and accepted. Separate items shall be provided for Specification and at the locations shown on the Plans, or as required by
premixed reflectorized traffic paint and reflectorized thermoplastic the Engineer.
pavement markings.

607.2 Material Requirements

606.4 Basis of Payment
607.2.1 Reflective Studs
The quantities measured as determined in Section 606.4, Method
of Measurement, shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit price for
Reflective studs shall be either the “Flush Surface” or “Raised
the Pay Items shown in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall
Profile” type having the following characteristics.
constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials,
sampling and packing, for the preparation of the surface, and for all labor, The “Flush Surface” reflector shall be the short base type having
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. a maximum base area of 180 mm x 140 mm. The base shall be formed in
cast-iron with adequate webbing to insure a firm key to the road when
installed. The pad shall be highly resilient and durable rubber reinforced
Payment will be made under: with canvass and shall have a design life of at least 5 years. The pad
shall be so designed as to produce a self-wiping action of the reflectors
when depressed. The reflectors shall be made of impact and abrasion-
resisting glass and shall be hermetically sealed into a copper socket.
Pay Item No. Description Unit of
Measurement The “Raised Profile” reflectors shall consist of an acrylic plastic
shell filled with an adherent epoxy compound molded from methyl
methacyclate into the shape of a shallow frustrum of a pyramid with base
606 (1) Pavement markings dimensions approximately 100 mm x 100 mm and thickness of not more
than 20 mm. The shell shall contain two prismatic reflectors each inclined
(Premixed Reflectorized) Square Meter at an angle of 30o to the horizontal and having an area not less than 20
cm2. The reflectors shall attain the following standards for their
photometric and physical properties:
606 (2) Pavement markings
(Reflectorized Square Meter
Thermoplastic) a) The reflectors shall have the minimum specific intensity
values expressed as candle power per foot-candle of

216
 illumination at the reflector on a plane perpendicular to
the incident light shown in Table 607.1.
607.2.3 Cement Mortar

Table 607.1 – Raised Profile Pavement Studs:

Cement mortar shall consist of 1 part of Portland Cement to 2
Photometric Properties
parts of fine aggregate with water added as necessary to obtain the
required consistency.
Specific Intensity Values
Color Crystal Yellow Red
o o
Divergence 0.2 0.2 2o 607.3 Construction Requirements
Angle
Incidence Angle 607.3.1 Flush Surface Type
0o 3.00 1.80 0.75
o The stud shall be installed into the pavement in accordance with
20 1.20 0.72 0.30
the manufacturer’s instructions but shall also comply with the following
requirements.
Each reflector for testing shall be located with the center of the
reflecting face at a diameter of 1.5 m from a uniformly bright light source
having an effective diameter of 5 mm. The width of the photocell shall be Cavities in the pavement shall be clearly cut to the dimensions of
1.2 mm and shall be shielded from stray light. The distance from the the pavement stud and shall allow a clearance of 10 mm around the stud
centers of the light source and photocell shall be 5 mm. Failure of more base. The longitudinal centerline axis of the cavity shall be the same as
than 4% of the reflective faces shall be a cause for rejection of the that required for the pavement stud when laid to the correct line and
complete batch. direction.

The reflectors shall support a vertical load or kgf(10kN) when The walls of the cavity shall be splayed back at the angle of
tested in the following manner. A reflector shall be centered horizontally approximately 30o to the vertical to facilitate a “dove-tail” joint after the
over the open end of a vertically positioned hollow metal cylinders, 75 mm mortar has set.
internal diameter, 25 mm high and wall thickness of 6 mm. The load shall
be applied to the top of the reflector through a 6 mm diameter by a 6 mm
high metal plug centered on top of the reflector. Failure shall constitute The bottom of the cavity shall be levelled with asphalt concrete
either breakage or significant deformation of the marker at any load less prior to placing the stud base which shall be pounded into position with a
than 1000 kgf. pounder foot attached to the pneumatic drill.

607.2.2 Adhesive The depth of the activity shall be such that when the stud base
and reflectors have been installed the elevation of the floor of the lens
socket shall not be greater than 2.0 mm or less than 1.0 mm above the
When “Raised Profile” type reflectors are specified, an approved pavement surface.
two-part epoxy adhesive shall be used.
217
 When the studs are installed into a cement concrete pavement,
the stud shall be grouted into position with asphalt concrete containing
fine aggregate only or with a cement mortar as described in Subsection 607 (1) Reflectorized Pavement Each
607.2.3 above. Stud
(Flush Type)

607.3.2 Raised Profile Type 607 (2) Each

Reflectorized Pavement
Studs
The pavement studs shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. (Raised Profile Type)

607.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity of reflectorized pavement studs to be paid for shall ITEM 608 – TOPSOIL
be the number of reflectorized pavement studs of either the flush surface
type or the raised profile type, whichever is called for in the Contract,
installed complete and accepted. 608.1 Description

This Item shall consist of topsoil furnished, transported and

spread, or topsoil removed from designated areas, hauled and spread, in
607.5 Basis of Payment accordance with this Specification at the location shown on the Plans or
as required by the Engineer.
The quantities measured as described in Subsection 607.4,
Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price of the
Pay Items shown in the Bid Schedule, which payment shall constitute full 608.2 Material Requirements
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, excavating cavities,
preparation of surfaces, applying adhesive and mortar and for all labor, Topsoil furnished shall consist of fertile friable soil of loamy
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. character without admixture of undesirable subsoil, refuse or foreign
materials. It shall be obtained from well-drained arable land and shall be
reasonably free from roots, hard clay, coarse gravel, stones larger than
Payment will be made under: 50 mm in size, coarse sand, noxious seeds, sticks, brush, litter and other
deleterious substances. Topsoil shall be capable of sustaining healthy
plant life and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement

218
 Topsoil shall contain not less than five (5) percent organic matter The quantities, as determined in Subsection 608.4, Method of
as determined by loss or ignition of samples oven-dried to constant Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price respectively, for
weight. each of the particular Pay Items listed below that is shown on the Bid
Schedule, which price and payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools and
608.3 Construction Requirements incidentals necessary to complete the Item.

608.3.1 Sources of Material

Payment will be made under:

Topsoil shall be obtained as specified in Item 102, Excavation, or

from other approved sources. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer
at least five days before he intends to start topsoil stripping operations. Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement
After inspection and approval by the Engineer and prior to stripping any Number
topsoil, the Contractor shall remove noxious weeds and tall grass, brush
roots and stones larger than 50 mm in diameter.
608(1) Furnishing and Placing Cubic Meter
Topsoil
608.3.2 Placing

608(2) Placing Topsoil Cubic Meter

The topsoil shall be evenly spread on the areas and to the line
and level shown on the Plans and compacted with a light roller to a
depth of not less than 100 mm. Spreading shall not be done when the
ground topsoil is excessively wet, or otherwise in a condition detrimental
to such work. The roadway surfaces shall be kept clean during hauling
and spreading operations. ITEM 609 - SPRIGGING
609.1 Description
After spreading has been completed, large clods, stones, roots,
stumps and other loose-lying materials shall be raked up and removed. This Item shall consist of planting sprigs of living grass plants in
Any erosion, irregularities of grade or other incidental damage to the accordance with this Specification at locations shown on the Plans or as
surface of the topsoil shall be repaired and/or restored to the Engineer’s required by the Engineer.
satisfaction.
608.4 Method of Measurement
609.2 Material Requirements
The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters
of Topsoil removed, furnished and hauled complete in place and 609.2.1 Sprigs
accepted.
608.5 Basis of Payment Sprigs shall be healthy living stems (stolons or rhizomes) with
attached roots or perennial turf-forming grasses of the kinds shown on the
Plans, harvested without adhering soil and obtained from approved
219
sources in the locality of the work where the sod is heavy and thickly Mulch material shall be hay, straw or other local non-toxic
matted. The presence of objectionable grasses, weeds or other material.
detrimental material will be a cause for rejection.

609.3 Construction Requirements

609.2.2 Fertilizers

609.3.1 Harvesting Sprigs

Fertilizers shall be standard commercial fertilizers supplied
separately or in mixture containing the percentages of total nitrogen,
available phosphoric acid and water-soluble potash. They shall be
furnished in standard containers with name, weight and guaranteed The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 5 days before
sprigs are to be harvested and the source shall be approved by the
analysis of contents clearly marked. The fertilizers may be supplied in the
following form: Engineer before harvesting begins.

1. A dry, free-flowing fertilizer soluble in water, suitable for To begin harvesting, grass and woods shall be mowed to a height
application by a common fertilizer spreader. of 50 to 75 mm and all clippings removed. Sprigs shall then be loosened
by cross-disking, shallow plowing or other acceptable methods. After
2. A finely ground fertilizer, soluble in water suitable for
application by power sprayer. loosening the sprigs from the soil, they shall be gathered in small piles or
3. A granular or pellet form suitable for application by blower windrows, watered and kept moist until planted.
equipment.
Not more than 24 hours shall elapse between harvesting and
609.2.3 Ground Limestone planting sprigs, except that when weather or other uncontrollable
condition interrupts the work, a time extension may be granted, provided
Ground limestone shall contain not less than 85 percent of the sprigs are still moist and viable. Sprigs that have heated in stockpiles,
calcium and magnesium carbonates and shall be of such fineness that permitted to dry out or otherwise seriously damaged during harvesting or
delivery shall be rejected and be disposed off as directed.
100 percent shall pass through a 2.00 mm sieve and not less than 35
percent through a 0.150 mm sieve. Granulated slag may be substituted
in lieu of ground limestone subject to the approval of the Engineer of an
adjusted application rate that will provide the equivalent total neutralizing 609.3.2 Advance Preparation and Cleanup
power of the specified limestone.
After grading of areas has been completed and before applying
609.2.4 Topsoil fertilizer and ground limestone, areas to be sprigged shall be raked or
otherwise cleared of stone larger than 50 mm in diameter, sticks, stumps
and other debris which might interfere with sprigging, growth of grasses or
Topsoil shall perform to the requirements of Item 608, Topsoil. subsequent maintenance of grass-covered areas. If any damage by
erosion or other causes has occurred after grading of areas and before
beginning the application of fertilizer and ground limestone, the Contractor
609.2.5 Mulch Material shall repair such damage. This may include filling gullies, smoothing
irregularities and repairing other incidental damage.

220
609.3.3 Topsoiling
2. Row Sprigging – Furrows shall be opened along the
approximate contour of slopes at the spacing and depth
If topsoiling is shown on the Plans, it shall be done in accordance
indicated on the Plans. Sprigs shall be placed without
with the requirements of Item 608, Topsoil.
delay in continuous row in the open furrow with successive
sprigs touching and shall be covered immediately.
609.3.4 Applying Fertilizer and Ground Limestone
3. Spot Sprigging – Spot sprigging shall be performed as
specified under row sprigging, except that, instead of
Following advance preparation and cleanup, fertilizer shall be planting in continuous rows, groups of four sprigs or more
uniformly spread at the rate indicated on the Plans. If use of ground shall be spaced 450 mm apart in the rows.
limestone is required, it shall be spread at the rate shown on the Plans.
These materials shall be incorporated into the soil to a depth of not less
609.3.6 Mulching and Compacting
than 50 mm by disking, raking or other methods acceptable to the
Engineer. Stones larger than 50 mm in diameter, large clods, roots and
other litter brought to the surface by this operation shall be removed.
After planting or sprigs has been completed and prior to
compacting, the surface shall be cleared of stones larger than 50 mm in
diameter, large clods, roots and other litter brought to the surface during
On steep slopes where fertilizer and ground limestone cannot be sprigging.
incorporated effectively by mechanical equipment, they may be applied
with power sprayers, blower equipment or other approved method and
need not be incorporated into the soil.
If mulching of sprigged areas is shown on the Plans, the sprigged
area shall be covered with mulch in accordance with the requirements of
Subsection 609.2.5, Mulch Material, within 24 hours from the time
609.3.5 Planting Sprigs sprigging has been completed, weather and soil conditions permitting.

Sprigging shall not be done during windy weather or when the

ground is dry, excessively wet or otherwise untillable. Sprigs shall be If mulching is not shown on the Plans, the sprigged area shall be
planted in existing ground or in formed embankments or on topsoil as compacted within 24 hours from the time sprigging has been completed,
shown on the Plans. If the soil is not moist when the sprigs are being set, weather and soil conditions permitting, by cultipackers, rollers or other
water shall be applied until the soil is moist and in a workable condition. satisfactory equipment operated at right angles to the slopes.
One or more of the following methods shall be used, whichever is directed Compaction shall not be done when the soil is in such condition that it is
by the Engineer: picked up by the equipment, nor shall clay soils be compacted if so
directed by the Engineer.

1. Broadcast Sprigging – Sprigs shall be broadcast by hand

or by suitable equipment in a uniform layer over the 609.3.7 Maintenance of Sprigged Areas
prepared surface with spacing between sprigs not to
exceed 150 mm. The sprigs shall then be forced into the
soil to a depth of 50 mm to 100 mm with a straight spade The Contractor shall protect sprigged areas against traffic by
or similar tool, or with a disk harrow or other equipment set warning signs or barricades approved by the Engineer. Surfaces gullied
to cover the sprigs to the required depth. or otherwise damaged following sprigging shall be repaired by regrading
221
and resprigging as directed. The Contractor shall mow, water as directed
and otherwise maintain sprigged areas in a satisfactory condition until
610.1 Description
final inspection and acceptance of the work.

This Item shall consist of furnishing and laying of live sod on the
shoulders, slopes, ditches, or other locations as designated, construction
of sod ditch checks or similar appurtenances, as shown on the Plans or
as ordered and laid out in the field by the Engineer, all in accordance with
609.4 Method of Measurement this Specification.
610.2 Material Requirements
The quantity of sprigging to be paid for shall be the number of
units of 100 square meters, measured on the ground surface, completed The sod shall consist of healthy, dense, well-rooted growth of
and accepted. permanent and desirable grasses indigenous to the general locality where
it is to be used and shall be free from weeds or undesirable grasses. At
the time the sod is cut, the grass on the sod shall have a length of
approximately 50 mm (if longer, the grass shall be cut to approximately
this length) and the sod shall have been raked free from debris.
609.5 Basis of Payment

The sod shall be cut into uniform squares approximately 300 mm

The quantity, determined as provided in Subsection 609.4, x 300 mm, but not larger than is convenient for handling and transporting.
Method of Measurement, shall be paid for the Pay Item listed below,
which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials, for any required mulching of sprigged areas and for The thickness of the sod shall be uniform as possible
all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work
approximately 40 mm or more depending on the nature of the sod, so that
prescribed in this Section except topsoiling which shall be paid for as practically all of the dense root system of the grasses will be retained, but
provided in Item 608, Topsoil. exposed, in the sod strip and that the sod can be handled without undue
tearing or breaking.
Pay Item will be made under:
In the event the sod to be cut is in a dry condition as to cause
scrumbling or breaking during cutting operations, the Contractor, at his
Pay item No. Description Unit of Measurement own expense, shall apply water in sufficient quantities at least 12 hours
before cutting to provide a well-moistened condition of the sod to the
depth to which it is to be cut. Sods shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
609 Sprigging 100 Square Meter

610.3 Construction Requirements

ITEM 610 – SODDING
610.3.1 Preparation of the Earth Bed
222
 On all slopes steeper than one vertical to four horizontal, sod
shall be pegged with stakes 200-300 mm in length, spaced as required by
The area to be sodded shall be constructed to the required
the nature of the soil and steepness of slope. Stakes shall be driven into
cross-section and contour, and the tops and bottoms of the slopes shall
the sod at right angles to the slope until flush with the bottom of the grass
be rounded as shown in the typical roadway sections.
blades.
610.3.4 Top Dressing
The areas to be sodded shall be free from stones, roots or other
undesirable foreign materials.
After staking has been completed, the surface shall be cleared of
loose sod, excess soil or other foreign material, whereupon a thin layer of
topsoil shall be scattered over the sod as a top dressing and the areas
The soil on the area to be sodded shall be loosened and brought
shall then be thoroughly moistened by sprinkling with water.
to a reasonably fine texture to a depth of not less than 30 mm by means
of equipment on hand methods adapted for the purpose.
610.3.5 Watering
610.3.2 Placing the Sod
The Contractor shall regularly water and maintain sodded areas
in a satisfactory condition for the duration of the Contract and until final
The earth bed upon which the sod is to be placed shall be acceptance of the work by the Engineer.
moistened to the loosened depth, if not naturally sufficiently moist, and
the sod shall be placed thereon within 24 hours after the same has been
cut.
610.4 Method of Measurement
Unless otherwise required, the sod on slopes shall be laid on
horizontal strips beginning at the bottom of the slope and working
Sodding shall be measured by the square meter and the quantity
upwards. When placing sod in ditches, or in the construction of sod ditch
to be measured for payment shall be the actual number of square meters
checks or similar appurtenances, the length of the strips shall be laid at
of area on which sod has been placed in accordance with this
right angles to the direction of the flow of the water.
Specification and within the limits of construction as designated on the
Sod shall be laid so that the joints caused by abutting ends of Plans or as ordered by the Engineer.
sod strip are not continuous. Each sod strip shall be so laid as to abut
snugly against the strip previously laid.
610.5 Basis of Payment
As the sod is being laid it shall be lightly tamped with suitable
wooden or metal tampers sufficiently to set or press the sod into the
underlying soil. The quantity as determined in Subsection 610.4, Method of
Measurement, shall be paid for at Contract unit price per square meter for
At points where it is anticipated that water may flow over a
Sodding which price and payment shall be full compensation for preparing
sodded area, the upper edges of the sod strips shall be turned into the
the earth bed, for furnishing, placing, staking, top dressing and watering
soil to be below the adjacent area and a layer of earth place over this
the sod, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
juncture and thoroughly compacted. At the limits of sodded areas, the
complete the Item.
end strips shall be turned in and treated similarly.
610.3.3 Staking the Sod
Payment will be made under:

223
 Bracing stakes for plants shall be 50 mm x 50 mm of rough wood
free from unsound loose knots, rot, cross grain and sapwood or other
Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement defects that may impair its strength.

Anchor stakes shall be of the same quality as bracing stakes and

610 Sodding Square Meter of the size specified under operations calling for their use.

Wrapping material for trees shall be waterproof paper or burlap.

The tying material to be used in wrapping trees shall be jute twine

or similar material not less than 2-ply for trees 7.5 mm or less in diameter
ITEM 611 – TREE PLANTING and 3-ply for trees over 7.5 mm in diameter.
The wire to be used in bracing trees 7.5 mm or less in diameter
611.1 Description shall be 3 mm (No. 11) galvanized steel wire and for trees over 75 mm in
diameter, 40 mm (No. 9) galvanized steel wire shall be used. All wires
shall be new and free from bends or kinks.
This Item shall consist of furnishing and planting deciduous
shade, flowering trees and evergreen trees less than 150 mm in diameter
on the areas and in the arrangements indicated on the Plans or as 611.2.3 Trees
indicated by the Engineer, including the digging and preparation of pocket
holes, furnishing and placing the necessary topsoil, mulch, water, fertilizer
and other incidentals necessary to complete the Item. All trees furnished under this Item shall be 150 mm or less in
diameter and shall be true to name and type and shall follow standard
names of trees in accordance with the Bureau of Forestry Standards as
611.2 Material Requirements adopted by the Department of Public Works and Highways.
When specified in the Provisions, certain varieties of plants will be
611.2.1 Topsoil furnished by the government.

Topsoil shall conform to the requirements of Item 608, Topsoil. The Contractor shall submit complete and detailed information
concerning the sources of supply for each item of plant materials before
planting operations.
611.2.2 Mulching

All existing laws and regulations requiring inspection for plant

Mulching material shall consist of approved wood chips, ground diseases and infections shall be complied with and each delivery shall be
or crushed corn cobs, wood shavings, sawdust or peat moss. Wood accompanied by necessary certificates of clearance to be presented to
chips shall be combination of wood slivers with ground wood or sawdust. the Engineer.

224
 Plants furnished by the Contractor shall be healthy, shapely and be permitted to dry out. They shall not be exposed to hot temperatures.
well-rooted and roots shall show no evidence of having been restricted or All plants shall be dug in dormant state and shall be so held until planted.
deformed at any time. Plants shall be well-grown and free from insect
pest and disease.
611.3.3 Temporary Storage and Plant Spray

Root condition of plants furnished by the Contractor in containers

will be determined by the removal of earth from the roots of not less than After delivery and inspection, the plants shall be sprayed with an
two plants nor more than two (2) percent of total number of plants of each approved anti-desiccant prior to planting, heeling-in or storing, except in
specie or variety except when container-grown plants are from several the case of collected stock which shall not be heeled-in or stored, but
sources, the roots of not less than two plants of each specie or variety shall be sprayed with anti-desiccant immediately and planted within 36
from each source will be inspected by the Engineer. In case the sample hours after digging.
plants inspected are found to be defective, the Government reserves the
right to reject the entire lot or lots of plants represented by the defective
samples. Any plant rendered unsuitable for planting because of this The spray shall cover both upper and lower surfaces of the
inspection will be considered as samples and will not be paid for. branches and foilage to the point of run-off. Spray nozzles shall be the
type to produce a fine mist.

611.3 Construction Methods

Spraying shall be included for payment in the pertinent planting
item. Following spray treatment with anti-desiccant, all plants which
611.3.1 Balling of Plants and Trees cannot be planted promptly shall be heeled-in in a trench, spread and the
roots covered with moist soil. If plants are not to be stored for a period
longer than 10 days, they may be placed in an approved well-ventilated,
Balling is employed in plants and trees to be transplanted or cool and moist storage shed and the roots completely covered with moist
transferred. To ball out the trees, the depth to which the root system straw. All plants heeled-in or stored shall be properly maintained by the
reaches is first determined. Digging around the tree is then done, being Contractor until planted. In the event heeled-in plant material must be
careful not to cut many roots. Watering the soil before balling is held over for a longer period, such heeled-in material shall be lifted and
prohibited. The surface of the earth is kept as smooth as possible. After replanted in a satisfactory manner in nursery rows.
the tree is dug out, the roots and earth is wrapped immediately with the
sacking material. The tree could now be tipped over and rolled to a new
location. These plants shall be hauled by the ball only and not by the The ball of soil and roots of balled and burlapped plants, if not
plant itself. The slightest indication of manufactured earth balls or immediately planted after delivery and inspection, shall be adequately
hauling of the plants itself will be a cause for rejection of such plants. protected by topsoil covering until removed for planting in a manner
appropriate to the conditions and satisfactory to the Engineer.

611.3.2 Digging Plants

Such emergency storage of plant shall be at the entire risk of the
Contractor, including maintenance of same.
All plants, nursery-grown or collected, shall be dug with care and
skill immediately before shipping and avoiding all possible injury to the
plants, loss or damage of the roots, particular attention being given to 611.3.4 Layout of Planting
fibrous roots in this respect. After the plants are dug, their roots shall not

225
 Before digging pocket holes or beds, the Contractor shall lay out, any time when the soil is not in a friable or workable condition. The
by suitable staking, the location of all pocket holes and beds. The layout Engineer shall also approve the location of each individual plant taking
of planting shall be approved by the Engineer. into consideration its size and shape, in order that the best possible
arrangement will result.

611.3.5 Roots and Top Pruning

One plant shall be planted in the center of each pocket hole and
in the arrangement shown on the Plans. The plants shall be set on
The ends of all broken and damaged roots, 6 mm diameter or tamped topsoil backfill brought to the height necessary to plant them at
larger, shall be pruned with a clean cut removing no more than the injured the same depth they grew, carefully spreading out the roots of barefoot
portion. All plants shall be pruned to balance the top with the root system stock in their natural position. Upright plants shall be kept in a vertical
keeping the natural shape of the species. All dead woods shall be position. After placing the plant in the hole, the backfill shall be carefully
removed. All cuts and wounds, 12 mm or over in diameter, shall be made, tamping with the worker’s feet and with round-end rods or other
painted with tree wound dressing immediately after the pruning. approved tamping devices to insure topsoil in and about all the roots. The
topsoil shall be settled in and about the plant roots by application of water
but at no time shall tamping or further topsoil backfill be made while this
611.3.6 Pocket Holes wet topsoil backfill is of a consistency that would permit its being
compacted or puddled by so doing. All compaction shall be such that no
plant will settle lower than the depth above specified. No air pocket shall
Pocket holes shall be dug at the locations shown on the Plans or be left around the root of any plants.
as directed by Engineer. The holes shall be dug to the depth and cross-
section specified and should be of sufficient size to provide for not less
than 150 mm of top soil backfill beneath and around the root system. The After filling halfway on the earth ball, the burlap shall be loosened
holes shall be dug with the sides vertical. Surplus excavation from the and the top half cut off and removed after which the balance of the pocket
bed and pocket holes shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer. hole shall be backfilled and tamped.

611.3.7 Backfill After planting and prior to mulching, fertilizers shall be applied
evenly over the top of the backfilled area. Care shall be used so that the
fertilizer does not get into contact with the stem, trunk, branches or leaves
The pocket holes shall be backfilled with topsoil as each plant is of the plants.
set. The topsoil shall be well-tamped by the worker’s feet, rods or other
approved tamping devices as it is shovelled into the holes. The backfill in
holes on slopes shall be built-up on the lower side to catch and hold 611.3.8.1 Tree Planting along National Road
water. During planting the topsoil surrounding the plant be slightly
depressed to hold water. The trees to be used for this purpose shall be the varieties the
root systems of which grow downward rather than sideward to avoid
situations where the roots spread sideward and consequently destroy the
611.3.8 Planting road and sidewalk slabs.

The plants to be planted shall be the specie, variety and size Trees shall be planted in a neat row, within the road right-of-way
specified. The operation of the actual planting shall not be performed at (ROW) and as close as possible to the ROW limit, with sufficient

226
allowance so that the trees when fully grown will not encroach on the District Engineering Office concerned. The tree planting shall be
adjoining property or touch electric and other overhead utility lines. The undertaken in both contractual projects and projects by administration.
center-to-center spacing between trees shall be 10-20 metres (m). For
road sections with a generally north-south alignment, the trees on one
side of the road shall be staggered vis-à-vis the trees on the other side of 611.3.9 Mulching
the road. This arrangement will help to ensure that enough sunlight will
fall on the road and thus help to keep the road dry even during the rainy
Within 24 hours after planting, mulching material shall be spread
season.
to cover the plant hole and the area 150 mm outside the periphery of the
plant hole. The depth and application for wood chips shall be a minimum
of 150 mm. For ground or crushed corn cobs, sawdust or peat moss the
For roads without curbs, the trees shall be planted with a
minimum depth shall be 100 mm.
minimum clear distance of 0.60 m beyond the edge of the shoulder, but in
no case less than 3.0 m from the edge of the pavement. For roads with
curbs, particularly in urban areas, the trees shall be planted with a
minimum setback of 1.00 m beyond the face of the curb. 611.3.10 Watering and Maintenance

All plants shall be watered during the planting operations, subject

Where there are longitudinal drainage canals, the trees shall be to direction and approval of the Engineer. From time to time during the
planted on the outer side of such canals. On the roadway curves and life of the Contract, sufficient water shall be applied so that not only will
intersections, the pertinent design standards on sight distance shall be the topsoil backfill about each plant be kept moist, but also for moisture to
observed. extend into the surrounding soil.

Non-traversable hazards (ravine, waiting shed, etc.) along the The Contractor shall, during the life of the Contract, properly care
line of trees shall be provided with appropriate barriers, e.g., guardrails, for all plants furnished, planted or stored, performing such watering,
and clearly marked, so that these do not pose hazards to motorists. weeding, cultivating or other ordinary maintenance work as shall be
necessary to keep the stock in a live and healthy condition. Plants which
have died back into the crown or beyond a normal pruning line shall be
The Contractor concerned shall undertake and be responsible for replaced by the Contract at no additional expense to the Government.
the maintenance of the planted trees during the contract warranty period
of the road project covered by his contract. The contractor’s maintenance
work shall comply with the provision of subsection 611.3.10 (Watching 611.3.11 Bracing
and Maintenance). The maintenance of trees shall be faithfully
undertaken as an integral part of the regular road maintenance program
All deciduous and evergreen trees shall be braced immediately
and shall be included in the reports therefore as a regular work item under
Activity No. 209 of the Highway Maintenance Activity Standards. after planting. Deciduous trees from 1.20 m to 1.80 m in height shall have
one vertical support stake. Deciduous trees from 1.80 m to 2.50 m in
height shall have two vertical support stakes.
The tree planting shall be undertaken not only along national
roads programmed for construction or improvement, but also along
Balled and burlapped deciduous or evergreen trees within the
existing national roads especially those outside developed urban areas
where there are no trees or only a few trees have been planted. For such above size ranges shall be supported with the number of stakes specified
existing roads, the required tree planting shall be undertaken by the for the group but instead of being placed vertically, shall be driven so that
the stake does not enter or contact the earth ball around the plant roots.
227
The stake or stakes shall be so placed that after being driven in place, the
upper foot of the stake is within approximately 100 mm of the trunk at
one-half of the height of the tree. If two are required, they shall be driven Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement
on opposite sides of the tree with the stake tops on opposite sides for
fastening.

611 (1) Trees (Furnishing and

All trees, deciduous or evergreen over two and one-half meters
shall be braced by the tripod method as directed by the Engineer. Transpplanting) Each

611.3.12 Dead Trees 611 (2) Trees (Transplanting) Each

Before completion and final acceptance of the project, all trees

not healthy or that have died back into the crown or beyond the normal
pruning line shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense with
trees of the specified species or variety, size and quality and meeting the ITEM 612 – REFLECTIVE THERMOPLASTIC STRIPPING MATERIALS
Specification. ( SOLID FORM)

611.4 Method of Measurement 612.1 Description

The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of trees of each This standard specifies the requirement for reflectorized
specie or variety called for in the Plans furnished, planted and accepted thermoplastic pavement striping material conforming to AASHTO M 249
with the necessary mulch, topsoil, water, fertilizer and other incidentals to that is applied to the road surface in a molten state by mechanical means
complete the Item. with surface application of glass beads at a rate of not less than 350 g/L
of glass beads having a size range of drop-in type and will produce an
adherent reflectorized stripe of specified thickness and width capable of
611.5 Basis of Payment resisting deformation by traffic.

The quantities as determined in Subsection 611.4, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price each of the trees 612.2 Materials Requirements
of each specie or variety furnished, planted and accepted which price and
payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labor, tools
and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. 1. Reflectorized Thermoplastic Pavement Material shall be
homogeneously composed of pigment, filler, resins and glass
reflectorizing spheres.
Payment will be made under:
The thermoplastic material shall be available to both white and
yellow.

228
 2. Glass Beads (Pre-Mix) shall be uncoated and shall comply with Glass Beads:
the following requirements:
min. 30 30
max. 40 40
Refractive Index, min. - 1.50
Titanium
Spheres, Percent, min. - 90
Dioxide, min. 10.0
Chrome Yellow,
Gradation:
Medium, min. 10.0
Sieve Mass Percent Passing
Calcium Carbonate
mm
And Inert Fillers,
0.850 100
Max. 42.0 42.0
0.600 75-95
0.425 -
612.3.2 Qualitative
0.300 15-35
0.180 - The material shall conform to the qualitative requirements as
0.150 0-5 specified in Table 612.2.

Table 612.2 – Qualitative Requirements

612.3 General Requirements

Property Requirements
612.3.1 Composition White
Yellow

The pigment, beads and filler shall be uniformly dispersed in the Specific Gravity, max. 2.15
resin. The material shall be free from all skins, dirt and foreign objects Drying Time, minutes, 10.0
and shall comply with the requirements as specified in Table 612.1. max.
Bond Strength to Portland
Cement Concrete after
Table 612.1 – Composition Requirements heating for four (4) hours
1.24
±5 min. @ 218oC, MPa,
Component White Yellow max.
Cracking Resistance @
Binder, min. 18.0 18.0
low

229
 temp. after heating for No cracks
four (4) hours ±5 min. @ Passing 850 um (#20) sieve and
218
retained on 250 um (#60) sieve, %
±2oC. 80 – 100
Impact Resistance after
heating for four (4) hours a) Preparation of Road Surface – the materials should be applied
115 only on the surface which is clean and dry. It shall not be laid into loose
o
±5 min. @ 218 ±2 C and
102.5 ± 9.5oC detritus, mud or similar extraneous matter, or over an old paint markings,
forming test specimens, or over an old thermoplastic marking which is faulty. In the case of
smooth, polished surface stones such as smooth concrete, old asphalt
mm/kg, min. surfacing with smooth polished surface stones and/or where the method
Softening Point after of application of the manufacturer of the thermoplastic materials shall be
75 recommended, and with the approval of the Engineer.
heating
45
for four (4) hours ±5 min.
@ 218 ±2oC. b) Preparation of Thermoplastic Materials – The materials shall
be melted in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction in a heater
Daylight reflectant @ 45 fitted with a mechanical stirrer to give a smooth consistency to the
Degrees – 0 degrees, % thermoplastic and such the local overheating shall be avoided. The
min. temperature of the mass shall be within the range specified by the
manufacturer and shall on no account be allowed to exceed the maximum
temperature stated by the manufacturer. The molten material shall be
used as expeditiously as possible and for thermoplastics which have
natural resin binders or otherwise sensitive to prolong heating the
612.4 Application Properties materials shall not be maintained in a molden condition for more than 4
hours.

The material shall readily extrude at a temperature of 211 ± 7oC,

from approved equipment to produce a line 3.2 to 4.8 mm thick which c) Laying – Center lines, lane lines and edges lines shall be
shall be continuous and uniform in shape having clear and sharp applied by approved mechanical means and shall be laid in regular
dimensions. alignment. Other markings may be applied by hand – screed, hand
propelled machine or by self-propelled machine approved or directed by
the Engineer. After transfer to the laying apparatus the materials shall be
The material shall not exude fumes which are toxic, obnoxious or maintained within the temperature range specified by the manufacturer
injurious to persons or property when heated during applications. and stirred to maintain the right consistency for laying.

The application of additional glass beads by drop-in methods In the case of screen application, the material shall be laid to a
shall be at a rate of not less than 350 g/L of glass beads having a size thickness of not less than 3 mm or more than 6 mm unless authorized by
range for drop-in type. The typical size range of spheres of drop-in type the Engineer when laid over an existing markings. In the case of sprayed
paints is as follows. application the material shall be laid to thickness of not less than 1.5 mm
unless authorized by the Engineer. In all cases the surface produced
230
shall be uniform and appreciably free from bubbles and steaks. Where
the Contractor Documents require or the Engineer direct that ballotini
612.5 Sampling
shall be applied to the surface of the markings, these shall be applied
uniformly to the surface of hot thermoplastic immediately after laying such
that the quality of ballotini firmly embedded and retained in the surface
after completion complies with the requirements of Sub-section 606.2.2, A minimum weight of 10 kg. of Reflectorized Thermoplastic paint
Material Requirements. shall be taken for every 100 bags or fraction thereof.

Road markings of a repetitive nature, other center lines, lane 612.6 Testing
lines, etc., shall unless otherwise directed by the Engineer be set out with
stencils which comply with the size and spacing requirements shown on
the Plans. The material shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO T 250
or with the appropriate method in ASTM designation.

d) Re-use of Thermoplastic Materials – At the end of day’s as

much as possible the material remaining in the heater and/or laying
apparatus shall be removed. This may be broken and used again
provided that the maximum heating temperature has not been exceeded
and that the total time during which it is a molden condition does not 612.7 Packing and Marking
exceed the requirements of Sub-section 606.2.3, Construction
Requirements.
The material shall be packaged in a suitable containers to which it
will not adhere during shipment and storage. The blocks of cast
612.4.1 Defective Materials or Workmanship thermoplastic material shall be approximately 300 x 915 by 51 mm and
shall weigh approximately 23 kg. Each container label shall designate
the color, manufacturer’s name, batch number and date of manufacture.
Materials which are defective or have been applied in an Each batch manufactured shall have its own separate number. The label
unsatisfactory manner or to incorrect dimensions or in a wrong location shall warn the user that the material shall be heated to 211 ± 7oC during
shall be removed, the road pavement shall be made good and materials application.
replaced, reconstructed and/or properly located, all at the Contractor’s
expenses and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

612.8 Method of Measurement

612.4.2 Protection of the Traffic

The quantity of pavement markings to be paid for shall be the

The Contractor shall protect pedestrians, vehicles and other area as shown on the Plans of painted traffic line of the stated width and
traffic adjacent to the working area against damage or disfigurement by the area as shown on the plans of symbols, lettering, hatching and the
construction equipment, tools and materials or by spatters, splashes and like, completed and accepted.
smirches or paint or other construction materials and during the course of
the work, provide and maintain adequate signs and signals for the
warning and guidance of traffic.

231
 The quantity shown in the Bill of Quantities represents the
approximate quantity in square meter of pavement markings, with width
as shown applied at the centerline of the road pavements to which may ITEM 700 – HYDRAULIC CEMENT
be increased or decreased depending on the Engineer’s decision whether
to require additional markings or delete parts of it. Other markings 700.1 Portland Cement and Masonry Cement
representing symbols, lettering, hatching and others in locations where
they maybe required by the Engineer shall, likewise, be implemented by Cement shall conform to the requirements of the following cited
the Contractor using reflectorized thermoplastic pavement markings as Specifications for the type specified or permitted.
approved and directed.
Type Specifications

Portland Cement AASHTO M 85 (ASTM C 150)

Blended Hydraulic Cements AASHTO M 240 (ASTM C 595)
612.9 Basis of Payment Masonry Cement AASHTO M 150-74 (ASTM C
91)
The quantities measured as determined in Subsection 612.8, When Types IV and V (AASHTO M 85), P and PA (AASHTO M
Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit 150) cements are used, proper recognition shall be given to the effects of
price for the Pay Items shown in the Bid Schedule which price and slower strength gain on concrete proportioning and construction practices.
payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all Types S and SA cements will be permitted only when blended with
materials, sampling and packing, for the preparation of the surface, and Portland Cement in proportions approved by the Engineer.
for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
Item. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the product of only
one mill of any one brand and type of Portland Cement shall be used on
the project.
Payment will be made under:
The Contractor shall provide suitable means of storing and
protecting the cement against dampness. Cement which, for any reason,
has become partially set or which contains lumps of caked cement will be
Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement rejected. Cement salvaged from discarded or used bags shall not be
Number used.

612(1) Reflectorized Thermoplastic Square Meter

Pavement Markings ITEM 701 – CONSTRUCTION LIME (HYDRATED)
(White)
612(2) Reflectorized Thermoplastic Square Meter
701.1 General
Pavement Markings
(Yellow) Hydrated lime shall conform to the requirements of PHILSA I-1-68
or ASTM C 207-76 and shall be of the following type :

PART I – MATERIALS DETAILS Type N - Normal hydrated lime for masonry purposes.
232
 Type S - Special hydrated lime for masonry purposes. Hydrated lime for construction purposes shall conform to the
Type NA - Normal air-entraining hydrated lime for following standard physical requirements:
masonry purposes.
Type SA - Special air-entraining hydrated lime for a. Percentage Residue
masonry purposes.
The residue retained on a 0.600 mm (No. 30) sieve shall not be more than
Type N and S are suitable for use in mortar, in scratch and brown 0.57% and not more than 15% on a 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve.
coats of cement plaster, for stucco and for addition to Portland Cement
concrete.
b. Plasticity
Type NA and SA are air-entrained hydrated limes that are
The putty made from Type S, special hydrate, or type SA, special air-
suitable for use in any of the above uses where air-entrainment are
entraining hydrate, shall have plasticity figure of not less than 200 when
desired.
tested within 30 minutes after mixing with water.
Type S and SA hydrated lime develop high, early plasticity and
higher water retentivity and by a limitation on their unhydrated oxide
content. c. Water Retention

It is the intent of this Specification to use either the Type N or S Hydrated lime mortar made with Type N (normal hydrated
for soil stabilization and as filler requirement to bituminous plant mixtures. lime) or Type NA (normal air-entraining lime), after suction for
It is expected to provide pavements with greater resistance to the 60 seconds, shall have a water retention value of not less
detrimental effects of water, especially flooding during the rainy season. than 75 percent and not less than 85% for Type S and SA,
when tested in a standard mortar made form the dry hydrate
or from putty made from the hydrate which has been soaked
701.2 Chemical Requirements for a period of 16 to 24 hours.

Hydrated lime for construction purposes shall conform to the

following standard chemical requirements. 701.4 Grading Requirement

Percentage Hydrated lime for construction purposes shall conform to the

following grading requirements:
Calcium and Magnesium oxides
(Non-volatile basis), min. % 60 Sieve Designation Mass Percent
Carbon dioxide (as received basis), max. % Passing
If sample is taken at the place of 5 Standard mm Alternate US Standard
manufacture 0.850 (No. 20) 100
If sample is taken at any other place 7 0.075 (No. 200) 85 – 100
Unhydrated oxides (as received basis) for
Type S and 8
SA, max. % 701.5 Sampling

Samples of construction lime shall be taken at the place of

701.3 Physical Requirements manufacture or at the destination as agreed upon by the parties
concerned. If the samples are taken elsewhere than at the place of

233
manufacture, such samples shall be taken within 24 hours of the receipt
of the material. 702.1 Asphalt Cements

Sampling shall be conducted as expeditiously as possible to Asphalt cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M
avoid undue exposure of the material to the air. Samples shall not be 226.
taken from broken packages.

At least one percent of the package shall be sampled but in no 702.2 Liquid Asphalts
case shall less than five packages be sampled. Individual packages
shall be taken from various parts of the unit being sampled. Each Liquid asphalt shall conform to the requirements of the following
package so taken shall be opened and not less than 0.5 kg shall be taken specifications:
by means of a sampling tube that takes a core of the material of not less
than 2.5 cm in diameter and that is of sufficient length to permit the taking Rapid Curing Liquid Asphalts - AASHTO M 81
of the sample from the top to the bottom of the mass being sampled. Medium Curing Liquid Asphalts - AASHTO M 82
The material removed shall be thoroughly mixed and quartered.
Triplicate samples of not less than 2.5 kg each shall be taken and sealed
in properly labelled, air-tight, moisture proof containers. 702.3 Emulsified Asphalts

701.5.1 Sample for Chemical Analysis Emulsified asphalts shall conform to the requirements of the
following specifications:
The sample as received at the laboratory shall be thoroughly
mixed, quartered, and a representative sample taken and crushed to pass Emulsified Asphalt (Anionic) - AASHTO M 140
a 0.150 mm (No. 100) sieve for analysis. The remaining uncrushed (ASTM D 977)
portion shall be resealed for further possible tests. Emulsified Asphalt (Cationic) - AASHTO M 208

701.6 Rejection 702.4 Acceptance Procedures for Bituminous Materials

Materials failing to meet the specification requirements shall be 702.4.1 General

reported to the manufacturer within one (1) week after tests have been
completed and the cause for rejection shall be stated. Bituminous materials will be accepted at the source of shipment
subject to the following conditions:
701.7 Packing
a. The supplier shall conduct laboratory tests of all materials
Lime and limestone products may be shipped in bulk or in intended for shipment to the Government and certify that the
containers agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser. The materials meet the Contract Specifications.
most common units for hydrated lime are paper bags holding 23 kg (50
lbs.), 11.5 kg (25 lbs.), 4.5 kg (10 lbs.) or 2.3 kg (5 lbs.). b. Before loading, the producer shall examine the shipping
container, remove all remnants of previous cargoes which
night contaminate the material to be loaded and certify that it
was clean and free of contaminating material and loaded.

ITEM 702 – BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

234
 c. The Contractor shall furnish with each shipment two copies of prescribed by the DPWH, to determine the reliability of the producer’s
the delivery ticket. The delivery tickets shall contain the certifications.
following information:
If this review indicates that the certifications are not reliable, the
Consignees Destination acceptance of bituminous materials by certification will be discontinued
________________ _________________ and the contents of each shipping container will be sampled at point of
Project Number Date delivery, tested and accepted prior to incorporation into the work. This
_____________ ______________________ procedure will be followed until the engineering determination is made
Grade Loading Temp. that the supplier’s quality control and testing procedures are such that
____________________ ______________ material meeting Contract Specifications is being consistently produced.
Net Liters Specific Gravity
__________________ ______________ 702.4.3 Alternate Acceptance Procedures for Asphalt Materials
At 15.50C (600F)
Net Weight Where required by the Special Provisions, the following alternate
_______________________________________________ acceptance plan for asphalt material will apply in lieu of (a) and (b) above.
Identification No. (Truck, Car, Tank, etc.) The Contractor shall provide deliver tickets and certifications as set out in
________________________ (a), above.
Acceptance samples of bituminous materials shall be obtained in
d. The Contractor or the supplier as his agent, shall deliver to accordance with AASHTO T 40, Sampling Bituminous Materials, at the
the Engineer or his representative a certification signed by applicable point of acceptance as defined herein:
an authorized representative of the supplier to cover the
quality and quantity of material and the condition of container a. Bituminous materials used in direct application on the road.
for each shipment. The certification shall be essentially in Acceptance samples shall be obtained under the supervision
the following form and may be stamped, written or printed on of the Engineer from the conveyances containing the
the delivery tickets. bituminous material at the point of delivery. Single samples
shall be taken of each separate tank load of bituminous
“This is to certify that this shipment of _______________ material delivered, at the time of discharge, into distributors or
(tonnes/litres) or ______________ of asphalt meets all Contract other conveyances on the project.
Specification requirements of the DPWH, and the shipping container was
clean and free from contaminating material when loaded. b. Bituminous materials initially discharged into storage tanks on
the project. Acceptance samples shall be obtained from the
Producer line between the storage tank and the distributor of the
________________________ bituminous mixing plant after each delivery. A single
Signed acceptance sample shall be taken after sufficient period of
__________________________ circulation of such bituminous material has taken place to
insure samples representative of the total materials then in
Failure to sign the certification will be a cause to withhold use of the storage tank.
the material until it can be sampled, tested and approved.
As soon after sampling as practicable, the acceptance
702.4.2 Quality Control Reviews sample shall be delivered by the Engineer to the nearest
authorized laboratory for tests to determine compliance.
Quality control reviews will be conducted by the Government, or
an authorized representative at the point of production, at frequencies 702.4.4 Requirements for Bituminous Materials containing Anti-
stripping Additives
235
 Table 702.1 shall apply unless temperatures ranges applicable to
a. All the foregoing requirements of Item 702 shall apply for the specific lots of material delivered to the job are supplied by the producer.
type of bituminous material involved.
702.6 Material for Dampproofing and Waterproofing Concrete and
b. Additionally, the Contractor or the supplier as his agent, shall Masonry Surfaces
furnish the Engineer or his representative along with and the
time of delivery of the initial shipment of fortified bituminous Material shall conform to the requirements of the following
material to the project, and thereafter with the subsequent specifications:
shipments when ordered by the Engineer, 1 litre (1 quart)
sealed sample of the bituminous material taken at the time of a. Primer for use with asphalt AASHTO M 116
loading at the refinery and prior to introduction of the
additive, along with a separate 0.5 litre (1 pint) sample of the b. Primer for use with tar AASHTO M 121
anti-stripping additive involved. (ASTM D 43)
Or

702.5 Application Temperatures It may be a liquid water-gas tar conforming to the following
requirements:
Bituminous materials for the several application indicated in the
Specifications shall be applied within the temperature ranges indicated in Specific gravity, 250/250C 1.030 – 1.100
Table 702.1. Specific viscosity at 400C
(Engler), not more than 3.0
Table 702.1 – Application Temperatures Total distillate, mass percent
3000, 50.0
Type and Grade Application Temperature Range not more than
Of Material Spray (0C) Mix Bitumen (soluble in carbon
(Min./Max.) (Min./Max.) disulphide), not less than 98.0 percent
RT 1-2-2 15.5 – 54 15.5 – 54 Water not more than 2.0 percent
RT 4-5-6 29 – 65.5 29 – 65.5
RT 7-8-9 65.5 – 107 65.5 – 107 c. Tar for mop or seal coats:
RT 10-11-12 79 – 121 79 – 121 Coal tar pitch (heated to free
RTCB 5-6 . . . . 30 15.5 – 48.9 15.5 – 48.9 flowing but not to exceed 1490C ASSHTO M 118,
MC . . . . . . . . . 30 21 – 62.8 15.5 – 40.5 (3000F) Type B (ASTM D
RC-MC . . . . . . 70 40.5 – 85 32 – 68 450)
RC-MC . . . . . . 250 60 – 107 51.7 – 93 Or
RC-MC . . . . . . 800 79 – 129 71 – 107
RC-MC . . . . . . 3000 106.7 – 143 93 – 126.7 Tar applied at about 270C (800F) AASHTO M 52,
All Emulsions 10 – 71 10 – 71 RTCB 5 or 6
Asphalt Cement As required to achieve
(All Grades) 204 Max. viscosity of 75 – 150 Rubberized tar (heated to free
seconds to achieve a flowing but not to exceed 1210C ASTM D 2993
Kinematic Viscosity of (2500F)
150-300 mm2/s (150-
300) centi-stokes d. Asphalt for mop coat AASHTO M 115

236
 e. Waterproofing fabric ASSHTO M 117
(ASTM D 1668) Pliability – 6.35 mm No cracks in ASTM D 146
(1/4”) mandrel 1800 rubberized asphalt
Fabric shall be waterproofed with tar or asphalt in bend at –8.30C (-
agreement with the material specified for prime and mop 150F)
coats. Primer and mastic shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and
shall be compatible with the membrane.
f. Mortar materials shall conform to Section 705.5 except
that the mortar shall be uniformly mixed to spreading
consistency in the proportion of 1 part Portland 702.8 Tars
Cement to 3 parts fine aggregate.
Tars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 52.
g. Asphalt plank AASHTO M 46
(ASTM D 517)
702.9 Dust Oils
Unless otherwise shown on the plans, planks shall be 30
mm thick and may be from 150 to 300 mm in width but all Dust oils and clarified dust oil shall conform to the following
pieces for one structure shall be of the same width except requirements:
such “closers” as may be necessary. The lengths shall be
such as to permit the laying of the planks to the best General ASTM Dust Oil Clarified
advantage on the surface to be covered but shall not be Requirements METHOD Light Medium Heavy Dust Oil
less than 0.9 nor more than 2.5 m. Flash Point, 0C D 1310 51.6 51.6 51.6 93.3
(Open tag.), min.
h. Asphalt roll roofing ASTM D 224, Viscosity at 380C D 2170 40-70 90-135 145- 20-100
65 pound grade (1000F) 200
Kinematic, CS
702.7 Membrane Material for Waterproofing Bridge Decks Water, % D 95 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
maximum
Bridge deck waterproofing membrane shall be mesh-reinforced Asphaltenes % *D2006 3.0- 4.0-7.0 5.0-8.0 0-5.0
self-sealing rubberized asphalt preformed membrane and shall have the 6.0
following properties: Saturates % *D2006 25 25 25 10
minimum
Thickness 1.65 mm (655 mils) Distillation
Permeance-Perms 57.213 x 10-11 ASTM E 96 Total Distillate to **D402 35 30 30 5
Kg/Pa.s.m2 (0.10) Method B 2880C (550 F),
(grains/sq.ft./hr./in.Hg) Max. %
Test on residue from Distillation to 2880C (5500F)
Tensile strength 344.5 kPa (50 lb/in) ASTM D 882
Viscosity at D 2170 75- 200-630 540- 20-150
modified for
100oT, Kinematic, 250 1500
25.4 mm
CS
(1 inch) opening
Solubility in ***2042 97.0 97.0 97.0 97.0
Trichloroethylene,
Puncture resistance 90.8 kg (200 lb) ASTM E 154
% Min.
(mesh)
237
 percent of which will pass a 37.5 mm (1-1/2 inches) sieve and containing
* As modified in procedure as “Test Method for Determination of not more than 5 percent passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve.
Asphaltene and Saturate Content of Dust Oils” by Materials
Testing Laboratory, Region I, USDA Forest Service, Missoula, MT
dated November 1970. Copies of the procedure are available from 703.2 Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete
the Regional Materials Engineer, Region I, USDA Forest Service,
Missoula, MT 598011. Coarse aggregate for concrete shall meet the requirements of
AASHTO M 80.
** Except that the residue remaining after a temperature of 2880C
(instead of 3600C) shall be used for further testing. As modified in Lightweight aggregate, if required or permitted by the Special
procedure identified as “Standard Method of Test for Distillation of Provisions, shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 195, for the
Forest Service Dust Oil” dated July 1972. Copies of the procedure grading specified.
are available from the Regional Materials Engineer, Region I USDA
Forest Service, Missoula, MT, 59801.
703.3 Aggregate for Portland Cement Treated and Stabilized Base
*** Trichloroethylene shall be used as a solvent instead of carbon Course
disulphide.
ITEM 703 – AGGREGATES The crushed and uncrushed granular material shall consist of
hard durable stones and rocks of accepted quality, free from an excess of
flat, elongated, soft or disintegrated pieces or other objectionable matter.
703.1 Fine Aggregate for Concrete and Incidentals The method used in obtaining the aggregate shall be such that the
finished product shall be as consistent as practical.
703.1.1 Concrete
All materials passing the 4.75 mm (No. 4) mesh produced in the
Fine Aggregate for concrete shall conform to the requirements of crushing operation of either the stone or gravel shall be incorporated in
AASHTO M 6, with no deleterious substances in excess of the following the base material to the extent permitted by the gradation requirements.
percentages: The plasticity index shall not be less 4 nor more than 10.

Clay lumps 3.0 703.4 Aggregate for Untreated Subbase, Base or Surface Courses
Coal and lignite 1.0
Material passing 0.075 mm sieve 4.0 Aggregate shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of
Other substances – as shown in the Special Provisions crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed or natural gravel. Materials that
break up when alternately wetted and dried shall not be used.
Lightweight aggregate, if required or permitted by the Special
Provisions, shall meet the pertinent requirements of AASHTO M 195. Coarse aggregate is the material retained on the 2.00 mm (No.
10) sieve and shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 50 for
703.1.2 Granular backfill filter material for underdrains and filler for paved subbase and not more than 45 for Base and Surface Courses as
waterways shall be permeable and shall meet the requirements of determine by AASHTO Method T 96.
AASHTO M 6, except that soundness tests will not be required and minor
variations in grading and content of deleterious substances may be Fine aggregate is the material passing the 2.00 mm (No. 10)
approved by the Engineer. sieve and shall consist of natural or crushed sand and fine mineral
particles. The fraction passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be
703.1.3 Aggregate for minor concrete structures shall be clean, durable, greater than 0.66 (two-thirds) of the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No.
uniformly graded sand and gravel, crushed slag or crushed stone, 100 40) sieve. For base courses, the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40)
238
sieve shall have a liquid limit not greater than 25 and a plasticity index not
greater than 6, while for subbase course, the liquid limit shall not be Fine aggregate passing the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve shall consist of
greater than 35 plasticity index not greater than 12. natural sand, stone, stone screenings or slag screenings or a combination
thereof and unless otherwise stipulated shall conform to the quality
For surface courses, the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) requirements of AASHTO M 29 (ASTM D 1073). Fine aggregate shall be
sieve shall have a liquid limit not greater than 35 and a plasticity index not of such gradation that when combined with other required aggregate
less than 4 or greater than 9. fractions in proper proportion, the resultant mixture will meet the gradation
required under the composition of mixture for the specific type under
All materials shall be free from vegetable matter and lumps or contract.
balls of clay.
703.5.3 Open-Graded Asphalt Concrete Friction Course
When crushed aggregate is specified, not less than 50 mass
percent of the particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have Aggregate shall conform to Subsections 703.5.1 and 703.5.2
at least one fractured face. above and the following requirements. Relatively pure carbonate
aggregates or any aggregates known to polish shall not be used for the
Gradation of each designated size of aggregate shall be obtained coarse aggregate fraction (material retained on the 2.36 mm (No. 8)
by crushing, screening and blending processes as may be necessary. sieve. In addition, the coarse aggregate fraction shall have at least 75
mass percent of weight of particles with at least two fractured faces and
Materials otherwise meeting the requirements of this Section will 90 mass percent with one or more fractured faces, except that lightweight
be acceptable whenever such materials produce a compacted course aggregates need not meet this requirement. The abrasion loss
meeting applicable density requirements as specified in Subsections (AASHTO T 96) shall not exceed 40 mass percent.
200.3.3, 201.3.3, 202.3.3 and 203.3.6.
703.5.4 Lightweight Aggregate (except slag)

703.5 Aggregate for Bituminous Concrete Lightweight aggregate (except slag), if required or permitted by a
Special Provisions, shall be manufactured by the rotary kiln process.
703.5.1 Coarse Aggregate The material shall consist of angular-fragments uniform in density and
reasonably free from flat, elongated or other deleterious substances.
Coarse aggregate retained on the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve shall be The material shall show an abrasion loss of less than 45 mass percent
crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed or natural gravel and unless when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 96. The dry mass per cubic
otherwise stipulated, shall conform to the quality requirements of metre shall not exceed 1080 kg (67 pcf). After testing through five cycles
AASHTO M 79 – 74. of the magnesium sulfate soundness test, the loss shall not exceed ten
(10) mass percent.
When crushed gravel is used, it shall meet the pertinent
requirements of Section 2.1 and 3.1 of AASHTO M 62 – 74 and not less
than 50 mass percent of the particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) 703.6 Aggregate for Bituminous Plant Mix Surfacing
sieve shall have at least one fractured face. The coarse aggregate shall
be of such gradation that when combined with other required aggregate Aggregate shall be uniformly graded from coarse to fine. Target
fractions in proper proportion, the resultant mixture will meet the gradation values for the intermediate sieve sizes shall be established within the
required under the composition of mixture for the specific type under limits shown in Table 703.1.
contract. Only one kind shall be used on the project except by
permission of the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit the proposed target values in writing
to the Engineer for approval. The target gradation is subject to
703.5.2 Fine Aggregate confirmation testing in accordance with Section 307.2 before approval by
239
the Engineer. Any changes in the target gradation are subject to blend meets one of the grading requirements of Table 703.2 as specified
confirmation testing in accordance with Section 307.2, unless otherwise in the Schedule.
approved in writing by the Engineer. No target gradation adjustment will
be permitted during the span of a lot. The gradings to be used will be shown in the Special Provisions,
adjusted to reflect variations in aggregate densities.
Table 703.1
Range of Gradation Target Values The ranges apply to aggregates with bulk specific gravity values
that are relatively constant throughout a grading band. When such
Sieve Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, values vary from sieve to sieve, such as with lightweight aggregates, the
Designation, mm AASHTO T 11 and T 27, exclusive of mineral ranges for each sieve size shall be adjusted to reflect the variations.
filler
Range 703.8 Aggregate for Cold Plant-Mix Bituminous Pavement
25 (1 inch) 100
19 (3/4 inch) 100 The provisions of Subsections 703.5.1 and 703.5.2 shall apply.
4.75 (No. 4) 50 – 60
2.36 (No. 8) 38 – 48 703.8.1 Aggregate for Pavement
0.075 (No. 200) 3–7
The minimum for Sand Equivalent is 35 The several aggregate fractions for the mixture shall be sized,
graded and combined in such proportions that the resulting composite
No intermediate sizes of aggregate shall be removed for other blends meet the respective grading requirements of Table 703.3 adjusted
purposes without written consent of the Engineer. to reflect variation in aggregate densities.

If crushed gravel is used, not less than 50 mass percent of the 703.8.2 Aggregate for Top Dressing
material retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be particles having at
least one fractured face. The material for the top dressing shall consist of dry sand, stone
screenings or slag screenings so graded that at least 95 mass percent
That portion of the composite material passing a 4.75 mm (No. 4) shall pass the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve and not more than 40 percent shall
sieve shall have a sand equivalent of not less than 35, as determined by pass the 0.300 mm (No. 50) sieve.
AASHTO T 176, Alternate Method No. 2.
Table 703.2
The aggregate shall show a durability index not less than 35 Gradation Ranges – Hot Plant Mix Bituminous Pavements
(coarse and fine) as determined by AASHTO T 210. (Mass percent passing square sieves, AASHTO T 11 and T 27)

The material shall be free of clay balls and adherent films of clay Sieve GRADING
or other matter that would prevent thorough coating with the bituminous Designation, A B C D E F G
material. mm
37.5 (1-1/2 100 - - - - - -
inch)
703.7 Aggregate for Hot Plant-Mix Bituminous Pavement 25 ( 1 inch) 95- 100 100 - - - -
100
The provisions of Subsections 703.5.1, 703.5.2 and 703.5.3 shall 19 (3/4 inch) 75-95 95- 95- 100 - 100 -
apply. The several aggregate fraction for the mixture shall be sized, 100 100
graded and combined in such proportions that the resulting composite 12.5 (1/2 inch) - 68-86 68-86 95- 100 - 100
100
240
 9.5 (3/8 inch) 54-75 56-78 56-78 74-92 95- - 95-
100 100 Lightweight aggregate, if required or permitted by the Special
4.75 (No. 4) 36-58 38-60 38-60 48-70 75-90 45- 30- Provisions, shall meet the pertinent requirements of Subsection 703.5.4.
65 50
2.36 (No. 8) 25-45 27-47 27-47 33-53 62-82 33- 5-15 When crushed gravel is used, not less than 50 mass percent of
53 the particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have at least one
1.18 (No. 16) - 18-37 18-37 22-40 38-58 - - fractured face. Aggregates shall meet the gradation requirements called
0.600 (No. 30) 11-28 11-28 13-28 15-30 22-42 - - for in the Bid Schedule.
0.300 (No. 50) - 6-20 9-20 10-20 11-28 10- -
20 Table 703.3
0.075 (No. 0-8 0-8 4-8 4-9 2-10 3-8 2-5
200) Gradation Requirements – Cold Plant Mix Bituminous Pavement
(Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO T 27)

703.9 Aggregate for Road Mix Bituminous Pavement Sieve Designation Bottom Wearing
(Binder) (Surface)
Aggregates for road mix bituminous pavement construction shall Standard, mm Alternate US Course Course
be crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed or natural gravel which meet Standard
the quality requirements of AASHTO M 62-74 or M 63-74 for the specified 37.5 1-1/2” 100 -
gradation, except that the sodium sulfate soundness loss shall not exceed 25 1” 85 – 100 -
12 mass percent. 19 ¾” 40 – 70 100
When crushed gravel is used, at least 50 mass percent of the 12.5 ½” 10 – 35 95 – 100
particles retained on the 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve shall have at least one 4.75 No. 4 4 – 16 15 – 40
fractured face. Gradation shall conform to Grading F of Table 703.2. 2.36 No. 8 0–5 10 – 25
0.600 No. 30 - 4 – 13
703.10 Aggregate for Cover Coats, Surface Treatments and 0.300 No. 50 - 0-5
Bituminous Preservative Treatment
Table 703.4
Cover aggregate for type 2 seal coat (Item 303) shall consist of Gradation Requirements for Cover Coats
sand or fine screenings, reasonably free from dirt or organic matter. (Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO T 27)

Aggregates for type 3 seal coat (Item 303) surface treatments or Sieve Grading designation with corresponding size
bituminous preservative treatment shall be crushed stone, crushed slag or Designation No. from AASHTO M 43 (ASTM D 448) modified
crushed or natural gravel. Only one type of aggregate shall be used on Std. Alt US A B C D E F
the project unless alternative types are approved. Aggregates shall mm Std (No.5) (No.6) (No.7) (No.8) (No.9) (No.10)
meet the quality requirements of AASHTO M 78-74. 37.5 1- 100 - - - - -
1/2”
When tested in accordance with AASHTO T 182, (ASTM D 1664) 25 1” 90- 100 - - - -
aggregate shall have a retained bituminous film above 95 mass percent. 100
19 ¾” - 90- 100 - - -
Aggregates which do not meet this requirement may be used for 100
bituminous surface treatments and seal coats provided a water resistant 12.5 ½” 0-10 - 90- 100 - -
film. 100

241
 9.5 3/8” - 0-15 - 85- 100 100 Gradation Requirements for Bituminous Preservative Treatment
100
4.75 No. - - 0-15 - 85- 85-100 Sieve Mass percent passing square
4 100 Designation mesh
2.36 No. - - - 0-10 - - Sieves, AASHTO T 27
8 Standard mm Alternate US Grading A Grading B
0.075 No. 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-10 Standard
200 19 ¾” - 100
9.5 3/8” 100 -
703.11 Blotter 4.75 No. 4 45 – 80 45 – 80
2.36 No. 8 28 – 64 28 – 64
Aggregate for blotter material shall conform to the gradation 0.075 No. 200 0 – 12 0 - 12
requirements of AASHTO M 43 (ASTM D 448), size 2.00 mm (No. 10).
The aggregate shall be free from vegetable or other deleterious materials.
703.12 Bed Course Material
Table 703.5
Gradation Requirements for Bituminous Surface Treatments Bed course material for sidewalks, paved waterways and curbing
(Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO T 27) shall consist of cinders, sand, slag, gravel, crushed stone or other
approved material of such gradation that all particles will pass through a
Sieve Grading designation with corresponding size sieve having 37.5 mm (1-1/2 inches) square openings.
Designation No. from AASHTO M 43 (ASTM D 448) modified
Std. Alt US A B C D E F Bed course material for slope protection shall be a porous, free-
mm Std (No.5) (No.6) (No.7) (No.8) (No.9) (No.10) draining material consisting of sand, gravel, cinders, slag, crushed stone
37.5 1- 100 - - - - - or other approved free-draining material. This material shall be uniformly
1/2” graded and of such size that 100 percent of the material will pass through
25 1” 90- 100 - - - - a sieve having 37.5 mm (1-1/2 inches) square opening.
100
19 ¾” 20-25 90- 100 - - - 703.13 Sheathing Material
100
12.5 ½” 0-10 20-55 90- 100 - - Sheathing material shall conform to either (a) or (b) below:
100
9.5 3/8” 0-5 0-15 40-70 85- 100 100 a. Sound, durable particles of gravel, slag or crushed stone
100 meeting the following gradation:
4.75 No. - 0-5 0-15 10-30 85- 85-100
4 100 Sieve Mass percent passing
2.36 No. - - 0-5 0-10 10-40 60-100 75 mm (3”) 100
8 4.75 mm (No. 4) 0 – 10
0.150 No. - - - - - 0-10 0.075 mm (No. 200) 0–2
100
b. Clean noncementitious sand meeting the requirements of
Subsection 703.1.2.
Table 703.6
703.14 Aggregates for Subgrade Modification

242
 The material shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments
of slag, stone or gravel, screened or crushed to the required size and Gradation Requirements for Aggregates for Salt Stabilized Base
grading. The material shall be visually free from vegetable matter and Course
lumps or balls of clay and shall meet the requirements for one of the Sieve Mass percent passing square
gradings given in Table 703.7 whichever is called for in the Bid Schedule. Designation mesh
sieves, AASHTO T 11 and T 27
That portion of the material passing a 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve Standard, Alternate US Grading A Grading B
shall have a plasticity index of not over 6, as determined by AASHTO T mm Standard
90. 75 3” - -
50 2” - 100
Table 703.7 37.5 1-1/2” - 70 – 100
25 1” 100 -
Grading Requirements – Aggregates for Subgrade Modification 19 ¾” 70 – 100 50 – 80
9.5 3/8” 50 – 80 40 – 70
Sieve Mass percent passing square 4.75 No. 4 35 – 45 30 – 60
Designation mesh 2.00 No. 10 25 – 50 20 – 50
sieves using AASHTO T 27 0.425 No. 40 15 – 30 10 – 30
Standard mm Alternate US 0.075 No. 200 7 - 15 7 – 15
Standard
75 3” 100 - - * Gradation varies with top size of material and should be based on
37.5 1-1/2” - 100 - size of largest material used. For instance, if largest size is 50 mm (2
25 1” - - 100 inches), gradation should be under heading B; if 25 mm (1 inch),
4.75 No. 4 30 – 70 30 – 70 40 – 80 under A.
0.075 No. 200 0 - 15 0 - 15 5 – 20
703.16 Aggregates for Emulsified Asphalt Treated Base Course
Crushed slag shall consist of clean, tough, durable pieces of blast
furnace slag, reasonably uniform in density and quality and reasonably Aggregate shall consist of coarse aggregate of crushed gravel,
free from glassy pieces. crushed slag or crushed stone, composed of hard, durable particles or
fragments and a filler of finely crushed stone, sand, slag or other finely
703.15 Aggregates for Salt Stabilization divided mineral matter. The portion of the material retained on a 4.75
mm (No. 4) sieve shall be known as coarse aggregate and that portion
Aggregates for salt stabilized base course shall consist of hard passing a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be known as fine aggregate. The
durable particles or fragments of slag, stone or gravel, screened or material shall meet one of the grading requirements of Table 703.9.
crushed to the required size and grading.
Table 703.9
That portion of the material passing a 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve Grading Requirements for Aggregates for Emulsified Asphalt
shall have a plasticity index of not over 6, as determined by AASHTO T Treated Base (Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO T 11
90. & T 27)
Sieve Designation
The material shall be visually free from vegetable matter or lumps Standard Alternate US Grading A Grading B Grading C
or balls of clay and shall meet the requirements for one of the gradings mm Standard
given in Table 703.8 as called for in the Bid Schedule. 37.5 1-1/2” 100 100 -
25 1” 95 – 100 95 – 100 -
Table 703.8 19 ¾” - 50 – 85 100
243
 12.5 1/2” - - 95 – 100 0.600 mm (No. 30) 100
4.75 No. 4 - 26 – 59 65 – 100 0.300 mm (No. 50) 95 – 100
2.00 No. 10 0–9 17 – 48 - 0.075 mm (No. 200) 70 – 100
0.300 No. 50 - - 12 – 35
0.075 No. 200 0–2 2 – 10 3 - 12 The mineral filler shall have a plasticity index not greater than 4.
If crushed gravel is used, not less than 65 mass percent of the
coarse aggregate particles retained on a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be Plasticity index limits are not appropriate for hydraulic lime and
particles having at least one fractured face. cement.

Coarse aggregate shall have a percent of wear of not more than

35 at 500 revolution, as determined by AASHTO T 96.

The aggregate shall show a durability factor not less than 35

(coarse and fine) as determined by AASHTO T 210 (Production of Plastic 703A.3 Methods of Sampling
Fines in Aggregates).
703A.3.1 Materials in Bulk
The material shall be free of clay balls and adherent films of clay
or other matter that would prevent thorough coating with bituminous Sampling from bins, piles or cars – A sampling tube that takes a
material. core not less than 25 mm (1 inch) in diameter may be used to obtain
sample portions from one or more location as required to obtain a field
sample of at least 5 kg (10 lb). Sample
ITEM 703A – MINERAL FILLER
portions may be taken from holes dug into the material at 5 or more
locations to provide a field sample of at least 5 kg (10 lb).
703A.1 Description
Sampling from conveyors – Sample portions shall be taken at
Mineral filler shall consist of finely divided mineral matter such as regular intervals during the time of movement of the materials in the unit
rock dust, slag dust, hydrated lime, hydraulic cement, fly ash or other being sampled to provide a field sample of at least 5 kg (10 lb).
suitable mineral matter. It shall be free from organic impurities and at the
time of use, shall be sufficiently dry to flow freely and shall be essentially 703A.3.2 Materials in Packages
free from agglomerations.
From the unit to be sampled, select at least one percent of the
packages at random for sampling, but in no case shall fewer than 5
703A.2 General Requirements packages be selected. Take a sample portion from a hole dug into the
top of each package selected for sampling. A sampling tube may be
703A.2.1 Filler material for bituminous bases or pavements shall meet used that takes a core not less than 25 mm (1 inch) diameter. Insert the
the requirements of AASHTO M 17, Mineral Filler for tube into the package to substantially sample the entire length of the
Bituminous Paving Mixtures. package. Combine the sample portions taken to obtain a field sample of
at least 5 kg (10 lb).
703A.2.2 Physical Requirements

Mineral filler shall be graded within the following limits: 703A.4 Shipping Samples

Sieve Maximum Perfect Passing

244
 Mineral filler shall be shipped in a clean, moisture-proof container Solid blocks shall conform with the requirements of ASTM C 139
and packaged securely to prevent the loss of material during handling. or ASTM C 145, grade as specified. Hollow blocks shall conform to the
Reduce the field sample to a minimum size of 2.5 kg (5 lb) to submit for requirements of ASTM C 90, grade as specified.
testing, using the method of quartering.
Dimensions and tolerances shall be as individually specified on
the Plans.
703A.5 Methods of Test
ITEM 705 – JOINT MATERIALS
The properties enumerated in this Specification shall be
determined in accordance with the following AASHTO Method of Test:
705.1 Joint Fillers
Gradation T 37
Plasticity Index T 90 Poured filler for joints shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 173.
ITEM 704 – MASONRY UNITS
Preformed fillers for joints shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 33 (ASTM D 994), AASHTO M 153, AASHTO M 213,
704.1 Clay or Shale Brick AASHTO M 220, as specified, and shall be punched to admit the dowels
where called for on the Plans. The filler for each joint shall be furnished
Brick shall conform to the requirements of one of the following in a single piece for the depth and width required for the joint unless
specifications: otherwise authorized by the Engineer. When the use of more than one
piece is authorized for a joint, the abutting ends shall be fastened
Sewer Brick -
AASHTO M 91, Grade SM securely and held accurately to shape, by stapling or other positive
Sewer Brick -
ASTM C 32, Grade SM fastening satisfactory to the Engineer.
Building Brick -
AASHTO M 114, Grade SW, or ASTM C
62, Grade SW
The grade will be shown on the Plans or in the Special 705.2 Joint Mortar
Provisions.
Pipe joint mortar shall consist of one part Portland Cement and
two parts approved sand with water as necessary to obtain the required
704.2 Concrete Brick consistency. Portland Cement and sand shall conform respectively to
Section 700.1 and 703.1. If shown in the Special Provisions, air
Concrete brick shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 55, entrainment conforming to Section 708.2 shall be provided. Mortar shall
Grade A. be used within 30 minutes after its preparation.

704.3 Concrete Masonry Blocks 705.3 Rubber Gaskets

Concrete masonry blocks may be rectangular or segmented and, Ring gaskets for rigid pipe shall conform to the requirements of
when specified, shall have ends shaped to provide interlock at vertical AASHTO M 198. Continuous flat gaskets for flexible metal pipe shall
joints. conform to the requirements of ASTM D 1056 with grade SCE 41 used for
bands with projections or flat bands and grade SCE 43 for corrugated
bands. Gaskets thickness for bands with projections or flat bands shall

245
be 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) greater than the nominal depth of the corrugation Hydrated lime shall meet the requirements for Residue, Popping
and shall be 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) for corrugated bands. and Pitting, and Water retention shown for Type N lime in Section 701.3
(ASTM C 207).

705.4 Oakum Water shall conform to the requirements of Item 714, Water.

Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipe shall be made from hemp Air-entraining agents shall conform to the requirements of Section
(Cannabis Sativa) line, or Benares Sunn fiber, or from a combination of 708.2 AASHTO M 154 (ASTM C 260).
these fibers. The oakum shall be thoroughly corded and finished and
practically free from lumps, dirt and extraneous matter.
705.6 Copper Water Stops or Flashings

705.5 Mortar for Masonry Beds and Joints Sheet copper for water stops of flashings shall meet the
requirements of AASHTO M 138 (ASTM B 152) for Type ETP, light cold-
705.5.1 Composition rolled, soft anneal, unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.

Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, masonry mortar shall be

composed of one part Portland Cement or air-entraining Portland Cement 705.7 Rubber Water Stops
and two parts fine aggregate by volume to which hydrated lime has been
added in an amount equal to ten (10) mass percent of the cement. In Rubber water stops may be molded or extruded and have a
lieu of air-entraining cement, Portland Cement may be used with an air- uniform cross-section, free from porosity or other defects, conforming to
entraining admixture in accordance with the applicable provisions of Item the nominal dimensions shown on the Plans. An equivalent standard
405. shape may be furnished, if approved by the Engineer.

For masonry walls not exceeding 1.8 m (6 feet) in height, a The water stop may be compounded from natural rubber,
mortar composed of one part masonry cement and two parts fine synthetic rubber or a blend of the two, together with other compatible
aggregate by volume maybe substituted for the above mixture of Portland materials which will produce a finished water stop meeting the
Cement, lime and fine aggregate. For other construction, masonry requirements of Table 705.1. No reclaimed material shall be used. The
cement may be used if and as shown on the Plans. Contractor shall furnish a certificate from the producer to show the
general compositions of the material and values for the designated
705.5.2 Materials properties. The Contractors shall also furnish samples, in length
adequate for making designated tests, as ordered by the Engineer.
Either Type I or Type IA air-entraining Portland Cement,
conforming to AASHTO M 85 may be used, except that when the contract
contains an item for concrete under Item 405, the Contractor may use the 705.8 Plastic Water Stops
same type as is used for that work.
Plastic water stops shall be fabricated with a uniform cross-
Masonry cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M section, free from porosity or other defects, to the nominal dimensions
150 – 74 (ASTM C 91). shown on the Plans. An equivalent standard shape may be furnished, if
approved by the Engineer.
Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M
45 (ASTM C 144). The material from which the water stop is fabricated shall be a
homogenous,, elastomeric, plastic compound of basic polyvinyl chloride
and other material which, after fabrication, will meet the requirements
246
tabulated herein. No reclaimed material shall be used. The Contractor No. 406-5011) manufacturer’s value
shall furnish a certificate from the producer, showing values for the Resistance to alkali D 543 Maximum weight
designated properties in Table 705.2. The Contractor shall furnish change:
samples, in lengths adequate for making designated tests, as ordered by - 0.10 percent to +
the Engineer. 0.25 percent
Water absorption (48 D 570
Table 705.1 hrs)
Cold bending (1) No cracking
Required Properties and Test Methods-Finished Rubber Volatile loss D 1203 Not more than
Water Stop manufacturer’s value
7 days using 10% - Maximum hardness
NaOH change ±5 (shore),
Property Federal Test Method Requirement Maximum tensile
Standard No. 601 strength decrease:
Hardness (by shore 15%
durometer) 3021 60 – 70
Compression set 3311 Maximum 30 1
The cold bend test will be made by subjecting a 25 x 150 x 3 mm
percent (1 x 6 x 1/8 inch) strip of plastic water stop to a temperature of –
Tensile strength 4111 Minimum 17.23 28.80C (-200F) for 2 hours. The strip will immediately thereafter be
MPa (2,500 psi) bent 180 degrees around a rod of 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) diameter by
Elongation at Breaking ASTM D 412 Minimum 450 applying sufficient force to hold the sample in intimate contact with
percent the rod. The sample will then be examined for evidence of
Tensile stress at 300 Minimum 6.20 MPa cracking. At least three individual samples from each lot will be
percent elongation 4131 (900 psi) tested and the result reported.
Water absorption by Minimum 5 percent
mass 6631
Tensile strength after 7111 Minimum 80 705.9 Hot Poured Pipe-Joint Sealing Compound
aging percent original
It shall meet the requirements of Federal Specification SS-S-169
for the type and class specified.
Table 705.2

Required Properties and Test Methods-Finished Plastic 705.10 Pipe-Joint Packing Compound
Water Stop
Packaging compounds for use with sealing compounds specified
ASTM in Section 705.9 shall be of appropriate sizes and shall meet the
Property Method Requirements requirements of Federal Specification HH-P-117.
Tensile strength D 638 Minimum 9.646 MPa
(1,400 psi)
Elongation at D 638 Minimum 260 percent 705.11 Preformed Plastic Sealing Compound
breaking
Hardness (shore) D 2240 60 – 75 For concrete pipe joints, it shall meet the requirements of Federal
Specific gravity (Federal test Method Maximum – 0.02 from Specification SS-S-210.

247
 Designs for fully lined or half lined pipes of the specified strength
classes shall be submitted by the manufacturer for approval. The
application requirements of AASHTO M 170 and AASHTO M 65 shall
ITEM 706 – CONCRETE, CLAY, PLASTIC AND FIBER PIPE govern. Liner or liner elements, shall be clay of first quality, sound,
thoroughly and perfectly burned without warps, cracks or other
706.1 Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe imperfections and fully and smoothly salt glazed.

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 86 706.7 Perforated Vitrified Clay Pipe
(ASTM C 14) for the specified diameters and strength classes.
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 65, for
706.2 Reinforced Concrete Pipe pipe with full circular cross-section, for the specified diameters and
strength class. When specified, the bell shall have integral spacer lugs
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 170 or to provide for an annular opening and self-centering feature.
AASHTO M 242 (ASTM C 655) for specified diameters and strength 706.8 Vitrified Clay Pipe
classes.
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 706.7 for
Elliptical pipe conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 207 the specified diameters and strength classes for circular, unperforated or
(ASTM C 507) shall be furnished where specified. Unless otherwise perforated pipe as shown on the Plans.
specified, pipe wall design and use of elliptical reinforced concrete arch
culvert pipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 206 (ASTM C 706.9 Cradle Invert Clay Pipe
506).
This pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of
Precast reinforced concrete and sections shall conform to the AASHTO M 65.
requirements of the cited specifications to the extent which they apply.
Reinforced concrete D-load pipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO 706.10 Asbestos Cement Pipe
M 242 (ASTM C 655).
706.3 Perforated Concrete Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 217
(ASTM C 428) for the specified diameters and strength classes.
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 175
for the specified diameters and strength classes. 706.11 Perforated Asbestos Cement Pipe

706.4 Drain Tile This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 189
for the specified diameters.
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 178 or
M 179 (ASTM C 4) for the specified material, diameters and quality 706.12 Bituminized Fiber Pipe
classes.
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 177
706.5 Porous Concrete Pipe ASTM D 1861 or D 1862.

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 176 706.13 Perforated Bituminized Fiber Pipe
(ASTM C 654) for the specified diameters.
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of Sections 706.12
706.6 Vitrified Clay Lined Reinforced Concrete Pipe for the specified diameters. Unless otherwise specified, either Type I or
Type II Couplings may be furnished.
248
 This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 304M
706.14 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer (ASTM D 2729).
Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 206

(ASTM C 506). ITEM 707 – METAL PIPE

706.15 Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Strom Drain and

Sewer Pipe 707.1 Cast Iron Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 207 This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 64 or
(ASTM C 507). ASTM A 716 for the specified diameters and strength classes. Unless
otherwise specified, either smooth, corrugated or ribbed pipe may be
706.16 Reinforced Concrete D-load Culvert, Storm Drain and furnished. Pipe of diameter in excess of 1.2 m (48 inches) shall conform
Sewer Pipe to ANSI Standard for Cast Iron Pit Cast Pipe for specified diameter and
strength class.
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 242
(ASTM C 655). 707.2 Corrugated Iron or Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches

706.17 Plastic and Polyethylene Corrugated Drainage Pipe or 707.2.1 Riveted Pipe and Pipe Arches
Tubing
The conduit shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 36
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 252. and M 218 for the specified dimensions and thicknesses.

706.18 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, 707.2.2 Welded Pipe and Pipe Arches
Storm Drains and Sewers
Corrugated steel pipe and pipe arches fabricated by resistance
These sections shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M spot welding shall comply with the applicable requirements of AASHTO M
259. 36 and M 218.

706.19 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and 707.2.3 Helical Pipe

Fittings
Unperforated helically corrugated pipes shall conform to sizes
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 2751. shown on the Plans and with the applicable requirements of AASHTO M
36 and M 218.
706.20 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Composite Sewer
Pipe 707.2.4 Special sections, such as elbows and fabricated flared and
sections, shall conform to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 36
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 264 and M 218.
(ASTM D 2680). Coupling bands shall conform to AASHTO M 36 and M 218,
except that use of bands with projections (dimple bands) will be limited to
706.21 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Drain Pipe end sections and to pipe laid on grades under 10 percent.

249
 Bands of special design that engage factory reformed ends of circle pipe may be used if permitted by the Special Provisions and shown
corrugated pipe may be used. in the Bid Schedule.

Steel sheets of the required compositions may be furnished with 707.5 Bituminous Coated Iron Steel Pipe for Underdrains
commercially produced corrugation dimensions other than those specified
in AASHTO M 36 and M 246, if shown on the Plans or approved by the This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 36 and
Engineer. M 218 and shall be coated with bituminous material to meet the
requirements of AASHTO M 190, Type A coating, except that the
707.3 Bituminous Coated Corrugated Iron or Steel Pipe and Pipe minimum coating thickness shall be 0.75 mm (0.03 inch). Coupling
Arches bands shall be fully coated. The specified minimum diameter of
perforations shall apply after coating. The Engineer may waive the
These conduits, coupling bands and special sections, shall imperviousness test if no separation of coating from the metal is
conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 190 coating Type A, B or C as observed.
specified. Coupling bands shall be fully coated with bituminous material.
707.6 Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Culvert Pipe
Special sections, such as elbows and other sections shall
conform to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 190. Coating and This shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 196 and M
invert paving shall be of the type specified. Flared end sections shall 197.
conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 243 for the coating specified.
707.7 Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Pipe for Underdrains
The Engineer may waive the imperviousness test for coated pipe
if no separation of coating from metal is observed. This pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 707.6.

When asbestos bonded bituminous coating is specified, these 707.8 Bituminous Coated Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Culvert Pipe
requirements shall equally apply and in addition, the special process of
embedding asbestos fiber in the molten metallic bonding medium shall be This pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 707.6 and
used to bond the bituminous coating. Asbestos-bonded corrugated metal shall be coated with bituminous material conforming to the requirements
pipe shall be fabricated in accordance with AASHTO M 36 using of AASHTO M 190. Coating and invert paving shall be of the type
asbestos-bonded sheets shall be coated with a layer of asbestos fibers specified.
pressed into the molten zinc bonding medium. Immediately after the
metallic bond has solidified, the asbestos fibers shall be thoroughly 707.9 Bituminous Coated Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Pipe
impregnated with a bituminous saturant. The finished sheets shall be Underdrain
uniformly coated and free from blisters. After fabrication, the culvert
sections shall be treated as specified for either Type A, B or C, as called This pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 707.6 and
for in the Bid Schedule, in accordance with AASHTO M 190. Coupling shall be coated with bituminous material conforming to the requirements
bonds shall be fully coated with bituminous material conforming to the of AASHTO M 190, type of coating as specified.
requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 190, Type A. The use of bands
with projections (dimple bands) will be limited to end sections and to pipe 707.10 Structural Plate for Pipe, Pipe Arches and Arches
laid on grades under 10 percent.
These conduits and bolts and nuts for connecting plates shall
707.4 Corrugated Iron or Steel Pipe for Underdrains conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 167.

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 36 and 707.11 Full Bituminous Coated Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arches
M 218 for the specified diameters and types. Galvanized metal part- and Arches
250
 These conduits shall conform to the requirements of Section
707.10 and shall be coated with bituminous material conforming to the
requirements of AASHTO M 243, type coating as specified.
ITEM 708 – CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES FOR CONCRETE
707.12 Aluminum Alloy Structural Plate for Pipe, Pipe Arches and
Arches
708.1 Description
These conduits and the bolts and nuts for connecting plates shall
conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 219. This Item specifies the classification, sampling, testing, packing
and marking of concrete admixtures. It also specifies the physical
707.13 Full Bituminous Coated Aluminum Alloy Structural Plate requirements for concrete with each type of chemical admixtures.
Pipe, Pipe Arches and Arches
Admixtures - A material, other than water, aggregates and
These conduits shall conform to the requirements of Section hydraulic cement (including blended cement)
707.12 and shall be coated with bituminous materials conforming to the that is used as an ingredient of concrete and is
requirements of AASHTO M 190, type of coating as specified. added to the batch in controlled amounts
immediately before or during mixing to produce
707.14 Precoated, Galvanized Steel Culverts and Underdrains some desired modification to the properties of
the concrete.
These conduits shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M
245 and M 246. 708.2 Types of Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

707.15 Slotted Pipe The concrete chemical admixture shall be classified as follows
and shall
Slotted pipe shall be the angle slot pipe or the grate slot type. conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 194.
The type of slotted pipe to be installed shall be at the option of the
Contractor. a. Type A – Accelerating Admixtures

Slot angles for the angle slot drain shall conform to the An admixture that accelerates the time of setting and
requirements of ASTM S 36. early strength development of concrete.

Grate assemblies for the grate slot drain shall conform to ASTM A b. Type B – Retarding Admixtures
36 or A 576. Slot angles and grate slot assemblies shall be galvanized in
accordance with the provisions of Subsection 712.07, Frames, Gratings, An admixture that delays the time of setting of
Covers and Ladder Rungs, of the Standard Specification Federal concrete.
Highway Projects FP-79.
c. Type C – Water-reducing Admixtures
Flashing shall be commercial quality and shall be galvanized with
G 165 coating designation conforming to the provisions in ASTM A 525. An admixture that reduces the quantity of mixing
Bolts and nuts shall conform to the provisions of ASTM A 307. Structural water required to produce concrete of a given consistency.
tubing spacers shall conform to the provisions in ASTM A 501. Said
bolts, nuts and spacers shall be galvanized in accordance with the d. Type D – Water-reducing High Range, Admixtures
provisions of AASHTO M 111.
251
 An admixture that decreases the quantity of mixing Content, 95 - - 95 95 88 88
water required to produce concrete of a given consistency percent of
by 12 percent or greater. control,
maximum
e. Type E – Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures
Time of
An admixture that decreases the quantity of mixing setting,
water required to produce concrete of a given consistency allowable
and hastens the time of setting and early strength deviation from
development of concrete. control, hour
f. Type F – Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixtures
Initial - 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 - 1.0
An admixture that decreases the quantity of mixing Minimum later earlier later earlier later
water required to produce concrete of a given consistency
and delays the time of setting of concrete. Maximum 1.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 1.0 3.5
earlier later earlier later earlier earlier later
g. Type G – Water-Reducing, High Range, and Retarding nor nor
Admixtures 1.5 1.5
later later
An admixture that decreases the quantity of mixing Final : - - 1.0 - 1.0 - -
water required to produce concrete of a given consistency Minimum earlier earlier
of 12 percent or greater and delays the time of setting of
concrete. Maximum 1.0 3.5 - 3.5 - 1.0 3.5
earlier later later earlier later
nor nor
708.3 Air-Entraining Admixtures 1.5 1.5
later later
Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to the requirements of Compressive
AASHTO M 154 (ASTM C 260). Strength,
percent of
control
708.4 Physical Requirements minimum:C
1 day - - - - - 140 125
The concrete in which each of the types of chemical admixtures 3 days 110 90 125 110 125 125 125
are used shall conform to the physical requirements given in Table 1. 7 days 110 90 100 110 110 115 115
28 days 110 90 100 110 110 110 110
Table 1 – Physical Requirements of Chemical Admixtures for
6 months 100 90 90 100 100 100 100
ConcreteA
1 year 100 90 90 100 100 100 100
Flexural
Type Type Type Type Type Type Strength,
PHYSICAL Type
B C D E FB GB percent of
PROPERTY A
control,
minimum:C
Water
252
 D
3 days 100 90 110 100 110 110 110 The percent of control limit applies when length change of control is
7 days 100 90 100 100 100 100 100 0.030% or greater; increase over control limit applies when length
28 days 100 90 90 100 100 100 100 change of control is less than 0.030%.
Length E
Change, This requirement is applicable only when the admixtures is to be used
maximum in air-entrained concrete.
shrinkage
(Alternative When the admixture is to be used in Prestressed concrete, the
requirements)D chloride content of the admixture shall be stated and whether or not
Percent of 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 chloride has been added during its manufacture.
control
Increase over 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
Control 708.5 Sampling
Relative 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
durability 708.5.1 The chemical admixtures for concrete shall be sampled either
factor by grab or composite sampling. A grab sample is one
minimum obtained in a single operation. A composite sample is one
obtained by combining three or more grab samples.
A
The values in the table include allowance for normal variation in test
results. The objects of the 90% compressive strength for Type B 708.5.2 Liquid Admixtures
admixture is to require a level of performance comparable to that of
the reference concrete. 708.5.2.1 The grab samples taken for quality tests shall represent a
unit shipment or a single production lot. Each grab
B
It is recommended that whenever practicable, tests may be made sample shall have a volume of at least 0.5L (1 pint), a
using cement, pozzolan, aggregates, air-entraining admixture, and minimum of 3 grab samples shall be taken.
the mix proportions and batching sequence when used in non-air-
entraining and air-entrained concrete because the specific effects 708.5.2.2 Liquid admixtures shall be agitated thoroughly
produced by chemical admixtures may vary with the properties and immediately prior to sampling. Grab samples shall be
proportion of the other ingredients of the concrete. For instance, taken from different locations and thoroughly mixed to
types “F” and “G” admixtures may exhibit such higher water reduction form the composite sample and the resultant mixture
in concrete mixtures having higher cement factors than 307 + -3 sampled to provide for at least 4 litres for complete set.
kg/m3. Mixtures having a high range water reduction generally
display a higher rate of slump loss. When high range admixtures are 708.5.2.3 Admixtures in bulk storage tanks shall be sampled
used to impart increased workability (15 cm to 20 cm slump), the equally from the upper, intermediate and lower levels by
effect may be of limited duration, reverting to the original slump in 30 means of drain cocks in the sides of the tanks or a
to 60 min depending on factors normally affecting rate of slump loss. weighed sampling bottle fitted with a stopper that can be
removed after the bottle is lowered to the proper depth.
C
The compressive and flexural strength of the concrete containing the
admixture under test at any test age shall be not less 90% of that 708.5.3 Non-liquid Admixtures
attained at any previous test age. The objective of this limit is to
require that the compressive or flexural strength of the concrete 708.5.3.1 The grab samples taken shall represent not more than 2
containing the admixture under test shall not decrease with age. Mg (2 tons) of admixture and shall have a mass of at
least 1 kg (2 lb). A minimum of four grab samples shall
be taken.
253
708.5.3.2 Composite samples shall be prepared by thoroughly This Item covers all paint materials including Vehicles, Pigment,
mixing the grab samples selected and the resultant Pastes, Driers, Thinners and Mixed Paints for steel and wooden
mixture sampled to provide at least 2.3 kg (5 lb) for structures.
complete test.
709.2 Material Requirements
708.6 Testing
709.2.1 General
Procedures for Proportioning of Concrete Mixtures, Tests and
Properties of Freshly Mixed Concrete, Preparation of Test Specimens, Paint, except, aluminum paint, shall consist of pigments of the
Test Specimens of Hardened Concrete and Tests on Hardened Concrete required fineness and composition ground to the desired consistency in
shall be in accordance with AASHTO M 194. linseed oil in a suitable grinding machine, to which shall be added
additional oil, thinner and drier as required.
The Concrete containing the admixtures shall be tested in
accordance with ASTM C 39, ASTM C 138, ASTM C 192, ASTM C 617. Aluminum paint shall consist of aluminum bronze powder or paste
of the required fineness and composition to which shall be added the
708.7 Packing specified amount of vehicle.

The liquid admixtures shall be packed in 4, 20 or 200 litre The paint shall be furnished for use in ready mixed, paste or
containers made of steel, plastic or other suitable packing materials. powder form.
These containers shall be properly sealed.
All paint shall meet the following general requirements:
The non-liquid admixtures or concrete shall be packed in 25-
kilogram containers made of steel, plastic, or other suitable packing a. The paint shall show no excessive settling and shall easily be
materials. These containers shall be properly sealed. redispersed with a paddle to a smooth, homogenous state.
The paint shall show no curdling, livering, caking or color
708.8 Marking separation and shall be free from lumps and skins.
b. The paint as received shall brush easily, possess good
Each container shall be marked with the following information: levelling properties and shall show no running or sagging
when applied to a smooth vertical surfaces.
a. Name, form and type of the product; c. The paint shall dry to a smooth uniform finish free from
b. Net mass or volume; roughness grit, uneveness and other imperfections.
c. Name and address of manufacturer and recognized d. The paint shall not skin within 48 hours in three quarters filled
trademark, if any; closed container.
d. Manufacturer’s batch number and date of manufacture e. The paint shall show no thickening, curdling, gelling or hard
e. Made in the Philippines and, caking after six (6) months storage in full, tightly covered
f. Required handling procedures container at a temperature of 210C (700F).

709.2.2 The paint shall conform to the requirements of the indicated

specifications as follows:
Red Lead Ready-Mixed Paint AASHTO M 72
ITEM 709 – PAINTS Type I, II, III and IV
Aluminum Paint AASHTO M 69 Type I
709.1 Description and II
254
 White & Tinted Ready-Mixed AASHTO M 70
Paint a. Appearance – Free from sediment and suspended matter.
Foliage Green Bridge Paint AASHTO M 67 b. Flash Point – (Tag close cup) not less than 300C (860F).
Black Paint for Bridges and c. Elasticity – The drier when flowed on metal and baked for 2
Timber AASHTO M 68 hours at 1000C (2120F) shall have an elastic film.
Structures d. Drying – It shall mix with pure raw linseed oil in the
Basic Lead Silicon Chromate, proportion of 1 volume of drier to 19 volumes of oil without
Ready- AASHTO M 229 curdling, and the resulting mixture when flowed on glass shall
Mixed Primer dry in not more than 18 hours.
d. Color – When mixed with pure, raw linseed oil in the
709.2.3 The constituents parts of the paint shall meet the following proportion of 1 volume of drier to 8 volumes of oil, the
specifications: resulting mixture shall be darker than a solution of 6 g of
potassium dichromate in 13 cc of pure sulfuric acid (sp. gr.
Red Lead (97% Pb3O4) ASTM D 83 1.84).
Iron Oxide (85% Fe2O3) ASTM D 84
Aluminum Powder and Paste ASTM D 962
Magnesium Silicate ASTM D 605 709.3 Proportion for Mixing
Mica Pigment ASTM D 607
Titanium Dioxide ASTM D 476 It is the intent of these Specifications to provide a paint of proper
Chrome Yellow ASTM D 211 brushing consistency, which will not run, streak or sag and which will have
Calcium Carbonate ASTM D 1199 satisfactory drying qualities.
Basic Lead-Silicon Chromate ASTM D 1638
Basic Carbonate White Lead ASTM D 81 709.3.1 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Structural Steel
Zinc Oxide ASTM D 79
Chrome Oxide Green ASTM D 263 The paint shall be mixed in the proportion of 0.242 kg of
Carbon Black ASTM D 561 aluminum powder of paste per litre of vehicle of long oil spar varnish (2
Lampblack ASTM D 209 lb/gal) producing a paint containing 21 mass percent pigment and 79
Prussian Blue ASTM D 261 percent vehicle. The weighed amount of powder or paste shall be placed
Boiled Linseed Oil ASTM D 260 in a suitable mixing container and the measured volume of vehicle then
Raw Linseed Oil ASTM D 234 poured over it. The paste or powder shall be incorporated in the paint by
Pale Heat Bodied Linseed Oil Fed Spec. TT-0-367 vigorous stirring with a paddle. The powder or paste will readily disperse
Alkyd Resin Fed. Spec. TT-R-266 in the vehicle. Before removing any paint from the container, the paint
Mineral Spirit ASTM D 235 shall be thoroughly stirred to insure a uniform mixture and the paint shall
Driers ASTM D 600 be suitably stirred during the use. The amount of paint enough for one
Turpentine ASTM D 13 day’s use only shall be mixed at one time.

709.2.4 Drier When two field coats of aluminum paint are specified, the first
coat shall be tinted with lampblack paste or Prussian blue paste in the
These specifications cover both straight oil drier (material free quantity of 0.024 kg/L or more (1/5 lb/gal) of paints. The exact quantity
from resins and “gums”), and Japan drier (material containing varnish used shall be sufficient to give a contrast in color which can be readily
“gums”). The drier shall be composed of lead manganese, or cobalt, or a distinguished. When three field coats of aluminum paint are specified the
mixture of any of these elements, combined with a suitable fatty oil, with second coat shall be tinted.
or without resins of “gums” and mineral spirits of turpentine, or a mixture
of these solvents. The drier shall conform to the following requirements:
255
709.3.2 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Creosoted Timber Fabric 497)
of Concrete Reinforcement
This paint shall be mixed as specified for Aluminum Paint for
Structural Steel except that the proportions shall be 0.272 kg of aluminum Plastic Coated Dowel Bars AASHTO M 254 Type A
powder or paste per litre of vehicle (2-1/2 lb/gal).
Low Alloy Steel Deformed Bars ASTM A 206
Other paint composition may be used when and as stipulated in for Concrete Reinforcement
the Special Provisions. Bar reinforcement for concrete structures, except No. 2 bars shall
be deformed in accordance with AASHTO M 42, M 31 and M 53 for Nos.
709.4 Containers and Markings 3 through 11.

All paints shall be shipped in strong, substantial containers plainly Dowel and tie bars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
marked with mass, color and volume in litres of the paint content, a true M 31 or AASHTO M 42 except that rail steel shall not be used for tie bars
statement of the percentage composition of the pigment, the proportions that are to be bent and restraightened during construction. Tie bars shall
of the pigment to vehicle, the name and address of the manufacturers and be deformed bars. Dowel bars shall be plain round bars. They shall be
the stencil of the authorized inspecting agency. Any package or free from burring or other deformation restricting slippage in the concrete.
container not so marked will not be accepted for use under this Before delivery to the site of the work, a minimum of one half (1/2) the
Specification. length of each dowel bar shall be painted with one coat of approved lead
or tar paint.

ITEM 710 – REINFORCING STEEL AND WIRE ROPE The sleeves for dowel bars shall be metal of an approved design
to cover 50 mm (2 inches), plus or minus 6.3 mm of the dowel, with a
closed end, and with a suitable stop to hold the end of the sleeve at least
710.1 Reinforcing Steel 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the dowel bar. Sleeves shall be of such
design that they do not collapse during construction.
Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of the
following Specifications: Plastic coated dowel bar conforming to AASHTO M 254 may be
used.
Deformed Billet-Steel Bars AASHTO M 31 (ASTM A
for Concrete Reinforcement 615) 710.2 Wire Rope or Wire Cable

Deformed Steel Wire AASHTO M 225 (ASTM A The wire rope or wire cable shall conform to the requirements of
for Concrete Reinforcement 496) AASHTO M 30 for the specified diameter and strength class.

Welded Steel Wire Fabric AASHTO M 55 (ASTM A

for Concrete Reinforcement 185) 710.3 Prestressing Reinforcing Steel

Cold-Drawn Steel Wire AASHTO M 32 (ASTM A Prestressing reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of
for Concrete Reinforcement 82) the following Specifications:

Fabricated Steel Bar or Rod Mats AASHTO M 54 (ASTM A High-tensile wire AASHTO M 204 (ASTM A
for Concrete Reinforcement 184) 421)
High-tensile wire strand or rope AASHTO M 203 (ASTM A
Welded Deformed Steel Wire AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A 416)
256
 High-tensile alloy bars as follows: 711.2 Woven Wire

High-tensile-strength alloy bars shall be cold stretched to a Galvanized woven wire fence of the coating class specified shall
minimum of 895.7 MPa (30,000 psi). The resultant physical properties conform to the requirements of ASTM A 116. Aluminum coated woven
shall be as follows: wire fence shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 584.

Minimum ultimate tensile 711.3 Chain Link Fence

strength 1000 MPa (145,000 psi) followed
by stress relieving Chain link fabric and the required fittings and hardware shall
conform to AASHTO M 181, for the kind of metal, coating, size of wire
Minimum yield strength, and mesh specified.
measured by the 0.7
percent Galvanized coiled spring steel tension wire shall be 7 (0.177 inch)
extension under load 895.7 MPa (130,000 psi) gauge, conforming to ASTM A 641 hard temper, with Class 3 coating
method unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings.
shall not be less than
Aluminized coil spring steel tension wire shall also be 7 (0.177
inch) gauge, hard temper, having a minimum coating mass of 0.12 kg/m2
Minimum modulus of 25,000,000 (0.40 oz/ft2) of aluminum.
elasticity
711.4 Metal Beam Rail
Minimum elongation in 20
bar 4 percent Steel rail elements shall be corrugated sheet steel conforming to
diameters after rupture the requirements of AASHTO M 180 of the designated class and type.

Diameters tolerance +0.762 mm – 0.254 mm

(+0.03”-0.01”) 711.5 Timber Rail

If shown on the Plans, type 270 k strand shall be used, The timber rail shall be cut from the specified grade of dry, well
conforming to AASHTO M 203. seasoned and dressed timber stock of the species specified, which shall
meet the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 168.

Where preservative treatment is specified, this shall conform to

ITEM 711 – FENCE AND GUARDRAIL the requirements of Section 713.3.

711.1 Barbed Wire Rustic rails shall be straight, sound and free of injurious defects
and shall have been cut from live trees not less than 30 days but not more
Galvanized barbed wire of the coating class specified shall than 1 year before use. They shall have been stripped of bark before
conform to the requirements of ASTM A 121. seasoning or shall have been stored under water. Immediately before
the logs are used in the work, all knots and projections shall be trimmed
Aluminum coated barbed wire shall conform to the requirements and smooth and, if water cured, all barks shall be peeled. Slight
of ASTM A 585, with Type I (Aluminum Coated) or Type II (Aluminum curvature of “wind” to give a pleasing appearance to the structure will be
Alloy) barbs at the option of the manufacturer.
257
permitted. Logs of only one specie shall be used in the construction of
any one continuous length of guardrail. 711.8 Guardrail Hardware

711.6 Fence Posts Guardrail hardware shall conform to the applicable standards
contained in AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA “A Guide to Standardized Highway
Wood posts shall conform to the details and dimensions indicated Barrier Rail Hardware”.
on the Plans. All wood posts shall be sound, seasoned wood, peeled
and with ends cut square or as indicated. The posts shall be straight and 711.9 Box Beam Rail
all knots trimmed flush with surface. Where treated posts are called for,
the kind and type of treatment shall conform to that indicated on the Steel box rail elements shall conform to the applicable standards
Plans. When red cedar posts or bracing is furnished, the requirements contained in AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA” Guide to Standardized Highway
for peeling may be omitted. Barrier Rail Hardware”.

All dimensions timber and lumber required for fences or gates

shall be sound, straight and reasonably free from knots, splits and ITEM 712 – STRUCTURAL METAL
shakes. It shall be of the species and grades indicated on the Plans and
shall be dressed and finished on four sides.
712.1 Structural Steels
Concrete posts shall be made of concrete conforming to the
specified requirements of concrete, for the class specified, and shall 712.1.1 General
contain steel reinforcement as shown on the Plans, conforming to the
requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope. Steel shall be furnished according to the following Specifications.
Unless otherwise specified, structural carbon rivet steel shall be
Steel posts for line-type fencing shall conform to ASTM A 702. furnished.

Steel posts shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M 712.1.2 Structural Steel
111 except that tubular steel posts shall be galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A 120. Fittings, hardware and other appurtenances not a. Carbon Steel. Unless otherwise specified, structural carbon
specifically covered by the Plans and Specifications, shall be galvanized steel for riveted, bolted or welded construction shall conform
in accordance with ASTM A 120 and shall be standard commercial grade, to Structural Steel, AASHTO M 183.
and in accordance with current standard practice.
b. Eyebars. Steel for eyebars shall be of a weldable grade.
Weathering steel posts conforming to the requirements of ASTM This grade includes structural steel conforming to: Structural
A 558, shall be furnished when specified. Steel, AASHTO M 183; Highway Strength Low Alloy
Structural Steel with 344.5 MPa (50,000 psi) Minimum Yield
Aluminum alloy posts shall conform to the requirements of Point to 100 mm (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222 (ASTM A
AASHTO M 181. 588 with Supplementary Requirement SI of AASHTO M 222
mandatory).

711.7 Guardrail Post 712.1.3 High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel

Guardrail post shall conform to the applicable standards It shall conform to: High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-
contained in AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA “A Guide to Standardized Highway Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality, AASHTO M 223, High-Strength
Barrier Rail Hardware”.
258
Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 MPa (50,000 psi) Minimum Yield (140,000 psi) for structural shapes and 999.05 MPa
Point to 100 mm (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222. (145,000 psi) for seamless mechanical tubing shall be
considered as A 514/A 517 steel.

712.1.4 High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel for Welding 712.1.7 Structural Rivet Steel

It shall conform to: It shall conform to Steel Structural Rivets AASHTO M 228, Grade
I (ASTM A 502, Grade I).
a. High-Strength Low Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural
Quality, Grade 50, AASHTO M 223 (ASTM A 572 with 712.1.8 High-Strength Structural Rivet Steel
supplementary requirements S2 of AASHTO M 223
mandatory). It shall conform to Steel Structural Rivets AASHTO M 228, Grade
2 (ASTM A 502, Grade 2).
b. High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 MPa
(50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm (4 inches) thick,
AASHTO M 222 (ASTM A 588 in Supplementary 712.1.9 High-Strength Bolts
Requirement S1 of AASHTO M 222 mandatory).
Bolts, nuts circular washers shall conform to High-Strength Bolts
712.1.5 High-Strength Structural Steel for Riveted or Bolted for Structural Steel Joints, including Suitable Nuts and Plain Hardened
Construction Washer, AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325).

It shall conform to: High-strength bolts for structural steel joints including suitable
nuts and plain hardened washers shall conform to either AASHTO M 164
a. High-Strength Low Alloy Columbium – Vanadium Steel of (ASTM A 325) or AASHTO M 253. When M 164 type 3 bolts are
Structural Quality, and AASHTO M 223. specified, they along with suitable nuts and washers shall have an
atmospheric corrosion resistance approximately two times that of carbon
b. High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 MPa steel with copper.
(50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to 100mm (4 inches) thick,
AASHTO M 222. Bolts and nuts manufactured to AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325)
are identified by proper marking as specified on the top of the bolt heads
712.1.6 High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel and on one face of the nuts for three different types.
Plate
Bolts manufactured to AASHTO M 253 shall be identified by
It shall conform to: marking on the top of the head with the symbol A 490 and the nuts shall
be marked on one face with the legend “2H” or “DH”.
a. High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel
Plate, suitable for welding, ASTM A 514. Bolt and nut dimensions shall conform to the dimensions shown
in Table 712.1 and to the requirements for Heavy Hexagon Structural
b. High-Strength Alloy Steel Plates, Quenched and Tempered Bolts and for Heavy Semi-Finished Hexagon Nuts given in ANSI Standard
for pressure vessels, ASTM A 517. B 18.2.1 and B 18.2.2, respectively.
c. Quenched and tempered alloy steel structural shapes and
seamless mechanical tubing meeting all the mechanical and Circular washers shall be flat and smooth and their nominal
chemical requirements of A 514/A 517 steel, except that the dimensions shall conform to the dimensions given in Table 712.2 except
specified maximum tensile strength may be 964.6 MPa
259
that for lock pin and collar fasteners, flat washers need not be used, established manufacturer of lock-pin and collar fasteners, as approved by
unless slotted or oversized holes are specified. the Engineer.

Bevelled washers for American Standard Beams and Channels 712.1.10 Copper Bearing Steels
or other sloping faces shall be required and shall be square or
rectangular, shall taper in thickness, and shall conform to the dimensions When copper bearing steel is specified, the steel shall contain not
given in Table 712.2. less than 0.2 percent of copper.

When necessary, washer may be clipped on one side to a point

not closer than 0.875 (7/8) of the bolt diameter from the center of the 712.2 Forgings
washer.
Steel forgings shall conform to the specifications for Steel
Other fasteners or fasteners assemblies which meet the Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial Use, AASHTO M 102,
Materials, Manufacturing, and Chemical Composition requirements of (ASTM A 668, Classes C, D, F & G).
AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) or AASHTO M 253 and which meet the
Mechanical Property requirements of the same specification in full-size
tests and which have body diameter and bearing areas under the head 712.3 Pins and Rollers
and nut, or other equivalent, not less than those provided by a bolt and
nut of the same nominal dimensions prescribed in the previous Pins and rollers more than 228.6 mm (9 inches) in diameter shall
paragraph, may be used. Such alternate fasteners may differ in other be annealed carbon-steel forgings conforming to AASHTO M 102, Class
dimensions from those of the specified bolts and nuts. Their installation C1.
procedure may differ from those specified in AASHTO Bridge
Specification. Article 2.10.20 (D) and their inspection may differ from that Pins and rollers 228.6 mm (9 inches) or less in diameter shall be
specified in Article 2.10.20 (E). When a different installation procedure or either annealed carbon-steel forgings conforming to AASHTO M 102
inspection is used, it shall be detailed in a supplemental specification (ASTM A 668), Class C1 or cold finished carbon-steel shafting conforming
applying to the alternate fastener and that specification must be approved to AASHTO M 169, grade 1016 to 1030 (ASTM A 108) inclusive, with a
by the Engineer. minimum Rockwell Scale B Hardness of 85. Material not meeting the
specifications for hardness maybe accepted provided it develops a tensile
Subject to the approval of the Engineer, high strength steel lock- strength of 482.3 MPa (70,000 psi) and a yield point of 248.04 MPa
pin and collar fasteners may be used as an alternate for high strength (36,000 psi).
bolts or rivets as shown on the Plans. The shank and head of the high
strength steel lock-pin and collar fasteners shall meet the requirements of Threads for pins shall conform to the ANSI B1.1 Coarse Thread
the preceding paragraph. Each fasteners shall provide a solid shank Series, Class 2A. Pin ends having a diameter of 35mm (1 3/8 inches) or
body of sufficient diameter to provide tensile and shear strength more shall be threaded six threads to the inch.
equivalent to or greater than the bolt or rivet specified, shall have a cold
forged head on one end, of type and dimensions as approved by the
Engineer, a shank length suitable for material thickness fastened, locking
grooved, break neck groove and pull grooves (all annular grooves) on the Table 712.1 – Nominal Bolt and Nut Dimensions
opposite end. Each fasteners shall provide a steel locking collar of Heavy Hexagon Structural Heavy Semi-Finished
proper size for shank diameter used which by means of suitable Bolts Hexagonal Nuts
installation tools, is cold swaged into the locking grooves forming a head Dimensions in mm
for the grooved end of the fastener after the pull groove section has been Nominal Dimensions in mm (inches) (inches)
removed. The steel locking collar shall be a standard product of an Bolt Size Width of Height Thread Width

260
 (Diameter) Head of Length Across Height 31 (1-1/4) 62 (2-1/2) 34 (1- 3 (0.136) 4 (0.177) 43 (2-1/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
mm (inch) Across 3/8)
Flats Head Flats 34 (1-3/8) 68 (2-3/4) 37 (1- 3 (0.136) 4 (0.177) 43 (2-1/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
1/2)
12 (1/2) 21 (7/8) 7 25 (1) 21 (7/8) 12
37 (1-1/2) 75 (3) 40 (1- 3 (0.136) 4 (0.177) 43 (2-1/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
(5/16) (31/64) 5/8)
15 (5/8) 26 (1- 9 31 (1- 26 (1- 15 43 (1-3/4) 84 (3-3/8) 46 (1- C
4(0.178) c
7(0.28) - - -
1/16) (25/64) 1/4) 1/6) (39/64) 7/8)
18 (3/4) 31 (1- 11 34 (1- 31 (1- 18 50 (2) 93 (3-3/4) 53 (2- 4 (0.178) 7 (0.28) - - -
1/4) (15/32) 3/8) 1/4) (47/64) 1/8)
d d
21 (7/8) 35 (1- 13 37 (1- 35 (1- 21 Over 50 2D-12 D+3 6(0.24) 8 (0.34) - - -
7/16) (35/64) 1/2) 7/16) (55/64) to 100 (2 (1/2) (1/8)
25 (1) 40 (1- 15 43 (1- 40 (1- 24 to 4) incl.
5/8) (39/64) 3/4) 5/8) (63/64)
28 (1- 45 (1- 17 50 (2) 45 (1- 27 (1- a
Dimensions in mm (inches)
1/8) 13/16) (11/16) 13/16) 7/64) b
May be exceeded by 6 mm (1/4 inch)
31 (1- 50 (2) 19 50 (2) 50 (2) 30 (1- c
4 mm (3/16 in) nominal
1/4) (25/32) 7/32) d
6 mm (1/4 in) nominal
34 (1- 54 (2- 21 56 (2- 54 (2-3- 33 (1-
3/8) 3/16) (27/32) 1/4) 16) 11/32)
37 (1- 59 (2- 23 56 (2- 59 (2- 36 (1- 712.4 Castings
1/2) 3/8) (15/16) 1/4) 3/8) 15/32)
Castings shall conform to the requirements of the following
a Specifications:
Table 712.2 – Nominal Washer Dimensions
Steel castings for Highway Bridges-AASHTO M 192, Class 70 shall be
Square or Rectangular Bevelled
furnished unless otherwise specified.
Circular Washer Washers for American Standard
Beams and Channels Chromium Alloy Steel Castings-AASHTO M 163 (ASTM A 296), Grade
Bolt Size Nominal Nominal CA-15 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified.
Diameter Outside Thickness Minimum Mean Slope or
mm Diameterb Diameter Minimum Maximum Side Thickne Taper in Gray Iron Castings – AASHTO M 105 Class No. 30 shall be furnished
unless otherwise specified. Iron castings shall be true to pattern in form and
(inch) mm Dimension ss Thickness
dimensions, free from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes, and other
(inch) defects in position affecting their strength and value for the service intended.
of Hole
12 (1/2) 26 (1-1/16) 13 2 (0.177) 4 (0.177) 43 (1-3/4) 7 (5/16) Casting shall be boldly filleted at angles and the arises shall be sharp and perfect.
40 (1.6)
(17/32) All castings must be sandblasted or otherwise effectively cleaned of seals and
15 (5/8) 32 (1-5/16) 16 3 (0.122) 4 (0.177) 43 (1-3/4) 7 (5/16) sand so as to present a smooth, clean and uniform surface.
40 (1.6)
(21/32)
19 (3/4) 36 (1- 20 3 (0.122) 4 (0.177) 43 (1-3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6) Malleable Castings – ASTM A 47. Grade No. 35018 shall be furnished
15/32) (13/16) unless otherwise specified. The requirements for workmanship, finishing, and
22 (7/8) 43 (1-3/4) 23 3 (0.136) 4 (0.177) 43 (1-3/4) 7 (5/16) cleaning shall be the same as above for gray iron castings.
40 (1.6)
(15/16)
25 (1) 50 (2) 26 (1- 3 (0.136) 4 (0.177) 43 (1-3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
1/16) 712.5 Steel Grid Floors
28 (1-1/8) 56 (2-1/4) 31 (1- 3 (0.136) 4 (0.177) 43 (2-1/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
1/4)

261
 All steel for grid floors shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M
183 or AASHTO M 222. Steel grid floors can be weathering steel, Tensile properties as determined by tests of bar stock after
galvanized or painted. Unless the floors are of weathering steel or drawing or of finished studs shall conform to the following requirements:
galvanized, the material shall have a minimum copper content of 0.2%.
Tensile strength (minimum) 413.4 MPa (60,000 psi)
Unless painting of floors is specified in the Special Provisions, Yield strength* (minimum) 344.5 MPs (50,000 psi)
open type floors shall be galvanized. Elongation (minimum) 20 percent in 50 mm (2 in)
Reduction in area (minimum) 50 percent
* As determined by 0.2 percent offset method.
712.6 Steel Pipe
Tensile properties shall be determined in accordance with
It shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 53, ASTM A 120. applicable sections of ASTM A 370 for mechanical testing of steel
AASHTO M 222 and ASTM A 618, as shown on the Plans or in the products. Tensile tests of finished studs shall be made on studs welded
Special Provisions. to test plates using a test fixture with dimensions similar to those shown in
Table 712.3.
Standard weight pipe shall be furnished unless otherwise shown
on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. In fracture occurs outside the middle half of the gage length, the
test shall be repeated.

712.7 Galvanized Metal Finished studs shall be of uniform quality and conditions, free
from injurious laps, fins, seams, cracks, twists, bends or other injurious
When galvanized structural steel shapes, plates, bars and their defects. Finish shall be produced by cold drawing, cold rolling or
products are specified, they shall be galvanized in accordance with the machining.
requirements of AASHTO M 111.
The studs shall conform to the dimensions given in Table 712.3.

712.8 Sheet Lead The Contractor shall furnish the manufacturer’s certification that
the studs as delivered are in accordance with the material requirements of
It shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B 29 for common this Item. Certified copies of in-plant quality control test reports shall be
desilverized lead. furnished to the Engineer upon request.
Table 712.3 – Welded Stud Shear Connector
The sheets shall be of uniform thickness and shall be free from Standard Dimensions and Tolerances mm (inches)
cracks, seams, slivers, scale and other defects. Unless otherwise
specified, lead sheets shall be 3.8 mm (1/8 inch) in thickness with a Shank Head
permissible tolerance of 0.75 mm (0.03 inch) plus or minus. Diameter (c) Length* (L) Diameter (H) Thickness (T)
19.05 + 0.00 101.6 + 1.575 31.75 + 0.40 9.53
712.9 Welded Stud Shear Connectors (+0.062)
(3/4) - 0.381 (4) – 3.175 (1-1/4) ± (1/64) (3/8) min.
Shear connector studs shall conform to the requirements of (- (-0.125)
AASHTO M 169 (ASTM A 108) for cold finished carbon steel bars and 0.015)
shafting, cold drawn bar, Grades 1015, 1018 or 1020, either semi-skilled 22.23 + 0.000 101.6 + 1.575 34.93 ± 0.40 9.53
or fully-skilled. If flux retaining caps are used, the steel for the caps shall (+.062)
be of a low carbon grade suitable for welding and shall comply with ASTM (7/8) - 0.381 (4) – 3.175 (1-3/8) ± (1/64) (3/8) min.
A 109 for cold rolled carbon steel strip.
262
 (- (-0.25) defined as timber so sawed that any point in the length of a sawed piece,
0.015) the pith lies entirely inside the four faces.

* Length includes thickness of head. Standard lengths is 101.6 mm Yard lumber shall be of the kinds and grade called for on the
(4 inches) but other lengths may be obtained by special order. Plans. Round poles and posts shall be of the kinds indicated on the
ITEM 713 – TREATED AND UNTREATED TIMBER Plans.

713.1 General Requirements 713.3 Treated Structural Timber and Lumber

713.1.1 Timber Structural timber, lumber and piling to be treated shall conform
to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 168 and M 133 or
It shall be of the species specified on the Plans. Unless equivalent.
otherwise noted on the Plans or in the Special Provisions only the best
grade shall be used. It shall be free from loose knots, splits, worn holes, The type of treatment to be used will be shown on the Plans or
decay, warp, ring separation or any defects which will impair its strength in the Special Provisions and shall conform to the applicable
or render it unfit for its intended use. Any specie specified on the Plans requirements of AWPA standard C1 and C14 or equivalent.
may be used for untreated timber and if that specie is not available, a
specie of equivalent strength and durability maybe used if authorized by ITEM 714 – WATER
the Engineer. If the timber is to be treated, only those species shall be
used which are known to posses properties which make them favorable to 714.1 Description
treatment.
This Item covers criteria for acceptance of Questionable Water
713.1.2 Paints either natural or wash water for use in concrete.

When painting of timber is required, the paint shall conform to 714.2 Requirements
the requirements of Item 709, Paints.
The mixing water shall be clear and apparently clean. If it
713.1.3 Preservatives contains quantities or substances that discolor it or make it smell or taste
unusual or objectionable, or cause suspicion, it shall not be used unless
It shall be creosote oil or creosote-petroleum oil blend as called service records of concrete made with it (or other information) indicated
for on the Plans or by the Special Provisions and shall conform to the that it is not injurious to the quality, shall be subject to the acceptance
Specification for timber preservative of AASHTO M 133. When timber is criteria as shown in Table 714.1 and Table 714.2 or as designated by
intended for marine use, the creosote petroleum oil blend shall not be the purchaser.
used.
When wash water is permitted, the producer will provide
satisfactory proof or data of non-detrimental effects if potentially reactive
713.2 Untreated Structural Timber and Lumber aggregates are to be used. Use of wash water will be discontinued if
undesirable reactions with admixtures or aggregates occur.
Structural timber, lumber and piling shall conform to the
applicable requirements of AASHTO M 168 or equivalent. No boxed Table 714.1
heart pieces of Douglas fir or redwood shall be used in outside stringers, Acceptance Criteria For Questionable Water Supplies
floor beams, caps, posts, sills or rail posts. Boxed heart pieces are
Limits
263
 Compressive strength, min. % concentration calculated in the total mixing water, including mixing
Control at 7 days 90 water on the aggregate and other sources, does not exceed that
Time of Setting deviation from from 1:00 earlier to 1:30 later stated limits.
control
Time of Setting (Gillmore Test) Water will be tested in accordance with, and shall meet the
Initial No marked change suggested requirements of AASHTO T 26.
Final Set No marked change
Appearance Clear Water known to be of potable quality may be used without test.
Color Colorless
Odor Odorless
Total Solids 500 parts/million max.
PH value 4.5 to 8.5 ITEM 715 – GEOTEXTILES

Table 714.2 715.1 Description

Chemical Limitation for Wash Water
This Item covers geotextile fabrics for use in subsurface
Limits drainage, hydraulic filter, erosion control, sediment control, pavement
Chemical Requirements, Minimum structures as a waterproofing and stress relieving membrane, and as a
Concentration permeable separator to prevent mixing of dissimilar materials such as
Chloride as C1(-1) expressed foundations and select fill materials.
as a mass percent of cement
when added to the C1(-1) in 715.2 Physical and Chemical Requirements
the other components of the
concrete mixtures shall not Fibers used in the manufacture of geotextiles, and the threads
exceed the following levels: used in joining geotextiles by sewing, shall consist of long-chain
synthetic polymers, composed of at least 85 percent by mass
1. Prestressed Concrete 0.06 percent polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamids. They shall be formed into a
2. Conventionally reinforced concrete network such that the filaments or yarns rertain dimensional stability
in a moist environment and relative to each other, including selvedges. These materials shall
exposed 0.10 percent conform to the physical requirements of Table 1 for the indicated
to chloride application. Guidelines for the survivability levels referred to under
3. Conventionally reinforced concrete “Separation” in Table 1 are included in Table 2.
in a moist environment but not
exposed to chloride 0.15 percent 715.3 Sampling and Testing
4. Above ground building construction
where the concrete will stay dry No limit for corrosion The product shall be subject to sampling and testing. Sampling
shall be done in accordance with ASTM D 4354 and testing procedures
Sulfate as SO4, ppmA 3000 shall be in accordance with the methods given in Table 1.
Alkalies as (Na2O + 0.658 K2O), 600 715.4 Certification
ppm
Total Solids, ppm 50000 715.4.1 Manufacturer’s Certificate

A
Wash water reused as mixing water in concrete may exceed the The manufacturer shall file with the purchaser a certificate
listed concentrations of sulfate if it can be shown that the stating the name of the manufacturer, the chemical composition of the
264
filaments or yarns, and other pertinent information so as to fully describe curve. The fold or overlap shall be in the direction of construction and
the geotextile. The manufacturer shall include in the certificate a held in place as prescribed above.
guarantee stating that the geotextile that is furnished meets the
requirements of the specification. The certificate shall be attested to by
a person having legal authority to bind the company. Either mismarking 715.7.2 Drainage Geotextile
or misrepresentation by the manufacturer shall be reason to discontinue
acceptance under these specifications. Notice sent to the manufacturer In trenches, after placing the backfill material, the geotextile shall
by the purchaser regarding the discontinuance of acceptance will be be folded over the top of the filter material to produce a minimum overlap
considered to be notice to all wholesalers, jobbers, distributors, agents of 12 inches for trenches greater than 12 inches wide. In trenches less
and other intermediaries handling the manufacturer’s product. than 12 inches in width, the overlap shall be equal to the width of the
trench. The geotextile shall then be covered with the subsequent
715.5 Quality Control course. Successive sheets of geotextile shall be overlapped a minimum
of 12 inches in the direction of flow.
The geotextile manufacturer is responsible for establishing and
maintaining a quality control program so as to assure compliance with 715.7.3 Erosion Control Geotextile
the requirements of this specification.
The geotextile shall be placed and anchored on a smooth
715.6 Shipment and Storage graded surface approved by the Engineer. The geotextile shall be
placed in such a manner that placement of the overlying materials will
715.6.1 During periods of shipment and storage, the fabric shall be not excessively stretch or tear the fabric. Anchoring of the terminal
protected from direct sunlight, ultra-violet rays, temperatures greater ends of the geotextile shall be accomplished through the use of key
than 600C (1400F), mud, dust, and debris. To the extent possible, the trenches or aprons at the crest and toe of slope. In certain applications
fabric shall be maintained wrapped in a heavy-duty protective covering. to expedite construction, 18 inches long anchoring pins placed on 2 to
Each shipping document shall include a notation certifying that the 6 feet centers depending on the slope of the covered area have been
geotextile is in accordance with the manufacturer’s certificate and used successfully.
guarantee previously filed with the purchaser.
715.7.4 Paving Fabric
715.6.2 Product Marking
The fabric shall be placed into the asphalt sealant with minimum
Label the fabric and its container with the manufacturer’s name wrinkling prior to the time the asphalt has cooled and lost tackiness. As
fabric type or trade name, lot number and quantity. directed by the Engineer, wrinklers or folds in excess of 1 inch shall be
slit and laid flat. Brooming and/or pneumatic rolling will be required to
715.7 Installation maximize fabric contact with the pavement surface. Overlap of fabric
joints shall be sufficient to ensure full closure of the joint, but should not
715.7.1 Separation Geotextile exceed 6 inches. Transverse joints shall be lapped in the direction of
paving to prevent edge pickup by the paver. A second application of
The geotextile shall be unrolled as smoothly as possible on the asphalt sealant to fabric overlaps will be required if in the judgment of
prepared subgrade in the direction of construction traffic. Adjacent the Engineer additional asphalt sealant is needed to ensure proper
geotextile rolls shall be overlapped in the direction of subbase placement bonding of the double fabric layer.
using the guidelines in Table 3. Sewing is recommended where
subgrade soils have a CBR value less than 1. The geotextile maybe 715.7.5 Geotextile Silt Fence
held in place prior to subbase placement by pins, staples, or piles of fill
or rock. On curves, the geotextile maybe folded or cut to conform to the Fence construction shall be adequate to handle stress from
sediment loading. Geotextile at the bottom of the fence shall be buried
265
 a minimum of 6 inches in a trench so that no flow can pass under the
barrier. The trench shall be backfilled and the soil compacted over the Cover Thickness (mm)1
geotextile. Fence height shall be as specified by the Engineer but in no (Compacted)
case shall exceed 36 inches above ground surface. The geotextile shall
be spliced together only at a support post with a minimum 6 inches 1022,3 NR NR H H M M
overlap. 152 NR NR H M M M
305 NR H M M M M
715.7.6 Hydraulic Filter 457 H M M M M M

The geotextile shall be laid lengthwise down slopes and H = High

appropriately anchored along the top edge. Installation horizontally M = Medium
along slopes will not be accepted. Overlaps shall be sufficient to NR = Not recommended
prevent parting of laps during the initial construction or fill stage. On
1
soft soil subgrades the overlap shall not be less than 400 mm. Maximum aggregate size not to exceed one-half the compacted
Alternatively the geotextile shall be sawn using a double-stitch portable cover thickness
2
sewing machine and appropriate thread. For low volume unpaved road (ADT<200 vehicles)
3
715.8 Method of Measurement The 102 mm minimum cover is limited to existing road bases
intended for use in new construction
715.8.1 The geotextile shall be measured by the number of square
meters from the pavement lines shown on the plans, or from the Table 3 Recommended Overlaps
pavement lines established in writing by the Engineer.
Soil Strength Overlap Overlap
715.8.2 Temporary silt fence will be measured in linear meter. (CBR) Unsewn (mm) (mm)

715.8.3 Removed sediment will be measured by the cubic meter. Less than 1 - 229
1-2 965 203
715.8.4 Excavation, backfill, bedding, and cover material are 2-3 762 76
separate pay items. 3 and above 610 -

715.9 Basis of Payment

The quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for at

Table 2 Construction Survivability Levels the contract price per unit of measurement, respectively, for each pay
item listed below.
Site Soil CBR Installation <1 1-2 >2
Payment shall be made under :

Equipment Ground Pay Item Pay Unit

Contract >345 <345 >345 <345 >345 <345 Separation Geotextile Square Meter
Pressure (KPa) Drainage Geotextile Square Meter
Paving Fabric Square Meter
Hydraulic Filter Square Meter
Silt Fence Linear Meter
Removing Sediment Cubic Meter
266
267